Manual service Renault Scenic 2 Echipament Electric

April 30, 2018 | Author: Podaru Andrei | Category: Headlamp, Switch, Relay, Calibration, Computer Program
Share
Report this link


Comments



Description

Electrical equipmentBATTERY XENON BULBS INSTRUMENT PANEL RADIO MULTIMEDIA PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT MULTIPLEXING AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS 77 11 322 302 MARCH 2006 All rights reserved by Renault s.a.s. EDITION ANGLAISE "The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the technical specifications current when it was prepared. The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his vehicles are constructed." Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of Renault s.a.s. © Renault s.a.s. 2006 Electrical equipment Contents Page Page 80A BATTERY EDITION 2 Battery: Initialisation 80A-1 86A RADIO EDITION 1 General information Fault finding log Security code recovery procedure Anti-theft code Replacement of components Configuration - Parameters Connection Self-test procedure Customer complaints Fault finding chart Recovering a jammed CD 86A-1 86A-5 86A-7 86A-8 86A-11 86A-12 86A-13 86A-14 86A-15 86A-16 86A-30 80C XENON BULBS Program No.: V010 - Vdiag No.: 05 EDITION 4 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Allocation of computer tracks Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Customer complaints Fault finding chart 80C-1 80C-5 80C-7 80C-9 80C-10 80C-11 80C-14 80C-15 80C-26 80C-28 80C-29 80C-30 80C-33 80C-34 86C MULTIMEDIA ITS Program No.: 0020 - Vdiag: 04 EDITION 1 Introduction Fault finding log List and location of components Operating diagram Functions Role of components Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart 83A INSTRUMENT PANEL Vdiag No.: 04-08 EDITION 4 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault summary table Conformity check Interpretation of statuses Interpretation of parameters Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart 83A-1 83A-5 83A-7 83A-9 83A-10 83A-12 83A-15 83A-20 83A-27 83A-38 83A-41 83A-42 86C-1 86C-6 86C-8 86C-9 86C-10 86C-11 86C-12 86C-13 86C-14 86C-15 86C-25 86C-29 86C-30 86C-36 86C-37 86C-38 86C-39 86C-44 86C-46 Page Page 87B PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT UCH Vdiag No.: 44-48-4C-4D-4F-50 EDITION 3 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart 87G ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 EDITION 5 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status and parameter summary table Interpretation of statuses Interpretation of parameters Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart Program No.: C54 - Vdiag No.: 48 EDITION 2 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart 87B-1 87B-6 87B-8 87B-46 87B-47 87B-59 87B-61 87B-107 87B-127 87B-131 87B-230 87B-231 87B-234 87B-236 87B-279 87B-284 87G-1 87G-6 87G-8 87G-10 87G-11 87G-12 87G-13 87G-14 87G-17 87G-27 87G-28 87G-36 87G-37 87G-54 87G-55 87G-1 87G-6 87G-8 87G-12 87G-17 87G-18 87G-19 87G-20 87G-56 87G-64 87G-65 87G-72 87G-73 87G-77 87G-78 87G-91 87G-92 Page 88B MULTIPLEXING EDITION 1 Introduction Configuration Dealing with faults Fault finding chart Repair help 88B-1 88B-4 88B-7 88B-11 88B-14 88C AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS ACU4 - Vdiag 04 EDITION 2 Introduction System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault finding log Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Status and parameter summary table Conformity check Fault finding chart 88C-1 88C-8 88C-9 88C-11 88C-12 88C-15 88C-17 88C-18 88C-65 88C-66 88C-67 ACU4 - Vdiag 08 EDITION 1 Introduction System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault finding log Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Status and parameter summary table Conformity check Fault finding chart 88C-69 88C-77 88C-78 88C-80 88C-81 88C-85 88C-87 88C-88 88C-139 88C-140 88C-141 ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS ABS ALP APC AVC BVA BVM BVR CAN AC CD PAS EPAS DVD DTC EGR ESP GMV CNG LPG HLE MAG MIG MR TN OBD SER SSPP THLE TM UCH UPC UCT UHLE VIN MEANING OF ABBREVIATION Anti-lock braking system Fault Finding Chart After ignition Before ignition Automatic gearbox Manual gearbox Sequential gearbox Controller Area Network Air conditioning Compact disc Power assisted steering (hydraulic) Electric power assisted steering Digital versatile disc Fault finding code Exhaust gas recirculation Electronic Stability Program Motor-driven fan assembly Compressed natural gas Liquefied petroleum gas High yield strength Metal active gas (for welding steel) Metal inert gas (for welding aluminium) Workshop repair manual Technical Note On board diagnostics Resistance welding Tyre pressure monitoring system Very high yield strength Labour time Passenger Compartment Unit Protection and Switching Unit Roof control unit Ultra high yield strength Vehicle identification number 180A BATTERY Battery: Initialisation ● 80A Initialisation: When the battery is removed or when it has been disconnected, carry out a certain number of initialisations for different vehicle functions so that the vehicle operates correctly. These initialisations do not require a tool of any kind. ● ● Reactivating the child safety systems: check that the switch indicator light is on. If the light is not on, deactivate then activate the switch until the light comes on. ● ● ● Entering the 4-digit radio code. Setting the time on the clock. Use the satellite radio control to set the time on a clock equipped with a navigation system: – Press and hold the left-hand Source key for 2 seconds to access time setting mode (the hours will flash). – Press the + or - keys to adjust the hour. – Press the left-hand Source key to switch to setting the minutes (the minutes will flash). – Press the + or - keys to adjust the minutes. – Press the left-hand Source key to exit setting mode. Checking that the electric windows are still initialised. The windows should open and close when the switch is pressed. If this is not the case, fully close the window which rises a few centimetres at a time and press the control button for 2 seconds once the window is fully closed. Checking that the sunroof is still initialised. The sunroof should open or close to the requested position without stopping. If this is not the case, reinitialise the system. – Start the engine. – Set the control to the sunroof closed position. – Press and hold the switch. The sunroof closes. – Keep pressing the switch until switching sounds can be heard from the motor (if the sunroof is already closed, wait for the motor switching sounds). – Release the switch and then press it again straight away. – Keep pressing the switch for several seconds. The sunroof will open and then fully close again. Release the switch once the sunroof is completely closed again. Initialising the electric power-assisted steering: with the engine running, turn the steering wheel a quarter turn to the left and then a quarter turn to the right, and bring back the steering wheel to the centre point with the wheels set straight ahead. 80A-1 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 180C XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction 80C 1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane Scénic Function concerned: Xenon lights Name of computer: Xenon light computer Program no.: V010 VDIAG No: 05 2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Diagnostic tools type: – CLIP + CAN probe Type of special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter CLIP + CAN sensor (El é. 1674) Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-1 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction 80C 3. RECAP Procedure: To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – vehicle card in card reader (scenario 1: keyless vehicle, entry level model, no hands-free; and scenario 2: top of the range, hands-free), – Press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the desired operations. To cut off + after ignition, proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the Start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – Check that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults Faults are classed as either present or stored (having appeared in a certain situation and then disappeared, or being still present but not diagnosed in the current situation). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed is switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault , note the faults displayed and apply the Instructions section. If the fault is confirmed when the Notes are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault. If the fault is not confirmed, check: – The electric lines on which there is a fault; – The connectors on those lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.); – The resistance of the faulty component; – The condition of the wires (insulation melted or cut, chafing, etc.). Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used: – to perform fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – to check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section features the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters, and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-2 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction 80C 4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit? no See Fault Finding Chart 1 yes Read the faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present no Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-3 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction 80C 5. FAULT FINDING LOG IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential item for communication with the manufacturer. WARNING! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this report: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty compensation, and enables better analysis of the parts removed. 6. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Use the appropriate tools. – Do not touch the xenon bulbs. – Never work on the xenon light system while it is on: the voltage is 20,000 V or more. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-4 Edition 4 FAULT FINDING LOG System: Xenon lights List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1/2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool Update version CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint 1079 1080 No automatic adjustment of the dipped headlights The dipped headlights do not switch off Your comments 1081 1083 Erratic automatic adjustment The dipped headlights come on intermittently 1082 1084 The dipped headlights do not switch on The headlight range is too weak Other ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005 003 While driving When stationary 011 004 When ignition is switched on Intermittently 009 999 Sudden fault When switching on the main beam headlights Other Your comments ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of diagnostic manual: Fault finding manual no.: Workshop Repair Manual Technical Note: Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part number: FD 19 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy FAULT FINDING LOG System: Xenon lights ● Page 2/2 Computer identification and system parts replaced Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. Present Stored Fault name Specification ● Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no. Parameter name Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify: FD 19 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - System operation 80C 1 - XENON LIGHT SYSTEM COMPONENTS The system consists of the following components: – Front vehicle level sensor (the xenon light computer is built into this sensor). – Rear vehicle level sensor. – Right and left-hand headlight adjustment motor. – Bulb high-voltage power unit (ballast). – Xenon lights. The K line can be used for fault finding; the system is not multiplexed. 2 - SYSTEM OPERATION When the control lever is in position (dipped headlights), it sends a signal to the UCH. The UCH processes the signal and, through the CAN network, asks the Protection and Switching Unit to turn on the xenon lights. When the bulbs come on, the adjustment motor moves through three positions: low, high, initial. This is its intialisation. If the vehicle is travelling faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) when the bulbs come on, there is no intialisation. The computer manages various signals to adjust the amount of light: – Vehicle speed: signal from the ABS computer. Above 18 mph (30 km/h), the adjustment motors raise the bulbs to provide optimum lighting for the driver. – Vehicle front and rear height: signals from the front and rear height sensors. These sensors track the angular motion of the car's body (deceleration, acceleration, vehicle loaded). The computer then controls the motors to adjust the beam and provide optimum lighting. – System initialisation: When the vehicle is unlocked, even if the dipped headlights are off, the system moves the adjustment motors to the low position and then the initial position. This initialises the system. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-7 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - System operation 80C 3 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRA TION To calibrate and configure a new computer on a vehicle, follow the configuration procedures in the following order . a - Vehicle type (CF003) This configuration activates the adjustment strategies designed for the body type. The new strategies only take effect after the ignition is switched off and the doors are locked. Perform configuration as follows: – Enter the xenon lights fault finding mode. – Make sure that the initial vehicle position indicated by the front and rear sensors is within the allowed range. – Run configuration CF003 according to the vehicle type: – J84 (MPV 5 seats) – R84 (MPV 7 seats LWB) – SUV84 (MPV 4x4) – – – – – – Exit fault finding mode. Switch off the ignition. Lock the doors with the card. The vehicle type has been programmed. After unlocking the doors, turn the ignition back on. See that the vehicle type has been properly identified by reading configuration LC001, Vehicle type. b - Computer calibration CF001 This calibration must be performed when a system component is replaced (e.g. sensor, headlight etc.). It enables the computer to store the vehicle's reference level. To ensure proper configuration and calibration, follow this procedure: – – – – – Check tyre pressure and adjust if faulty. Park the vehicle on a level surface under normal driving conditions (luggage compartment empty). Vehicle stopped, no variation in attitude (no door rattling). Driver aboard. Fuel tank full. Once computer calibration has been performed, check conformity of the light beam. If it is incorrect, adjust the headlights manually. 4 - DEFECT MODE If a system component is defective, no indicator lights up on the instrument panel. The system then switches to defect mode. If the computer detects a system fault, it sets the adjustment motors to the low or initial position. If the computer detects a fault, there is no longer any intialisation when the lights are turned on. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-8 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Component replacement 80C The system's xenon lights require a voltage of 20,000 V when switched on, then run on 85 V AC. The battery must without fail be disconnected before any work on the headlights, bulbs, and high-voltage headlight power transformer units. Refer to MR 370, 80C - Xenon lights, Xenon light computer: Removal - Refitting for the Removal - Refitting procedure for the components of the system. It is forbidden to supply a bulb if it is not installed in the headlight (danger that you might damage your eyes). The computer must be programmed using command CF001 each time the front or rear level sensor is replaced (see Configuration and programming). The following procedure should be applied before adjusting the beam height: – check that there are no faults – configure the vehicle type using command CF003 (see Configuration and programming) – program the computer using command CF001 (see Configuration and programming) Then manually adjust the headlight beam, see MR 370, 80C - Xenon lights, Xenon headlights: Adjustment. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-9 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks 80C Xenon light computer 8-track black connector Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Earth Timed +12 V power supply Vehicle rear height signal from rear level sensor Vehicle speed signal from ABS computer. Fault finding signal Dipped headlights signal by Protection and Switching Unit (UPC) Right-hand and left-hand headlight adjustment motor control signal Rear level sensor + power supply from xenon light computer Description Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-10 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Configurations and programming 80C COMPUTER CALIBRATION CF001 NOTES This configuration enables the computer to store the vehicle's reference level. Begin by configuring the vehicle type; then calibrate the vehicle level. The vehicle must be stationary. Also, the front and rear sensor values must be within the permissible range. To calibrate the computer, proceed as follows: – Check tyre pressure and adjust if faulty. – Park the vehicle on a level horizontal surface. – Make sure that the headlights have been properly adjusted manually. – Position the vehicle with the wheels straight, engine off, driver behind the wheel and dipped headlights on. – Turn on the ignition and enter xenon lights fault finding mode. – Select Configuration mode. – Run configuration CF001. – When calibration is complete, exit fault finding mode. – Lock and unlock the doors with the card. – The computer has now been calibrated. – Check status LC010, which should indicate Completed. COMPUTER CALIBRATION LC010 Status 1: Not completed Status 2: Completed The configuration LC010 reading can have one of two statuses: – Not completed: The computer has not been calibrated, the vehicle's reference level is unknown, and the maximum and minimum body height levels have not been programmed. – Completed: The computer has been calibrated. Normal system operation. The sensor reference levels have been programmed. AFTER REPAIR Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Check that the system performs its intialisation to verify that the computer has no faults. Adjust the headlights manually. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-11 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Configurations and programming 80C VEHICLE TYPE CF003 NOTES This configuration is performed after replacing the computer. Configuration procedure: – – – – – – – – – Connect the CLIP tool and turn on the ignition. Enter Xenon lights fault finding mode. Select configuration CF003 Vehicle type. Select the type of vehicle. Confirm the configuration. Exit fault finding mode and switch off the ignition. Lock and unlock the vehicle doors with the card. Re-enter Xenon lights fault finding mode and read LC001 Vehicle type. See that the vehicle type has been properly identified by reading configuration LC001. VEHICLE TYPE LC001 Status 1: Status 2: Status 3: Status 4: Error J84 R84 SUV 84 Configuration LC001 can have one of four statuses: – Error: Configuration CF003 Vehicle type, has been complete, but the vehicle type programmed does not match the vehicle diagnosed. – J84: Configuration correct: the vehicle type is Scénic. – R84: Configuration correct: the vehicle type is the LWB Scénic. – SUV84: Configuration correct: the vehicle type is Scénic 4x4. AFTER REPAIR Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Check that the system performs its intialisation to verify that the computer has no faults. Adjust the headlights manually. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-12 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Configurations and programming 80C ACTUATOR HIGH AND LOW POSITION CHECK AC012 NOTES Before running this command, make sure that the vehicle level has been calibrated. This command tests actuator control following a malfunction or customer complaint. Use the CLIP tool to check whether the xenon light computer has any faults. If fault DF018 Actuator is present, consult procedure for dealing with DF018. If the actuators fail to move after the command is run, proceed as follows: – Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Right-hand adjustment motor track 2 track 7 of the xenon light computer Left-hand adjustment motor track 2 track 7 of the xenon light computer If necessary, repair the connections. Check the condition of the adjustment motors and xenon light computer connections. Repair if necessary. If the command still fails to move the adjustment motors, replace them. AFTER REPAIR Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Check that the system performs its intialisation to verify that the computer has no faults. Adjust the headlights manually. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-13 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Summary table of faults 80C List of faults and related DTCs: Tool fault DF001 DF008 DF009 DF018 Associated DTC 9003 9002 9001 9004 Computer Front height sensor circuit Rear height sensor circuit Actuators Diagnostic tool title Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-14 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults 80C COMPUTER C.O. 1.DEF 2.DEF 3.DEF 4.DEF 5.DEF 6.DEF 7.DEF 8.DEF 9.DEF 10.DEF 11.DEF : : : : : : : : : : : : Dipped headlights signal circuit open Speed signal above maximum threshold Speed signal open circuit or short circuit to +12 V Speed signal short circuit to earth detected while driving Speed greater than 0 during initialisation Computer not calibrated Incorrect vehicle configuration Internal electronic fault. Actuator control line open circuit Actuator control line short circuit to earth Actuator control line short circuit to +12 V Battery voltage too low DF001 PRESENT NOTES The fault is declared present after the dipped headlights are switched on, or during a road test. C.O. NOTES Priority when dealing with a number of faults Replace if necessary. Carry out fault finding on the UCH to make sure that the stalk works properly. Check the condition of the contacts and make sure that the xenon light computer is properly connected. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance in the following connection: Black 6-track Protection and Switching Unit connector track 5 Track 6 of the xenon light computer If the fault is still present after these checks, replace the dipped headlights control stalk. 1.DEF NOTES None. Make sure that parameter PR019 Vehicle speed is accurate, and that the value lies within the permissible range. Check the ABS circuit for faults. If any faults are present, deal with them first. Then check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4 AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-15 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults 80C DF001 PRESENT CONTINUED 1 2.DEF NOTES Only take this fault into consideration if the vehicle's power supply is + after ignition. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4 Check the condition of the computer connections and repair if necessary. Then check the insulation against +12 V on the connection below. 3.DEF NOTES None. Check the insulation against +12 V of the connection between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4 Check the condition of the computer connections and repair if necessary. 4.DEF NOTES None. Make sure that parameter PR019 Vehicle speed is consistent. Check the ABS circuit for faults. If any faults are present, deal with them first. Then check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4 5.DEF NOTES This fault reappears every time configuration CF003 Vehicle type is run. If the computer has not been calibrated, it indicates fault DF001 Computer fault. In this case, consult command CF001 Computer calibration . If the fault persists, contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-16 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults 80C DF001 PRESENT CONTINUED 2 6.DEF NOTES None. If the vehicle configuration has not been done, the computer indicates fault DF001 Computer fault. In this case, consult command CF003 Vehicle type , and configure the computer for the type of vehicle involved. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. 7.DEF NOTES Deal with other system faults first. If fault DF001 appears with Internal computer error status, contact the Techline. 8.DEF NOTES None. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Right-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Left-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Check the condition of the connections as well as the xenon light computer and adjustment motor connections. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-17 Edition 4 Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults 80C DF001 PRESENT CONTINUED 3 9.DEF NOTES None. Check the insulation against earth on the following connection: Right-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Left-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Check the condition of the connections as well as the xenon light computer and adjustment motor connections. Repair if necessary. 10.DEF NOTES None. Check the insulation against +12 V of the connection between: Right-hand headlight adjustment motor Track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Left-hand headlight adjustment motor Track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Check the condition of the connections as well as the xenon light computer and adjustment motor connections. Repair if necessary. 11.DEF NOTES None. If the battery voltage is too low (< 10 V), check the condition of the battery and recharge or replace if necessary. Then check the vehicle's charge circuit. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-18 Edition 4 ). If there is no intialisation.DEF: 3. Check the condition of the front sensor connection harness (pinching. Check the front height sensor connections. deal with the system faults.). Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Repair if necessary.DEF NOTES None. Repair if necessary. Perform a road test.: V010 VDIAG No. etc. the signal will be outside the limits. Check the condition of the front sensor connection harness (pinching.DEF: 4. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. 2. NOTES The fault is declared present after a road test. the signal will be outside the limits. Check the front height sensor connections.Program no. Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod.Interpretation of faults 80C DF008 PRESENT OR STORED FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. etc. then check with the diagnostic tool. If it is damaged. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. breaks.DEF NOTES None. breaks.DEF: 2. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-19 Edition 4 .DEF: Signal outside upper limit Signal outside lower limit Signal outside limit on initialisation Internal electronic fault. If it is damaged. 1. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-20 Edition 4 .DEF NOTES None. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. breaks.: V010 VDIAG No.). Perform a road test. contact the Techline. 4. Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. Check the front height sensor connections. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed.Interpretation of faults 80C DF008 PRESENT CONTINUED 1 3. If there is no intialisation. Check the condition of the front sensor connection harness (pinching.Program no.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Repair if necessary. deal with the system faults. If fault DF008 appears with the Internal electronic fault status. If it is damaged. the signal will be outside the limits.DEF NOTES None. Repair if necessary. then check with the diagnostic tool. etc. CC. CC. If the fault is still present. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and insulation against earth between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Then check the insulation of this connection against earth.Interpretation of faults 80C REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT DF009 PRESENT OR STORED CC. then check with the diagnostic tool.DEF: Short circuit to earth Short circuit to +12 V Signal absent Signal outside upper limit Signal outside lower limit Signal outside limit on initialisation Inconsistent signal NOTES The fault is declared present after a road test. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. Perform a road test. If there is no intialisation.: V010 VDIAG No.DEF: 4. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear height sensor connections.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .0 NOTES None.1 : 1. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration.0 : CC. deal with the system faults.DEF: 2.Program no. Check the continuity and insulation against +12 V between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Then check the insulation of this connection against earth.DEF: 3. contact the Techline.1 NOTES None.DEF: 5. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-21 Edition 4 . Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration.Program no. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. Perform a road test. and then against +12 V . deal with the system faults. 2. contact the Techline. Check the proper installation and condition of the rear sensor linkage. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-22 Edition 4 . If there is no intialisation.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .DEF NOTES None. then check with the diagnostic tool.DEF NOTES None. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Track 1 of the rear level sensor connector Vehicle earth If the fault is still present. Replace if necessary.Interpretation of faults 80C DF009 CONTINUED 1 1. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections.: V010 VDIAG No. Program no.DEF NOTES None. then check with the diagnostic tool. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections.DEF NOTES None. Perform a road test.Interpretation of faults 80C DF009 CONTINUED 2 3. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Replace if necessary. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth. deal with the system faults.: V010 VDIAG No. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-23 Edition 4 . Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. If there is no intialisation. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. Check the proper installation and condition of the rear sensor linkage. Replace if necessary. contact the Techline.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth. 4. contact the Techline. and then against +12 V . Check the proper installation and condition of the rear sensor linkage. and then against +12 V . If the fault is still present. deal with the system faults. Check the condition of the rear level sensor linkage. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth. Replace if necessary.Program no. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. If there is no intialisation. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-24 Edition 4 .: V010 VDIAG No. Perform a road test.DEF NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. If the fault is still present. then check with the diagnostic tool. and then against +12 V .Interpretation of faults 80C DF009 CONTINUED 3 5. contact the Techline.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . : V010 VDIAG No. Switch on the ignition and turn on the dipped headlights.DEF NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: If the fault appears as present after: – the fault has been cleared – the ignition is switched off and on again. Check the headlamp unit which does not initialise by doing the following. replace the defective adjustment motor(s). Park the vehicle facing a wall. Perform a road test. Switch off the ignition. AFTER REPAIR Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-25 Edition 4 .: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .Interpretation of faults 80C DF018 PRESENT OR STORED ACTUATORS 1. If there is no intialisation. Run command AC012 Check actuator high and low positions to make sure that the actuators are working properly. then the dipped headlights are switched on. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Check the condition of the computer connections and the actuator connections in the headlights.DEF: Actuator motor fault 1. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: computer connector track 7 track 2 of the actuator connector in the right-hand headlight computer connector track 7 track 2 of the actuator connector in the left-hand headlight Track 1 of the actuator connector vehicle earth Track 3 of the actuator connector + after ignition If one or more of these checks fail. deal with the system faults.Program no. then check with the diagnostic tool. DEF If the value is incorrect. to see if they work properly If the value is incorrect. see the interpretation of fault DF001 Computer 2 PR020 Actuator positions 15 steps < PR020 < 520 steps PR032 3 PR033 Front reference height Rear reference height 23° < PR032 < 85. see the interpretation of faults DF008 Front height sensor circuit and DF009 Rear height sensor circuit status 4.6° 23° < PR032 < 89.Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.5° 4 PR019 Vehicle speed 0 mph < PR019 < 132 mph (220 km/h) Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-26 Edition 4 . LIGHTING POSITION SUB-FUNCTION Parameter or Status checked or Action PR017 1 PR018 Rear height 9 ° < PR018 < 110° Order Function Display and Notes Fault finding Front height 8° < PR117 < 115. see the interpretation of fault DF018 Actuator and run command AC012 Check actuator high and low position. Prerequisite: dipped headlights on.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .Conformity check 80C NOTES Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.5° If the value is incorrect. consult the interpretation of faults DF008 Front height sensor circuit and DF009 Rear height sensor circuit If the value is incorrect. : V010 VDIAG No.Program no.Conformity check 80C NOTES Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Prerequisite: dipped headlights on. LIGHTING CONTROL SUB-FUNCTION Parameter or Status checked or Action Order Function Display and Notes Fault finding If the value is incorrect. see the interpretation of fault DF018 Actuator and run command AC012 Check actuator high and low position to see if they work properly 1 PR020 Actuator positions 15 steps < PR020 < 520 steps LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SUB-FUNCTION Parameter or Status checked or Action Order Function Display and Notes Fault finding Done 1 ET001 Computer calibration Not done Normal operating mode Run CF001 Computer calibration Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-27 Edition 4 .: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-28 Edition 4 .Interpretation of statuses 80C COMPUTER CALIBRATION ET001 Status 1: Not completed Status 2: Completed There must be no present or stored faults.Program no. Not completed Status ET001 should be Not completed if the computer has not yet been calibrated and the vehicle reference heights have not been programmed. If status ET001 remains stuck at Not completed. Done Status ET001 should be Completed if the computer has been calibrated and the vehicle reference heights have been programmed.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Clear the fault memory.: V010 VDIAG No. Deal with any other faults. carry out fault finding on the entire system as a component may be defective. This is normal operation status. parked on a level surface with a driver behind the wheel and the fuel tank full. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. NOTES Special notes: The vehicle must be stationary. : 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .Parameter summary table 80C Tool parameter PR020 PR032 PR017 PR033 PR018 PR019 Actuator positions Front reference height Front height Rear reference height Rear height Vehicle speed Diagnostic tool title Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-29 Edition 4 .: V010 VDIAG No.Program no. Interpretation of parameters 80C FRONT HEIGHT PR017 and PR018 REAR HEIGHT NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-30 Edition 4 . If the values indicated by the vehicle do not match those of the conformity check. Carry out fault finding only if the values of this parameter are inconsistent. and follow the fault finding procedure. see faults DF008 Front height sensor circuit and DF009 Rear height sensor circuit. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .: V010 VDIAG No. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults.Program no. Program no.DEF and 4. Deal with any other faults. Clear the fault memory. Run fault finding only if the values of this parameter are inconsistent.Interpretation of parameters 80C VEHICLE SPEED PR019 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the values indicated by the vehicle do not match those of the conformity check. see fault DF001 Computer 3. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-31 Edition 4 .: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.DEF and apply the fault finding procedure.: V010 VDIAG No. and follow the diagnostic procedure. Carry out fault finding only if the values of this parameter are inconsistent.Program no. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of parameters 80C ACTUATOR POSITIONS PR020 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Clear the fault memory. If the values indicated by the vehicle do not match those of the conformity check. Parameter PR020 will therefore always be within a range of permissible values even if one of the components is defective. see command AC012 Check actuator high and low position .: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Note: Even though a height sensor or actuator is defective. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. To find out if an actuator is malfunctioning. refer to fault DF018 Actuators .: V010 VDIAG No. the value of parameter PR020 will always be determined by the computer. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-32 Edition 4 . : 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding .Customer complaints 80C NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: V010 VDIAG No. NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE COMPUTER ALP 1 NO HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ON EITHER OR BOTH HEADLIGHTS. REGARDLESS OF VEHICLE LOAD ALP 2 DIPPED HEADLIGHT BEAMS TOO HIGH ALP 3 THE LEFT AND RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS DO NOT LIGHT AT THE SAME HEIGHT ALP 4 Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-33 Edition 4 .Program no. If the resistance is not approximately 1 Ω . If the resistance is not 65 Ω ± 5 Ω. Replace it if necessary. Check fuse 1K (5A) of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box.Fault finding charts 80C ALP 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the system does not perform intialisation. Check for the presence of: a +12 V before ignition feed on track 16 of the diagnostic socket. a +12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the diagnostic socket. replace relay A. Check the condition of the connections and repair if necessary.Program no. Check the battery voltage and carry out the operations necessary to obtain a suitable voltage ( 9. Turn on dipped-beam headlights.5 V < battery voltage < 14. replace relay A. – Control circuit: Resistance between tracks 30 and 87A of the relay.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . contact the Techline. deal with the system faults. If the bulbs light but the system does not perform intialisation and no communication is possible.4 V ). perform the following checks: Remove the timed power supply 40A relay A located in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. earth on tracks 4 and 5 of the diagnostic socket. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-34 Edition 4 .: V010 VDIAG No. AFTER REPAIR Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Measure the following resistance values: – Power circuit: Resistance between tracks 85 and 86 of the relay. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. replace the faulty adjustment motor(s). If the system does not perform intialisation. If all the checks described above fail to solve the problem.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Make sure that the sensors are properly positioned and mounted on the body. and check the condition of the linkage. Check the condition of fuse F1K (5A) located in the vehicle's glovebox. Check for mechanical blockage of the headlight (ball joint popped out. If it is not.Program no. regardless of vehicle load NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.Fault finding charts 80C ALP 2 No height adjustment on either or both headlights. deal with the system faults. actuator seized). Use command AC012 Check actuator high and low position to find out which headlight is faulty.: V010 VDIAG No. reflector stuck. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-35 Edition 4 . Confirm that intialisation is performed when the dipped headlights are switched on. the actuators or a circuit component may be defective. AFTER REPAIR Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Repair if necessary. Program no. If the headlights differ in height. If the motors are actuated but the beam does not move.: V010 VDIAG No. perform a computer calibration ( CF001 described in the Configurations and Programming section). Check that headlights are fitted correctly. Check that the right-hand and left-hand headlights light at the same level. Use actuator command AC012 Check actuator high and low position . If there is a major difference between these two parameters.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . Replace the faulty headlight(s). adjust the headlights manually. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.Fault finding charts 80C ALP 3 Glare. or beam too high NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the light beam does not move: Check that the adjustment motors are actuated when the command is given (motor noise + vibration). check the condition of the adjustment motor/ headlight coupling rods. If the light beam moves: adjust the headlights manually. linkages). Check whether the initial front and rear heights PR032 Reference front height and PR033 Reference rear height are similar. Check the condition of system mechanical components (sensor mounting. Deal with any faults found. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-36 Edition 4 . Use actuator command AC012 Check actuator high and low position . If the motors are actuated but the beam does not move. Check whether the initial front and rear heights PR032 Reference front height and PR033 Reference rear height are similar. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.: 05 XENON BULBS Fault finding . If the light beam does not move: Check that the adjustment motors are actuated when the command is given (motor noise + vibration). check the condition of the adjustment motor/ headlight coupling rods.Program no. perform a computer calibration ( CF001 described in the Configurations and Programming section). Check the condition of system mechanical components (sensor mounting. If there is a major difference between these two parameters. Replace the faulty headlight(s). Check that the right-hand and left-hand headlights light at the same level.Fault finding charts 80C ALP 4 The left-hand and right-hand dipped headlight beams do not light at the same height NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the headlights differ in height. adjust the headlights manually. Check that headlights are fitted correctly. If the light beam moves: adjust the headlights manually.: V010 VDIAG No. Lampes au Xénon J 84 80C-37 Edition 4 . linkages). Deal with any faults found. – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds). SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): SCENIC II Function concerned: Instrument panel Name of computer: Instrument Panel VDIAG No. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM).: 04 . top of the range.08 2. standard. not hands-free and scenario 2. To cut off + after ignition. – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled. Type of diagnostic tools CLIP Special tooling required SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED Multimeter Universal bornier 3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers. TDB_V04_PRELI/TDB_V08_PRELI TdbJ841. – ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out. proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool.: 04 .Vdiag No. Dialogys. hands-free). paper version.Introduction 83A 1. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Renault card in the card reader (keyless vehicle scenario 1. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedure (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool).0 83A-1 Edition 4 .08 INSTRUMENT PANEL 183A Fault finding . – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool when the data is inconsistent.). TdbJ841. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repair.Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present. – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation. For a present fault.Introduction 83A Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since. For a stored fault . check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault. Customer complaints . you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. – the resistance of the component detected as faulty.: 04 . A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display. – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation.Vdiag No. bent pins.0 83A-2 Edition 4 . and which may correspond to a customer complaint. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied. the fault should be treated by customer complaints . Therefore. apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. etc. wear). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. the fault is present. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no See ALP No.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . 1 yes Read the faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use Fault Finding Charts (ALPs) The cause is still present no Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log TdbJ841.Introduction 83A 4.Vdiag No.0 83A-3 Edition 4 .: 04 . TdbJ841. and enables better analysis of the parts removed. – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory.: 04 . It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer. – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement. You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. FAULT FINDING LOG NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools.0 83A-4 Edition 4 . which should be completed during the fault finding procedure. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. The FAULT FINDING LOG. ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. IMPORTANT! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT.Introduction 83A 5. – Use the appropriate tools. 6.Vdiag No.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . FAULT FINDING LOG System: Instrument panel List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1/2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool Revision CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint 1188 Faulty fuel level display Faulty speedometer 1156 Faulty coolant temperature display Warning lights fail to come on Faulty trip computer displays 1187 Digital display: faulty text/image 1185 1157 1186 Faulty tachometer 1190 Other ● Your comments Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 011 When the ignition is switched on Sudden fault 005 While driving 004 Intermittently 009 010 Gradual deterioration Other ● Your comments Documentation used for fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of diagnostic manual: Fault finding manual No.page to print or photocopy .: Other documentation Title and/or part number: FD 10 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .: MR Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No. page to print or photocopy . Program No. Part 5 part no. VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.page to print or photocopy . Supplier No. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Instrument panel ● Page 2/2 Identification of computer and system parts exchanged Part 1 part no. Software version Calibration No. Parameter name Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments: FD 10 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Present Stored Fault name Specification ● Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no. Part 4 part no. To determine the vehicle's oil service interval. Mid-range instrument panel The Mid-range instrument panel has all the features of the Entry-level version. – average consumption. The mileage before service interval may be changed using the diagnostic tools. – Time and external temperature display. – Audible warning. – automatic headlighting indicator (depending on version). – coolant temperature. see the Maintenance Booklet. TdbJ841. – Bar-chart display. – fault alerts (see section Warnings and indicator lights in the MR). Top of the range instrument panel The Top of the range instrument panel has all the features of the Mid-range version plus the following functions: – Top of the range navigation. – headlights on reminder when a door is opened. – automatic locking when driving confirmation. – Entry level radio display. – Warning light indications. by configuring the instrument panel and pressing and holding the trip computer scroll button on the trip computer Mileage before service page. – Mid-range instrument panel. – fuel range. – driver seatbelt warning. – fuel consumed.Vdiag No. – Trip Computer display.: 04 . – cruise control/speed limiter indicator (depending on version).System operation 83A Three types of instrument panel can be found on vehicles: – Entry-level instrument panel. – Automatic transmission gear display (depending on configuration). – fuel level. – rev counter. Entry-level instrument panel The Entry-level instrument panel has the following features: – Digital speedometer. It has the Top of the range radio and Entry-level navigation displays through a multiplex connection. – oil level.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . – direction indicators.0 83A-7 Edition 4 . – cruise control or speed limiter setting (depending on configuration). – Text message display. The instrument panels have no self-test function. – mileometer and trip meter. The diagnostic tools can be used for fault finding on all versions. – Top of the range instrument panel. – overspeed (Saudi Arabia). – current consumption. System operation 83A Instrument panel in miles/Instrument panel in kilometres It is possible to switch from display in miles to display in kilometres and vice versa with a simple procedure.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .: 04 . then without releasing it.Vdiag No. without changing the computer configurations with the diagnostic tool. release the trip computer button. – the unit of distance flashes for approximately 3 seconds . the trip computer will automatically return to the original unit. press the Start button. TdbJ841. Repeat the procedure to return to the previous mode. follow this procedure: – with the ignition off. press one of the two trip computer buttons.0 83A-8 Edition 4 . Note: After switching off the battery. then the new unit is displayed. To do this. 0 83A-9 Edition 4 . configure it (see following section) and enter the VIN. REPROGRAMMING OR REPLACING THE COMPUTER The system cannot be programmed or reprogrammed.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . TdbJ841. When the computer has been replaced. 2.Vdiag No. Only the top of the range navigation window and screen can be replaced.Replacement of components 83A 1. REPLACEMENT OF COMPONENTS NOTE Work in the instrument panel is forbidden.: 04 . Make sure the correct VIN has been entered. PROGRAMMING. engine off. with ABS) – With ABS (with Vehicle speed computer) Three options: – With – None – With PAX (PAX + Tyre Pressure Monitoring system) CF138 Type of fuel LC049 CF143 Unit of measurement for consumption LC054 CF142 Electronic stability program (ESP) LC053 CF145 Tyre pressure monitor LC053 TdbJ841. then press and hold the trip computer button for 10 seconds . CF002 Configuration Language setting: French English Italian German Spanish Dutch Portuguese Turkish Polish (Vdiag 08 only) Automatic parking brake Vehicle type Gearbox type Related configuration reading LC060 Notes The configuration of the distance units CF140 in miles and the configuration of units of measurement for consumption in miles/gallon CF143 is only compatible with the selection of English. Three options: – With (with ESP and ABS) – Without (without ESP. The configuration CF143 of units of measurement for consumption in km/l is only compatible with the selection of Portuguese. No.Configurations and programming 83A NOTES Ignition on. CF146 CF137 CF149 LC057 LC030 LC029 Two possibilities: With or Without One possibility: J = compact MPV Two possibilities: BVA = automatic gearbox BVM = manual gearbox Four options: Petrol Diesel Petrol/LPG Petrol/CNG Three options: – L/100 km (related to configuration CF140 km) – Miles/Gallon (related to configuration CF140 Miles) – km/l (related to configuration CF140 km) To register the configuration.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .0 83A-10 Edition 4 . use the trip computer button to select the instrument panel display relating to the oil service interval.: 04 .Vdiag No. to find the exact figure in kilometres. Example of entry: Using the CLIP numeric keypad.000 km. in kilometres. engine off.Vdiag No. use the trip computer button to select the instrument panel display relating to the mileage before service. the computer automatically performs the conversion into miles for the oil change frequency. Inconsistent configuration may cause the Cruise Control/Speed Limiter to malfunction. carry out the calculation below to allow the instrument panel to display consistent values between the distance before next oil change and the desired oil change frequency.Arabia LC061 LC052 Oil service frequency Only use this parameter if the instrument panel is new. Ignition on.Configurations and programming 83A NOTES Ignition on. then press and hold the trip computer button for 10 seconds. IMPORTANT Make sure configurations CF002 (languages). It is imperative to use the following procedure for correct functioning of the range and oil change frequency. CF140 Configuration Unit of distance Related configuration reading LC051 Notes Two possibilities: km (related to configuration CF143 l/100 km or km/l) Miles (related to configuration CF002 English) Two possibilities: With or Without Two possibilities: With or Without CF150 CF141 Cruise control/speed limiter Overspeed function . After the value has been entered. This configuration updates the new instrument panel. Example: 18. or enter 30 to display 30 000 km. VP006 Oil change frequency in KM and VP007 Oil change frequency in months from the old instrument panel.000 miles. engine off.000 miles x 10 = 180.0 83A-11 Edition 4 . Run command VP006 Oil change frequency in KM.000 km (Enter 30) To register the configuration. enter 20 to display 20. in accordance with two parameters which can be configured by the CLIP tool. In addition to the language configuration CF002 Language setting. CF140 (unit of distance) and CF143 (unit of measurement and consumption) are consistent. multiply the value in miles indicated in the Maintenance booklet by 10 then divide by 6 . To display the oil change frequency in miles. No. Refer to the vehicle handbook for the distance and frequency for the vehicle according to the country. then divide by 6 = 30. by default.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .: 04 . Enter the oil change interval in km. TdbJ841. or else the instrument panel display system will malfunction. Special features for English versions The newly supplied instrument panel is configured. 0 83A-12 Edition 4 .Vdiag No.Fault summary table 83A Tool fault DF007 DF016 Associated DTC Fuel sender circuit Oil level sensor circuit Diagnostic tool title TdbJ841.: 04 .08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Move the harness around in order to detect any change of status. Repair if necessary. check the insulation.10 Ω ) Tank empty = 320 Ω (tolerance ± 10 Ω ) Replace the sender if faulty.Fault summary table 83A DF007 PRESENT OR STORED FUEL SENDER CIRCUIT C. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Sender track 1 track 22 of the instrument panel's grey connector Sender track 2 track 23 of the instrument panel's grey connector Repair if necessary.O. check the connections and condition of instrument panel and fuel gauge connectors. Deal with any other faults. TdbJ841. Look for possible damage to the harness. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. disconnect the fuel sender connector and measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2 of the fuel gauge. check the sender mounting. : Short circuit to earth Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after waiting 2 minutes with the ignition on. : Open circuit C. If the fault is still present.0 TDB_V04_DF007/TDB_V08_DF007 83A-13 Edition 4 . contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. The resistance should be: Tank full = 20 Ω (tolerance + 0 Ω / . NOTES Special notes: Check the consistency between the instrument panel display and parameter PR035 Fuel level. If the fault is still present.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .Vdiag No.: 04 . Clear the stored faults.C. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. and oil level sensor connections. If necessary replace the sensor.Fault summary table 83A DF016 PRESENT OR STORED OIL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT C.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Protection and Switching Unit. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.O. check the connections and condition of instrument panel. TdbJ841. check the insulation. If the fault is still present. NOTES Special notes: Check the consistency between the instrument panel display and the actual oil level (top up if low). : Short circuit to earth Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after waiting 2 minutes with the ignition on. Deal with any other faults. Repair if necessary.C. Move the harness around in order to detect any change of status. disconnect the oil level sensor connector and measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2 of the oil level sensor (the resistance should be between 3 Ω and 20 Ω ). Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present.Vdiag No. : Open circuit C. Clear the stored faults. check the sensor mounting. If the fault is still present.0 TDB_V04_DF016/TDB_V08_DF016 83A-14 Edition 4 .: 04 . Look for possible damage to the harness. If the fault is still present. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Oil level sensor track 1 track 11 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Oil level sensor track 2 track 10 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Instrument panel track 7 track 5 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Instrument panel track 8 track 4 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Repair if necessary. Vdiag No. ABSENT: Seat belt not fastened. INACTIVE: Seat belt fastened. in that case the status is OFF Indicates the brake fluid level. 0 V < PR111 < 8. refer to the Interpretation of statuses section Seat belt 9 ET099: Passenger seat belt warning TDB_V04_CCONF/TDB_V08_CCONF TdbJ841. The warning only applies if the detection system is installed in the vehicle. refer to the Interpretation of parameters section 1 Battery 2 3 PR110: Battery voltage + 12 V after ignition feed Radio alarm Lighting dimmer voltage Indicates battery voltage in volts 7. PRESENT: Level too low ABSENT: Level OK Indicates oil pressure. dipped headlights lit. PRESENT: Seat belt fastened Indicates whether or not the seat belt is fastened. MAIN COMPUTER STATUSES AND PARAMETERS Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes Fault finding In the event of a fault.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . oil pressure OK CLOSED: Indicator light lit: inadequate or no oil pressure Indicates whether or not the seat belt is fastened. engine off.: 04 . or not fastened but no front-seat passenger. ACTIVE: Seat belt not fastened and passenger in front seat.5 < PR110 < 16 ET002: ET101: Present ON: + 12 V present OFF: No + 12 V Ignition on.1 V Indicates parking brake position except for automatic parking brakes. refer to the Interpretation of parameters section In the event of a fault. refer to the Interpretation of statuses section In the event of a fault.0 83A-15 Edition 4 . Test condition: Ignition on. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read.Conformity check 83A NOTES The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. 4 Lighting PR111: 5 Parking brake ET097: Parking brake 6 Brake fluid level light ET066: Brake fluid level light alert 7 Oil pressure ET096: Oil pressure contact 8 ET098: Seat belt contact In the event of a fault. OPEN: Indicator light off. In the event of a fault.Vdiag No. Fault finding 2 Fuel Fuel consumed since trip PR117: computer reset to zero PR099: Vehicle speed Indicates fuel used. In the event of a fault. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Ignition on and engine off: the buzzer should sound.: 04 .0 83A-16 Edition 4 . refer to the Interpretation of commands section 4 Buzzer AC006: Buzzer TdbJ841. engine off. TRIP COMPUTER Order 1 Function Parameter or Status checked or Action PR112: Fuel flow Display and Notes Indicates fuel flow. refer to the Interpretation of parameters section 3 Vehicle speed Indicates vehicle speed.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Test condition: Ignition on.Conformity check 83A NOTES The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. Vdiag No. Indicates fuel flow. 1 Fuel level 2 PR035: Fuel level Indicates the fuel level in the tank. If configured for petrol.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . apply the fault finding procedure DF007 Fuel sender circuit . engine off. GAUGES Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes Fault finding In the event of a fault.: 04 . refer to the Interpretation of parameters section TdbJ841. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. In the event of a fault. PR015: LPG level 3 4 5 Fuel sender resistance Fuel flow PR119: PR118: PR112: LPG fuel gauge resistance CNG gauge resistance Fuel flow Indicates gauge resistance based on tank contents.0 83A-17 Edition 4 . value 0.Conformity check 83A NOTES The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. Test condition: Ignition on. Indicates LPG level in tank (depending on configuration). Conformity check 83A NOTES The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Indicates exterior temperature in °C. see the Dealing with command modes section 7 AC010: Lighting TdbJ841. dipped headlights lit. Ignition on. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. DISPLAY Order 1 2 3 4 Function Vehicle speed Engine speed Coolant temperature Exterior temperature Parameter or Status checked or Action PR099: PR116: PR027: PR109: Vehicle speed Engine speed Coolant temperature Exterior temperature Lighting dimmer voltage Display and Notes Indicates vehicle speed. 0 V < PR111 < 8. Following activation of all the instrument panel warning lights. The warning and indicator lights are not equipped with a dimmer. 75% then 100% of the maximum brightness for 4 seconds each time. engine off. Indicates the engine coolant temperature in °C.: 04 . the brightness will vary between 25%. 50%.1 V The instrument panel warning lights are activated in several stages. Test condition: Ignition on.Vdiag No. Fault finding In the event of a fault. The vehicle speed display lights up in two stages: 188 then 200. refer to the Interpretation of parameters section 5 PR111: 6 AC009: Instrument panel warning lights Lighting In the event of a fault.0 83A-18 Edition 4 . Indicates engine speed. contact Techline.Vdiag No.: 04 . ODOMETER Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action PR005: Display and Notes Fault finding 1 Oil change frequency Oil change Indicates the oil change frequency in km. Indicates the oil change frequency in months (24 months). 2 PR006: If the fault is still present. engine off. TdbJ841.0 83A-19 Edition 4 . The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Oil change frequency in months.Conformity check 83A NOTES The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. Test condition: Ignition on. frequency in km (30 000 km).08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . contact the Techline. TDB_V04_ET002/TDB_V08_ET002 TdbJ841.Vdiag No. engine stopped. The status must be ACTIVE. Ignition on. If the status is still not correct. Test the multiplex network and the Protection and Switching Unit.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 83A +12 V AFTER IGNITION ET002 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.: 04 . Deal with any faults.0 83A-20 Edition 4 . replace the switch. If the status is PRESENT and the level OK. The status must be ABSENT. contact the Techline. engine stopped.Interpretation of statuses 83A BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LIGHT ALERT ET066 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .0 83A-21 Edition 4 . Ignition on. The status should change to ABSENT. If so. TDB_V04_ET066/TDB_V08_ET066 TdbJ841. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.: 04 . If the status is still not correct. disconnect the brake fluid reservoir level switch connector. If status is still not correct.Vdiag No. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Track 2 of the level switch connector track 26 of the instrument panel Repair if necessary. check the insulation. The status should be OPEN (oil pressure warning light off). If the status is still not correct.0 83A-22 Edition 4 . Switch on the ignition and start the engine (the speed should be greater than 1.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .Vdiag No.: 04 . contact the Techline.Interpretation of statuses 83A OIL PRESSURE CONTACT ET096 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.600 rpm). Test the multiplex network and the Protection and Switching Unit. TDB_V04_ET096/TDB_V08_ET096 TdbJ841. Deal with any faults. check the switch mounting. then DISENGAGED.: 04 .0 83A-23 Edition 4 . then DISENGAGED. Look for possible damage to the harness.Interpretation of statuses 83A PARKING BRAKE ET097 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Pull and release the handbrake. make sure automatic parking brake configuration was done properly (WITHOUT).08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Automatic parking brake Make sure the automatic parking brake has been configured correctly (WITH). Repair if necessary. If the status is still wrong. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Switch track 10 of the computer Repair if necessary. test the multiplex network and automatic parking brake. Repair if necessary. Replace the switch if necessary. In the event of a fault. check the connections and condition of instrument panel and fuel sender connectors. make sure the status shows ENGAGED.Vdiag No. Manual parking brake Pull and release the handbrake. contact the Techline. move the harness around to see if the status changes. If the status is still faulty. use a multimeter to see if there is no continuity in the switch when it is pressed. If the status is INACTIVE. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any faults. check the insulation. If status is still not correct. If the status is incorrect. TDB_V04_ET097/TDB_V08_ET097 TdbJ841. If the status is still not correct. and continuity when it is not. make sure the status shows ENGAGED. If the status is still not correct.: 04 . TDB_V04_ET098/TDB_V08_ET098 TdbJ841. contact the Techline. engine stopped. Seat belt buckled. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Ignition on. Deal with any faults.Vdiag No.Interpretation of statuses 83A DRIVER'S SEAT BELT CONTACT ET098 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Test the multiplex network and airbag/pretensioner computer.0 83A-24 Edition 4 . The status must be PRESENT and the light on the instrument panel indicating that a seat belt is not fastened should go out. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. If the status is still not correct.Interpretation of statuses 83A PASSENGER SEAT BELT CONTACT WARNING ET099 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. contact the Techline.: 04 . The buzzer should sound and the status become ACTIVE. TDB_V04_ET099/TDB_V08_ET099 TdbJ841.0 83A-25 Edition 4 .Vdiag No. If the buzzer fails to sound. Vehicle speed above 9 mph (15 km/h) with someone in the passenger seat and their seat belt not fastened. use command mode procedure AC006 Buzzer. test the multiplex network and airbag/pretensioner computer. If the buzzer still fails to sound. Deal with any faults.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Switch on the ignition. The status must be ACTIVE. With the radio on. contact the Techline. If everything is correct. There must be no present or stored faults.: 04 . Deal with any faults. check the insulation. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . test the multiplex network.0 83A-26 Edition 4 . If the status is still not correct. continuity and the absence of interference resistance between: Grey radio connector track 5 track 1 of the instrument panel. the radio symbol on the instrument panel should light up after approximately 20 seconds.Vdiag No. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of statuses 83A RADIO ALARM ET101 NOTES Only in Entry-level/Mid-range models. With the ignition off and radio on. check for 12 V on track 1 of the instrument panel. TDB_V04_ET101/TDB_V08_ET101 TdbJ841. If the status is not ACTIVE. make sure the value of this parameter.Vdiag No. With the engine running (to cause a change in temperature). If the parameter is still not correct. contact Techline.Interpretation of parameters 83A COOLANT TEMPERATURE PR027 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any faults.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . the display on the instrument panel and the reading from the injection computer match. If not.0 83A-27 Edition 4 . test the multiplex network and injection computer. TDB_V04_PR027/TDB_V08_PR027 TdbJ841.: 04 . Interpretation of parameters 83A VEHICLE SPEED PR099 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. TDB_V04_PR099/TDB_V08_PR099 TdbJ841.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . test the multiplex network and ABS/ESP computer or vehicle speed computer (VSU).: 04 .0 83A-28 Edition 4 .Vdiag No. During a road test. If they are inconsistent. check that the vehicle speed and the value displayed by the speedometer are consistent. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. If the parameter is still not correct. Deal with any faults. contact Techline. Deal with any faults. test the multiplex network and UCH.Interpretation of parameters 83A EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE PR109 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.: 04 . If the parameter is still not correct. contact Techline.Vdiag No.0 83A-29 Edition 4 . AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. With the ignition on.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . If not. TDB_V04_PR109/TDB_V08_PR109 TdbJ841. see if the ambient temperature matches the value displayed on the instrument panel. Interpretation of parameters 83A BATTERY VOLTAGE PR110 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.0 83A-30 Edition 4 .08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . Replace it if necessary. TDB_V04_PR110/TDB_V08_PR110 TdbJ841. If the parameter is still not correct. check the condition of the instrument panel fuse. continuity and the absence of interference resistance between: + battery feed track 1 of the instrument panel Earth track 2 of the instrument panel Repair if necessary. Check the insulation.: 04 . Measure the voltage at the battery terminals and check the consistency with the value displayed by the diagnostic tool. contact Techline. If the parameter is incorrect. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.Vdiag No. check that the earth is present on track 4 of the dimmer. with the side lights lit. If the voltage on track 5 of the dimmer does not fluctuate. check the connections and condition of instrument panel and lighting dimmer connectors. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between: Dimmer track 5 track 25 of the instrument panel Repair if necessary. Ignition on. While adjusting the dimmer with the side lights on. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation. Look for possible damage to the harness.1 V. If everything is OK. 0 V < PR111 < 8. Fault finding procedure A Move the harness around in order to detect any change of status. replace the dimmer. contact Techline. Fault finding procedure B If the parameter is incorrect. proceed with Fault finding procedure A. carry out Fault finding procedure B .0 83A-31 Edition 4 . check for + 12 V on track 3 of the lighting dimmer.Vdiag No. then on track 25 of the instrument panel. check for + 12 V on track 6 of the Protection and Switching Unit. If the voltage fluctuates on track 5 of the dimmer but not on track 25 of the instrument panel. TDB_V04_PR11 1/TDB_V08_PR111 TdbJ841. If the parameter is still not correct.Interpretation of parameters 83A LIGHTING DIMMER VOLTAGE PR111 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check the insulation. If the parameter is still not correct. Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit if necessary. with the side lights lit. dipped headlights lit. Vary the intensity of the lighting to ensure that the dimmer gradation falls into the range specified above.: 04 . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. If the parameter is still incorrect. check the fluctuation in positive voltage on track 5 of the dimmer.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between: Dimmer track 3 track 6 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. Note: A fuel flow signal fault causes a trip computer malfunction.: 04 . the flow should be near or equal to 0. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. If the parameter is still not correct. If not. With the engine idling.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . contact Techline.Interpretation of parameters 83A FUEL FLOW PR112 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.Vdiag No. test the multiplex network and injection computer. TDB_V04_PR112/TDB_V08_PR112 TdbJ841. Deal with any faults.0 83A-32 Edition 4 . : 04 .08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . TDB_V04_PR115/TDB_V08_PR115 TdbJ841. If the parameter is still not correct.0 83A-33 Edition 4 .Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Check the consistency between the fuel level signal and LPG gauge resistance (PR119). contact Techline. Deal with any faults.Interpretation of parameters 83A LPG FUEL LEVEL PR115 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. engine stopped. Test the multiplex network and LPG computer. Ignition on. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. If not.0 83A-34 Edition 4 . contact Techline.Interpretation of parameters 83A ENGINE SPEED PR116 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Turn on the engine and vary the engine speed to check the consistency between the diagnostic tool and instrument panel. test the multiplex network and injection computer.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . TDB_V04_PR116/TDB_V08_PR116 TdbJ841.Vdiag No.: 04 . Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct. 0 83A-35 Edition 4 . Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct.: 04 .08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . contact Techline. the vehicle must be driven approximately 400 metres . Note: After the trip computer has been reset to zero or the instrument panel replaced. Check the consistency between the distance travelled and amount of fuel consumed since the trip computer was reset to zero.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.Interpretation of parameters 83A FUEL CONSUMED SINCE TRIP COMPUTER RESET PR117 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. TDB_V04_PR117/TDB_V08_PR117 TdbJ841. If not. test the multiplex network and injection computer. Deal with any faults. test the multiplex network and CNG computer.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . If not.0 83A-36 Edition 4 . AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair.: 04 .Vdiag No. TDB_V04_PR118/TDB_V08_PR118 TdbJ841.Interpretation of parameters 83A CNG GAUGE RESISTANCE PR118 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the parameter is still not correct. contact Techline. Ignition on. engine stopped. 10 Ω ). Fuel sender resistance with tank empty = 320 Ω (tolerances ± 10 Ω ) If not. test the multiplex network and LPG computer. Deal with any faults. Fuel sender resistance with tank full = 20 Ω (tolerances + 0 Ω / . If the parameter is still not correct.Interpretation of parameters 83A LPG GAUGE RESISTANCE PR119 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.0 83A-37 Edition 4 .: 04 . contact Techline. AFTER REPAIR Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Ignition on. engine stopped.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .Vdiag No. TDB_V04_PR119/TDB_V08_PR119 TdbJ841. 08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .: 04 .0 83A-38 Edition 4 . If there is a fault with the buzzer. TdbJ841. and run the command. contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Run the command to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. Follow the instructions to confirm repair. NOTES The command modes can only be accessed for software versions greater than 6. corresponding to Vdiag 08.00.Vdiag No.Interpretation of commands 83A BUZZER AC006 Switch on the ignition. AFTER REPAIR Run the command to confirm repair.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .0 83A-39 Edition 4 .Interpretation of commands 83A INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING LIGHTS AC009 NOTES The instrument panel warning lights are activated in several stages. The side light indicator lights may not light up when the instrument panel indicator lights are activated. refer to ALP02 Side light indicator light operates inconsistently. The vehicle speed display lights up in two stages: 188 then 200.: 04 . Follow the instructions to confirm repair. contact Techline. If there is a fault activating the instrument panel display indicator lights.Vdiag No. Deal with any other faults. If the Vdiag is lower than 08 and the side light indicator light does not work. TdbJ841. Follow the instructions to confirm repair.0 83A-40 Edition 4 .Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Run the command to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. If there is a fault with the lighting intensity variation. engine off.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . contact Techline.: 04 . TdbJ841.Interpretation of commands 83A LIGHTING AC010 NOTES Ignition on. Vdiag No. THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DOES NOT LIGHT UP.: 04 .Customer complaints 83A NOTES Carry out a fault finding procedure on the multiplex network. Carry out fault finding on the instrument panel. NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE INSTRUMENT PANEL. ALP 1 TdbJ841.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding .0 83A-41 Edition 4 . contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR If the instrument panel has been replaced.: 04 .Vdiag No.0 83A-42 Edition 4 . TDB_V04_ALP01/TDB_V08_ALP01 TdbJ841.Fault finding chart 83A ALP 1 No communication with the instrument panel. Check the instrument panel connections: – + battery feed on track 1 – earth on track 2 If the fault is still present. clear the faults and configure the instrument panel.08 INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding . The instrument panel does not light up. Test the multiplex network. The radio will operate for approximately 20 minutes without the ignition being switched to the accessories position.RADIO 186A General information 86A The tuner-amplifier has a test menu (see radio self-test procedure) to carry out repair operations or fault finding. Diagram: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Radio Aerial CD changer Speakers/tweeter speakers Display Steering wheel control 86A-1 . The radio beeps then switches off. PN2: radio and cassette player with integrated display. PN1: radio with remote display. Notes: ● All radios are designed to control a CD changer. This display may be integrated into the instrument panel. ● According to the vehicle version. the remote displays may have a 24 or 30-track connector or two 15-track connectors. PN5: radio and CD player with remote display.RADIO General information Special features of radios in the PN range: PN0: radio with integrated display. ● There is a special procedure for replacing the CD changer located in the dashboard front panel. PN3: radio and cassette player with remote display. PN4: radio and CD player with integrated display. 86A 86A-2 . – receive public safety emergency bulletins (PTY 31). CD FUNCTION The CD player can play conventional discs and any audio tracks on a CD-ROM. 86A-3 . – alphabetical mode (LIST). Only the Dolby fast-forward and rewind with search controls can be selected by specific buttons. RADIO FUNCTION The tuner has three selection modes displayed on the screen and accessible from the radio front panel: – manual mode (MANU). Should one of the speaker tracks short circuit. CASSETTE FUNCTION 86A The cassette plays automatically once cassette mode has been selected using the steering wheel control or the front panel. the volume is automatically reduced (without changing the volume shown in the display). Note: The "Mute" function accessed via the voice synthesiser or the steering wheel control stops the cassette playing. – preset mode (PRESET). If a CD changer is being used. – receive traffic news ( I Traffic function).RADIO General information The radio features allow you to: – listen to the radio (four geographical zones can be programmed for FM radio) – display the name of the station using RDS which automatically switches to the best transmitter (AF function). CDs can be played in order or at random. – receive news flashes and emergency bulletins (I News function). random play is possible on only one of the possible 6 compact discs. the supply to the amplifier will be cut off. THERMAL PROTECTION If the radio temperature is too high for it to function properly. RADIO General information VOLUME CONTROL The volume can be increased according to the vehicle speed. To operate this function: select the desired volume adjustment curve by using the expert mode (press and hold the source button until a bleep is heard): SPEED 5 for maximum increase. 0 to cancel the increase. 86A 86A-4 . Dealership details VIN Repair Order ● Mile age Engine System configurations Renault part number: series number Renault part number: series number Renault part number: series number FAULT FINDING LOG FAULT FINDING LOG FAULT FINDING LOG Radio CD changer Display ● Customer complaint 1165 Faulty control on radio front panel Screen display fault (give details) Fault with adjusting the volume according to speed Some of the radio's buttons do not work The CD changer does not switch on 1166 Sound fault on a speaker 1167 Faulty control on steering wheel The radio does not switch on 1168 1169 Reception fault (FM. which: ● YES YES NO NO Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 999 Permanent fault 999 Intermittent frequency (when fault occurs) Ambient heat When starting 999 Low temperatures 999 011 009 Very high temperatures When the ignition is switched on Sudden fault 999 999 999 005 Engine running or warm While driving Others Comments: FD 99 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . LW. MW) 999 999 999 The radio does not switch off 999 The code is always requested when the radio is switched on CD-ROM read fault (give details) 999 999 Cassette playing fault (give details) CD changer has no sound 999 999 999 Description of customer complaint: Customer complaint reproduced: Are there any retrofitted accessories on the vehicle? If yes.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Radio List of monitored parts: Radio system ● Page 1 of 2 Administrative identification 2 0 Date Log completed by/tel.page to print or photocopy . FAULT FINDING LOG System: Radio ● Page 2 of 2 Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of fault finding manual: Fault finding manual number Workshop Repair Manual Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagrams Technical Note Number: Other documentation Title and/or part number: ● Workshop fault finding ● Conditions under which fault disappears ● Parts returned Radio CD changer Speakers Screen Parts: Note: Complete and send off a fault finding log for each component that is removed and returned. FD 99 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy RADIO Security code recovery procedure 86A Recovering a security pre-code is carried out by removing the TUNER-AMPLIFIER and noting down the four characters that follow the letter T on the barcode. Below are two photos of barcodes displayed on the radios: Radio series number Pre-code The pre-code is found in this area. The pre-code is Q916 in this example THE VIN MUST BE ENTERED IN ALL 4 SOLUTIONS 4 solutions to recover the radio code: 1 Only the VIN is available: connect to code management on Renault Net and enter the number. The code server gives the original radio code entered in the World Vehicle Database (BVM). If the code has not been entered in the World Vehicle Database or is incorrect when the code is entered in the radio, then follow the procedure below: 2 The pre-code is available: go back into code management on Renault.Net, enter the pre-code (see photos) then obtain the radio code. For radios in the NR range, the pre-code is obtained in the self-test procedure mode by pressing buttons 1, 6 and i. 3 For older vehicles which do not have a radio pre-code, enter the series number of the radio again. For example, for Philips radio, this code starts with RN. In the photo of the radio, this code is RN277F30194601. If this code is correct, the radio operates again; if it does not operate, follow the procedure below: 4 Write a help message to be sent to the assistance unit. IF A NEW CODE IS CREATED, THE VIN IS UNKNOWN; SEND A HELP MESSAGE TO RENAULT NET CODE MANAGEMENT TO UPDATE THE DATABASE. 86A-7 RADIO Protection code The radio is protected by a four digit code. This code must be entered via the control satellite or the radio keypad each time the battery is disconnected. Entering the code with the control on the steering wheel: Press the bottom button on the control to confirm an entry. Entry via the radio: Enter the digits using buttons 1, 2, 3 and 4, and then confirm with button 6. If the code is entered incorrectly, the radio will be locked (1 minute for the first error, 2 minutes for the second error, 4 minutes for the third error, etc. 32 minutes maximum). Some configurations must be set after the code has been entered for the first time (see the Configuration Section). These settings are stored when the battery is disconnected. 86A Reminder: The radio will operate for approximately 2 minutes in scrambled mode without the code having been entered (with regular warning beeps). If the vehicle is equipped with a CD changer in the front panel, a code is exchanged between the CD changer and the radio. – If a new CD changer is fitted, the radio code is programmed when the battery or CD changer is connected. – If the radio is replaced, enter the security code of the old radio connected to the CD changer. The CD changer is programmed with the code for the new radio. – If the old radio code is lost, the changer code can be cleared using the clearing code. The clearing code is issued by the Techline, server etc. Note: If there is a configuration error, you can return to scrambled mode by pressing the 2 and 5 buttons at the same time as switching the power on. Then wait 2 minutes. Note: The CD changer is supplied uncoded. When it is installed in the vehicle, the CD changer is programmed with the radio supply code. Reminder: The radio will operate for approximately 2 minutes in scrambled mode without the code having been entered (with regular warning beeps). IMPORTANT If the vehicle is fitted with a top of the range navigation system (ITS), enter the radio code in the following way: 1. switch on the system by activating the vehicle's + after ignition feed, 2. wait 2 minutes: scrambled mode with beeps from the speakers, then code request screen appears, 3. enter the radio code using the ITS keypad: move the cursor with the central control and press to confirm, 4. switch off the ignition. 86A-8 RADIO Protection code THE DISPLAY SHOWS "CODE" OR "0000" Entering the security code. The radio beeps every 2 seconds for 2 minutes then displays CODE. 86A Does the radio show CODE then 0000? No Yes Enter the first digit using the wheel control on the steering wheel or the front panel. Go back to scrambled mode. With the radio off, press the 2, 5 and ON buttons. Wait approximately 2 minutes until CODE then 0000 appear. Confirm that the digit is correct by briefly pressing the lower steering wheel button or front panel button. Use the same procedure to enter the remaining three digits. Confirm the security code by pressing and holding the same button or button (6) on the front panel. Does the radio show ERROR then CODE? No Yes No Does the radio show ERROR CD then CD CODE? Yes The radio enters CONFIGURATION mode (if being used for the first time) and operates normally. Refer to the page entitled Display displays CD CODE. 86A-9 RADIO Protection code THE DISPLAY SHOWS "CD CODE" 86A The radio displays ERROR CD, CD CODE, then CD-0000. Enter the code of the old radio connected to the CD changer. Enter the first digit using the steering wheel controls. Confirm the digit by briefly pressing the lower button on the steering wheel controls. Enter the three other digits using the same procedure. Confirm the security code by pressing and holding the same button. No Does the CD changer code match the radio code? Yes Enter the CD changer resetting code obtained from the Techline. After following the procedure, the display shows CODE or 0000. The CD changer has registered the new radio code and operates correctly. 86A-10 RADIO Replacement of components AFTER DISCONNECTING THE BATTERY OR REMOVING THE RADIO: ● ● 86A Enter the security code (see security code). Setting the time: For displays not equipped with time setting buttons, proceed as follows: Press and hold the satellite time setting button (left-hand button): the hour flashes and can be set with ● the +/- buttons. Briefly press the satellite time setting button (left-hand button): the minutes flash and can be set with ● the +/- buttons. Briefly press the satellite time setting button (left-hand button): exit time setting. ● For displays equipped with time setting buttons, proceed as follows: Briefly press the right-hand display button to select hours then use the left-hand button to select the ● desired hour. Press the right-hand button to confirm. Use this procedure to set the minutes. After a component has been replaced, reconfigure and set the parameters for the radio (see Configuration Settings ), enter the security code (see security code). 86A-11 RADIO Configuration - Settings CONFIGURATIONS NOTE: To select the zone in which the Tuner is to be used, press buttons 2 and 5, at the same time as the equipment is switched on. Then wait for approximately 2 minutes. Enter the four digit code then: ● 86A SETTINGS To enter configuration mode (Expert mode), press and hold the source button (four seconds) until you hear a bleep. This allows you to adjust the following functions: NR range: ● AF mode activation (automatic retuning), ● vehicle speed-dependent volume control (5 for maximum regulation, 0 to cancel regulation), ● Loudness mode activation. PN range: ● AF mode activation (automatic retuning), ● vehicle speed-dependent volume control (5 for maximum regulation, 0 to cancel regulation), ● Loudness mode activation, ● Assisted tuner mode activation, ● configuration of the number of speakers (2 or 4), ● manual or dynamic list selection. PN6 radio: ● AF mode activation (automatic retuning), ● vehicle speed-dependent volume control (5 for maximum regulation, 0 to cancel regulation), ● Loudness mode activation, ● Assisted tuner mode activation, ● configuration of the number of speakers (2 or 4), ● manual or dynamic list selection. ● activation of data storage in accordance with the Renault Card: CARD ON/OFF. To operate, the radio must be accompanied by the navigation system. select the tone curve appropriate for the vehicle – 0: no regulation – 1: Twingo – 2: Clio – 3: Mégane/Scénic – 4: Laguna – 5: Vel Satis - Espace select the relevant zone: – America – Japan – Asia – Arabia – Others (Europe, Africa, other) ● Note: These configurations are not required when the secret code is entered after the power supply has been cut. 86A-12 RADIO Connections 86A To allocate the tracks for the different functions that are connected to the radio (CD changer, steering wheel control, display, aerial), refer to the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note corresponding to the vehicle. Radio: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261 CD changer: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 1272 Display: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 1127 For displays which are connected to the instrument panel, the code is 247 Steering wheel control: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 325 Aerial: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 886 86A-13 RADIO Self-test procedure 86A The self-test procedure mode of the previous generation radios (PN0-6) allows certain main functions to be tested: ● by pressing buttons 2 and 4 at the same time, the speakers can be tested. They are supplied one by one; the display enables the connections and signals from each speaker to be checked, ● by pressing buttons 1 and 6 at the same time, the reception level can be tested (after frequency is displayed), – 9 or letter: good reception, – less than 3: poor reception, – if 2: total loss of stereo. The self-test procedure mode of the new generation radios (NR4/5) enables certain main functions to be tested using the combination of buttons 1, 6 and i. The messages will be displayed in the following way: ● Radio pre-code displays one letter and three digits to avoid removal of the radio, ● speaker test with two bleeps (bass - treble) from the speakers, with the tested speakers shown on the display (front left-hand H01, front right-hand H02, rear right-hand H03, rear left-hand H04), ● displays the frequencies and levels of the radio sensors, ● software version displayed, displays fault finding for the connected aerial if the aerial is supplied by a coaxial cable; in this case, the display shows H15 with X = 0, 1 or 2 depending on the aerial status (0: open circuit, 1: short circuit to earth, 2: power consumption), ● audio test loudness OFF (H08), cuts any loudness for an audio test. Note: Also displays source use time and total time in 10 minute slots (Tuner (H09)/CD (H10)/cassette (H11)/CD changer (H12)/auxiliary (13)/MP (H14)/Total (H15)). 86A-14 RADIO Radio fault finding: Customer complaints 86A ALP 1 THE RADIO BEEPS APPROXIMATELY EVERY 2 SECONDS THE RADIO DOES NOT WORK (NO SOUND) WHEN THE RADIO ON BUTTON IS PRESSED ALP 2 THE RADIO DOES NOT SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY WHEN "+ ACCESSORIES FEED" IS SWITCHED ON OR SWITCHES OFF AFTER 20 MINUTES ALP 3 THE RADIO IS SWITCHED ON, BUT THE DISPLAY AND SATELLITE CONTROLS DO NOT WORK ALP 4 THE SATELLITE CONTROLS DO NOT WORK ALP 5 RADIO RECEPTION FAULTS ALP 6 THE VOLUME DOES NOT INCREASE WITH THE VEHICLE SPEED ALP 7 LIGHTING DOES NOT CHANGE WHEN THE VEHICLE LIGHTS ARE SWITCHED ON ALP 8 NO SOUND CUT-OUT DURING CARMINAT OR HANDS-FREE KIT MESSAGES ALP 9 THE INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK ALP 10 86A-15 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 1 The radio beeps approximately every 2 seconds The radio beeps every 2 seconds wait for 2 minutes. Enter the radio-specific security code No Is the code correct? Yes The radio enters Configuration mode (if being used for the first time) and operates normally. The radio displays CODE then 0000. Check the code and try again. See security code, the radio displays CODE then 0000. No Has the code been entered correctly? Yes 86A-16 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 2 The radio does not operate when the ON button is pressed Press the radio's ON button. Is the display working (backlighting)? No Check the radio fuse (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 260). Yes No Replace the fuse Is the fuse sound? Yes Does the radio switch on? Check the continuity of connections BCP3 and MA0, (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261 ) Yes Fault solved No Is the wiring harness sound? Yes Press the radio's ON button. Replace the wiring or repair it if the repair procedure exists. Replace the radio Is the volume 0 or mute? No Check and test whether one of the speaker tracks has short circuited or earthed from the disconnected radio connector using a multimeter, connections 34A to 34H (see Wiring DiagramsTechnical Note, vehicle, code 189 to 192 and 365 to 366) Yes Disconnect the mute control wire from the hands-free kit (connection 107 D) (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 692) 86A-17 RADIO Fault finding chart ALP 2 CONTINUED 86A Is there a short circuit on one of the lines? No Replace the radio. Yes Check the speaker concerned using a multimeter. Is the speaker short circuited? No Using a multimeter, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring. No Test OK? Yes Replace the radio Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists Yes Replace the faulty speaker. 86A-18 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 3 The radio does not switch on automatically or switches off after 20 minutes Check that the system is operating correctly. – Connect + accessories feed, – Switch on the radio, – Cut the + accessories feed; the radio should switch off – Reconnect the + accessories feed; the radio should switch on. Has the fault disappeared? Yes End No Check the + accessories feed using a multimeter. Is there + 12 V on connection SP2? No Yes Replace the radio. No Check supply fuse 1G (15A) (code 260). Are the fuses sound? Yes Replace the fuse. Replace the radio. 86A-19 RADIO Fault finding chart EXCEPT ESPACE IV, SCENIC II 86A ALP 4 The radio is switched on, but the display and control satellite do not operate The radio operates but the display does not light up. Check thefunctions of thedisplay that are not connected to the radio by switching on the + sid e lights feed (screen backlighting and exterior temperature). Is there anything displayed on the screen? No Disconnect the aerial amplifier Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and display using a multimeter (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261). Is there anything displayed onthescreen? No Check the display supply (the fault is not associated with the radio) Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the 34AM connection No Are the tests ok? Are the tests ok? No Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists. Yes Replace the aerial amplifier. Yes Disconnect then reconnect the display. If the fault is still present, replace the display. 86A-20 RADIO Fault finding chart ESPACE IV, SCENIC II 86A ALP 4 The radio is switched on, but the display and control satellite do not operate The radio operates but the display does not light up. Check the functions of the display that are not connected to the radio by switching on the + side lights feed (screen backlighting and exterior temperature). Is there anythin g displayed on the screen? No Disconnect the aerial amplifier Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and instrument panel using a multimeter (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261). Is thereanything displayedonthe screen? No Check the instrument panel supply (the fault is not associated with the radio) See Wiring diagrams Technical Note, Vehicle, Code 227 . Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the 34AM connection No Are the tests ok? Are the tests ok? No Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists. Yes Replace the aerial amplifier. Yes Disconnect and reconnect the connector connected to the display. If the fault is still present, replace the instrument panel. 86A-21 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 5 The radio control satellite does not operate The radio operates but the radio control satellite does not. Does the remote display operate? No See ALP 4 Yes Check that the radio control satellite is correctly connected to the display or instrument panel (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 1519). No Is the radio control satellite connected correctly? Yes Check the resistance of the radio control satellite using a multimeter. Reconnect theradio control satelliteand check the system operates correctly. Are the resistances correct? No Using a multimeter, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring. Replace the satellite. No Test OK? Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between the radio and the display. Test OK? No Replace the wiring between the radio and the display or repair it if the procedure exists. Yes Replace the display 86A-22 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 6 Radio reception faults Poor radio reception. Does the radio scan without tuning in FM? Yes Fault external to the radio (transmitter synchronisation). Are there occasional gaps (loss of sound < 1 second) in FM reception? Yes The vehicle is in an area of poor reception. The radio takes longer to find an adequate transmitter. Disable AF in Expert mode. Does the radio crackle ? Yes No The vehicle is in an area of poor reception. Switch off the Heated rear screen function. No Is the level higher? With the vehicle outside and in an area with good reception, test the reception level in the radio's fault finding menu. Yes The fault is associated with micro-breaks on the rear screen de-icing circuit. 86A-23 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 6 CONTINUED 1 Is the reception level good? No Without moving the vehicle, compare the level with that of a Long Wave station. Yes Check whether the poor reception is localised or permanent and on all stations. Is the level higher? No Check the vehicle aerial. Yes Is the fault permanent? No The vehicle is in an area of poor FM reception. Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and the aerial amplifier. Carry out the tests on the aerial. Test OK? No Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists. Yes Replace the radio 86A-24 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 6 CONTINUED 2 Hold the aerial wire near to the radio. No Is the level higher? Replace the aerial amplifier. Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and the aerial. No Test OK? Replace the wiring or repair it if the repair procedure exists. Yes Replace the radio. 86A-25 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 7 The volume does not increase with the vehicle speed The SDVC (speed-dependent volume control) function does not work. Check the audio equipment configuration (Expert mode). Set the SPEED curve to 5 and run a test when driving at more than 48mph (80 km/h). Does the volume change? No Yes The fault has been rectified. Reset the control to: CURVE 2. Check the signal on connection 47F (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261) using a multimeter. The voltage should vary depending on vehicle speed. Yes No Does the signal increase? Yes The fault is not associated with the audio equipment. See MR Fault finding corresponding to vehicle, 38C, ABS, Conformity check. Replace the radio with the approval of your Techline. 86A-26 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 8 Lighting does not change when the vehicle lights are switched on Lighting does not change when the vehicle lights are switched on. Check for + 12 V on connection LPG (only lights are on). Is there + 12 V feed? No Yes Replace the radio. The fault is not associated with the audio equipment. Check the continuity and insulation of connection LPG using a multimeter (See Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261). No Test OK? Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists Yes 86A-27 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 9 No sound muting during Carminat, voice synthesiser or hands-free kit messages No muting of sound during messages. Check for earth on connection 107D (See Technical Note Wiring Diagrams, vehicle, code 261) only during messages. Is there an earth? No Yes Replace the radio. The fault is not associated with the radio. Check the continuity and insulation of connection 107D using a multimeter. No Test OK? Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists Yes 86A-28 RADIO Fault finding chart 86A ALP 10 The infrared remote control does not operate (PN6) The infrared remote control does not work. Check the continuity and insulation of connections 34GH and 34GK (between the radio and instrument panel, see Technical Note Wiring Diagrams, vehicle, code 261). Are the connections sound? No Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists. Yes Connect a multimeter to connection 34GH and check that a voltage change occurs when pressing the remote control. No Test OK? Check that the battery is sound. No Test OK? Replace the battery. Yes Replace the radio. Yes Replace the remote control. Connect a multimeter to connection 34GH and check for 0V on the connection when pressing the remote control. No Test OK? Replace the instrument panel. Yes Replace the remote control. 86A-29 RADIO Recovering a jammed CD RADIO First solution If the electric ejector motor is operational.wire to contact ( 2) when ejecting the CD). 86A 86A-30 .5 V battery to supply the electric motor (B) (attach the + wire to contact (1 ) and the . eject the CD using a 4. remove the screw (C ) and release the electric motor (B). ● Turn toothed wheel ( D) by hand in a clockwise direction until the CD is ejected. Before refitting the radio: ● 86A refit the electric motor and attach it using the bolt (second solution only). 86A-31 . refit the casing.RADIO Recovering a jammed CD RADIO Second solution If the electric ejector motor is not operational. RADIO Recovering a jammed CD CHANGER IN THE DASHBOARD REMOVAL Remove the two screws (A ). Turn the CD changer upside down. Remove the cover. 86A Remove the mechanism from its housing. Remove the 6 screws (B ). Turn the CD changer upside down. 86A-32 . Remove both clips from the two connectors. Remove the eight screws (E). 86A Remove the CD guide arm. 86A-33 . Disconnect connector (D ).RADIO Recovering a jammed CD CHANGER IN THE DASHBOARD Remove the two bolts (C ). RADIO Recovering a jammed CD CHANGER IN THE DASHBOARD Remove both ribbon cables. The CDs can now be accessed. 86A Turn the guides and push the mechanism as shown in the diagram in order to raise or lower the CDs. 86A-34 . Remove the upper section of mechanism. NOTE Never refit the changer mechanism once it has been removed. wire to contact (2)).5 V battery to supply the electric motor (3). – the four dampers (3) (clipped on). 86A Remove the electronic module from the mounting and refit it to the side. 86A-35 . (attach the + wire to contact (1 ) and the . – the two springs (2) after bringing them to the upper position.RADIO Recovering a jammed CD CHANGER IN THE BOOT Remove: – the three screws ( 1) located underneath the unit. First solution If the electric motors are operating: 1 Reinsert the CD and its drawer into the changer (4) using a 4. 2 Eject the changer by moving lever (4). 86A 2 Eject the CD changer by moving the lever (8). refit the module in its unit. attach the module to the unit using the three bolts. re-close the changer. replace the four dampers and the two springs. 86A-36 . attach its cover and refit the rear section.RADIO Recovering a jammed CD CHANGER IN THE BOOT Second solution If the electric motors are not operational: 1 To reinsert the CD and its drawer into changer (5 ). remove the pinion mounting (6) by its screw. Before replacing the radio: ● ● ● turn the toothed wheel (7 ) by hand in an anticlockwise direction until the drawer is turned completely upside down in the changer (5). switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed).Introduction 86C 1. proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool. CD player 2. RECAP Universal bornier Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP + CAN sensor Special tooling required Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1681 3. Note: The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are supplied when the dipped headlights are lit. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM). PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Name of computer: ITS Program No. – press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled.: 0020 Vdiag No. receiver. Fault finding can only be run after the ignition is switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights are lit. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle: Scenic II ph2 Function concerned: Navigation. integrated hands-free telephone. Dialogys.: 04 Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool). – check that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out to confirm that the + after ignition feed has been cut off. paper version.186C ITS Program no. – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds).0 86C-1 Edition 1 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Proceed as follows: – put the vehicle card in the card reader. To cut off the + after ignition feed. TDB_V04_PRELI ITSJ84ph2V1. – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations.: 0020 Vdiag No. Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present. check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault. – the connectors on these lines (corrosion.0 86C-2 Edition 1 .). wear). – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. bent pins. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied. apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section.: 0020 Vdiag No. the fault is present. this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . For a present fault. or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). consult the corresponding fault finding page. For a stored fault . A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart ITSJ84ph2V1.ITS Program no.Introduction 86C Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since. the fault should be processed by customer complaints . etc. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is switched on after the + after ignition feed (without any system components being active). and which may correspond to a customer complaint. Customer complaints . note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation. Therefore. – the resistance of the component detected as faulty. ITS Program no. 1 yes Read faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults yes Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present no Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log ITSJ84ph2V1.Introduction 86C 4.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no Refer to ALP No.: 0020 Vdiag No.0 86C-3 Edition 1 . Resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment.Introduction 86C 4. repair or replace the wiring harness.0 86C-4 Edition 1 . try to locate the source of the fault. resistance and insulation are generally correct. as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Apply light pressure to the connectors. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Look for signs of oxidation. If a fault is detected. insulators and wiring harness routing.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Look for a short circuit to earth. Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. then section by section.ITS Program no. Twist the wiring harness. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection.: 0020 Vdiag No. If there is a change in status. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs. Carefully check the fuses. to + 12 V or to another wire. Electrical measurements of voltage. ITSJ84ph2V1. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness. FAULT FINDING LOG IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. IMPORTANT! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. which should be completed during the procedure. ITSJ84ph2V1. ● for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is mandatory. and enables better analysis of the parts removed. enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement. You will always be asked for this log: ● when requesting technical assistance from Techline.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . The FAULT FINDING LOG.: 0020 Vdiag No. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load.0 86C-5 Edition 1 . – use the appropriate tools. ● to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested.ITS Program no. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.Introduction 86C 5. 6. which: ● YES YES NO NO Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 999 Permanent fault 999 Intermittent frequency (occurrence must be stated) Ambient heat Covered area (garage.page to print or photocopy . etc.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Carminat Advanced Navigation List of monitored parts: navigation system ● Date Log completed by/tel.page to print or photocopy .) Green GPS Symbol Green CD Symbol 999 Low temperatures 999 999 999 999 Very high temperatures When starting Red TMC Symbol During impacts/vibrations 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 Engine running or warm Green TMC Symbol Red GPS Symbol Red CD Symbol Others Comments: FD98 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Dealership details VIN Repair Order ● Engine Mileage Page 1 of 2 Administrative identification 2 0 Navigation system configuration Renault part number series number Renault part number series number Renault part number series number Version Renault part number series number Fault finding log Fault finding log Fault finding log Fault finding log Navigation computer CCU: Central Communication Unit Cartographic CD-ROM Languages CD-ROM Radio ● Customer complaint 1162 Problem reading the cartographic CD-ROM Navigation guidance fault 1161 Problem opening or closing the screen Control fault on the CCU front panel or independent console Permanent black screen 1158 Guidance voice message fault 1170 1160 1171 Satellite reception fault (GPS) 999 Intermittent black screen 999 999 Location fault Description of customer complaint: Customer complaint reproduced: Are there any retrofitted accessories on the vehicle? If yes. ............................. FD98 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy ........ go to Fault finding: Navigation → Configuration → System information → Fault finding→ GPS status Status red LED computer front panel: Carminat computer (CD-ROM reader): Cartographic map CD scratched or dirty: Permanently off Impossible to insert CD YES Permanently flashing Impossible to eject CD NO Permanently lit Refuses to read CD Vehicle speed signal fault finding....page to print or photocopy ................FAULT FINDING LOG System: Carminat Advanced Navigation ● Page 2 of 2 Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of diagnostic manual: Fault finding manual number Workshop Repair Manual Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note Number: Other documentation Title and/or part number: ● Workshop fault finding COM................................. .............. from the following fault finding menu: Navigation → Configuration → System information → Fault finding → I/O ● Conditions under which fault disappears Vehicle restart after a cut-off of > 1 min: OUT NO after a cut-off of < 1 min: OUT NO By action on: ........... The fault disappears by itself (state time): ....... change of value when driving? YES NO To run this fault finding procedure on the navigation system.................... ● Parts returned Navigation computer CCU Keypad Screen Parts: Note: Complete and submit a fault finding log for each component removed and returned................................................................................................................................................page to print or photocopy .............................................................................................................................................................. Other (give as much detail as possible): ....... follow the procedure below: Position the vehicle in an open area Wait for 15 minutes with the ignition on In the navigation system........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .............................ERROR Search Sat ≥ 3 sat GPS reception status: To check the GPS reception status..................................... : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .ITS Program no.List and location of components 86C 1 .List and location of components Number 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 Navigation computer CD multi-changer GPS aerial* Display Steering column control Speakers Tweeter speakers Navigation central control Tuner-amplifier Microphone Description * Satellite guidance ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No.0 86C-8 Edition 1 . : 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .0 86C-9 Edition 1 .Operating diagram GPS aerial* (+ telephone) Microphone Display Navigation computer Speakers Receiver/radio Navigation central control Diagnostic socket CD multi-changer Steering column control AM/FM aerial amplifier .Bus UART .Vehicle multiplex network .Multimedia multiplex network .Operating diagram 86C Vehicle multiplex network 2 .Wire connections * Satellite guidance ITSJ84ph2V1.ITS Program no. Features 86C 3 . The number of CDs in the changer can be viewed via PR005 Number of CDs in the changer. B . – CD multi-changer. This can play audio CDs.Display The display is used to display information such as navigation maps.Clock This function displays the time on the video display. – Hands-free telephone integrated control. receive and make calls and receive SMS text messages. The receiver automatically selects the best frequency for a station using the AF function. C . CD-Rs which have been copied by the customer and CDs on which MP3 files are stored. – Display. – Clock. Addresses for guidance can be entered via the central control or as voice commands.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . – Satellite guidance navigation.Receiver This function is used for listening to AM and FM radio. The phone can be connected to the vehicle with Bluetooth (wireless). radio. temperature and information from the mobile phone F .: 0020 Vdiag No.ITS Program no. E . ITSJ84ph2V1. It receives traffic information via the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) to make best use of the Carminat Navigation and Communication system.Hands-free telephone integrated control This function enables the driver to use a mobile phone hands-free using the microphone located next to the driver's sun visor and the vehicle speakers.CD multi-changer The CD multi-changer located on the dashboard can hold up to 6 CDs. CD title. A . time.Navigation This function guides the driver by displaying maps and issuing voice messages. D .Features The CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system is involved in the following functions: – Receiver.0 86C-10 Edition 1 . The Carminat Navigation and Communication system lets you use the phonebook. Role of components 86C 4 . DVD cartographic map: loads maps onto the navigation computer.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Speakers and tweeter speakers: produce sound from the multimedia system inside the vehicle. AM/FM aerial amplifier: improves the reception of AM/FM signals. AM/FM aerial: picks up waves from various transmitters. the time.: 0020 Vdiag No. Display: displays different multimedia information such as the station tuned in. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ITSJ84ph2V1.Role of main components ● ● Receiver: the receiver transmits audio signals via the speakers inside the vehicle. Navigation central control: different multimedia functions can be intuitively accessed via a multimedia keypad. or information related to CDs or satellite navigation. Navigation computer: manages the various multimedia system functions according to the requests of the user. Steering column switch: different multimedia functions can be accessed via controls on the steering wheel. GPS aerial: receives various signals emitted by satellites.0 86C-11 Edition 1 . Microphone: enables a phone to be used in hands-free mode via a Bluetooth connection.ITS Program no. CD multi-changer: loads CDs and sends audio signals to the receiver. Enter the unlocking code for the Carminat Navigation and Communication system. 2. Before removing the computer. Configure the computer (see Configuration and programming ). – Use command VP002 Write VIN to enter the VIN. – How to obtain the unlocking code for the Carminat Navigation and Communication system ● ● ● ● ● ● ● switch on + after ignition feed.Replacement of components 86C To remove and refit this computer (see MR 370 Mechanical. – Enter the vehicle type via the CF001 Vehicle type command. the unlocking code is requested 2 mins after the CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system comes on.Refitting). address book. switch on the CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system. Note: If the code is incorrect. On-board telematics system.) using the RZ003 Parameters and customer data command and the diagnostic tool. enter this code using the navigation central control. connect the Clip diagnostic tool.: 0020 Vdiag No. ITSJ84ph2V1. complete the VP004 Netherlands Legislation configuration. contact Techline with this navigation programming number to obtain the CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system unlocking code. clear the customer's data (telephone numbers. Eject the DVD. 83C.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . The navigation computers from the Parts Department are supplied unconfigured and in factory mode (receiver set to 162 kHz AM. read the faults and run a conformity check to ensure that it is definitely faulty. note the navigation programming number given in the identification menu. Remove the computer with ignition off. and beeps for 2 minutes). – For vehicles registered in the Netherlands only. Enter the VIN code (see Dealing with commands). 3. Procedures to be carried out before replacing the navigation computer: 1. Before replacing the computer (with the agreement of Techline).0 86C-12 Edition 1 . 2.ITS Program no. Procedures to be carried out after replacing the navigation computer: 1. Navigation computer: Removal . 3. 4. Delete the incorrect code before entering the new one. etc. you must wait for between 2 and 32 minutes before entering a new code. ● Select the line in the drop-down menu that corresponds to the vehicle.ITS Program no. ● Establish dialogue with the computer. – NETHERLANDS LEGISLATION (VP004): IMPORTANT Running command NETHERLANDS LEGISLATION initialises the computer according to this country's legislation. ● Select the line corresponding to the configuration to be modified. ● Select the Write configuration menu. ● Exit fault finding mode (communication cut-off with the computer without the tool being switched off). ● Establish dialogue with the computer. switch off the ignition for 5 seconds then switch on the ignition again. ● Select the Repair mode menu. ● Click on Confirm . ● Select the Repair mode menu.Configurations and programming 86C Configurations available and operating mode – Vehicle type (CF001): This configuration enables the system to identify the vehicle in which it is installed. ● In the Read configuration menu. ITSJ84ph2V1. check that the configuration has been completed. check that the configuration has been completed. ● In the Read configuration menu.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . ● Establish dialogue with the computer.0 86C-13 Edition 1 . This configuration is IRREVERSIBLE: it is not possible to clear this selection. ● Select the line in the drop-down menu that corresponds to the country. ● Exit fault finding mode (communication cut-off with the computer without the tool being switched off). List of individual configurations available on the diagnostic tool with the associated configuration reading Configuration reading LC001 LC002 Configuration CF001 VP004 Name of configuration Vehicle type Country type Choice of configuration Scenic II Except Netherlands Netherlands Procedure to follow to modify the Vehicle Type configuration. Programming Procedure to follow to modify the Country Type configuration (this programming only affects the Netherlands and is irreversible). ● Select the line corresponding to the configuration to be modified.: 0020 Vdiag No. ● Establish dialogue with the computer. switch off the ignition for 5 seconds then switch on the ignition again. ● Select the Programming menu. : 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .ITS Program no.Fault summary table 86C Summary of faults that can be diagnosed by the navigation computer.0 86C-14 Edition 1 . Associated DTC D010 D011 9A01 9A02 9A03 9A04 9A07 9A08 9A10 9A0D C300 C186 9A06 C163 C189 9A0C 9A00 Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer configuration No radio multiplex signal No display multiplex signal No central control multiplex signal No audio CD changer signals Navigation DVD reader GPS aerial circuit* Tool fault DF001 DF002 DF003 DF004 DF005 DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 DF010 DF021 DF022 DF023 DF025 DF027 DF029 DF030 Diagnostic tool title * Satellite guidance ITSJ84ph2V1. with corresponding technical center codes. the tuner-amplifier and the hands-free telephone integrated control (if present on the vehicle) to check that the system is operating correctly.ITS Program no. ITS_V04_DF001/ITS_V04_DF002/ITS_V04_DF003/ITS_V04_DF004/ITS_V04_DF005/ ITS_V04_DF006/ITS_V04_DF007/ITS_V04_DF008/ITS_V04_DF009/ITS_V04_DF010 ITSJ84ph2V1. reconfigure the computer (see Configurations and programming). STORED FAULT Clear the fault. – Turn on the navigation system. – Refit the fuse and switch the ignition back on.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . repair the wiring. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.DEF: Internal electronic fault NOTES Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. contact Techline. including the CD multi-changer. Check that the earth on the MX connection of the 40-track connector of component 662 is perfect.0 Edition 1 86C-15 . If the fault does not reappear: operate the navigation system. AFTER REPAIR If the computer was replaced (at the request of the Techline). Repairing electrical wiring. FAULT PRESENT If the fault is present. If the fault reappears as stored. switch off the ignition and disconnect the 20A computer supply fuse. Wiring: precautions for repair ). contact the Techline. Scenic II. replace the wiring.: 0020 Vdiag No.Interpretation of faults 86C DF001 DF002 DF003 DF004 DF005 DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 DF010 PRESENT OR STORED COMPUTER 1. Check the conformity of the + 12 V on the BCP3 connection of the navigation computer 40-track connector (component code 662 ). Deal with any other faults. otherwise. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. switch off the ignition for 5 seconds then switch it back on again.ITS Program no.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . contact the Techline. ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No. Check that the configurations have been correctly registered by reading configurations LC001 Vehicle Type and LC002 Country type . After configuration.0 ITS_V04_DF021P 86C-16 Edition 1 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.Interpretation of faults 86C COMPUTER CONFIGURATION DF021 PRESENT 1.DEF: Blank or incomplete configuration NOTES None Configure the system (see Configuration and programming). Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. repair the wiring. Scenic II. the ignition switched off and back on again and the receiver started with several actions.ITS Program no. repair the connectors. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of faults 86C DF022 PRESENT OR STORED NO RADIO MULTIPLEX SIGNAL Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 107W.: 0020 Vdiag No.0 ITS_V04_DF022 86C-17 Edition 1 . If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). otherwise.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and the connection of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261 ). oxidised. Check the insulation. Repairing electrical wiring. repair the wiring. With ignition on. between components 1657 and 261 . ITSJ84ph2V1. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 of the 8-track connector on component 261. check the multimedia multiplex network (see 88B. replace the wiring. of the navigation central control connector (component code 1657) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken. Multiplexing ). Repairing electrical wiring. ● connection code 34HU. replace the wiring. otherwise. Check that the earth on the MT connection of the 8-track connector on component 261 is perfect. Repairing electrical wiring. bent tabs). NOTES Order of priority in the event of more than one fault: If faults DF022 No radio multiplex signal and DF027 No audio CD changer signals are present at the same time. replace the wiring. ● connection code 107X. otherwise. ● connection code 34GA. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. between components 1657 and 662 .0 86C-18 Edition 1 . ITSJ84ph2V1. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34DZ. repair the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). replace the wiring.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Repairing electrical wiring. contact the Techline.ITS Program no. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory.Interpretation of faults 86C DF022 CONTINUED Check the insulation. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Repairing electrical wiring. Check that the earth on the MAN connection of component 1127 is perfect.DEF: No communication with display 2. 1.: 0020 Vdiag No. replace the wiring. If the fault is still present.DEF: Display malfunction NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after it has been cleared. Repairing electrical wiring. Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). the ignition turned off and on again and the navigation system started. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note.Interpretation of faults 86C DF023 PRESENT OR STORED NO DISPLAY MULTIPLEX SIGNAL 1. ITSJ84ph2V1. otherwise. otherwise. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662 ) (broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair).ITS Program no. repair the wiring. replace the wiring. Scenic II. check for + 12 V on the BCP3 connection of the component 1127 connector. bent tabs). oxidised. repair the connectors. replace component 1127. With ignition on.0 ITS_V04_DF023 86C-19 Edition 1 . between components 662 and 1127. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise. Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). otherwise.Interpretation of faults 86C DF023 CONTINUED 2. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code TB30. repair the connectors. ● connection code 34HA.0 86C-20 Edition 1 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . repair the wiring.ITS Program no. Check the insulation. replace the wiring. ● connection code TB31. Wiring: Precautions for repair). ITSJ84ph2V1. replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Repairing electrical wiring. bent tabs). oxidised.: 0020 Vdiag No. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present.DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662 ) (broken. ● connection code 34HU. Repairing electrical wiring. Deal with any other faults. ● connection code 34GZ. ITS Program no.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . otherwise.: 0020 Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. ● connection code 34GA. ● connection code 34HU. DF025 No central control multiplex signal and DF027 No audio CD changer signals are present at the same time. Scenic II. NOTES If faults DF022 No radio multiplex signal. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. repair the wiring.Interpretation of faults 86C DF025 PRESENT OR STORED NO CENTRAL CONTROL MULTIPLEX SIGNAL 1. Repairing electrical wiring. the ignition switched off and back on again and the navigation system started after using the central control several times. Multiplexing). replace the wiring. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise. Check the insulation. repair the connectors. Check the condition and connection of the navigation central control connector (component code 1657) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken.DEF: No communication with the central control Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise. check the multimedia network (see 88B. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Check that the earth on the MX connection on the component 1657 connector is perfect. Repairing electrical wiring. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34DZ. Repairing electrical wiring. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. ITSJ84ph2V1. oxidised. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. With ignition on. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. Wiring: Precautions for repair). contact the Techline. Deal with any other faults. between components 1657 and 662 . replace the wiring. bent tabs). Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). replace the wiring. check for + 12 V on the BCP3 connection of component 1657.0 ITS_V04_DF025 86C-21 Edition 1 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the wiring. : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . ITSJ84ph2V1. ● connection code 34HR. Repairing electrical wiring. oxidised. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. between components 1272 and 261 . the ignition switched off and back on again and the audio system started after using the CD multi-changer several times. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 0020 Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the CD changer (component code 1272) and of the receiver C2 (green) connector (component code 261) (broken. Repairing electrical wiring. Check that the earth on the MAN connection on the component 1272 connector is perfect.DEF: No communication with the CD changer keypad Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared.Interpretation of faults 86C DF027 PRESENT OR STORED NO AUDIO CD CHANGER SIGNALS 1. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connectors. bent tabs). replace the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. Scenic II. replace the wiring. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.5A fuse (component code 1337). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise. contact the Techline. AP43 and BCP3 of the component 1272 connector. repair the wiring. replace the wiring. ● connection code TB29. check for + 12 V on connections SP2.ITS Program no. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. With ignition on.0 ITS_V04_DF027 86C-22 Edition 1 . repair the wiring. Check the condition of the 15A fuse (component code 260) and the 7. otherwise. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34HT. otherwise. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. NOTES Order of priority in the event of more than one fault: Deal with fault DF022 No radio multiplex signal first. ● connection code 34HS. Check the insulation. ITS Program no. the ignition switched off and back on again and the navigation system started with a navigation DVD in good condition. Wipe the DVD from the centre out with a soft. contact the Techline.0 ITS_V04_DF029 86C-23 Edition 1 . If the fault is still present after the DVD has been changed.DEF: Disc cannot be read NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. clean cloth. Check that the DVD in the navigation computer is not an audio CD or other type but a navigation DVD designed for this navigation system. Check that the DVD is inserted the right way up. Replace the navigation DVD if it is scratched.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.Interpretation of faults 86C DF029 PRESENT OR STORED READING NAVIGATION DVD 1. ITSJ84ph2V1. Deal with any other faults. Check the condition and connection of the GPS aerial 2-track connectors (component code 886 ) and of the navigation computer (component code 662 ) (broken.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . bent tabs). replace the GPS aerial. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connections are correct. oxidised. ● connection code TB15. Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in status (present → stored). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. ITSJ84ph2V1.0 ITS_V04_DF030 86C-24 Edition 1 .ITS Program no. contact the Techline. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 46CB. between components 662 and 886. replace the wiring. repair the connectors. Repairing electrical wiring. Scenic II. Deal with any other faults. repair the wiring.: 0020 Vdiag No.Interpretation of faults 86C DF030 PRESENT OR STORED GPS AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after it has been cleared and the ignition has been switched off and on again. otherwise. Check the insulation. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present. replace the wiring. otherwise. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Repairing electrical wiring. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .Conformity check 86C NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks).0 86C-25 Edition 1 . 4. + after ignition feed switched on. Application conditions: Engine stopped. MAIN SCREEN Order Function Parameter or Status Check or Action Display and Notes Fault finding In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of parameter PR002 Vehicle speed. None 1 Night-time lighting ET003: + 12 V side lights feed ON OFF 2 Vehicle speed PR002: Vehicle speed 0 mph Carry out a road test to obtain a variation. consult the interpretation of status ET003 + 12 V side lights feed . consult the interpretation of status ET024 Reverse gear engaged. 5 or 6 ITS_V04_CCONF ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No.ITS Program no. In the event of a fault. 2. 1. 3 Reverse gear ET024: Reverse gear engaged Number of CDs in the multichanger YES NO 4 CD multichanger PR005: 0. In the event of a fault. 3. : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Sub-function: DRIVER SELECTION Order Function Parameter or Status Check or Action ET006: ET007: + button . In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of statuses ET006 + button. consult the interpretation of status ET018 Wheel activation. ensure that you have the PIN code. consult the interpretation of status ET017 Communication button. 2 Communication connection button Steering column control ET017: In the event of a fault.button.Conformity check 86C NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). ITSJ84ph2V1. ET009 high button and ET034 MODE button. + after ignition feed switched on. Application conditions: Engine stopped.ITS Program no. ET007 .: 0020 Vdiag No.0 86C-26 Edition 1 . 3 ET018: Wheel action Note: If you need to work on the telephone. ET010 low button.button Lower button Upper button MODE button Communication connection button Display and Notes DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED INACTIVE UPWARDS DOWNWARDS Fault finding 1 Steering column switch ET010: ET009: ET034: In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed switched on.ITS Program no.0 86C-27 Edition 1 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . rear left-hand and rear right-hand speakers to be activated successively. Application conditions: Engine stopped.Conformity check 86C NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks).: 0020 Vdiag No. Fault finding 1 Speakers test AC004: Speaker test In the event of a fault. Sub-function: SOUND TESTS Order Function Parameter or Status Check or Action Display and Notes This command enables the front lefthand. ITSJ84ph2V1. front righthand. apply the interpretation of command AC004 Speakers test. Sub-function: TESTS Order Function Parameter or Status Check or Action Display and Notes This command is used to test the colour connections between the navigation computer and the display. speak into the microphone to check that it is working. This command is used to test the screen to see if a pixel from the display is out of order. This command is used to test the video connections between the navigation computer and the display.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Fault finding AC006: Screen test: colour bars In the event of a fault. 1 Screen AC007: Screen test: shades of grey In the event of a fault.0 86C-28 Edition 1 . apply the interpretation of command AC009 Microphone test.ITS Program no. apply the interpretation of command AC007 Screen test: gradation of grey. AC008: Screen test: white screen Replace the display if several pixels are out of order. 2 Microphone AC009: Microphone test In the event of a fault.Conformity check 86C NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: Engine stopped. This command is for testing microphone operation. Note: If it is quiet. ITSJ84ph2V1. + after ignition feed switched on. apply the interpretation of command AC006 Screen test: colour bars. button Upper button Lower button Diagnostic tool title Communication connection button Wheel action Reverse gear engaged MODE button ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .Status summary table 86C Tool status ET003 ET006 ET007 ET009 ET010 ET017 ET018 ET024 ET034 + 12 V side lights feed + button .ITS Program no.0 86C-29 Edition 1 . replace the wiring. 1272 and 1657. ITS_V04_ET003 ITSJ84ph2V1. replace the wiring.5 A fuse in the engine compartment connection unit (component code 1337). Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . otherwise.ITS Program no. repair the wiring. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the LPG connection between components 1337. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of statuses 86C + 12 V SIDE LIGHTS FEED ET003 NOTES Visually check that the side lights are working. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the insulation. otherwise. repair the connectors. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Scenic II. Carry out fault finding on the steering column switches and the side lights. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. bent tabs). Repairing electrical wiring. Check the condition and connection of the navigation central control connectors (component code 1657) and of the CD changer (component code 1272) (broken. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.0 86C-30 Edition 1 .: 0020 Vdiag No. Check the condition of the 7. contact the Techline. Repairing electrical wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). bent tabs). repair the connectors.Interpretation of statuses 86C ET006 ET007 ET009 ET010 ET034 + BUTTON . otherwise. otherwise. ● connection code 34AR. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring.: 0020 Vdiag No. ● connection code 34AP.0 Edition 1 86C-31 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Repairing electrical wiring. ● connection code 34AU. Check the condition and connection of the steering column switch 10-track connector (component code 1519) and of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) (broken. Check the insulation. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AQ.ITS Program no. replace the wiring. ● connection code 34AT. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. repair the wiring. ● connection code 34AS. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. between components 261 and 1519. oxidised. ITS_V04_ET006/ITS_V04_ET007/ITS_V04_ET009/ITS_V04_ET010/ITS_V04_ET034 ITSJ84ph2V1. Scenic II. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.BUTTON UPPER BUTTON LOWER BUTTON MODE BUTTON NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. ● connection code 34AO. Mode button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AU and 34AP.: 0020 Vdiag No. Wiper switch: Removal . Control .ITS Program no. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of statuses 86C ET006 ET007 ET009 ET010 ET034 CONTINUED Carry out the following checks on component 1519 using an ohmmeter: ● + button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AT and 34AP. High button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AS and 34AQ.signals. Low button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AU and 34AQ. . ITSJ84ph2V1. If the measurements taken do not correspond to the values above. Low button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AU and 34AQ. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● . replace component 1519 (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A. Mode button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AU and 34AP.0 86C-32 Edition 1 . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AP and 34AS.button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AP and 34AS.Refitting). High button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AS and 34AQ. ● + button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AT and 34AP. contact the Techline. Repairing electrical wiring.0 86C-33 Edition 1 . ITS_V04_ET017 ITSJ84ph2V1. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note.Interpretation of statuses 86C COMMUNICATION CONNECTION BUTTON ET017 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Repairing electrical wiring. repair the connectors. ● Communication button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AT and 34AO. Carry out the following checks on component 1519 using an ohmmeter: ● Communication button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AT and 34AO. otherwise. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Scenic II.signals. Check the insulation. Control . bent tabs). ● connection code 34AO.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . replace component 1519 (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A. replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the steering column switch 10-track connector (component code 1519) and of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) (broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the wiring. If the fault is still present. between components 261 and 1519. otherwise. Wiper switch: Removal . oxidised.: 0020 Vdiag No. If the measurements taken do not correspond to the values above. replace the wiring.Refitting). Wiring: Precautions for repair).ITS Program no. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AT. Check the condition and connection of the steering column switch 10-track connector (component code 1519) and of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) (broken.0 86C-34 Edition 1 . Repairing electrical wiring. – between connections 34AR and 34AU . Scenic II. Check the continuity of component 1519: – between connections 34AR and 34AT . replace component 1519 (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A. otherwise. ● connection code 34AT.: 0020 Vdiag No. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.Refitting). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . ● connection code 34AR. replace the wiring. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. Control . bent tabs). ITS_V04_ET018 ITSJ84ph2V1. replace the wiring. repair the connectors. contact the Techline. Repairing electrical wiring.signals. Control . – between connections 34AR and 34AS. ● connection code 34AS. Wiper switch: Removal . Wiring: Precautions for repair). continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AU. If there is no continuity.signals.Interpretation of statuses 86C TUMBLEWHEEL ACTION ET018 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.ITS Program no. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the insulation. otherwise. repair the wiring. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. Wheel checking procedure (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A. Radio control satellite: Test). oxidised. between components 1519 and 261 . : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . replace the wiring. bent tabs). bent tabs). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the wiring. replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 86C REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET024 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise. Repairing electrical wiring.: 0020 Vdiag No. repair the connector. Repairing electrical wiring. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken. Repairing electrical wiring. If the fault is still present. repair the wiring. If the connector is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit (see 87G. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. Engine compartment connection unit). otherwise.0 86C-35 Edition 1 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the insulation. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit MN and CN connectors (Vdiag 48) (component code 1337) (broken. Scenic II. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. repair the connectors. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.ITS Program no. ITS_V04_ET024 ITSJ84ph2V1. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the H66P connection between components 662 and 1337. oxidised. otherwise. ITS Program no.0 86C-36 Edition 1 .: 0020 Vdiag No.Parameter summary table 86C Tool parameter PR002 PR005 Vehicle speed Diagnostic tool title Number of CDs in the multi-changer ITSJ84ph2V1.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . ITS_V04_PR002 ITSJ84ph2V1.ITS Program no. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the 47F connection between components 662 and 118 or 1094. contact the Techline. NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. otherwise. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. check the insulation. Anti-lock braking system). replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 0020 Vdiag No. Scenic II. If the value for parameter PR002 Vehicle speed is incorrect. Repairing electrical wiring.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . depending on the vehicle's equipment level. carry out fault finding on the ABS system (see 38C. repair the wiring.Interpretation of parameters 86C VEHICLE SPEED PR002 Carry out a road test to obtain a variation of parameter PR002 Vehicle speed.0 86C-37 Edition 1 . If the fault is still present. If no value for parameter PR002 Vehicle speed appears on the tool. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .Command summary table 86C CLEARING RZ001 RZ002 RZ003 Fault memory Computer memory Parameters and customer information SETTINGS VP002 VP004 Enter VIN Netherlands legislation ACTIVATION AC004 AC006 AC007 AC008 AC009 Speaker test Screen test: colour bars Screen test: shades of grey Screen test: white screen Microphone test ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No.ITS Program no.0 86C-38 Edition 1 . ● Read the VIN again from the Identification menu for confirmation.: 0020 Vdiag No. This command is also used to clear telephone numbers stored in the navigation computer and the list of received and dialled calls when the telephone is connected to the vehicle. ● Confirm. Procedure for writing the VIN ● Establish dialogue with the navigation computer. IMPORTANT This command must be activated before removing the computer. ● Enter the VIN. address books and navigation settings stored by the customer in the navigation computer. ● Select the Repair mode menu. ● Select the line of your choice. RZ002 Computer memory: This command enables the configuration CF001 Vehicle Type for the navigation computer to be removed. The VIN number is inscribed on the manufacturer's plate. IMPORTANT The NETHERLANDS configuration is IRREVERSIBLE this selection cannot be cleared. ● Switch off the ignition. ● Select the Repair mode menu. RZ003 Customer parameters and data This command is used to clear CF001 Vehicle type command configurations.Interpretation of commands 86C RZ001 Fault memory: This command is used to clear faults stored in the navigation computer. Use this command each time the computer is replaced.ITS Program no. ● Select the Clear menu. VP002 Write VIN: This command permits manual entry of the vehicle's VIN into the computer.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . ITSJ84ph2V1.0 86C-39 Edition 1 . Clearing procedure ● Establish dialogue with the navigation computer. ● Select line VP002 Write VIN. ● Select the other parameters menu. ● Exit fault finding mode. ● Wait for the end of the power-latch. one by one. select Balance) then the output setting on the front and rear speakers (press the SET button and then select Fad). ITSJ84ph2V1. Repairing electrical wiring. between components 261. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. between components 261 and 190. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. 192) (broken. NOTES Special note: Check the output setting on the right-hand and left-hand speakers (press the SET button. 366 and 192 . 190.: 0020 Vdiag No. otherwise. 191. Wiring: Precautions for repair). front right-hand bass. otherwise. connection code 34H. between components 261 and 189.Interpretation of commands 86C SPEAKER TEST AC004 This command activates. bent tabs). continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34E. between components 261.0 86C-40 Edition 1 . connection code 34C. connection code 34D. front right-hand tweeters. 189. ● ● connection code 34A. rear left-hand bass and front right-hand bass speakers. If the checks reveal no faults. 366. contact the Techline. repair the connectors.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .ITS Program no. Check the condition and connection of the receiver connector B (component code 261) and of the faulty speaker connector (component code 365. ● ● connection code 34G. ● ● If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. rear right-hand bass. Wiring: Precautions for repair). replace the wiring. Check the insulation. Scenic II. replace the wiring. the front left-hand tweeters. but one or more of the speakers does not work. 365 and 191 . oxidised. ● connection code 34F. If the fault is still present. repair the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. replace the faulty speaker(s). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. connection code 34B. replace the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. repair the wiring. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the wiring. replace component 1127 . Repairing electrical wiring. repair the connectors. Repairing electrical wiring. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. Scenic II. but the colours displayed by component 1127 are incorrect. Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 of the component 1127 connector. repair the wiring. ● connection code 34DD. replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). ITSJ84ph2V1. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. ● connection code 34DC. ● connection code 34DB. bent tabs).Interpretation of commands 86C SCREEN TEST: COLOUR BARS AC006 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair).ITS Program no. Apply this procedure if one or more colour bars is missing on the display when this command is run. Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662 ) (broken.: 0020 Vdiag No. otherwise. Check that the earth on connection 34GU of the component 1127 connector is perfect. ● connection code 34GU. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code TB31. oxidised. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation. If the checks reveal no faults. otherwise. between components 1127 and 662 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .0 86C-41 Edition 1 . otherwise. : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Repairing electrical wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662 ) (broken.0 86C-42 Edition 1 .Interpretation of commands 86C SCREEN TEST: GRADATION OF GREY AC007 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 of the component 1127 connector.: 0020 Vdiag No. otherwise. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the wiring. replace the wiring. replace component 1127 .ITS Program no. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code TB30. otherwise. ITSJ84ph2V1. Scenic II. Apply this procedure if the shade of grey shown on the display when the command is activated is incorrect. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. ● connection code 34GZ. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise. ● connection code 34HA. between components 1127 and 662 . Check that the earth on connection 34GU of the component 1127 connector is perfect. repair the wiring. Check that the earth on the MAN connection of component 1127 is perfect. If the checks reveal no faults. replace the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. but the gradation of grey displayed by the display is not correct. replace the wiring. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connectors. Repairing electrical wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the insulation. otherwise. bent tabs). repair the wiring. ITS Program no. replace the wiring. ● connection code 107G. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the wiring. ITSJ84ph2V1. Apply this procedure if the Faulty connection message appears when these commands are activated. repair the connectors. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.0 86C-43 Edition 1 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). bent tabs). between components 789 and 662. Scenic II. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 107J.: 0020 Vdiag No. replace component 789. Check the condition and connection of the microphone connector (component code 789) and of the navigation computer 40-track connector (component code 662 ) (broken. otherwise. Repairing electrical wiring. replace the wiring.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . If the checks reveal no faults but the microphone does not work. Check the insulation. otherwise. oxidised. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of commands 86C MICROPHONE TEST AC009 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. ● connection code 107F. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Repairing electrical wiring. Customer complaints 86C NOTES Only refer to these customer complaints after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.0 86C-44 Edition 1 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .: 0020 Vdiag No.ITS Program no. NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER ALP 1 THE SCREEN STAYS BLACK ALP 2 NO VOICE MESSAGES ALP 3 NO TRAFFIC INFORMATION MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE SCREEN ALP 4 POOR SATELLITE RECEPTION ALP 5 THE RADIO DOES NOT SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY OR GOES OFF AFTER 20 MINUTES ALP 6 NO TIME DISPLAY OR TIME DISPLAY INCORRECT ALP 7 THE VOLUME DOES NOT CHANGE WITH A CHANGE IN VEHICLE SPEED ALP 8 POOR RADIO RECEPTION ALP 9 THE CD CHANGER DOES NOT WORK ALP 10 IMPOSSIBLE TO ALTER GPS GUIDANCE WHEN DRIVING ALP 11 ITSJ84ph2V1. ITS Program no. THE SYSTEM NO LONGER WORKS ALP 12 IMPOSSIBLE TO USE TELEPHONE WITH BLUETOOTH ALP 13 NOT POSSIBLE TO MAKE A CALL FROM THE NUMBERS STORED IN THE LIST OF RECEIVED CALLS ALP 14 THE CALL IS NOT TRANSFERRED TO THE NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IF A NUMBER IS DIALLED ON THE TELEPHONE ALP 15 COMMUNICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO INTERFERENCE IN BLUETOOTH ALP 16 THE PERSON CALLING USING THE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CANNOT HEAR ME VERY WELL OR CANNOT HEAR ME AT ALL (WITH BLUETOOTH) ALP 17 VOICE RECOGNITION IS NOT WORKING ALP 18 THE DISPLAY ON THE SCREEN STAYS FROZEN ALP 19 THE SCREEN DISPLAYS CONNECT A DIAGNOSTIC TOOL ALP 20 ITSJ84ph2V1.0 86C-45 Edition 1 .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . AFTER UPDATING THE NAVIGATION DVD.Customer complaints 86C NOTES Only refer to these customer complaints after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.: 0020 Vdiag No. repair the wiring. – the connection between the diagnostic lead and the diagnostic socket (lead in good condition). repair the wiring.ITS Program no. Repairing electrical wiring. Check for + 12 V battery feed on connection BP32. ● connection code 34DZ. between components 1657 and 225 .0 86C-46 Edition 1 . Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. repair the wiring. otherwise.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . between components 662 and 260. Check for + 12 V battery feed on connection BCP3 and an earth on connection MX of component 662 . Scenic II.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES Switch on the + after ignition feed to enter fault finding mode with the computer. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for + 12 V on the 34HU connection of the navigation computer (component code 662). Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Repairing electrical wiring. Check: – the connection between the diagnostic tool and the diagnostic probe (lead in good condition). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. continuity and absence of interference resistance of the following connections: ● connection code 34GA. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Repairing electrical wiring. Check the battery voltage. ● connection code 107X. otherwise. ● connection code BCP3. for + 12 V after ignition feed on connection AP43 and for an earth on the NAM connection and on the MAM connection of the diagnostic socket (component code 225 ). between components 662 and 1657. Disconnect the 32-track connector of component 662 and the connector of component 1657 to check the insulation. Check the condition of the fuses. Wiring: Precautions for repair). between component 662 and earth MX. otherwise. ● connection code MX. replace the wiring. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.: 0020 Vdiag No. replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. ● connection code 107W. ITS_V04_ALP1 ITSJ84ph2V1. Repairing electrical wiring. switch on the ignition. To check the supply to the display. repair the wiring. Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 and an earth on connection MX of the navigation computer (component code 662 ). AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. No If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. 34DC et 34DD between components 662 and 1127 . Are these checks correct? No Check the insulation.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 2 The screen stays black NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . replace the wiring. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. switch on the navigation system and eject the navigation DVD. Has the DVD been removed? Yes Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 and an earth on connection MAN of the display (component code 1127).: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . – If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the wiring. Contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connections 34DB.: 0020 Vdiag No. Check the insulation. Scenic II. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Yes – If the connection is correct. Check that the display has not been deactivated. otherwise. Repairing electrical wiring. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection 34HU between components 1127 and 1272 . Press the LIGHT button on the central control for 2 seconds to reactivate the display. otherwise. replace the display.0 86C-47 Edition 1 . Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly.ITS Program no. ITS_V04_ALP2 ITSJ84ph2V1. Are these tests correct? Yes No Check the condition of the supply fuse (20A ) (component code 260). repair the wiring. Has the fault been solved? Yes No End of fault finding. Press the SET button and select the Volume and beeps. balance or fader menus.ITS Program no. Has the voice guidance volume been properly adjusted? Yes Has the fault been solved? No Yes End of fault finding.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 3 No voice messages NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . No Adjust the voice guidance volume. and Guidance volume menus. Guidance preference. Scenic II. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. select the audio. Check that voice guidance is activated. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 0020 Vdiag No. Voice guidance menus. ITS_V04_ALP3 ITSJ84ph2V1. No Activate voice guidance. Check that the sound from the radio is coming through the front and rear speakers.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Press the SET button. adjust the sound for all vehicle speakers.0 86C-48 Edition 1 . Press the SET button and select the Navigation. Has voice guidance been activated? Yes Ensure that the voice guidance volume has been properly adjusted. Otherwise. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. continuity and absence of interference resistance on connections TB27. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .0 86C-49 Edition 1 . Yes AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.ITS Program no. bent tabs). Has the fault been solved? No Contact the Techline. 34HD and 34HG between components 662 and 261. Repairing electrical wiring. repair the wiring.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 3 CONTINUED Check the condition and the connection of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261 ). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. oxidised. repair the connectors. otherwise. of the navigation central control connector (component code 1657) and of the navigation computer 40-track connector (component code 662) (broken. Check the insulation. otherwise. Wiring: Precautions for repair). replace the wiring. End of fault finding. replace the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. Card display menus. Traffic information service menus. but there is no traffic information to be transmitted. No Activate the traffic information display. Type of information to be displayed.ITS Program no.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 4 No traffic information messages appear on the screen NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . Traffic information adjustment. Traffic information adjustment. Has the display been activated? Yes Check that the traffic information settings are correct. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .: 0020 Vdiag No. What colour is the TMC pictogram? Green The system is operating correctly. Check that the traffic information display has been activated. The TMC pictogram should be green in order for the traffic information to be received. Traffic information (TMC) is transmitted via the radio's FM band. Make any necessary adjustments. ITS_V04_ALP4 ITSJ84ph2V1. Press the INFO button and select the TMC traffic information.0 86C-50 Edition 1 . Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Grey No traffic information is being received. Press the INFO button and select the TMC traffic information. contact the Techline. replace the GPS aerial. under bridges and in stormy weather. Yellow or Grey Positioning is imprecise (yellow) or impossible (grey) in the following areas: forests. otherwise. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. ITS_V04_ALP5 ITSJ84ph2V1. Scenic II.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 5 Poor satellite reception NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. If the satellite reception is poor. repair the wiring. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connections 46CB and TB15 between components 662 and 886 . valleys. Repairing electrical wiring. Ensure there are no present or stored faults.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Carry out a system test in an open area.ITS Program no. No Are the tests correct? Yes If the fault is still present.: 0020 Vdiag No. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. tunnels. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.0 86C-51 Edition 1 . Check the condition and cleanliness of the GPS aerial. Check the insulation. replace the wiring. What colour is the GPS pictogram? Green The system operates normally. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Repairing electrical wiring. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection 34HU between components 1272. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. 1127 and 662.0 86C-52 Edition 1 .Fault finding charts 86C ALP 6 The radio does not switch on automatically or goes off after 20 minutes NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection BCP3 between components 261 and 260. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. repair the wiring. Wiring:Precautionsfor repair). otherwise. The navigation system does not receive the multimedia wake-up signal when the + after ignition feed is switched on. Scenic II. ITS_V04_ALP6 ITSJ84ph2V1. 261. Has the fault been solved? No Yes End of fault finding. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the wiring. Check the condition of the CD changer fuses (component code 1272). Repairing electricalwiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 0020 Vdiag No. Is it present? No Check the insulation. Has the fault been solved? Yes No AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Has the fault been solved? No On pressing the CD changer on/off button. 1657. replace the wiring.ITS Program no. Check for + 12 V (+ battery feed) on connection BCP3 of the component 261 black connector. otherwise. check for the multimedia wake-up signal on connection 34HU on the radio's blue connector (component code 261).: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. Yes Yes End of fault finding. replace the wiring. Is it present? No Yes Check the insulation. : 0020 Vdiag No. Check the continuity. Are the tests correct? No Yes If the fault is still present. replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. check for + battery feed on connection BCP3. ITSJ84ph2V1. insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code SP2.ITS Program no. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. between components 1272 and 260 . Also check that the earth on connection MAN is perfect. Wiring: Precautions for repair). ● connection code MAN.0 86C-53 Edition 1 . between components 1272 and 1337 . Repairing electrical wiring.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 6 CONTINUED Disconnect the connector from component 1127 . between component 1272 and the earth MAN. ● connection code BCP3. for + accessories feed on connection SP2 and for + after ignition feed on connection AP43 of the component 1127 connector. contact the Techline. ● connection code AP43. otherwise. repair the wiring.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . select the clock. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 0020 Vdiag No.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 7 Clock not displayed or incorrect NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . summer time. Explain to the customer how to make these adjustments.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . clock display. Check that the time display is activated and the time zones and settings are correct. contact the Techline. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly.ITS Program no. Are these adjustments correct? Yes Place the vehicle outside in an open area and check that the satellite reception is correct. No No Set the display and time.0 86C-54 Edition 1 . ITS_V04_ALP7 ITSJ84ph2V1. Press the SET button. See fault finding chart: ALP 5 Poor satellite reception. If the time is still wrong. time adjustment. Is the GPS pictogram green? Yes Wait a few minutes in a location with good satellite reception. time zone. Press the SET button and select the volume correction menu. repair the wiring. Anti-lock braking system).: 0020 Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair). ITS_V04_ALP8 ITSJ84ph2V1. Does the volume vary? Yes Carry out fault finding on the ABS/ESP (see 38C. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.ITS Program no. otherwise. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the connection 47F between components 261 and 662 . Scenic II. Check the condition and connection of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662 ). Repairing electrical wiring. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . No Yes End of fault finding. Wiring: Precautions for repair). replace the wiring. otherwise.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 8 The volume does not change with a change in vehicle speed NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . repair the connectors. replace the wiring. Carry out a road test and check that the volume varies as the vehicle speed varies. Repairing electrical wiring. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Check that volume according to speed function has been activated.0 86C-55 Edition 1 . Check the insulation. Is the volume according to speed function active? No Activate this function. ITSJ84ph2V1. replace the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 8 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the ABS computer connector (component code 118 or 1094).: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . check the insulation. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Wiring: Precautions for repair). continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection 47F between components 261 and 118 or 1094 according to the vehicle's equipment level. repair the connectors.: 0020 Vdiag No. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Repairing electrical wiring. otherwise.ITS Program no. Wiring: Precautions for repair). contact the Techline. replace the wiring. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. If no fault is found with the ABS system.0 86C-56 Edition 1 . otherwise. If the fault is still present. repair the wiring. Repairing electrical wiring. repair the wiring. ITS_V04_ALP9 ITSJ84ph2V1. otherwise. repair the connectors. replace the wiring. otherwise. If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A.ITS Program no.0 86C-57 Edition 1 . replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. ● connection code TB13.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 9 Poor radio reception NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AM. ● connection code 34AN. Check the insulation. Check the condition and connection of the 32-track connector and the aerial connector on the radio (component code 886). contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . between components 261 and 886. Scenic II. Repairing electrical wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 0020 Vdiag No. Are the tests correct? No Yes Yes End of fault finding. No Replace the fuses.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 10 The CD changer does not work NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . ITS_V04_ALP10 ITSJ84ph2V1.ITS Program no.5 A (+ after ignition feed) on component 1337. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Also check that the earth on connection MAN is perfect. Are the fuses in good condition? Yes Check the condition and connection of the CD multi-changer connector (component code 1272).: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Check that the customer is using the system properly. Repairing electrical wiring. If the connector is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition of the 15 A fuses (+ accessories feed) on component 260 and 7. Scenic II.: 0020 Vdiag No. replace the wiring. for + accessories feed on connection SP2 and for + after ignition feed on connection AP43 of the component 1272 connector.0 86C-58 Edition 1 . Has the fault been solved? No Disconnect the connector from component 1272. otherwise. repair the connector. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note. check for + battery feed on connection BCP3. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present. repair the wiring. otherwise. ● connection code 34HM.0 86C-59 Edition 1 . insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code SP2.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 0020 Vdiag No. ITSJ84ph2V1. contact the Techline. replace the wiring. insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34HN. Check that the system is operating correctly. ● connection code 34HP. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. ● connection code MAN. between component 1272 and the earth MAN. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Repairing electrical wiring. Has the fault been solved? Yes End of fault finding. ● connection code AP43. between components 1272 and 1337 . ● connection code 34HQ. between components 1272 and 261 .Fault finding charts 86C ALP 10 CONTINUED Check the continuity. No Check the continuity. repair the wiring. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A. between components 1272 and 260 . ● connection code BCP3. replace the wiring. otherwise. Repairing electrical wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair).ITS Program no. it is normal not to be able to adjust the guidance when driving.0 86C-60 Edition 1 .ITS Program no.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 11 Impossible to alter GPS guidance when driving NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . This configuration is IRREVERSIBLE and it is not possible to clear this choice.: 0020 Vdiag No. If the configuration LC002 Country type is NETHERLANDS .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. ITS_V04_ALP11 ITSJ84ph2V1. suggest that the customer buys a navigation DVD in a version compatible with the vehicle's navigation system. Check that the navigation computer software version is compatible with the navigation DVD update. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . ITS_V04_ALP12 ITSJ84ph2V1.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 12 After updating the navigation DVD.ITS Program no. the system no longer works NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool .: 0020 Vdiag No. If the navigation DVD is not compatible with the navigation computer software.0 86C-61 Edition 1 . Has the telephone been looked at by Renault? Yes Check that the telephone software on the telephone is compatible with the vehicle's navigation and communication system. For information on the latest list of telephones approved by Renault and the various operations to perform on these telephones.ITS Program no. Command to find out the telephone's software (see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones used with the navigation and communication system): – Nokia: *#0000# – Motorola: select configuration. Check that fault DF009 Computer is not present or stored. Nokia 6230.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 13 Impossible to use the telephone with Bluetooth NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones for the navigation and communication system. The telephone software compatible with the vehicle's navigation and communication system is greater than or equal to: Nokia 6230 and 6820: v 03.15 Motorola V500 and V600: Triplets_G_0B. ITS_V04_ALP13 ITSJ84ph2V1.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Siemens S65. Check that Bluetooth mode is activated in the navigation and communication system.0 86C-62 Edition 1 . Press the SET button and select the telephone. Bluetooth option.44R Siemens S65: v 12 Is the telephone software compatible with the vehicle's navigation and communication system? Yes No Suggest that the customer buy a telephone approved by Renault. Note: List of telephones researched and approved by Renault in March 2005: Nokia 6820. Check that the customer is using the system properly. telephone status then version information – Siemens: *#06# No Ask the customer to contact the telephone vendor in order to install a software version into the telephone that would be compatible with the navigation and communication system.09.: 0020 Vdiag No. Bluetooth connection menus. Motorola V600. Motorola V500. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. : 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .Fault finding charts 86C ALP 13 CONTINUED 1 Procedure for activating the telephone's Bluetooth mode: – Nokia: Select Parameters. Activate Bluetooth mode for the telephone (see Technical Note 6024A "Special features of mobile phones used with the navigation and communication system"). – Enter the PIN code given on the vehicle's navigation display. Bluetooth.0 86C-63 Edition 1 . – Siemens: Select Adjustments. Connectivity. Bluetooth. ITSJ84ph2V1. Match up the navigation and communication system and the telephone. Check that the telephone does not need to be confirmed before it is connected to the Bluetooth system. – Motorola: Select Configuration. – Select the Bluetooth option line. then activate Bluetooth mode. Supply.: 0020 Vdiag No. Was the match successful? Yes No Test the Bluetooth terminal on the navigation computer. Procedure for matching the communication system and the telephone: On the navigation and communication system: – Press the SET button. Connection. If this is the case. – Enter the telephone menu. Activate in the main menu. Mode/Data. select My CAR. – In the list of found accessories. Activated in the main menu. – Select the save a Bluetooth telephone line. Configuration. Bluetooth link.ITS Program no. On the telephone: – Enter the menu to find a Bluetooth accessory. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. confirm in order to connect the telephone then inhibit this function in the telephone (not possible on Siemens telephones). No If the fault has not been solved.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. ITSJ84ph2V1.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 13 CONTINUED 2 Check that the telephone is at the top of the matched phones list (icon opposite its name).0 86C-64 Edition 1 . Was the match successful? Yes The customer's telephone is definitely the reason why it does not work with the navigation and communication system. Is the telephone at the top of the list? No Put the telephone at the top of the list of telephones matched to the navigation and communication system. contact Techline.: 0020 Vdiag No.ITS Program no. Try to match another telephone to the vehicle's navigation and communication system. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 14 Not possible to make a call from the numbers stored in the list of received calls NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool .: 0020 Vdiag No. ITS_V04_ALP14 ITSJ84ph2V1.ITS Program no.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .0 86C-65 Edition 1 . This fault occurs with Nokia phones and cannot be repaired. ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.0 86C-66 Edition 1 .Fault finding charts 86C ALP 15 The call is not transferred to the navigation and communication system if a number is dialled on the telephone NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool .: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . This fault occurs with Siemens phones and cannot be repaired. In this case. ITS_V04_ALP15 ITSJ84ph2V1. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. dial the numbers using the navigation central control. Check that the customer is using the system properly. Bluetooth connection menus. Supply. Bluetooth link. Deactivate in the main menu. Connection. Check that the customer is using the system properly. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Configuration. Check that the telephone network signal is strong enough to make a call. No The fault is linked to the customer's telephone. Make a call to a fixed line. Mode/Data.ITS Program no.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . then deactivate Bluetooth mode.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 16 Communication is subject to interference with Bluetooth NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . For information on the latest list of telephones approved by Renault and the various operations to perform on these telephones. Bluetooth. ITS_V04_ALP16 ITSJ84ph2V1. Make a call to a fixed line. Connectivity. Press the SET button and select the telephone. If the telephone is not listed opposite (see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones used with the navigation and communication system ). Ask the customer to carry out a fault finding procedure on the telephone with the vendor. Deactivated in the main menu. – Siemens: Select Adjustments. Bluetooth. Deactivate Bluetooth mode in the navigation and communication system. see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones for the navigation and communication system .0 86C-67 Edition 1 . – Motorola: Select Configuration. Yes Deactivate Bluetooth mode on the telephone. Is the interference still present? Yes Procedure for activating the telephone's Bluetooth mode: – Nokia: Select Parameters. Bluetooth option.: 0020 Vdiag No. Is the interference still present? No The fault is linked to the number the customer is calling or to a localised lack of network availability. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.ITS Program no.0 86C-68 Edition 1 . Is the interference still present? Yes If the fault is still present.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . – Select the save a Bluetooth telephone line. – Enter the telephone menu. end of fault finding. check the condition and connection of the connectors on the navigation computer and the radio. No No End of fault finding.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 16 CONTINUED Place the telephone close to the navigation computer. ITSJ84ph2V1.: 0020 Vdiag No. – In the list of found accessories. select My CAR. contact the Techline. – Enter the PIN code given on the vehicle's navigation display Fault solved. On the telephone: – Enter the menu to find a Bluetooth accessory. – Select the Bluetooth option line. Procedure for matching the communication system and the telephone: On the navigation and communication system: – Press the SET button. Is the interference still present? Yes Match up another telephone and make a call. – Select the save a Bluetooth telephone line. Ask the customer to carry out a fault finding procedure on the telephone. ITS_V04_ALP17 ITSJ84ph2V1. Check that the customer is using the system properly. No The fault is linked to the number the customer is calling or to a localised lack of network availability. On the telephone: – Enter the menu to find a Bluetooth accessory. is voice recognition of the words Directory and Dial working? Yes Check the condition and connection of the connectors of the telephone support base plate. the navigation computer and the radio.ITS Program no. Is the fault still present? Yes If the fault is still present. see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones for the navigation and communication system . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. – In the list of found accessories.: 0020 Vdiag No. No Check the condition and connection of the microphone connector.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . – Select the Bluetooth option line. For information on the latest list of telephones approved by Renault and the various operations to perform on these telephones.0 86C-69 Edition 1 . replace the microphone. – Enter the telephone menu. Make a call to a fixed line.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 17 The person calling using the communication system cannot hear me very well or cannot hear me at all (with Bluetooth) NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . – Enter the PIN code given on the vehicle's navigation display The fault is probably caused by the telephone. If not. Is the fault still present? Yes With the engine stopped. Check that the microphone part number is correct. No Procedure for matching the communication system and the telephone: On the navigation and communication system: – Press the SET button. contact the Techline. select My CAR. Match up another telephone and make a call. Check that the telephone network signal is strong enough to make a call. ITS_V04_ALP18 ITSJ84ph2V1. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Scenic II.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Check that the microphone part number is correct.Fault finding charts 86C ALP 18 Voice recognition is not working NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool .0 86C-70 Edition 1 . Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note.ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No. then at 30 mph (50 km/h) does voice recognition of the words Directory and Dial work? No Check the condition and connection of the microphone connector (component code 789). If not. If the fault is still present. Check that the customer is using the system properly. contact the Techline. replace the microphone. With the engine stopped. Yes The customer needs to use voice recognition intensively for 2 weeks so that the voice recognition system can learn to recognise his voice. Switch on the ignition again.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding . Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly.0 86C-71 Edition 1 . ITS_V04_ALP19 ITSJ84ph2V1. If the fault recurs.: 0020 Vdiag No. No Contact the Techline.ITS Program no. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and wait until the system shuts down completely ( at least 1 minute).Fault finding charts 86C ALP 19 The display on the screen stays fixed NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . The display on the screen stays frozen. Has the fault been solved? Yes End of fault finding. contact Techline. ITS_V04_ALP20 ITSJ84ph2V1. No Contact the Techline.: 0020 Vdiag No. The navigation computer configuration has not been carried out. Configure the computer (see Configuration and programming ). Has the fault been solved? Yes End of fault finding.0 86C-72 Edition 1 .Fault finding charts 86C ALP 20 The screen displays Connect a diagnostic tool NOTES Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 04 MULTIMEDIA Fault finding .ITS Program no. paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. paper. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document describes the diagnostics applicable to all UCH's with the following characteristics: Vehicle(s): Scénic II Function concerned: UCH Name of computer: UCH Vdiag No. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM).: 44 2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Standard documentation: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool).: 44 UCH 187B Fault finding .Introduction 87B 1. Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP Special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter.Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-1 . Proceed as follows: – RENAULT card on the card holder (keyless vehicle scenario 1. you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. bent pins. – Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault. The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). – .Introduction 87B 3. top of the range.the resistance of the faulty component. or whether they remain present but are not diagnosed within the current context). note the faults displayed and apply the Notes section. This phase therefore: – diagnosis of faults that do not have a fault display. To cut off + after ignition.). – checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. apply the method described in the Interpretation of faults section. – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled. wear). – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds). If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-2 . and which may correspond to a customer complaint.: 44 UCH Fault finding . – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. REMINDERS Procedure: To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers. – the connectors on these lines (corrosion. etc. basic. hands-free). Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. For a present fault. If a state is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values.Vdiag No. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting). Faults: Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since. For a stored fault . – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation. proceed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool. the fault is present. not hands-free and scenario 2. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-3 . A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.: 44 UCH Fault finding . but the customer complaint is still present. the fault should be treated by customer complaints .Introduction 87B Customer complaints .Vdiag No.Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK. Vdiag No.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Introduction 87B 4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses Print the system fault finding log (available in CLIP or in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no See Chart 1 yes Read faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with faults found The symptom persists no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use the fault finding charts no The symptom persists Fault solved The symptom persists no Fault solved yes Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-4 . 8. WARNING: IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS DONE. FAULT FINDING LOG WARNING All problems involving a complex system call for thorough diagnostics with the appropriate tools. – Do not smoke. The FAULT FINDING LOG. – Use the proper tools.Introduction 87B 5. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-5 . the fault should be treated by customer complaints . ● Which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. the computer must be configured. DIAGNOSTIC TOOL TEST OK If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. CHANGING A UCH After a UCH has been replaced. It is therefore used to decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the removed parts. but the customer complaint is still present. ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out.Vdiag No. which should be completed during the fault finding procedure. Refer to the Configuration part of this section. ● For certification requests when replacing parts that must be certified. It is an essential item when discussing the fault with the manufacturer. 7. You will always be asked for this report: ● When requesting technical assistance from the Techline. 6.: 44 UCH Fault finding . : Workshop Repair Manual: Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.page to print or photocopy . card reader.: FD 13 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .FAULT FINDING LOG System: Engine immobliser List of monitored parts: Computer.page to print or photocopy .: Other documentation Title and/or part no. handle and antenna modules ● Page 1 / 2 Administrative identification Date: Sheet completed by: VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool Version CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint 1469 Ignition problem 1468 Does not start 1467 Indicator light coming on Other Please specify: ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 009 Sudden breakdown 010 Gradual deterioration 004 Intermittently Other Please specify: ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure Type of fault finding manual: Fault Finding Manual No. Software version Calibration no.page to print or photocopy . To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Part 2 part no. Part 4 part no. Present Stored Fault title Specification ● Conditions when fault occurs State or parameter no. Part 3 part no. Part 5 part no. the instrument panel warning lights are illuminated: After fully inserting the card in the reader.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Engine immobliser ● Page 2 / 2 Identification of computer and system parts exchanged Part 1 part no. Supplier no.page to print or photocopy . the steering column is unlocked: After fully inserting the card in the reader. the instrument panel immobiliser warning light: The vehicle starts after pressing the "start" button for more than 3 seconds FD 13 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .: VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. the reader indicator lamp: Yes Yes Yes Blinks rapidly Is permanently illuminated Blinks: slowly Is permanently illuminated Yes No No No Is unlit rapidly Is unlit No 3 seconds after fully inserting the card in the reader. Vel Satis and Espace IV vehicles: Is there a problem with both cards? After fully inserting the card in the reader. Program no. Name of parameter Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Please specify: For Laguna II. : Other documentation Title and/or part no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1 / 2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool Version CLIP OPTIMA 5800 NXR 2 0 ● Customer complaint 875 1194 Door locking/unlocking problem Indicator light coming on 1070 Lights problem 1075 Wiper problem Other Please specify: ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005 009 While driving Sudden breakdown 010 Gradual deterioration 004 Intermittently Other Please specify: ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure Type of fault finding manual: Fault Finding Manual No.: Workshop Repair Manual: Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .: FD 15 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . page to print or photocopy .FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ● Page 2 / 2 Identification of computer and system parts exchanged Part 1 part no. Supplier no. Present Stored Fault title Specification ● Conditions when fault occurs State or parameter no. Part 4 part no. Part 3 part no. Program no. Name of parameter Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: Additional information ● What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify: FD 15 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . Part 5 part no. Software version Calibration no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Part 2 part no.: VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. Vdiag No. protection and starting. with the ignition off. – Tyre pressure monitoring system (dealt with in Section 35B). Otherwise the indicator light goes out after unlocking. approximately one minute later. which breaks down into two parts: Lighting control and lighting power. which breaks down into three parts: Access. The number of cards programmed for this vehicle can be checked by means of the PR013 "Number of cards programmed" parameter (at most 4). – Air conditioning. the rear screen. Access 1. Access without hands-free function: Locking or unlocking is requested by radiofrequency exchange (emission. where applicable. the ET041 "Opening rear screen" state.F. – Locking with the ignition on is not possible with the RENAULT card. which breaks down into two parts: Wiper control and wiper power. – Locking is impossible if one of the doors. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-10 . by pressing the button on the RENAULT card. ET051 "LH rear door". at 433 or 315 MHz. frame received". is detected open by the UCH. which breaks down into three parts: User selection.: 44 UCH 187B Fault finding .System operation 87B General Operation The UCH performs and contributes to the following functions: – Keyless vehicle. ET042 "Passenger's door". which is visible through lighting of the starting switch and the instrument panel. The type of card and its correspondence with the vehicle can be checked by means of the specific SC005 "Card check" command and one or more cards can be assigned by means of the specific SC006 "Card assignment" command. ET052 "RH rear door" and ET050 "Tailgate" states and. The corresponding states can be viewed by means of the ET045 "R. Operation of the Central Door Locking switch lighting can be checked by means of the AC020 "Central Door Locking switch indicator" command. 1 The KEYLESS VEHICLE function is described by sub-function (explained in Keyless vehicle section). opening of a door causes time-delayed power-up. – Lighting. Unlocking can be viewed by 1 flash of the direction indicators. or the tailgate. where applicable.1. and reception via the aerial integrated in the UCH). The central door locking switch indicator light comes on after locking and goes out. because they can activate the UCH. cold loop and heating. The states of the doors seen open or closed by the UCH can be viewed by means of the ET053 "Driver's door". 1.a. ET066 "Card button press received". The tailgate can be locked or unlocked only by pressing the button on the RENAULT card. Locking can be viewed by 2 flashes of the direction indicators. UCH fault finding is performed using the diagnostic tool. A request for opening of the tailgate and. can be viewed by means of the ET061 "Tailgate opening request" and ET062 "Rear screen opening request" states. Note: Satisfactory operation of the door switches is important.a. The cause of the last locking and unlocking operations can be viewed by means of the ET068 "Source of last locking" and ET069 "Source of last unlocking" states. – Wipers. After unlocking. ET067 "Card button press recognised" states. by pressing the central door locking switch ET044 "Central Door Locking switch" or by means of the diagnostic tool. internal fault. – By automatic locking when driving (RAID function: the vehicle is locked as soon as the speed signal exceeds approximately 8 kph). locking/unlocking on certain doors only can be checked or configured by means of configuration reading LC029 "Selective opening of doors and windows" and configuration CF036 "Selective opening of doors and windows".System operation 87B Locking can be performed by the UCH: – through automatic relocking (30 seconds after unlocking not followed by opening of a door or the tailgate). etc. Note: Unlocking can be performed by the UCH if the airbag computer has detected an impact or if it is faulty (not recognised on the multiplex network. The activation or non-activation of automatic relocking can be checked by configuration reading LC012 "Automatic relocking" and changed with configuration CF018 " Automatic relocking". Acknowledgment is indicated by an audible alert. Operation and powering of the lock motors by the UCH and the RENAULT card via the card holder.: 44 UCH Fault finding . See Section 88C. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-11 . The automatic locking when driving function is activated or deactivated. AC005 "Door and window unlocking" and AC006 "Driver unlocking". WARNING: If the central door locking switch is held down for approximately 5 seconds with the engine stopped.). Operation and powering of the lock motors by the UCH can be checked by means of the actuator commands: AC004 "Door and window locking". with the engine running. the vehicle will lock itself (irrespective of the state of the doors and windows) as soon as all the doors and the tailgate are detected closed by the UCH. Depending on the country in which the vehicle is used.Vdiag No. Activation or non-activation of the RAID function can be checked by means of the ET043 "Enabling of RAID function by Central Door Locking" state. after pressing and holding down the central door locking switch for approximately 5 seconds. the vehicle will be able to lock or unlock itself. after querying by the external aerials. Note: If the RENAULT card is detected and recognised by the internal and external aerials. The RENAULT card replies directly to the UCH (at 433 or 315 MHz) if it is of the MEGANE II type.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Sensor operation can be viewed by means of the ET055 "Driver front optical sensor". ET056 "Driver rear optical sensor" and ET057 "Front/rear passenger sensor" states. Note: After 72 hours without using the vehicle. Unlocking takes place by presence detection. operating through earthing as soon as it is pulled. The UCH controls the power supply and radiofrequency exchanges with the RENAULT card by external sender aerials. The UCH receives the locking request.F. in earthing form.a. which can actuate the UCH or replace a faulty sensor. Exchanges between the RENAULT card. can be viewed by means of the ET045 "R. Locking takes place. when detection is actuated by pressing a switch).Vdiag No. and will cause the sensor state to go ACTIVE in the same way as presence detection. the internal aerials will be overriding and locking or unlocking in hands-free mode will not work. the optical sensors go to standby mode. it is possible to leave a RENAULT card in the vehicle and to lock the vehicle with another card. after querying by the external aerials. The locking requests can be viewed by means of the ET058 "Locking switch on driver's side handle". by pressing the buttons located on the door handles (or in the logo on the tailgate) and RENAULT card belonging to the vehicle detected. Note: Only the tailgate will be unlocked if the unlocking request is made by pressing the tailgate opening request switch. Access with hands-free function: Same functionality of "access without hands-free function" but different RENAULT card and adding the possibility of unlocking/locking without acting on the card. and RENAULT card belonging to the vehicle detected. The configuration of the UCH with hands-free function can be checked and changed by means of the configuration reading LC001 "Hands-free" and configuration CF010 "Hands-free". ET059 "Locking switch on passenger's side handle" and ET060 "Boot locking switch on tailgate" states.System operation 87B 1. in hands-free operation. and the UCH. The UCH controls the power supply and state of the optical sensors on the doors. However. If everything is alright. The optical sensor link is backed up by a switch located in the handle. by the external aerials exclusively. with the ignition off and with no card in the card reader. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-12 . The sensor power supply can be viewed by means of the ET054 "Optical sensors powered" state. Principle of exchange between the RENAULT card and the aerials: The aerials emit (at 125 kHz) following detection by a presence sensor or pressing on one of the door switches. and RENAULT card belonging to the vehicle detected. to find out whether there is a RENAULT card in the areas covered exclusively by the external aerials. by means of optical sensors located in the door handles (except with a tailgate. Locking takes place by pressing the locking switches located on the door handles and in the tailgate logo. through pressing on the door and boot handle locking switches (switch in logo). with + after ignition switched off and no RENAULT card in the card reader. if it is of hands-free type and if it is programmed for this vehicle. frame received" state.2. to prevent their opening by using the inside handles. Door and window control (If the vehicle is equipped with sequential window lifts and sunroof) The UCH controls enabling of the window lifts and sunroof in the one touch window version. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-13 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . In the event of a short circuit to earth. perform reading of faults. As soon as the RENAULT card is detected. 1. In the event of failure of one or more aerials detected by the UCH. even if it does not belong to the vehicle.4. The activation or non-activation of sequential operation can be viewed by means of the ET087 "One touch window enabling" state. the card reader starts flashing. These commands can be used to determine the presence of a hands-free RENAULT card for Mégane II. configuration reading LC003 "Deadlocking" and configuration CF009 "Deadlocking". After activation.a. This is why the internal aerials must also be checked: in the event of a short circuit to earth.B. the actuator command AC025 "One touch window enabling" can be used.Vdiag No. but does not detect short circuits to earth.5. the faults concerning the aerial circuit will appear. the region covered becomes greater.System operation 87B To check the operation of the aerials: Use the AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" command. Deadlocking (where applicable and if the vehicle is configured "WITH") The UCH controls the door locks to prevent unlocking by using the inside handles. Note: This command diagnoses open circuits and short circuits at + 12 V on the internal and external aerials. The one touch windows are controlled by a unit located in the doors. 1. This command can be used only to activate one-touch operation (by earthing). The regions covered by the aerials can be checked by means of actuator commands AC032 "Test on external aerials on driver's side". configuration reading LC026 "Electric child safety" and configuration CF033 "Electric child safety". To activate one-touch operation. Note: These commands enable checking of the region covered by the aerials for detecting the RENAULT card. The cause of the last activation or deactivation of deadlocking can be viewed by means of the ET088 "Source of deadlocking activation" and ET090 "Source of deadlocking deactivation" states.a. N. and inhibits operation of the window lift switches located at the rear. 1. Electric child safety system (where applicable) The UCH controls the rear door locks. AC034 "Test on boot external aerial" and ET036 "Test on internal aerials" ("Protection" sub-function). AC033 "Test on external aerials on passenger's side". The switch states and activation of the electric child safety system can be viewed by means of the ET089 "Electric child safety switch" and ET086 "Electric child safety" states. not to deactivate it.a. Deadlocking can be viewed by 2 flashes followed by 3 flashes of the direction indicators when doors and windows are closed. they could interfere with the vehicle's external aerials and render emitting by the external aerials ineffective. Operation of the indicator light on the child safety switch can be checked by means of actuator command AC029 "Child safety indicator".3. If the RENAULT card is not detected and recognised. the RENAULT card is queried by the UCH via the card reader (card in the reader. Note: If the RENAULT card is not detected and recognised. except in the event of an open tailgate or a faulty card battery.b. in which case the card should be inserted in the card reader.System operation 87B 1. the card reader will start flashing. the warning light will remain lit steadily. Check the warning light's operation by means of the AC003 "Immobiliser warning light" command. the warning light flashes to indicate that the vehicle is protected. Check operation of the card reader's lighting by means of the AC024 "Card holder lighting" command. View pressing on the start switch by means of the ET070 "Start switch" state. with exchange taking place at 433 or 315 MHz for both the card and the reader). independent of the remote control function or the hands-free function. Protection The UCH shares control of the vehicle's anti-theft protection system with other computers. During placing in after ignition. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-14 . Check operation of the start switch's lighting by means of the AC026 "Start switch lighting" command. the vehicle protection is removed. the warning light remains lit steadily for 3 seconds and then goes out. Check that the vehicle is correctly configured with hands-free function by means of the configuration reading LC001 "Hands-free" and configuration CF010 "Hands-free". Vehicle protection is removed in the following order: Recognition of the RENAULT card by the UCH: After a press on the start switch. because it is this pressing that enables the vehicle deprotection request. A coded chip (requiring no battery). the RENAULT card (at 433 or 315 MHz) is queried by the internal aerials (at 125 kHz). Special notes concerning the card holder lighting: The card reader lights up following activation of the UCH. It lights again or declines in intensity upon a request for outside lighting. Special notes concerning the immobiliser warning light: With the ignition off. The protection system is controlled by a random rolling code RENAULT card recognition system. If the engine immobiliser protection is not removed. is built into each of the vehicle's RENAULT cards.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Pressing on the start switch absolutely must be seen by the UCH. the instrument panel will display a message. Special notes concerning start switch lighting: The start switch lights up after the UCH has been activated and goes out with the engine running or when the UCH is placed on standby. In hands-free mode.Vdiag No. When the ignition is switched off. As soon as the RENAULT card is detected. In the event of failure of one or more aerials. frame received" RENAULT card seen by the internal aerials in hands-free mode. Once the RENAULT card has been recognised. detected by the UCH.Vdiag No. but does not detect short circuits to earth. the faults concerning the aerial circuit will appear. if the RENAULT card is not recognised as present.System operation 87B So long as the RENAULT card is not recognised as present and corresponding to this vehicle. even if it does not belong to the vehicle. the card reader starts flashing. These commands enable a hands-free RENAULT card for Mégane II to be recognised. perform fault reading. the UCH enables access to the power supply + accessories level. the vehicle will remain protected.: 44 UCH Fault finding .F. Operation of the aerials can be checked by means of the actuator commands: – AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics". – AC036 "Internal aerial testing" Note: These commands enable checking of the region covered by the aerials for detecting the RENAULT card. with card in the reader. The states corresponding to exchanges between the RENAULT card and the UCH can be viewed: – ET116 "Card code received" and ET117 "Card code valid". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-15 . after activation. Note: This command checks the internal and external aerials. – ET045 "R. two presses on the start switch are needed and it will not be possible to access the power supply + accessories level. the injection system will prevent any starting. DF014 "Card reader circuit" and DF005 "Renault card". if the coded line is still powered with +12 V and in the event of faults on the airbag computer. the + after ignition feed will not be able to be delivered by the Protection and Switching Unit and the engine immobiliser indicator light will remain lit steadily. – ET072 "Steering lock" and ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal" Immobiliser: Under + after ignition. After the ignition has been switched off. the UCH asks the Protection and Switching Unit to establish the + after ignition. The lock cannot be locked if the speed signal is greater than 0 kph. the engine immobiliser becomes active again as soon as the RENAULT card leaves the reader. In case of failure. see section dealing with injection: 13B or 17B. – ET119 "UCH request to steering lock". In case of failure. the UCH and the injection system compare the immobiliser code and check that it corresponds to the vehicle in question. The steering lock is coded definitively and must be assigned to this vehicle. Non-activation of the engine immobiliser can be checked by means of the ET046 "Immobiliser" state. In hands-free operation. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-16 . ET071 "Steering lock blank".System operation 87B The steering lock: The UCH communicates over the multiplex network with the steering lock. the UCH requests unlocking. The injection computer is delivered non-coded. the engine immobiliser becomes active again approximately 10 seconds after switching the ignition off. see processing of faults DF002 "Steering lock". If the lock indeed belongs to the vehicle.: 44 UCH Fault finding . The lock (barring a failure) sends to the UCH its unlocked state in reply.Vdiag No. Once the lock is recognised as unlocked. Note: If the lock does not unlock or does not communicate with the UCH. Gear lever on neutral detected by the Protection and Switching Unit.: 44 UCH Fault finding . ET094 "Engine driven". Force a + after ignition setting to confirm removal of the vehicle's protection. The starting function can be performed only if the vehicle's protection can be completely removed. see processing of faults: DF003 "Clutch switch circuit". With automatic transmission: – ET047 "Brake pedal position" PRESSED. Starting conditions: After a press on the start switch. – ET070 "Start switch". the UCH checks the presence of the RENAULT card and the starting conditions. or – ET048 "Clutch pedal position" DEPRESSED. ET091 "Engine running" and ET093 "Engine stalled" states. Starting The UCH shares control of the vehicle's starting with other computers. In case of failure.Vdiag No. – ET108 "ATX gear selector lever position" PARKING or NEUTRAL. With manual gearbox: – ET047 "Brake pedal position" PRESSED. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-17 .c. DF004 "Brake light switch circuit". Also check the consistency of the engine state by means of the ET092 "Engine stopped". UCH sending of the starting request can be viewed by means of the ET110 "UCH request to UPC or injection system" state.System operation 87B 1. : 44 UCH 287B Fault finding . the system switches to intermittent wiping. ET078 "Windscreen washer request". If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor. Important: If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk. see explanation in "Special notes concerning rain and light detector". ET097 "Rear screen wiper park position" and ET109 "Reverse gear engaged" or ET108 "ATX gear selector lever position" states. The requests made to the UCH via the wiper control stalk can be viewed by means of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position" and ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position". The UCH sends the command by cable connection to the two headlight washer relays. The states corresponding to operation of the rear screen wiper can be viewed by means of the ET080 "Rear screen wiper request". in intermittent wiping. Special note: If the windscreen wiper is in second gear and the vehicle stops. – At high speed. the headlight washers. the system switches to first gear. rear screen wiper wiping is continuous up to 80 kph and is time-delayed by 3 seconds beyond that. Rear screen wiper: Rear wiper speed and power supply are also controlled by the UCH. the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the windscreen wiper at slow speed (defect mode).Vdiag No. the configuration reading LC019 "Rear screen wiper park position control" and the configuration CF025 "Rear screen wiper park position control". only if the headlights are illuminated. If the windscreen wiper is in first gear and the vehicle stops. Windscreen wiper outside of neutral position: – The rear screen wiper starts up as soon as reverse gear is engaged. located below the Protection and Switching Unit. are actuated at the same time as the windscreen washer.a. These connections are duplicated up to the UCH to permit wiping and state reading. or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position. The park position is managed by the Protection and Switching Unit. Wiper control The UCH receives the driver's request via the wiper control stalk. The control stalk has four positions (neutral. ET079 "Rear screen washer request".System operation 87B 2 The WIPERS function is described by sub-function 2. slow speed and fast speed) and an intermittent speed ring by which the time between each wipe can be varied. via a cable connection. Windscreen washers: The front and rear windscreen washers are controlled directly by the wiper control stalk. Windscreen wiper: The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit via the CAN network to supply power to the windscreen wiper. Special notes concerning headlight washers For vehicles fitted with discharge bulbs. intermittent wiping. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-18 . System operation 87B 2.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Vdiag No. Wiper power The UCH controls the power of the rear screen wiper and the headlight washers. Matrices Multiplex network Steering-column fingertip control UCH Protection and Switching unit Rear screen wiper Windscreen and rear screen washers Headlight washer relays 1 and 2 Windscreen wiper Headlight washer pump UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-19 . AC030 "Headlight washer relay 1" and AC031 "Headlight washer relay 2" commands.b. where applicable. Their operation can be checked by means of the AC007 "Rear screen wiper". from the light detector.: 44 UCH 387B Fault finding . ET083 "Left hand indicator request". to provide power to the side lights. ET082 "Rear fog lights request". 3.System operation 87B 3 The LIGHTING function is described by sub-function 3.Vdiag No. ET084 "Right hand indicator request". Lighting control The UCH receives the request from the driver. ET085 "Hazard warning lights button". Operation of the lights powered by the UCH can be checked by means of the actuator commands AC009 "Rear fog lights". see explanation in "Special notes concerning rain and light sensor". Lighting power The UCH controls the power supply for the rear fog light (a single one).b. the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the dipped headlights.a. Note: If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk. The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit. Rain and light detector Multiplex network UCH Steering-column fingertip control UCH Matrices Rear screen wiper Side lights Windscreen wiper Dipped headlights with discharge bulbs Dipped headlights without discharge bulbs UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-20 . The following states are viewed: ET081 "Lighting stalk position". or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position. AC021 "Interior lights" and AC027 "Footwell/floor lighting". AC022 "Left hand indicator". The interior lighting request can be viewed by means of the ET112 "Interior lighting control" state. The dipped headlights are maintained when the main beam headlights are activated. dipped headlights. from the lighting stalk. main beam headlights and fog lights (front). If the vehicle is fitted with discharge bulbs. via the multiplex network. from the hazard warning lights button and. the Protection and Switching Unit powers the discharge bulb computers. If the vehicle is fitted with a light sensor. AC023 "Right hand indicator". where applicable. direction indicators and interior lighting (roof lights and footwell/floor lights). Vdiag No. Note: The "Auto" position on the wiper control stalk takes the place of intermittent wiping on unequipped vehicles and the ring is in this case used to adjust the rain detector's sensitivity.). night.System operation 87B SPECIAL NOTES CONCERNING RAIN AND LIGHT DETECTOR (where applicable). The rain and light detector is a single sensor. and the configuration can be altered by means of the CF012 "Rain sensor" command. Rain and light detector Multiplex network UCH Steering-column fingertip control Protection and Switching unit Matrices Rear screen wiper Side lights Windscreen wiper Dipped headlights with discharge bulbs Dipped headlights without discharge bulbs UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-21 . and the configuration can be altered by means of the CF013 "Light sensor" command. This sensor is installed in the windscreen. the rear screen wiper will come into operation if the reverse gear is engaged. configuration reading LC007 "Light sensor". The state of the light detector can be viewed by means of ET115 "Lights illumination request by light sensor".: 44 UCH 487B Fault finding . place the wiper control stalk in neutral position and then place it back in "Intermittent ON" position. Operation of the rain detector can be viewed by means of the ET114 "Wiper request by rain sensor" state. etc. gloomy weather conditions. and configuration reading LC006 "Rain sensor". Automatic operation of the rain detector is inhibited after an ignition switch-off. connected by a single link to the UCH. The light detector allows automatic operation of the side lights and dipped headlights as soon as the vehicle is in a dark place (tunnel. The detector is activated by setting the wiper stalk to "Intermittent ON" position. Use the ET118 "Rain sensor sensitivity ring position" state in place of state ET096. On a vehicle equipped with a rain detector. To reactivate operation when next switching on the ignition. automatic detection being activated and when it is not raining. The rain detector allows automatic operation of the windscreen wipers and the control of wiper speeds according to the quantity of water on the windscreen. a. for the cabriolet version. – ET015 "Passenger compartment fan" only with unregulated air conditioning. – PR002 "External temperature". The following states can be viewed: – ET029 "Air conditioning button". for electric rear screen de-icing and the signal of passenger compartment fan operation.b. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-22 . engine loading and. Passenger compartment heating resistor power 0W 333 W 667 W 1000 W Relay 1 0 1 0 1 Relay 2 0 0 1 1 The configuration reading LC027 "Additional heating power available" can be viewed. – ET028 "Heated rear screen button". The states produced by the UCH can be viewed: – PR001 "Battery voltage". – ET026 "Rear screen de-icing".: 44 UCH 587B Fault finding . Heating The UCH manages the passenger compartment heating resistors (RCH's) by controlling power relays according to the request for ventilation in the passenger compartment.Vdiag No. – ET021 "RCH control 1". The UCH sends the request to the injection system to actuate the air conditioning compressor. 4. Relay 2 controls a set of passenger compartment heating resistors consisting of two resistors. – ET019 "Number of RCH's authorised by injection system". Relay 1 controls a set of passenger compartment heating resistors consisting of one resistor. User selection (Unregulated air conditioning only) The UCH receives the signal from the air conditioning control panel via cable connection for the air conditioning request. 4. whether the roof is open. Operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors can be checked by means of actuator commands: AC016 "RCH relay 1" and AC017 "RCH relay 2". – ET031 "Fast idle request for RCH". the electrical balance. – ET020 "Number of RCH's activated". – ET015 "Passenger compartment fan". Operation of the indicator lights for the air conditioning and electric rear screen de-icing request buttons can be checked by means of the actuator commands: AC015 "Air conditioning button indicator" and AC019 "Rear screen de-icing indicator". the external temperature. – ET091 "Engine running". – ET018 "Number of RCH's authorised by alternator" alternator load factor. – ET025 "Retractable roof" Cabriolet version only. the engine coolant temperature.System operation 87B 4 The AIR CONDITIONING function is described by sub-function The type of air conditioning can be viewed by means of the configuration reading LC013 "Type of air conditioning" and configured by means of the CF019 "Type of air conditioning" command. – ET017 "Number of RCH's required". – ET022 "RCH control 2". The UCH sends the request to the Protection and Switching Unit to bring into operation electric rear screen de-icing. according to the external temperature. The following states and parameters can be viewed: ET030 "Air conditioning request 2".Vdiag No.: 44 UCH Fault finding .System operation 87B 4.c. ET091 "Engine running". ET015 "Passenger compartment fan" and PR002 "External temperature". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-23 . the passenger compartment fan activation signal and whether the engine is in operation. Cold loop The UCH requests compressor switch-on at injection by the multiplex network. System operation 87B Midrange ● ● Low-end Multiplex connection Fault finding ● ● ● ● ● ● High-end ● ● Card management RENAULT Basic RENAULT "hands-free" Coded immobiliser + Accessories feed control relay Opening elements Locking the opening elements (and unlocking in the event of an impact) Relocking the opening elements Electric and one-touch windows Tailgate lock Deadlocking the opening elements Electric childproof lock Opening "driver's door only" Control of exterior lock buttons Wipers Rain and luminosity sensor Front wiper (speed control/low and high) Rear screen wiper (wiper speed according to vehicle speed) Windscreen and rear screen washers Headlight washers Lights Lighting / wiper control management Indicators and hazard warning lights Hazard warning lights in emergency braking and airbag deployment Rear fog light Lights on reminder management (control) Timed interior lighting supply Interior lighting (floor) Daytime running lights Automatic lighting when driving and stationary Heated rear screen management Air conditioning request management Alarm management (predisposition) External temperature management Tyre pressure monitor Additional heating ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-24 .Vdiag No.: 44 UCH Fault finding . : 44 UCH Fault finding .Track allocation 87B UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-25 .Vdiag No. rear doors and boot closing switch Passenger door.Track allocation 87B Connector PP1 (black) Track 1 2 3 4 Earth Not used + Before ignition feed (protected) + Before ignition feed (protected) Description Connector PP2 (black) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Description Steering column electric lock (supply) Steering column electric lock (signal) Rear screen wiper (control) Rear screen wiper (supply) Driver's door and fuel filler flap closing switch Driver's door and fuel filler flap opening switch Passenger door.: 44 UCH Fault finding . rear doors and boot opening switch Locking motors supply Front doors deadlocking control Rear doors deadlocking control Not used Connector PP3 Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Interior lighting (control) Earth + Before ignition Left-hand direction indicators control Right-hand direction indicators control Rear fog light control Not used Not used Interior lighting (supply) Interior lighting (supply) Not used Not used UCH B/C 84 version 2 Description 87B-26 .Vdiag No. Track allocation 87B Connector PE1 (brown) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Description Electric steering column lock External temperature (output) Hazard warning lights indicator Card reader (card inserted) Clutch pedal sensor Door locking/unlocking switch Engine start push button (signal).: 44 UCH Fault finding . Tailgate opening switch Child safety indicator light Not used Interior locking control (child safety) Steering-column fingertip control (headlight washer track 1) Engine start push button (engine running indicator light) Doors locking indicator light Passenger door opening sensor Rear right-hand door opening sensor Driver's door opening sensor Doors deadlocking status signal Rear left-hand door opening sensor Not used Connector PE1 (green) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Description UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-27 .Vdiag No. driver's side Boot hands-free opening aerial UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-28 . passenger side Rear hands-free opening aerial. driver's side Boot hands-free opening aerial Sensor (passenger side rear door) Front hands-free opening aerial. driver's side Front hands-free opening aerial. driver's side Rear hands-free opening aerial. passenger side Rear hands-free opening aerial. passenger side Front hands-free opening aerial.Track allocation 87B Connector PE3 (brown) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Description Not used Not used Driver's door sensors supply Boot locking switch Boot opening switch Passenger door sensors supply Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Headlamp washer relay (1) Headlamp washer relay (2) Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Connector PE3 (green) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Description Sensor (driver's door) Sensor (driver's side rear door) Sensor (passenger door) Hands-free starting aerial (front) Hands-free starting aerial (front) Hands-free starting aerial (centre) Front hands-free opening aerial.Vdiag No. passenger side Hands-free starting aerial (rear) Hands-free starting aerial (rear) Hands-free starting aerial (centre) Rear hands-free opening aerial.: 44 UCH Fault finding . : 44 UCH Fault finding .Track allocation 87B PE2 connector (Black) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Description Rain and luminosity sensor Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 9) External temperature sensor Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 2) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 13) Multiplex connection H (Protection and Switching Unit) One-touch electric windows and sunroof Multiplex connection H (passenger compartment) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 4) Multiplex connection H (steering column electric lock) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 14) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 5) External temperature sensor earth Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 3) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 12) Multiplex connection L (Protection and Switching Unit) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 8) Multiplex connection L (passenger compartment) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 10) Multiplex connection L (steering column electric lock) PE2 connector (Green) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Description Card holder Passenger compartment heating relay control Not used Air conditioning control (heated rear screen) Card holder (earth) Air conditioning control (air conditioning indicator light) Brake pedal switch (pressed) Steering-column fingertip control connection (rear screen washer track 2) Immobiliser warning light output Air conditioning control Not used Air conditioning control (heater fan) Passenger compartment heating relay control + Accessories relay Hazard warning lights switches Brake pedal switch (inactive) Rear screen wiper park position Heated rear screen indicator light Card holder Card holder UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-29 .Vdiag No. : 44 UCH Diagnostics . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-30 .Vdiag No. The programming and configurations are described in the following pages of the present document. see the relevant sections in the Mechanical Workshop Repair Manual for the vehicle.Replacing parts 87B For replacement of the various components. Its status is shown by the flashing red light on the instrument panel and by locking of the electric steering column lock. The engine immobiliser switches on a few seconds after the RENAULT card is removed from the reader.UCH Vdiag No. if lost or stolen). UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-31 . – voice server. – Techline. A coded chip (requiring no battery) independent of the remote control function is built into each of the vehicle's RENAULT Cards. – deactivate one or more RENAULT cards (e. – replace one or more RENAULT cards. a 12-character hexadecimal code is assigned to the vehicle to make the engine immobiliser operational. During manufacture. The repair code is required in After Sales to: – add RENAULT Cards. Note: It is essential to know the vehicle's serial number to obtain the repair code. – Minitel server. GENERAL The protection system is controlled by a random rolling code RENAULT card recognition system.: 44 Fault finding . – replace a UCH. There are several ways to do this.g. depending on location.Configuration and programming 87B 1. Note: – The RENAULT card can be programmed to a vehicle but not operational (not assigned). – Only the RENAULT cards inserted during the assignment process will be operational. it is assigned to the vehicle. following installation. To perform this procedure. UCH PROGRAMMING New parts are not coded. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-32 . it is essential that some parts on the vehicle are already correctly coded (with the vehicle code).UCH Vdiag No. Refer to the assignment table. they therefore have to be coded in order to be operational. WARNING Once a part is programmed with a code. Operation OPERATION UCH State of Components Renault card Injection computer Electric steering lock Repair Code needed Programming the UCH RENAULT card assignment or deactivation Programming of the electric steering lock Blank Coded Coded / YES Coded Blank / / YES Coded Coded / Blank NO Programming the injection computer Coded Coded / Coded NO The RENAULT card assigned to a vehicle must be blank or already programmed for the vehicle.Configuration and programming 87B 2. the code cannot be deleted and the part cannot be reprogrammed with another code. The programmed code cannot be erased.: 44 Fault finding . Confirm line "SC004 UCH Programming". Enter the After Sales code. If you do not know the After Sales code. Click on "Diagnostic". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-33 .: 44 Fault finding . then "Passenger compartment unit". Click on the " Result" tab. Enter the code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm.Configuration and programming 87B Run the " Multiplex network" test. The instrument panel should be illuminated. The tool displays "Unknown vehicle configuration: check tool updating". Error message Click in " Repair" mode and in the "Programming" menu. "Power supply level inadequate". Click on "Test result ". contact your Techline. Switch on the side lights. Error messages The tool displays "Insert card fully into reader".UCH Vdiag No. then "Continue". Click on the " information" tab. "PROCEDURE ABORTED" Error message "Remove the card from the reader". " PROCEDURE ABORTED" " Check the UCH power supply level". " Incorrect code". the instrument panel should be illuminated. insert a charger. contact your Techline. start the procedure again. The UCH is programmed to the vehicle. "Procedure aborted".UCH Vdiag No. It is now impossible to clear the programmed code.Configuration and programming 87B Error message "The RENAULT card presented is not fully inserted in the card holder or does not correspond to the After Sales code entered. start the procedure again with a card assigned to the vehicle". Check the RENAULT card and the condition of the card holder. Next. program the cards and perform calibration and configuration of the UCH and programming of the valves. Confirm Error messages The tool displays "PROGRAMMING IN PROGRESS " " UCH programming problem: please contact your Techline". Insert a card assigned to the vehicle." Error message " The RENAULT card inserted is blank. The tool displays "Programming completed". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-34 .: 44 Fault finding . To assign a second RENAULT card. The tool displays "Warning: all previously programmed cards will no longer be useable after the first card has been programmed. the tool displays "Insert card fully into reader". With the card out of the reader. The tool displays Please enter the After Sales code. Important: Be sure to insert all the cards to be assigned to the vehicle when programming ". confirm line "SC006 Card assignment". If the format is correct. Now insert a blank card or one assigned to the vehicle and confirm. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-35 . select "YES". the system does not take this into account and the engine immobiliser indicator light remains off. The tool displays "Do you want to program another card?" The vehicle can have no more than four cards. WARNING These cards must be old RENAULT cards for the vehicle or blank new ones.Configuration and programming 87B 3. Now insert a blank card or one assigned to the vehicle and confirm. reassignment will have to be performed later with all the cards. enter the secret After Sales code (12 hexadecimal digits in upper case) and confirm. To finish programming. Note: If the same card is inserted twice. select "NO" and confirm.UCH Vdiag No. The tool displays: "Remove card from reader". The tool displays "Insert card fully into reader". RENAULT CARD ASSIGNMENT PROCEDURE Note: It is possible to know whether a RENAULT card is blank by the state: ET IMPORTANT If not all the RENAULT cards are available.: 44 Fault finding . Do not remove the card until you see the "One card programmed" message. The tool displays: Programming in progress. In the " Programming" menu. The cards are assigned to the vehicle and the vehicle serial number is stored in the cards and in the UCH. the cards assigned to the vehicle are the ones assigned before the procedure was performed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-36 . Configure the UCH according to the vehicle options and equipment. This message also appears when communication with the UCH is lost or the battery is disconnected. otherwise the procedure will be cancelled and the tool will display the message "Procedure interrupted: Warning. there is no operation to perform on the injection computer. they are no longer blank and can be assigned only to this vehicle".: 44 Fault finding . as it retains the same immobiliser code.Configuration and programming 87B Note: The vehicle can accept several RENAULT cards equipped with the function. Note: If only the UCH is replaced.UCH Vdiag No. WARNING The maximum time between each operation is five minutes. The programmed code cannot be erased. The remote control function. this system can be associated with a card that has the hands-free function. the battery and the rechargeable battery (on the hands-free version) have no effect on the engine immobiliser. Depending on version. blank) These components cannot be coded when replaced unless they have the vehicle's original code in memory. They can be reallocated to the same vehicle if necessary. simultaneously. or at the customer's request. Replacement RENAULT cards are supplied non-coded and without an emergency metal key. The rechargeable battery for the hands-free function is charged.: 44 Fault finding . In the event of loss or theft. This system can have up to four RENAULT Cards. WARNING With this system.UCH Vdiag No.e. it is impossible to replace several components. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-37 . This information enables the operator to identify the vehicle in order to provide the correct code. it is essential to provide the vehicle's VIN as well as its fabrication number. There is no way of erasing the code programmed into the system components. i. one or more vehicle cards can be deactivated. such as the UCH and card. (These parts are sold uncoded.Configuration and programming 87B Special notes When working on the system. When requesting the code number. or the UCH and injection computer. the repair code number can be requested from the local assistance network. The card must be blank or assigned to the vehicle. contact the Techline. and confirm the "SC006 Card assignment" line. Run the programming procedure again. Important note: Be sure to insert all cards assigned to the vehicle for programming. Enter the code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm.Configuration and programming 87B Card programming and assignment procedure Run the " Multiplex network" test. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-38 . The tool displays "Insert card fully into reader". "Procedure aborted". Insert a card into the reader. " Check the UCH power supply level". Select the "Repair" mode and "Programming" menu. "Procedure aborted ". The tool displays: " Please enter After-Sales code". Enter the "UCH" system. run the UCH programming procedure. Run the programming procedure again. The tool displays: " Warning: all previously programmed cards will no longer be useable after the first card has been programmed.UCH Vdiag No. Error messages "The UCH is blank." "Procedure aborted ". " The RENAULT card inserted is already assigned to the vehicle"." The tool displays: "Remove card from reader". run the procedure again. Error message " The RENAULT card presented is not fully inserted in the card holder.: 44 Fault finding . The instrument panel should be illuminated. Check the condition of the card holder." Error messages " Incorrect code". the card holder and the UCH. and contact your Techline". NO YES Confirm The tool displays: "Writing data to memory ". The cards are assigned to the vehicle. The tool displays PROGRAMMING IN PROGRESS. Check the condition of the RENAULT card.Configuration and programming 87B Error messages "Programming not carried out. The tool displays "One card programmed ". Test starting the vehicle and door locking with all the cards. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-39 .: 44 Fault finding . The vehicle can have no more than four cards. The tool displays "Do you want to program another card? " The tool displays: "Remove card from reader".UCH Vdiag No. Configuration and programming 87B 4. E = Manual air conditioning. I (*) Choice of configuration Air conditioning (type of air conditioning) CF019 Number of heating resistors Gearbox Rain sensor Light sensor Type of windscreen Follow-me-home lighting: Daytime running lights Discharge bulb Front fog lights Hazard warning lights on at impact Hazard warning lights actuated by antilock braking system Steering wheel position Rear screen wiper park position control Tyre Pressure Monitoring System function Pax-type tyre system Engine type CF011 CF012 CF013 CF027 CF032 CF014 CF030 CF021 CF015 CF024 CF020 CF025 CF023 CF016 CF028 CF017 CF036 Automatic/Manual with/without with/without Heat insulating/Tinted with/without with/without with/without with/without with/without with/without Right-hand/Left-hand with/without with/without with/without Petrol/Diesel All except Cabriolet/Convertible with/without LC011 LC029 Vehicle type Selective opening component opener (*) A = Heating (without air conditioning). H. F = Regulated air conditioning. F.: 44 Fault finding . UCH CONFIGURATION The UCH configurations possible using the diagnostic tool are: Configuration reading LC024 LC001 LC003 LC012 LC013 LC020 LC005 LC006 LC007 LC021 LC025 LC008 LC022 LC015 LC009 LC018 LC014 LC019 LC017 LC010 Name of configuration Computer Hands-Free function Deadlocking Automatic relocking Configuration CF031 CF010 CF009 CF018 with/without with/without with/without A. B = Manual air conditioning. with one passenger compartment heating resistor. C. H = Manual air conditioning. without passenger compartment heating resistor. G = Heating (without air conditioning). C = Regulated air conditioning. with two passenger compartment heating resistors. B. D = Heating (without air conditioning). with one passenger compartment heating resistor. G. with two passenger compartment heating resistors. with two passenger compartment heating resistors. with one passenger compartment heating resistor. D. E.UCH Vdiag No. without passenger compartment heating resistor. I = Regulated air conditioning. without passenger compartment heating resistor. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-40 . enter the topology of the multiplex network (see Section 88B). then disconnect the battery to register the configurations.UCH Vdiag No. and then confirm by reading the configuration using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Fault finding . Switch off the ignition. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-41 . program the Tyre pressure monitor valves (see Section 35B). wait for one minute. Refer to note 35B Reading the valve set and the stored codes Entering the VIN N IMPORTANT When the configurations have been made. command used to determine the After Sales code Contact the Techline Programming of valve codes in case of valve replacement. if the UCH has been replaced Card assignment if a card has been added Card checking. card fault finding command: see under Specific Command function Reserved.Configuration and programming 87B Specific UCH commands SCENARIO Function Keyless vehicle: Programming: SC004: SC006: SC005: SC003: Tyres SC002: SC001: Other Parameters VP004: UCH programming. It therefore has to be programmed with the engine immobiliser code when it is installed. to allow the vehicle to be started.: 44 Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-42 . CODING THE INJECTION COMPUTER The injection computer is supplied uncoded. and the immobiliser is activated after a few seconds. Simply switch on the ignition for a few seconds without starting the engine.Configuration and programming 87B 5.UCH Vdiag No. Switch the ignition off. Fault summary table Description UCH Steering lock Clutch switch circuit' Brake switch circuit Card Left front wheel sensor Right front wheel sensor RH rear wheel sensor LH rear wheel sensor Steering-column fingertip control unit circuit Rain/Light sensor circuit RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT left hand indicator CARD READER CIRCUIT OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT At least 2 identical codes in the summer set At least 2 identical codes in the winter set Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed Front internal aerial circuit Rear internal aerial circuit Central internal aerial circuit Driver side front door external aerial circuit Passenger side front door external aerial circuit Driver side rear door external aerial circuit Passenger side rear door external aerial circuit Exterior temperature sensor circuit Steering lock circuit Anti-locking line One-touch window connection Boot external aerial circuit Driver-side external aerial(s) Passenger-side external aerial(s) Internal aerial circuit 87B List of faults DF001 DF002 DF003 DF004 DF005 DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 DF010 DF011 DF012 DF013 DF014 DF015 DF016 DF017 DF018 DF019 DF020 DF021 DF022 DF023 DF024 DF025 DF026 DF027 DF029 DF030 DF031 DF032 DF033 DF034 DF035 UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-43 .Vdiag No.: 44 UCH Fault finding . NOTES Special notes: If a fault concerning the steering lock is present or stored.Vdiag No. carry out this fault finding procedure. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. deal with it first.Interpretation of faults 87B UCH DF001 PRESENT 1. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-44 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. If the fault appears.DEF: Internal electrical fault Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform locking/unlocking by pressing button on card.DEF: Internal electronic fault 2. Clear the fault memory. Contact your Techline. open the driver's door.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 3. Clear the fault memory.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 6.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 7. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Vdiag No.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 5. deal with the DF029 "Steering lock circuit" fault. Contact your Techline. if it is present.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 8.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Interpretation of faults 87B STEERING LOCK 1.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 4. NOTES Special notes: Lock/unlock the vehicle.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault DF002 PRESENT Processing priority in the event of a number of faults: Firstly.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 2. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-45 . Deal with any other possible faults. replace the switch. oxidised. etc. Repair if necessary. oxidised. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. Clear the fault memory. broken. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-46 . Deal with any other possible faults.0 NOTES None. If the connection is satisfactory.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault appears after: a road test at V > 40 kph. contact the Techline. Ensure insulation relative to earth for the following connection: Switch track 1 track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.).).Interpretation of faults 87B DF003 PRESENT OR STORED CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT CC. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track connector of the clutch switch (tabs crushed. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. etc. : 44 UCH Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track connector of the clutch switch (tabs crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-47 . broken. If the connection is satisfactory and earth is present. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. contact the Techline. oxidised. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. oxidised. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults. If the fault is still present. replace the switch. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. etc. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87B DF003 (CONTINUED) CO.).1 NOTES None. broken.). etc. Ensure the insulation from + 12 volts and the continuity of the connection between: Switch track 1 track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector Ensure the presence of vehicle earth on track 2 of the switch. Refer to processing of the ET047 "Brake pedal position" state in the "Starting" sub-function. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-48 . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of faults 87B DF004 PRESENT OR STORED STOP BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault appears after a series of 10 presses of more than 1 second Note: The fault could prevent cruise control/speed limiter operation.Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. : 44 UCH Fault finding . fill in the diagnostic sheet and contact your Techline. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. If the fault persists. Check the card battery. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-49 . Replace the battery if necessary. Perform the test with another card belonging to the vehicle.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of faults 87B DF005 PRESENT OR STORED CARD DEF : Card battery low DEF NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Press one of the buttons on the card and check whether the fault appears. : 44 UCH Fault finding . Section 35. If the fault persists.Vdiag No.DEF : Internal electronic fault 6.Interpretation of faults LH FRONT VALVE SENSOR RH FRONT VALVE SENSOR RH REAR VALVE SENSOR LH REAR VALVE SENSOR 1. Before any operation. Make sure that no wheel has a rubber valve. program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002 "Programming four valve codes" described in the " Repair" section of this chapter.DEF : Internal electronic fault 4.DEF : Internal electronic fault 87B DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: Any operations involving replacing a valve or removing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations set out in the Workshop Repair Manual 364. replace the valve in question according to the method described in the repair manual ( Workshop Repair Manual 364.DEF : Internal electronic fault 5. If the problem is still present. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-50 . If the programming fails. The correspondence between fault numbers and the valve concerned is described below: – DF006 = Front left-hand valve sensor – DF007 = Front right-hand-hand valve sensor – DF008 = Rear right-hand-hand valve sensor – DF009 = Rear left-hand valve sensor Once the sensor has been replaced. ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves. replace it by a wheel with a valve fitted with a sensor and perform a road test. Section 35B ). and that the spare wheel has not been fitted. repeat programming of the 4 valves.DEF : Internal electronic fault 8. replace the valve. if the fault is present as of the first kilometers.DEF : Internal electronic fault 2. For faults DF006 to DF009. carry out programming of the 4 valves.DEF : Internal electronic fault 3. If there is one. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults.DEF : Internal electronic fault 7. ). Repair it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-51 . 2. Repair it if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. track 14 track 11. replace the steering-column fingertip control if necessary.DEF : Internal electronic fault NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on the control stalk. broken. Clear the fault memory. oxidised.Interpretation of faults 87B DF010 PRESENT OR STORED STEERING-COLUMN FINGERTIP CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT 1. track 12 track 15.DEF : Failure detected on a connection between the steering-column fingertip control unit and the UCH 2. Contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.DEF NOTES None. etc. track 8 track 17. etc. If the connections are correct. track 5 track 12. track 13 track 5. Check the condition and connection of the black 12-track connector of the steering-column fingertip control (tabs crushed. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Black 12-track connector 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.). track 9 track 2. broken. oxidised. track 3 track 14. track 2 track 4. Replace the steering-column fingertip control unit unit.DEF NOTES None. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Vdiag No. track 10 track 19. 1. track 4 track 9. DEF: Internal electrical fault 87B DF011 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Place in operation the automatic wiper system and automatic light illumination system. If okay. Repair if necessary. then cover the sensor and/or place water on it. 2.).Vdiag No. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding .). Repair if necessary. carry out this fault finding procedure. oxidised. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 1 of the rain/light sensor. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-52 .DEF NOTES Check the condition and connection of the sensor supply fuse in the passenger compartment relay and fuse box in position 2S.DEF: Communication disrupted 2. replace the sensor. etc. Replace it if necessary. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector of the sensor (tabs crushed. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Replace the sensor. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Sensor track 2 track 2 of UCH connector PE2. etc. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other possible faults. broken. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. oxidised. 1. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of the sensor. If the fault appears.DEF NOTES If fault is present. With the control activated. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Vdiag No. If okay. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector.and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight. the left-hand repeater and the LH rear light. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector.0 : Short circuit to earth CO. and if still not okay replace the rear light(s). then carry out this fault finding procedure. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-53 .: 44 UCH Fault finding .and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector.Interpretation of faults RIGHT-HAND INDICATOR CIRCUIT CC. check the bulbs again. check the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3. Repair if necessary. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V CC : Short circuit 87B DF012 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on the right-hand indicator control stalk. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Special note: The fault becomes stored following a change of bulb. Clear the fault memory. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. if necessary. Check the bulbs. Replace them. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-54 .and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Clear the fault memory. If the fault is still present. track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3. Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector.Interpretation of faults 87B DF012 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH.Vdiag No. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. 0 : Short circuit to earth CO. check the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3. check the bulbs again.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V CC : Short circuit 87B DF013 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on the left-hand indicator control stalk.and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Check the bulbs. the right-hand repeater and the RH rear light.Vdiag No. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. If okay. With the control activated. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Special note: The fault becomes stored following a change of bulb.and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight. if necessary. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Replace them. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-55 .Interpretation of faults LEFT-HAND INDICATOR CIRCUIT CC. Clear the fault memory. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. and if still not okay replace the rear light(s). 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Deal with any other possible faults.: 44 UCH Fault finding .and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present.Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-56 .Interpretation of faults 87B DF013 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3. contact your Techline. track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. : 44 UCH Fault finding . DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the black 8-track connector of the card reader (tabs crushed.). Ensure the presence of 12 V on track 3 of the card reader. Ensure the continuity and insulation from earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4 Track 39 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 6 Track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. etc.0 : Short circuit to earth DEF : Internal electronic fault NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Insert the card in the reader. Deal with any other possible faults. broken. contact your Techline. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-57 . switch off and restore the after ignition. carry out this fault finding procedure. oxidised. broken.Interpretation of faults 87B DF014 PRESENT OR STORED CARD READER CIRCUIT CC. Repair if necessary. oxidised. Clear the fault memory. If the fault appears. Repair if necessary Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track PE2 connector and the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. etc. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault persists.). Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. Interpretation of faults 87B DF014 CONTINUED DEF NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory.Vdiag No. Replace the card reader. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-58 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. ET056 "Rear driver side optical sensor". Check the sensor states to determine on which sensor there is a short circuit. Deal with any other possible faults. NOTES Special note: Only with hands-free.Vdiag No. contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Each state should go ACTIVE .0 : Short circuit to earth Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Lock the vehicle and place your hand in each handle.Interpretation of faults 87B DF015 PRESENT OR STORED OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT CC. If the fault persists. Clear the fault memory. If the connections are correct and the power supply is present. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver side front sensor track 1 track 21 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Driver side rear sensor track 1 track 22 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Passenger side front sensor track 1 track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Passenger side rear sensor track 1 track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Repair if necessary. If a state is on INACTIVE : Ensure the presence of 12 V on track 3 of the sensor(s). If the fault appears. then replace the suspected faulty sensor. ET057 "Front and rear passenger side optical sensor".: 44 UCH Fault finding . carry out this fault finding procedure. ET055 "Front driver side optical sensor". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-59 . Interpretation of faults 87B DF016 DF017 PRESENT AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES IN THE SUMMER SET AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES IN THE WINTER SET NOTES Special notes: Any operations involving replacing a valve or removing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations set out in MR364.Vdiag No. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test using the diagnostic tool.: 44 UCH Fault finding . repeat programming of the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: "Programming of the four valve codes" described in the " Repair" section of this note. Before any operation. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-60 . AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. In this case. Fault DF016 At least 2 identical codes / summer set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the summer wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). repeat programming of the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: "Programming of the four valve codes" described in the " Repair" section of this note. Fault DF017 At least 2 identical codes / winter set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the winter wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). Section 35. and that the spare wheel has not been fitted on the same axle assembly. ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves. In this case. : 44 UCH Fault finding . In the State menu. Program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: "Programming the four valve codes'' described in the ''Repair '' section of this note.Interpretation of faults 4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR SUMMER SET 4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR WINTER SET 87B DF018 DF019 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: Any operations involving changing a valve or replacing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations set out in MR364. for the type of tyre stored in memory. note the valve codes assigned. ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves.Vdiag No. Fault DF019: 4 winter set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the winter tyre set and the winter tyre set is selected. Fault DF018: 4 summer set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the summer tyre set (after replacing the sensors or UCH). and that the spare wheel has not been fitted. Section 35. note the type of tyre set stored in memory (summer or winter). In the State menu. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-61 . AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Before any operation. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test using the diagnostic tool. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.). Replace the aerial if necessary. Repair if necessary Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . contact your Techline. If the fault is still present. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-62 . etc. etc.Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. if the fault appears. broken. then carry out this fault finding procedure.). broken. Deal with any other possible faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF020 PRESENT OR STORED FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". Clear the fault memory. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . broken. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-63 . Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF021 PRESENT OR STORED REAR INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics".). If the fault is still present. if the fault appears. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 35 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 36 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. Repair if necessary.). etc. etc. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. Replace the aerial if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 37 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87B DF022 PRESENT OR STORED CENTRAL INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". etc. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-64 . Replace the aerial if necessary. broken. Clear the fault memory. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. contact your Techline. etc. then carry out this fault finding procedure.). broken.).Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. if the fault appears. : 44 UCH Fault finding . if the fault appears. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory. If the fault is still present. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 39 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. etc. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Replace the aerial if necessary. etc. then carry out this fault finding procedure.Interpretation of faults 87B DF023 PRESENT OR STORED DRIVER SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics".). broken. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-65 . Deal with any other possible faults. broken.). contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. etc. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-66 . then carry out this fault finding procedure. contact your Techline. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 31 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 34 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary.). Repair if necessary. broken. Clear the fault memory.Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Replace the aerial if necessary. Repair if necessary.). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. etc. Deal with any other possible faults. broken.Interpretation of faults 87B DF024 PRESENT OR STORED PASSENGER SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics".: 44 UCH Fault finding . if the fault appears. If the fault is still present. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 28 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 38 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87B DF025 PRESENT OR STORED DRIVER SIDE REAR DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics".). etc. broken. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Replace the aerial if necessary. Repair if necessary. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed.Vdiag No.). if the fault appears. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-67 . contact your Techline. then carry out this fault finding procedure. contact your Techline. If the fault is still present. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 32 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 33 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-68 . broken.).: 44 UCH Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. then carry out this fault finding procedure. if the fault appears. Deal with any other possible faults. etc. Clear the fault memory.). broken.Interpretation of faults 87B DF026 PRESENT OR STORED PASSENGER SIDE REAR DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. carry out the following fault finding procedure.Interpretation of faults 87B DF027 PRESENT OR STORED EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT CC. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2 .Vdiag No.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Sensor resistance in Ω between 5400 and 6200 between 3700 and 4400 between 2500 and 3000 between 1700 and 2100 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. broken). Check the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. oxidised. broken). Repair if necessary. If the problem persists.0 : Short circuit to earth NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault reappears as stored after: – the fault has been cleared. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-69 . vehicle does not have this option. contact your Techline.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CC. Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. oxidised. If YES. Check the green 2-track connector of the temperature sensor (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults. If NO. Check whether the right-hand door mirror is fitted with a temperature sensor. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Approximate temperature in °C between 0 and 5 between 11 and 15 between 21 and 25 between 31 and 35 Replace the sensor if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 Steering lock on track 5 track 1 of the PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary.DEF 2. broken. If the fault persists. CC. Check the condition and connection of connectors PE2. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-70 .1 1.).DEF : Short circuit to +12 V : Open circuit (e. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.DEF 6. PP2 of the UCH and PEH of the Protection and Switching Unit (tabs crushed. etc. DF029 PRESENT None NOTES Special note: Lock/unlock the vehicle. Repair if necessary.g. and check the lock power supply within the 5 minutes following door opening.DEF 5. Clear the fault memory. contact your Techline.: 44 UCH Fault finding . steering lock connection => UCH) : Voltage not within the permitted limits : Short circuit to earth on the steering lock sensor connection : Open circuit on the steering lock sensor connection : Short circuit to +12 V on the steering lock sensor connection. lock disconnected) or lock power supply absent : Lock earth absent or multiplex network faulty (e.g.Interpretation of faults 87B STEERING LOCK CIRCUIT CC.1. Repair if necessary.DEF 3.Vdiag No. SHORT CIRCUIT to +12 V NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock.DEF 4. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-71 . etc. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. contact your Techline.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 1 1.: 44 UCH Fault finding .DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Deal with any other possible faults.Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory.). Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. If the fault persists. broken. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 and PE2 connectors of the UCH (tabs crushed. ).DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-72 . Deal with any other possible faults.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. contact your Techline. broken.). If the fault persists. etc.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 2 2. etc. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-73 . Deal with any other possible faults. Unlocking impossible if the voltage is > 16 V.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 3 3.Vdiag No. Locking or unlocking possible if the voltage is in the range 9 V < Voltage < 16 V .DEF NOTES None Verify the battery voltage and check the charge circuit (excess voltage). Clear the fault memory. broken. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-74 . broken. Repair if necessary. etc.Vdiag No.). etc. If the fault persists. contact your Techline.).Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 4 4.DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory.). If the fault persists.DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed. etc. etc. broken.). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 5 5.Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. broken. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-75 . contact your Techline.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. broken.DEF NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed.Vdiag No. broken. etc. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed. etc.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 6 6.). Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. If the fault persists. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-76 . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.). Deal with any other possible faults.). Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-77 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . etc.Interpretation of faults 87B ANTI-LOCKING LINE DF030 PRESENT CO : Open circuit NOTES None CO.Vdiag No.). If the fault persists. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Steering lock on track 5 track 1 of the 12-track PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. (tabs crushed. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. etc. Repair if necessary. broken. contact your Techline. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the condition and presence of the 5D fuse on the Protection and Switching Unit. broken.1 NOTES Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed. Interpretation of faults 87B DF031 PRESENT OR STORED ONE TOUCH WINDOW CONNECTION CC. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-78 . broken.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.). contact the Techline. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the window lifts (tabs crushed.Vdiag No. etc.: 44 UCH Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on a one-touch window. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7 Track 6 of the window lift connector Repair if necessary If the fault is still present. Clear the fault memory. etc. ignore this fault.). Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. broken. Repair if necessary. Special note: If the vehicle is not fitted with one-touch windows. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. etc. Repair if necessary. contact your Techline.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. then carry out this fault finding procedure.Interpretation of faults 87B DF032 PRESENT OR STORED BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO. If the fault is still present.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Repair if necessary.). if the fault appears. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-79 .Vdiag No. broken. Clear the fault memory. etc. Replace the aerial if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 29 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 40 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary.). broken. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 39 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". if the fault appears.).Vdiag No. Replace the aerial if necessary. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . contact your Techline. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87B DF033 PRESENT OR STORED DRIVER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO. broken. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. etc.). etc. Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-80 . Clear the fault memory. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Replace the aerial if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. etc. broken.). broken. contact your Techline.: 44 UCH Fault finding .). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. If the fault is still present. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-81 . Clear the fault memory.Interpretation of faults 87B DRIVER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) DF033 CONTINUED Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed.Vdiag No. etc. Repair if necessary Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 28 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 38 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. broken. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact your Techline.). Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present.Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 31 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 34 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". Replace the aerial if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Clear the fault memory. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.Interpretation of faults 87B DF034 PRESENT OR STORED PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-82 . etc. broken. if the fault appears. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Vdiag No.Interpretation of faults 87B PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) DF034 CONTINUED Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-83 . Replace the aerial if necessary. Clear the fault memory. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . contact your Techline. broken. If the fault is still present.).). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. etc. Deal with any other possible faults. etc. Repair if necessary Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 32 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 33 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. 1 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics". If the fault is still present.Vdiag No.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.). etc. contact your Techline. if the fault appears.Interpretation of faults 87B DF035 PRESENT OR STORED INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO. Replace the aerial if necessary. Repair if necessary Ensure the insulation and continuity relative to earth of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults.). Clear the fault memory. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-84 . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Front Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. broken. then carry out this fault finding procedure. broken. etc. Repair if necessary Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 35 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 36 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. etc. If the fault is still present. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. broken. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. broken. Replace the aerial if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.: 44 UCH Fault finding . broken.). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact your Techline. contact your Techline. etc. broken. Rear Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults. Replace the aerial if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-85 . Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory.).Vdiag No.).). Repair if necessary Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 37 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87B DF035 CONTINUED Centre Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. etc. Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position.). etc. R (Scénic 7seater) and K (estate). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.ACCESS OPENING REAR SCREEN ET041 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.). contact your Techline. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-86 . If the problem persists. oxidised. This state can be processed only for vehicles of types J (Scénic.Vdiag No. oxidised. 5-seater). Clear the fault memory. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Lock 4-track connector on track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. etc. Check the condition and connection of the grey 8-track connector of the opening rear screen switch (tabs crushed. broken. Replace the lock if it is not correct.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Deal with any other possible faults. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. broken.: 44 UCH Fault finding . ).: 44 UCH Fault finding . The continuity of the lock switch on tracks B and A in ON position. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Passenger's door lock black 4-track connector Track A Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. oxidised. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the passenger door lock (tabs crushed.ACCESS PASSENGER DOOR ET042 NOTES Check that no fault is present. Replace the lock if it is not correct. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults. broken. track 15 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. oxidised. If the fault is still present. contact your Techline. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-87 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . broken.).Vdiag No. etc. etc. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks B and A in OFF position. Clear the fault memory. ACCESS RAID FUNCTION ENABLED THROUGH CENTRAL DOOR ET043 LOCKING NOTES No faults may be present or stored.Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults. Press the vehicle unlocking button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition to deactivate automatic locking when driving (the "locking when driving" state is inactive). Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition to activate automatic locking (the "locking when driving" state is active).Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Clear the fault memory. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-88 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check that the UCH is configured with Locking when driving. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds without the after ignition to lock the vehicle (specification for Spain). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 8-track Electric Door Locking switch Track 5 Track 14 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. broken. contact your Techline.). UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-89 . Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.Vdiag No. broken. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and connection of the grey 8-track connector of the Electric Door Locking switch (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory. oxidised. If the fault is still present. oxidised. etc.ACCESS CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON ET044 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Check continuity of the connection between track 4 of the 8-track connector and the vehicle earth.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Check: The continuity of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch pressed) The insulation of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch OFF) Replace the switch if it is not correct.: 44 UCH Fault finding . etc. Unlocking/Locking. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. ET045 "NO" upon pressing one of the buttons on the RENAULT card or with sensor detection faults on the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System function.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .ACCESS RF FRAME RECEIVED ET045 No faults may be present or stored. NOTES Special note: This state is used for the tyre pressure monitoring system (SSPP) function. Check with the vehicle's second card. Hands-free starting. check state ET066 "Card button press received". Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-90 . If the fault persists. perform a test with another card of another vehicle of MEGANE II type. contact your Techline. This state merely makes it possible to check the sound condition of the UCH receiver aerial. If the state remains at " NO". If the state goes to " YES". Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. etc. Check the condition and connection of the white 4-track connector of the tailgate lock (tabs crushed. broken.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .ACCESS TAILGATE ET050 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. oxidised.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. Replace the lock if it is not correct. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.). UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-91 . Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. oxidised. etc.Vdiag No. broken. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate lock 4-track white connector track 3 Track 8 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.). Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. If the fault is still present. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. broken. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Left rear door 4-track black connector track D Track 19 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.).: 44 UCH Fault finding . oxidised. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed).Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-92 . etc. etc. Replace the lock if it is not correct. contact your Techline. broken. oxidised.).ACCESS LEFT-HAND REAR DOOR ET051 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the left-hand rear door lock (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-93 . If the fault is still present. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the left-hand rear door lock (tabs crushed. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. broken. Deal with any other possible faults.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks A and B (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Right rear door 4-track black connector track A Track 16 of the blue 40-track connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. oxidised.).Vdiag No. etc.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .ACCESS RIGHT-HAND REAR DOOR ET052 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. broken. Clear the fault memory. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks A and B (door closed). contact your Techline. oxidised.). etc. Clear the fault memory.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Left rear door 4-track black connector track D Track 17 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-94 . The continuity of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed).). broken. broken. oxidised. etc. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the left-hand rear door lock (tabs crushed. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Replace the lock if it is not correct. contact your Techline.). oxidised. Repair if necessary.ACCESS DRIVER'S DOOR ET053 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. etc.Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. Check the earth on track 23 of the 40-track PE connector of the UCH by pulling a handle Is earth present? YES Contact your Techline.: 44 UCH Fault finding . and if insulation change the handle. and repair if necessary.ACCESS OPTICAL SENSOR POWERED (Only in hands-free vehicles) ET054 NOTES After 72 hours without an attempt at opening the vehicle. ET054 : is at "NO" despite an action on the door handles The vehicle has been immobilised for less than 72 hours: Check that the UCH is in hands-free configuration by means of the LC001 "Hands-free function" configuration reading. NO Check the continuity between track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector and track 2 of the black 3-track connector of the optical sensor. To recover the optical sensors' power supply. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check for earth on track 3 of the connector. contact your Techline. The vehicle has been immobilised for more than 72 hours: Check the insulation against 12 V of the following track (door handle pulled): track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH.Vdiag No. contact the Techline. Check for continuity of the switch with handle pulled on tracks 1 and 2 . If everything is correct. one must pull the handle of one of the doors or unlock by card and lock the vehicle and place a hand in one of the handles. Clear the fault memory. the UCH cuts out the optical sensors' power supply.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-95 . If the fault persists. Track 22 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. dirt). Is the status on? YES Check the condition of the reflective surface inside the handle (frost. lock the vehicle and pull the handle. If necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Passenger side front sensor track 1 Right-hand rear sensor Left-hand rear sensor Sensors track 1 track 1 track 2 If the fault persists. Switch the ignition on. driver and passenger side Driver side front sensor track 3 track 3 track 3 track 1 Track 3 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH Track 21 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH Track 23 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Track 23 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . contact your Techline. If the state is "inactive ". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-96 . Place your hand behind the door handle. Clear the fault memory. Check that the state ET054 "Optical sensor powered" is at "YES". NO Check for insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver side front sensor Passenger side front sensor Rear sensors. Deal with any other possible faults. then switch it off. Check the condition of the optical sensor. replace the sensor. Earth Repair if necessary.ACCESS ET055 ET056 ET057 DRIVER'S SIDE OPTICAL SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE REAR OPTICAL SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE FRONT/REAR OPTICAL SENSOR (Only in hands-free vehicles) NOTES No faults may be present or stored.: 44 UCH Fault finding . make sure the corresponding state is "active".Vdiag No. Vdiag No. Ensure the presence of earth on track 4 of the door handle. oxidised.: 44 UCH Fault finding . broken. contact your Techline. oxidised. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Door handle switch on track 3 Track 30 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Check the condition and connection of the blue 9-track connector of the door (tabs crushed. Check: The insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (OFF position) The continuity between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Pressed position ) Replace the handle if necessary. etc. Repair if necessary. etc.).). broken. Clear the fault memory. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-97 . If the fault persists. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary.ACCESS ET058 ET059 LOCKING BUTTON ON DRIVER'S HANDLE LOCKING BUTTON ON PASSENGER HANDLE (Only in hands-free vehicles) NOTES Check that no fault is present.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Repair if necessary. broken. Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . contact your Techline. Check: The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the button on tailgate (OFF position). If the fault persists. oxidised. etc.). oxidised. Clear the fault memory. Replace the button if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the white 2-track connector of the locking button on tailgate (tabs crushed.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Repair if necessary.ACCESS BOOT LOCKING BUTTON ON TAILGATE (Only in hands-free vehicles) ET060 NOTES Check that no fault is present.). etc. broken. The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the button on tailgate ( Pressed position).Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Locking button on tailgate on track 1 Track 4 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-98 . Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the locking button on tailgate. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Is earth present? YES Contact your Techline.: 44 UCH Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. If insulated. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector on track 5 of the UCH and track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-99 . Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. NO Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. ET061 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Deal with any other possible faults. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 (with the button pressed). Repair if necessary. replace the switch.ACCESS TAILGATE OPENING REQUEST ET061 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Check for an earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Clear the fault memory. Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: connector PP3 of the UCH on track 7 track 2 on the lock's 4-track connector Repair if necessary. If +12 V is not present. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. Check the continuity between track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the lock's 4-track connector with the button pressed. replace the switch. Is earth present? YES Check for +12 V on track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-100 . If insulated.ACCESS ET061 CONTINUED ET061 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. NO AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults. Is it present? YES: Replace the tailgate lock NO: Check for +12 V on track 7 of the PP3 connector of the UCH If +12 V is present. contact your Techline. If there is continuity. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-101 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .ACCESS ET061 CONTINUED 1 ET061 "Present" when there is no request on the button Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check for insulation against earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. contact your Techline. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 . Ensure insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 . Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check for insulation against earth on track 1 of the lock's 4-track connector. replace the switch If the fault persists. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults. replace the switch If the fault persists. contact your Techline.Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Repair if necessary. If there is continuity. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 16 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed. NO Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. 5-seater). UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-102 . R (Scénic 7seater) and K (estate).: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. ET062 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Is earth present? YES Contact your Techline. If insulated. Deal with any other possible faults. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. replace the switch.ACCESS REAR SCREEN OPENING REQUEST ET062 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector on track 16 of the UCH and track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector. This state can be processed only for vehicles of types J (Scénic. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-103 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Check the continuity between track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. contact your Techline.ACCESS ET062 CONTINUED ET062 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check the connection and condition of the 4-track connector of the lock. Repair if necessary. check the continuity and insulation of the following connection between connector PP3 of the UCH on track 7 and track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. replace the switch. NO AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. Check for an earth on track 1 of the door lock connector with the button pressed.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Vdiag No. Is earth present? YES Check for +12 V on track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector. Is it present? YES: Replace the tailgate lock NO: Check for +12 V on track 7 of connector PP3 of the UCH If +12 V is present. If insulated. If +12 V is not present. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 .Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. If the fault persists. If there is continuity. Deal with any other possible faults. Scenario 1 vehicle (hands-free) Check for insulation against earth on track 4 of the lock. replace the switch. If there is continuity.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . contact your Techline. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 . If the fault persists.ACCESS ET062 CONTINUED ET062 "Present" when there is no request on the button Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check for insulation against track earth on track 7 of the UCH. replace the switch. Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-104 . contact your Techline. The state is declared as " YES" when one of the buttons is pressed.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Clear the fault memory. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-105 . Replace the first card. ET066: "NO" despite pressing one of the buttons on the card. contact the Techline. If the state remains at " NO". Check with the second card whether the state goes to "YES". AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Deal with any other possible faults.Vdiag No. It is essential to have the second card.ACCESS CARD BUTTON PRESS RECEIVED ET066 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-106 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . The state is declared as " YES" when one of the buttons is pressed. Deal with any other possible faults.Vdiag No. ET067: "NO" despite pressing one of the buttons on the card Carry out resynchronisation of the cards by forced setting of the after ignition If the problem persists and if ET066 "Card button press received" is at "YES". If the fault persists. replace the cards.ACCESS CARD BUTTON PRESS RECOGNISED ET067 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact your Techline. Deal with any other possible faults.: 44 UCH Fault finding . within the 30 s following unlocking Electric door lock: follows an action on the button. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. AUTOMATIC: The UCH controls locking in case of non-detection of opening of a door or a hands-free or card unlocking request. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-107 . Makes it possible to know what mode is the origin of the last locking or unlocking operation.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Clear the fault memory.Vdiag No. AIRBAG: following an impact signal detected.ACCESS ET068 ET069 ORIGIN OF LAST LOCK ORIGIN OF LAST UNLOCK NOTES No faults may be present or stored. ET068 "Origin of last lock" RAID FUNCTION: The UCH controls locking according to the speed signal from the vehicle. HANDS-FREE: detection of a close request on button press located on the handles or in logical diagram. Electric door lock: follows an action on the button. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the After Sales tool via command AC005 "Central door unlocking" AC006 "Driver unlocking" RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the After Sales tool via the AC004 "Central door locking" command ET069 "Origin of last unlock" HANDS-FREE: detection of a hand in the handle. Repair if necessary.) Repair if necessary. broken. If the fault is still present. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .Vdiag No. Check for the presence of earth on track A3 of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. etc. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Child safety button 6-track connector track B1 track 11 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. etc.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check: The insulation between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (OFF position) The continuity between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Pressed position) Replace the switch if necessary.ACCESS ELECTRIC CHILD SAFETY SWITCH ET084 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.). (tabs crushed. contact your Techline. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-108 . Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector of the child safety switch. broken. State ET084: "Electric child safety switch" must be consistent with the actual position of the switch. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.). If faulty. If faulty. Repair if necessary. etc. oxidised.Vdiag No. Manually check the operation of the child safety system Otherwise. Repair if necessary. etc. If faulty. carry out the fault finding procedure on this state first.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .ACCESS ELECTRIC CHILDPROOF LOCKS ET086 NOTES There must be no faults present or stored. Insert a warning light bulb and check that it lights. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-109 . Deal with any other possible faults. carry out the fault finding procedure on commands AC004 and AC005 first. Clear the fault memory. check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: left-hand rear lock motor Track B Track 11 of UCH connector PP2 right-hand rear lock motor Track E left-hand rear lock motor Track E Track 8 of UCH connector PP2 right-hand rear lock motor Track B Repair if necessary. apply the following fault finding procedure. contact your Techline. Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector on the rear locks (tabs crushed.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. oxidised.). The locking/unlocking function should work on all the doors. If the fault is still present. during the brief moment of activation or deactivation of the child safety system between tracks B and E of the rear lock motor. : 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. ET090 "Origin of deadlock deactivation" Electric Door Locking: upon pressing the locking/unlocking switch RENAULT CARD: press on card button. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-110 . Makes it possible to know what component is the origin of the last locking or unlocking operation.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . ET088 "Origin of deadlock activation" RENAULT CARD: upon a second button press on the card. HANDS-FREE: upon a second press on the door handle button. + after ignition: no deadlocking at this power supply level.ACCESS ET088 ET090 ORIGIN OF DEADLOCK ACTIVATION ORIGIN OF DEADLOCK DEACTIVATION NOTES No faults may be present or stored. HANDS-FREE: placing a hand in the handle FAULT FINDING: by the After Sales tool controlling command AC 006. Clear the fault memory.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . ET008: is at " YES".PROTECTION UCH BLANK ET008 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.: 44 UCH Fault finding . – card programming. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-11 1 . Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. Refer to the start of this section to perform: – UCH programming and UCH configuration.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. : 44 UCH Fault finding . Check state ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal". if locked. if it is released.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . 1 Check state ET070: "Start switch". if YES . if locked. Deal with any other possible faults. 2 Transponder state ET116 "Card code recognised" and ET117 "Card code valid" 3 Check state ET071 "Blank steering lock" for NO. run fault finding on that state. perform fault finding on this state. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.PROTECTION IMMOBILISER SYSTEM ET046 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. run fault finding on that state. this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. 4 Check state ET111 "UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit" if ET111 is at "+ after ignition" 5 Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay. Check state ET072 "Steering lock" which should be unlocked. run fault finding on that state.Vdiag No. but the after ignition level is not present. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-112 . Power supply level required + after ignition. ET046 "Active" scenario 1 vehicle (without hands-free) with start request. 6 If these states are okay. it should be depressed in the event of a button press. contact the Techline. Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . run fault finding on that state. if YES . Check state ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal". Testing of internal aerials via the command. it should be depressed in the event of a button press. Clear the fault memory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Check whether the card is assigned to the vehicle by means of the SC006 "Card assignment" command. If these states are okay. Check state ET111 "UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit" if ET111 is at " + after ignition". if locked. Check state ET071 "Blank steering lock" for NO. this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. run fault finding on that state. Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay.PROTECTION ET046 CONTINUED ET046 "Active" scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) with start request. but the after ignition is not present.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Vdiag No. perform fault finding on this state. contact the Techline. run fault finding on that state. Check state ET070: "Start switch". AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. if locked. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-113 . Transponder state ET116 "Card code recognised" and ET117 "Card code valid". Check state ET072 "Steering lock" which should be unlocked. Deal with any other possible faults. if it is released. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-114 . State of engine immobiliser in the injection system. ET048 "Clutch pedal position" should be "PRESSED".Vdiag No.PROTECTION ET046 CONTINUED ET046 "Active" after ignition power supply level forced set as present Check and repair if necessary. Neutral state: see in Protection and Switching Unit. Deal with any other possible faults. contact your Techline.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .: 44 UCH Fault finding . If the problem persists. check the injection computer. if " ACTIVE". ET047 "Brake pedal position" should be " PRESSED". Clear the fault memory. State of automatic transmission speed selector. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. broken. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.). oxidised. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the engine ON/OFF button (tabs crushed. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the ON/OFF button connector. oxidised. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: On-off control button on track 1 track 7 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. etc.).PROTECTION START SWITCH ET070 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-115 . contact your Techline.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . broken. Check: The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the ON/OFF button in depressed position and the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the ON/OFF button in released position Replace the switch if necessary. etc. Deal with any other possible faults. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-116 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . If the fault persists. If the steering lock state remains at " YES". Check that when pressing on the disengaged clutch pedal or on the brake pedal or the ON/OFF button.PROTECTION BLANK STEERING COLUMN LOCK ET071 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. contact your Techline. the UCH issues an unlock signal (if the steering is locked). Check that the card is authenticated (otherwise refer to processing of the ET116 "Card code valid" state).Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-117 .Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. refer to processing of the DF029 "Steering lock circuit" fault. Deal with any other possible faults.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . If the state is at INCONSISTENCY. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.: 44 UCH Fault finding .PROTECTION STEERING LOCK ET072 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. ET073 "Faulty" when the steering column is not unlocked. contact your Techline.). Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory. oxidised. etc.). broken. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 Track 10 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering lock on track 6 Track 20 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering lock on track 4 Track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-118 . ET073 "Short circuit" when the steering column is not unlocked. broken. and check the lock power supply during the 5 minutes. Check the power supply on track 2 of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . The state should be "unlocked" in after ignition present or " pseudo-armed" in " + accessories" NOTES Special note: Perform a locking/unlocking operation. Check the continuity between vehicle track 1 of the 6-track connector of the steering lock and the vehicle earth. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.: 44 UCH Fault finding . oxidised. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. If the fault persists.PROTECTION STEERING LOCK SENSOR SIGNAL ET073 No faults may be present or stored. etc. Deal with any other possible faults. Refer to processing of the DF029 "Steering lock circuit" fault.Vdiag No.PROTECTION ET073 CONTINUED ET073 "Unlocked" and + after ignition absent. In case of inconsistency. Clear the fault memory. in case of failure of the airbag system or the speed signal. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-119 . refer to processing of the DF029: "Steering lock circuit" fault. ET073 "Undetermined".Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . If everything is okay. with the ignition off.: 44 UCH Fault finding . contact the Techline. but the UCH cannot determine its position precisely. The state remains UNLOCKED. The state is UNDETERMINED in the event that neither the lock nor the lock sensor can inform the UCH regarding its position. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. the lock bolt is pulled out. ET073 "Pseudo-armed" and + after ignition present. In the " pseudo-armed" state. State 075 is at " YES" but + accessories absent.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Check the power-supply fuses.PROTECTION + ACCESSORIES PRESENT ET075 No faults may be present or stored. If there is no 12 V . NOTES Special note: Check satisfactory operation of the start switch: ET070 "Start switch" .Vdiag No. Ensure +12 V on track 1B of the fuse box. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. If there is 12 V . Check for an earth on track 2B of the fuse box by pressing the button. Check on track 5B of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box for a +12 V by pressing the start switch. Is earth present? YES Ensure +12 V + before ignition on track 3B of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-120 . Clear the fault memory. replace the relay. check the wiring harness.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Clear the fault memory.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .: 44 UCH Fault finding . check the continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH on Track 34 Track 2B of passenger compartment relay and fuse box. If "YES". Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults.Vdiag No.PROTECTION ET075 CONTINUED State 075 is at " YES" but + accessories absent. NO Check at UCH output for earth on track 34 of the 40-track PE3 connector If "NO". AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact the Techline. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-121 . connector poorly connected. Replace the vehicle's cards. Carry out the following checks: Check the following connectors: 8-track connector of the card reader (e.' If the state goes ACTIVE with the vehicle's second card. tabs crushed. 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.Vdiag No. connector poorly connected.: 44 UCH Fault finding . If the ET116 "Card code received" state goes ACTIVE. ET116 "Inactive" key assigned to the vehicle. Replace the reader if necessary. broken. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-122 . Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against the earth of the following connections: Card reader track 3 Track 21 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 4 Track 39 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 6 Track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.g. replace the faulty card. oxidised). Contact your Techline. try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any operation. If the state remains INACTIVE . broken. tabs crushed. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . If the ET117 "Card code received" state remains INACTIVE.g. Deal with any other possible faults. Clear the fault memory.PROTECTION CARD CODE RECEIVED ET116 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. oxidised). try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any operation. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .' If the state goes ACTIVE with the vehicle's second card. contact the Techline. Deal with any other possible faults. If the fault is still present. Carry out card assignment SC006 "Card assignment".: 44 UCH Fault finding . ET117 "Inactive" key assigned to the vehicle If the state remains INACTIVE .Vdiag No. Remove the cards if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-123 .PROTECTION CARD CODE VALID ET117 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. replace the faulty card. Deal with any other possible faults. contact your Techline.). Perform a complete diagnostic of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. A speed signal failure may cause various problems to appear (on the steering lock. If the fault persists.Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. etc.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .: 44 UCH Fault finding . non-operation of the RAID system. Clear the fault memory.STARTING VEHICLE SPEED PR008 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-124 . difficulty stopping the engine. Ensure insulation from +12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 36 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. to check. This treatment applies only in cases in which the state is "inconsistency" or "undetermined". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-125 . State 047 "Inconsistency" with pressing on the pedal. During pedal travel.Vdiag No. It is therefore necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch.STARTING BRAKE PEDAL POSITION ET047 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Special note: Apply forced setting of after ignition. where applicable. using a wiring diagram. in case of faulty insulation. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. it is possible to note an inconsistency.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Note: The line is shared with the injection computer and. contact your Techline. Deal with any other possible faults. the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. Clear the fault memory. with foot hard down on the accelerator or completely released from the brake pedal. The accessories relay must operate.: 44 UCH Fault finding . with the pedal depressed. the automatic transmission computer. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 4 of the brake pedal switch connector. to check.: 44 UCH Fault finding . – Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 3 of the PP3 connector of the UCH. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UCH PE2 connector Track 36 Track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector. Deal with any other possible faults. in case of faulty insulation. Replace the switch if faulty. using a wiring diagram. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-126 .Vdiag No. the automatic transmission computer. Contact your Techline. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity of the connection between track 3 and track 4 of the brake switch in OFF position. Clear the fault memory. if still faulty.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . where applicable.STARTING ET047 CONTINUED State 047 "Undetermined" without pressing on the pedal. the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. Note: The line is shared with the injection computer and. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. It is therefore necessary. the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these items. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Replace the switch if faulty.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . If the fault is still present.Vdiag No. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch. It is therefore necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. Repair if necessary.: 44 UCH Fault finding . using a wiring diagram. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. to check. Deal with any other possible faults. Ensure insulation from +12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 27 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the electronic stability program (ESP) relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights.STARTING ET047 CONTINUED State 047 "Inconsistency" without pressing on the pedal. contact your Techline. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-127 . with the pedal released. in case of faulty insulation. Repair if necessary. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the ESP relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these items. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UCH connector PE2 Track 27 Track 1 of the brake pedal switch connector. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-128 . Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 and track 2 of the brake switch in depressed position.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .Vdiag No. in case of faulty insulation. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 1H of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. – Check the condition and connection of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. It is therefore necessary. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of fuse 1H in the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. using a wiring diagram. Deal with any other possible faults. to check.: 44 UCH Fault finding . if still faulty. Contact your Techline. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 2 of the brake pedal switch connector.STARTING ET047 CONTINUED State 047 "Undetermined" with pressing on the pedal. Repair if necessary. Replace the switch if faulty. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. NOTES Special note: Apply forced setting of after ignition. If faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No.STARTING CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION ET048 No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. State 048 "Released" with pressing on the pedal. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. replace the clutch pedal switch. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Clutch switch on track 1 Track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in pedal depressed position. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch connector.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-129 . contact your Techline. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-130 . Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Clutch switch on track 1 Track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. contact your Techline. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . replace the clutch pedal switch. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.STARTING ET048 CONTINUED State 048 "Depressed" without pressing on the pedal. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in pedal released position. If faulty. Clear the fault memory. Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. State 049 "NO" with correct starting or forced after ignition setting conditions. Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. contact your Techline.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Make sure the pedal presses are properly perceived by the UCH by means of the ET047 "Clutch pedal" and ET048 "Brake pedal" states. apply the fault finding procedure associated with the faulty state. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. NOTES Special notes: starting conditions: Make sure the start button presses are properly perceived by the UCH by means of the ET070 "Start switch" state. Clear the fault memory. Check that the card is properly recognised by the UCH by means of the ET116 "Card code recognised" and ET117 "Card code valid" states. Check that the UCH request is properly sent to the other computers.Vdiag No. If the fault persists.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults. In case of problems.STARTING + AFTER IGNITION PRESENT ET049 No faults may be present or stored. by means of the ET111 "UCH request to INJECTION OR Protection and Switching Unit" state. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-131 . Check that the steering lock operates correctly by means of the ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal " state. STARTING START SWITCH ET070 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Check this state in the "PROTECTION" sub-function. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-132 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . contact your Techline. Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. ET091: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine. If the fault persists. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.STARTING ENGINE RUNNING ET091 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-133 .: 44 UCH Fault finding . Deal with any other possible faults.Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. Vdiag No. contact your Techline. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-134 . If the fault persists.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . ET092: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.: 44 UCH Fault finding . Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network.STARTING ENGINE STOPPED ET092 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. ET093: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.STARTING ENGINE STALLED ET093 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.Vdiag No. If the fault persists.: 44 UCH Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-135 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . contact your Techline. Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. contact your Techline.Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists.STARTING ENGINE DRIVEN ET094 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.: 44 UCH Fault finding . ET094: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-136 .Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. " OFF NEUTRAL": gear selector lever position on D. ET108: " ABSENT": no automatic transmission presence. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. " NEUTRAL": gear selector lever position on N. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-137 .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE .Vdiag No.STARTING ATX GEAR SELECTOR LEVER POSITION ET108 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. If the fault persists. " REVERSE": gear selector lever position on R. Run fault finding on the automatic transmission and the Protection and Switching Unit. Deal with any other possible faults. contact your Techline.: 44 UCH Fault finding . refer to the corresponding fault finding charts in the Keyless Vehicle function section.Vdiag No. This state gives information concerning the type of request made by the UCH to these computers. " + after ignition": a press of more than 5 seconds on the start switch. Deal with any other possible faults.: 44 UCH Fault finding .Interpretation of states 87B KEYLESS VEHICLE . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-138 . Clear the fault memory. " START": when starting is requested. contact your Techline. " INACTIVE ": without action on the vehicle. If the fault is still present. If the state does not correspond to the current user request. ET110: " ENGINE STOP": when an engine stop is requested.STARTING UCH REQUEST TO INJECTION SYSTEM OR PROTECTION AND ET110 SWITCHING UNIT NOTES No faults may be present or stored. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. (e. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. pins crushed.: 44 Fault finding . oxidised. Repair it if necessary.g. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the UCH 40-track black connector Repair if necessary. Approximate temperature in °C between 0 and 5 between 11 and 15 between 21 and 25 between 31 and 35 Sensor resistance in Ω between 5400 and 6200 between 3700 and 4400 between 2500 and 3000 between 1700 and 2100 Replace the sensor if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact your Techline.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT 187B Vdiag No. If the problem persists.Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002 NOTES None. Repair it if necessary. broken). pins crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-139 . Check the UCH black 40-track connector. connector poorly connected.g. oxidised. Check the temperature sensor's green 2-track connector. Deal with any other possible faults. (e. broken). connector poorly connected. Climate control: ET091 "Engine running" PR002: Exterior temperature < 5°C Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability . depending on the conditions.: 44 Fault finding . NOTES Special note: Manual heating and ventilation system Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature.Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B NUMBER OF RCH'S REQUIRED ET017 No faults may be present or stored. Climate control Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Heat demand by the user (refer to the air conditioning computer). The passenger compartment heating resistor management conditions are: Manual heating and ventilation system: ET091 "Engine running" at YES ET015 "Passenger compartment ventilation" ACTIVE PR002: Exterior temperature < 5°C Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability . refer to the procedure for processing these states and parameters. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-140 . Check the consistency of these states and parameters. Deal with any other possible faults. the exterior temperature and electrical availability. alternator charge < 70% (refer to the Power and Switching Unit).60%. The state. electrical availability. the interior temperature and the user's request. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. 1. Clear the fault memory. 2 or 3. In the event of a problem.60%. alternator charge < 70% (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). the exterior temperature. will be at 0. Deal with any other possible faults. Clear the fault memory. will be at 0. depending on the conditions. The state. NOTES Special note: Authorisation given by the UCH according to the electrical availability provided by the Protection and Switching Unit. 2 or 3.Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B NUMBER OF RCH AUTHORISED BY ALTERNATOR ET018 No faults may be present or stored.: 44 Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-141 . 1. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check in the Protection and Switching Unit that the parameter corresponds to the availability.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory.: 44 Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. will be at 0. 2 or 3. 1. depending on the conditions. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-142 . The state. NOTES Special note: Authorisation given by the injection system according to the engine load and the driver's demands.Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B NUMBER OF RCH AUTHORISED BY INJECTION ET019 No faults may be present or stored.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults. : 44 Fault finding . depending on the conditions.Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B NUMBER OF RCH'S ORDERED ET020 No faults may be present or stored. The state. NOTES Special note: The UCH controls the passenger compartment heating resistor relays according to the authorisation from the injection computers and Protection and Switching Unit.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults. 2 or 3. 1. Clear the fault memory. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-143 . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. will be at 0. ET015 "Passenger compartment ventilation". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-144 .: 44 Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. If all the requisite conditions are consistent and the states are " INACTIVE".Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B ET021 ET022 RCH CONTROL 1 RCH CONTROL 2 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Check on ET017 "Number of passenger compartment heating resistors required". contact the Techline. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. ET019 "Number of passenger compartment heating resistors authorised by injection system". ET018 "Number of passenger compartment heating resistors authorised by alternator". Check on requisite heating and ventilation parameters: heat demand via the temperature setting. : 44 Fault finding . otherwise run fault finding on the injection system. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-145 .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. contact your Techline. Deal with any other possible faults. NOTES Special note: For the rear screen de-icer to operate. Run fault finding on the air-conditioning computer. MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING Check whether the ET092 "Engine running" state is "YES". Clear the fault memory.Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CONTROL ET026 No faults may be present or stored. If the fault persists. otherwise run fault finding on the injection system. If the fault persists. the engine must be running. ET026 "Inactive" despite a rear de-icing request by the user. contact your Techline. Automatic climate control Check whether the ET092 "Engine running" state is "YES". Check whether the ET028 "Rear screen de-icer switch" is "PRESSED". AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. otherwise run fault finding on that state. Contact your Techline.: 44 Fault finding .Interpretation of states Heating / Air conditioning 87B FAST IDLE REQUEST FOR RCH ET031 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. ET031 "Inactive" whereas the state is inconsistent with normal operation of the vehicle. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-146 .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Interpretation of states AIR CONDITIONING .USER SELECTION 87B PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION ET015 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed. broken. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-147 . If the fault is still present.). etc. see unregulated air conditioning section. Perform a check on the control panel.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Apply to manual heating and ventilation. broken. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.: 44 Fault finding . ET015 "Inactive" position on the air conditioning control panel different from 0. Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 9-track connector of the control panel on Track 1 Track 32 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Deal with any other possible faults.). ET028 "Released" with press on the button.: 44 Fault finding . Apply to manual heating and ventilation. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.Interpretation of states AIR CONDITIONING . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults.). Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. see unregulated air conditioning section. Perform a check on the control panel. Contact your Techline. broken. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Air conditioning control panel black 9-track connector on track 4 track 24 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.).USER SELECTION 87B REAR SCREEN DE-ICER BUTTON ET028 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. broken. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-148 . Interpretation of states AIR CONDITIONING . Repair if necessary. Contact the Techline. broken. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults.USER SELECTION 87B AIR CONDITIONING KEY ET029 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.). Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Air conditioning control panel black 9-track connector on track 7 track 30 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-149 . Clear the fault memory.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Repair if necessary. ET029 "Released" with press on the button. see unregulated air conditioning section.). Perform a check on the control panel. Apply to manual heating and ventilation. Repair if necessary. broken. Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed.: 44 Fault finding . If the fault persists.Cold loop 87B AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST ET030 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. contact your Techline. Clear the fault memory. The engine must be running. if "INACTIVE". run fault finding on that state.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. The status should be on when requested through the heating / ventilation control panel. which should be "ACTIVE". run fault finding on that state.Interpretation of states Air conditioning . Climate control Run fault finding on the air-conditioning computer. Check whether the ET029 "Air conditioning button" state is " DEPRESSED" with one press. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-150 . Deal with any other possible faults. Manual heating and ventilation system Check whether the ET091 "Engine running" state is "YES". run fault finding on the injection system. contact your Techline. If the fault persists.: 44 Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. if it is "NO". ET030 "Inactive" despite an air conditioning request. if "RELEASED". Check the ET015 "Passenger compartment ventilation" state. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . see Section 84. Deal with any other possible faults. see Section 84. ET081 "Dipped beam" with "Park" requested control stalk position. Check the operation of the following states: ET082 "Right hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the right hand indicator. For switch test.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. If the problem persists. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" : Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B LIGHTING SETTING ET081 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. For switch test. Result 1 ET082 "Right-hand indicator request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-151 .: 44 Fault finding . Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. see Section 84. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-152 . If the problem persists. Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. For switch test.: 44 Fault finding . Result 1 ET080 "Rear screen wiper request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . Check the operation of the following states: ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place control stalk on rear screen wiper. Clear the fault memory. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" : Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Deal with any other possible faults. contact your Techline.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B ET081 CONTINUED 1 ET081 "Dipped beam" with control stalk position on side lights requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET098 "Trip Computer button" : Press the button at the end of the control stalk. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 10 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B ET081 CONTINUED 2 ET081 "Side lights" with control stalk position on main beam headlights requested. Deal with any other possible faults. For switch test.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . Clear the fault memory. contact your Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 10 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . If the problem persists. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-153 . ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" : Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. see Section 84. Result 1 ET098 "Trip Computer button" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" Depressed 4 Result 2 Released 1 Result 3 Released 4 Result 4 Depressed 1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. LIGHTING CONTROL 87B ET081 CONTINUED 3 ET081 "Dipped beam" with control stalk position on headlight flash requested. see Section 84. If the problem persists.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Check the operation of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the wiper stalk on "Park" position. Clear the fault memory. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. For switch test.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-154 . Deal with any other possible faults. Result 1 ET077 "Wiper stalk position" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" Off 4 Result 2 Intermittent facility 1 Result 3 Intermittent facility 4 Result 4 Off 1 Change the steering-column fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" : Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Result 1 ET077 "Wiper stalk position" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" Off 4 Result 2 Intermittent facility 1 Result 3 Intermittent facility 4 Result 4 Off 1 Change the steering-column fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. For switch test. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-155 . Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the operation of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the wiper stalk on "Park" position. If the problem persists. contact your Techline. Clear the fault memory.: 44 Fault finding . ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" : Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. see Section 84.Interpretation of states LIGHTING .LIGHTING CONTROL 87B ET081 CONTINUED 4 ET081 "Side lights" with control stalk position on dipped beam requested. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. ET082 "Absent" with control stalk position on rear fog light requested. Clear the fault memory. ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place the wiper stalk in rear screen wiper position. See Section 84 (test procedure). Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. contact your Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. If the problem persists. see Section 84.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B REAR FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET082 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Result 1 ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET080 "Rear screen wiper request" Present Absent Result 2 Absent Present Result 3 Absent Absent Result 4 Present Present See Chart 4 Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test. Deal with any other possible faults.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-156 . Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. For switch test. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-157 .Interpretation of states LIGHTING . If the problem persists. see Section 84.: 44 Fault finding . Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. contact your Techline. ET082 "Rear fog lights request" : Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. Result 1 ET084 "Right-hand indicator request" ET082 "Rear fog lights request" Present Absent Result 2 Absent Present Result 3 Absent Absent Result 4 Present Present See Chart 4 Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. For switch test.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B LEFT TURN SIGNAL REQUEST ET083 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. see Section 84. ET083 "Absent" with control stalk position on left-hand indicator. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the operation of the following states: ET084 "Right-hand indicator request" : Place the control stalk on the right-hand indicator. Clear the fault memory. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . For switch test. Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-158 . see Section 84. If the problem persists. contact your Techline.: 44 Fault finding .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Result 1 ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 3" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 3 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 3 See Chart 5 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. ET084 "Absent" with control stalk position on right-hand indicator. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 3" : Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET084 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. see Section 84. For switch test. g. If insulated. Repair if necessary. connector properly connected. tabs crushed. tabs crushed.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . oxidised).LIGHTING CONTROL 87B HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BUTTON ET085 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Check on fuse F7B/RL 7 7. broken. Clear the fault memory. oxidised). Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. broken.5 A of the Protection and Switching Unit. Check on 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. If continuity. connector properly connected. Check on the switch ( depressed): tracks 6 and 7. Check on the grey 8-track connector of the doors/warning lights switch (e. Replace it if necessary. contact your Techline. Power supply on track 3 Track 6 of the PPH 2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Track 3 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. ET085 "Absent" with press on the switch. Check for +12 V on track 3 and the earth and vehicle earth.g. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-159 .: 44 Fault finding . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. replace the switch. Switch track 7 Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. ET085 "Present" without press on the switch. Check on the switch ( OFF): tracks 6 and 7. If insulated. Deal with any other possible faults. broken. Power supply on track 3 Track 6 of the PPH 2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. tabs crushed.: 44 Fault finding . (connector properly connected. oxidised. Check on the grey 8-track connector of the doors/warning lights switch. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Track 3 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. If continuity.).PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. etc. replace the switch. Check the 40-track PE2 and PE1 connectors. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact your Techline. Switch track 7 Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B ET085 CONTINUED NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-160 . For switch test. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-161 . Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the problem persists. contact your Techline. See Section 84 (test procedure).: 44 Fault finding .Interpretation of states LIGHTING . see Section 84. ET111 "Absent" with control stalk position on fog light requested. ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place control stalk on rear screen wiper request. Result 1 ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET080 "Rear screen wiper request" Present Absent Result 2 Absent Present Result 3 Absent Absent Result 4 Present Present See Chart 4 Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B FRONT FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET111 NOTES No faults may be present or stored.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. see Section 84.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Deal with any other possible faults. contact your Techline. only with rain sensor. Refer to Section 84 (inspection method). ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" : Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B AUTOMATIC LIGHTING BUTTON ET113 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. If the problem persists. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.: 44 Fault finding . For switch test. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. Result 1 ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-162 . ET113 "Released" with one press on the button. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-163 . Clear the fault memory. ET115 is "Inactive" with lights lit. Deal with any other possible faults.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B REQUEST FROM LIGHT SENSOR TO SWITCH ON HEADLIGHTS ET115 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . connector poorly connected. broken. Check on the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e. oxidised. etc. ET115 is "Inactive" without lights lit. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2.). If necessary replace the sensor. Replace it if necessary. Replace the sensor. (e. tabs crushed. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. broken. oxidised.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor. Check on 15 A fuse of sensor power supply line. tabs crushed.g. etc.g. Vehicle fitted with sensor. connector properly connected.). contact the Techline. If necessary replace the sensor. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.g. If the fault is still present. tabs crushed. oxidised. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-164 . Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.: 44 Fault finding . oxidised. Deal with any other possible faults. broken. etc. broken. etc. connector poorly connected. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. tabs crushed.g.Interpretation of states LIGHTING . contact the Techline. Clear the fault memory.).PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.LIGHTING CONTROL 87B ET115 CONTINUED ET115 is "Active" without lights lit. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor. for connector poorly connected (e. Repair if necessary.). Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Repair if necessary. Interpretation of states LIGHTING . contact your Techline. replace the faulty switch. if earth is present. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.LIGHTING POWER 87B INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ET112 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. If the fault persists. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-165 .: 44 Fault finding .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check whether the footwell/floor switches operate correctly. ET112 "Inactive" when the footwells/floor are operative. If NO. Deal with any other possible faults. check the continuity and insulation of the wiring harness between the UCH and the switch connectors (see wiring diagram). Clear the fault memory. check for earth on tracks 9 and 10 of the PP3 connector of the UCH. if YES. WIPER CONTROL 87B VEHICLE SPEED PR008 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. If the fault persists. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. contact your Techline. Perform a complete diagnostic of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit.Interpretation of states WIPERS . Clear the fault memory.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-166 . ET081 "Lighting stalk position" : Place the control stalk on main beam headlights position. Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. To obtain state 081. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-167 . Clear the fault memory. For switch test. see Section 84. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator.Interpretation of states WIPERS . Result 1 ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET081 "Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights" Present Dipped headlights Result 2 Absent Main beam Result 3 Absent Dipped headlights Result 4 Present Main beam Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. see Section 84.WIPER CONTROL 87B WIPER STALK POSITION ET077 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. If the problem persists. ET077 "Slow speed" but with control stalk in "Park" position requested. For switch test. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. main beam headlights. contact your Techline.: 44 Fault finding . Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. hold the switch in position. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET077 CONTINUED 1 NOTES If no contact is detected by the UCH, slow speed is automatically selected. ET077 "Slow speed" control stalk on "Park" requested position. Change the steering-column fingertip control. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-168 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET077 CONTINUED 2 ET077 "Slow speed" but with control stalk in fast speed requested position. Check the operation of the following states: ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place the wiper stalk on a rear screen wiper request. ET081 "Intermittent speed ring position level 2": Place the intermittent speed ring on level 2. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET080 "Rear screen wiper request" ET096 "Intermittent speed ring position level 2" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 2 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 2 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-169 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET077 CONTINUED 3 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. To obtain state 081, main beam headlights, hold the switch in position. For switch test, see Section 84. ET077 "Level 2" but with intermittent speed level 1 requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET081 "Lighting stalk position" : Place the lighting stalk on "Park" position. ET081 "Lighting stalk position" : Place the lighting stalk on main beam headlights position.' Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET081 "Lighting stalk "Park" request position" ET081 "Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights" Result 2 Dipped headlights Main beam Result 3 Dipped headlights Dipped headlights Result 4 Off Dipped headlights Off Main beam Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 5 Track 12 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Steering-column fingertip control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-170 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET078 ET079 FRONT WINDSCREEN WASHER REQUEST REAR SCREEN WASHER REQUEST NOTES No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84. ET078 "Absent" with press on the control stalk. ET079 "Absent" with press on the control stalk. Check on the steering-column fingertip control 6-track connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken. Repair if necessary. Check the UCH 40-track PE1 connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 6 of the steering-column fingertip control connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control on track 1 Track 12 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (front) Steering-column fingertip control on track 2 Track 28 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (rear) Control earth on track 5 Vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the steering-column fingertip control black connector. Tracks 1 and 6 front windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. Tracks 2 and 6 rear windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. If continuity, contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-171 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B REAR SCREEN WIPER REQUEST ET080 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84. To obtain ET082 "Rear fog lights request", hold the handle. ET080 "Absent" with control stalk position on rear screen wiper requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET082 "Rear fog lights request" : Place the lighting stalk on rear fog lights. ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the front wiper stalk on fast speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET082 "Rear fog lights request" ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed" Present High speed Result 2 Absent Low speed Result 3 Absent Low speed Result 4 Present High speed See Chart 10 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-172 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B WIPER INTERMITTENT RING POSITION ET096 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84. ET096 "Level 1" but with intermittent speed level 2 requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the lighting stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the front wiper stalk on slow speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed" Present Off Result 2 Absent Low speed Result 3 Absent Off Result 4 Present Low speed Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-173 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET096 CONTINUED 1 ET096: "Level 1" but with intermittent speed level 3 requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Right-hand indicator request" : Place the lighting stalk on the right-hand indicator. ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the front wiper stalk on fast speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET084 "Right-hand indicator request" ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed" Present Low speed Result 2 Absent High speed Result 3 Absent Low speed Result 4 Present High speed Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Result 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-174 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET096 CONTINUED 2 NOTES To obtain state ET081 Main beam headlights, hold the switch in position. ET096 "Level 1" but with intermittent speed level 4 requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the windscreen wiper stalk on fast speed. ET081 "Lighting stalk position" : Place the lighting stalk on main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed" ET081 "Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights" High speed Dipped headlights Result 2 Low speed Main beam Result 3 Low speed Dipped headlights Result 4 High speed Main beam Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-175 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B REAR SCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ET097 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. ET097 "Inactive" Check the condition and connection of the white 3-track connector of the rear screen wiper (tabs crushed, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Rear screen wiper motor on track 2 Track 37 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity of the connection between connector track 3 and vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the rear screen wiper motor. Check fitting. If everything is okay, replace the wiper motor. If the fault persists, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-176 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET109 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. ET108 is "NO" when reverse gear is engaged. Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-177 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ATX GEAR SELECTOR POSITION ET108 No faults may be present or stored. NOTES Special note: This state informs of the automatic transmission gear selector position. ET108: " ABSENT", without automatic transmission, " OFF NEUTRAL", with a gear shift on position D, " NEUTRAL", gear selector lever on position N, " REVERSE", gear selector lever on position R, If there is an incorrect position, run fault finding on the automatic transmission. If the fault persists, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-178 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B WINDSCREEN WIPER REQUEST BY RAIN SENSOR ET114 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Vehicle fitted with sensor. ET114 is "Inactive" without wiper in operation. Replace the sensor. ET114 is "Inactive" with wiper in operation. Check on 15 A fuse of sensor power supply line. Replace if necessary. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-179 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL 87B ET114 CONTINUED ET114 is "Active" without wiper in operation. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor, for connector poorly connected (e.g. tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-180 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states MAIN SCREEN 87B BATTERY VOLTAGE PR001 NOTES None. Check the + battery voltage reading. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-181 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states MAIN SCREEN 87B EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002 NOTES None. Check the green 2-track connector of the temperature sensor (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-182 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states MAIN SCREEN 87B CONTROL POWER LEVEL ET014 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. Special note: This status displays the power level. ET014: " NONE", no power supply " TIME-DELAYED", when a door is opened " + ACCESSORIES", when the start switch is pressed " + after ignition" at starting or a forced + after ignition setting Contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-183 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states MAIN SCREEN 87B ONE-TOUCH WINDOW ACTIVATION ET087 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. ET087 "Active" No operation of one or more one-touch windows. Ensure the presence of earth on track 6 of the connector on the window lift suspected as faulty. Is earth present? NO Check earth at UCH output on track 7 of the 40-track PE2 connector. If there is no earth, contact your Techline. If the earth is present, ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7 Track 6 of the window lift connector Repair if necessary. YES Run complete fault finding on the window lift motor. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-184 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states MAIN SCREEN 87B ET087 CONTINUED ET087 "Inactive" No operation of one or more one-touch windows. Run the AC025 "One-touch window enabling" command, and check for earth on track 6 of the window lift connector. Is earth present? YES Operating conditions: Door open; if failure, check the door states. Power supply + accessories level raised at least once. NO Run complete fault finding on the window lift motor. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-185 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states MAIN SCREEN 87B TRIP COMPUTER BUTTON ET098 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. This state should go to ON when the control is actuated. ET098 "Released" with press on the button. Check the operation of the following states: ET082 "Rear fog lights request" : Place the lighting stalk on the fog lights position. ET081 "Lighting stalk position" : Place the lighting stalk on dipped headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1 ET082 "Rear fog lights request" ET081 "Dipped headlights wiper stalk position". Present Off Result 2 Absent Dipped headlights Result 3 Absent Off Result 4 Present Dipped headlights Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Result 1 Result 2 Result 3 AFTER REPAIR 87B-186 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS 87B OPENING ELEMENT LOCKING AC004 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing locking relay operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. Note: The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. One or more doors do not lock when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: Driver's door and RH rear door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty: If okay: With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V: Driver's door and RH rear door locks on track D, taking the earth on track C. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks on track A, taking the earth on track B. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 3, taking the earth on track 1. If okay, replace the faulty lock(s). If faulty: AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-187 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS 87B AC004 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door bolt track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Driver's door bolt track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3 Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track B RH rear door bolt track C Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track A RH rear door bolt track D Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-188 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS 87B AC005 AC006 UNLOCKING OF DOORS AND BOOT UNLOCKING OF DRIVER'S DOOR NOTES No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing unlocking relay operation. The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. The command lasts 7 seconds. One or more doors do not unlock when the commands are activated. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: Driver's door and RH rear door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty: If okay: With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V: Driver's door and RH rear door locks on track C, taking the earth on track D. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks on track B, taking the earth on track A. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 1, taking the earth on track 3. If okay, replace the faulty lock(s). If faulty: AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-189 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS 87B AC005 AC006 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door bolt track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Driver's door bolt track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3 Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track B RH rear door bolt track C Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track A RH rear door bolt track D Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-190 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS 87B CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON INDICATOR AC020 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. This command is used to see if the button has the proper power supply. The command lasts 7 seconds. The electric door lock button light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the door locking button connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the electric door lock button connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 of the electric door lock button connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track 5 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-191 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. If okay. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH.: 44 Fault finding . Clear the fault memory.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . If the fault is still present. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track A2 Track 9 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. With the command activated. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-192 . Repair if necessary. The child safety switch light does not come on when the command is activated. This command is for testing child safety indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. contact your Techline. Ensure the presence of +12 V on track A2 of the start switch connector. check for the presence of earth on track B3 of the child safety switch connector.ACCESS 87B CHILD SAFETY INDICATOR LIGHT AC029 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Clear the fault memory. perform reading of the ET087 "One-touch window enabling" state. see the treatment for this condition. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults.ACCESS 87B ONE-TOUCH WINDOW ACTIVATION AC025 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. If there is a problem.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. The command lasts 7 seconds. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-193 . This command can activate operation of the window lift motors after replacement of the UCH or a harmless loss of enabling. After activation.: 44 Fault finding . to verify a change of state. contact your Techline. it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 " Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-194 . Repair if necessary. please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 27 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 39 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . View the flashing of the card reader. broken. Deal with any other possible faults. If the range exceeds 1. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the fault is still present. etc. make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory. This command lasts 1 minute. During this command.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed.50 m. broken. There must be no faults present or stored.). Repair if necessary. etc. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.ACCESS 87B DRIVER-SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC032 Before executing this command.). contact your Techline. broken. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Clear the fault memory.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.).: 44 Fault finding .ACCESS 87B AC032 CONTINUED Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.). Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 28 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 38 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. etc. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-195 . broken. View the flashing of the card reader. make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. broken. This command lasts 1 minute. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. etc. Clear the fault memory.). Replace the aerial if necessary. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. During this command. Repair if necessary. If the range exceeds 1. There must be no faults present or stored. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-196 . broken. Repair if necessary. check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other possible faults.ACCESS 87B PASSENGER-SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033 Before executing this command. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 31 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 34 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.).: 44 Fault finding .50 m. etc. it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. contact your Techline. ACCESS 87B AC033 CONTINUED Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed.: 44 Fault finding . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Clear the fault memory.). etc. broken. contact your Techline. Deal with any other possible faults.). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Replace the aerial if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-197 . broken. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 32 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 33 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. etc. Repair if necessary. Deal with any other possible faults. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 29 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 40 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. During this command. broken. broken. Clear the fault memory. make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute.50 m. Replace the aerial if necessary. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. Repair if necessary.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding . There must be no faults present or stored. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed. it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE .ACCESS 87B BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033 Before executing this command. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed.). contact your Techline. If the range exceeds 1. View the flashing of the card reader. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-198 .). etc. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. etc. etc. If the fault is still present. broken. Clear the fault memory. make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. Ensure the insulation and continuity relative to earth of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 25 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 24 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. contact your Techline. This command lasts 1 minute. If the range goes beyond the door sill. etc.). Replace the aerial if necessary. Repair if necessary. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the internal aerials. During this command. it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. broken. View the flashing of the card reader. Deal with any other possible faults.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. There must be no faults present or stored.). please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-199 .ACCESS 87B INTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC034 Before executing this command.: 44 Fault finding .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. broken.ACCESS 87B AC034 CONTINUED 1 Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. broken. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 35 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 36 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. etc. contact your Techline.). If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Deal with any other possible faults.). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-200 . etc. Replace the aerial if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . Replace the aerial if necessary.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed. Clear the fault memory.: 44 Fault finding . contact your Techline. etc. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-201 .).Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 26 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 37 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. etc. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Repair if necessary. broken. If the fault is still present. broken. Deal with any other possible faults.ACCESS 87B AC034 CONTINUED 2 Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed. NOTES Special Note This command is for running diagnostics on the aerials in open circuit or short circuit at +12 V . perform fault reading. Deal with any other possible faults. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. This command lasts 1 minute.ACCESS 87B SENDER AERIAL DIAGNOSTICS AC037 No faults should be present or stored.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. refer to the processing of this (these) fault(s).Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Clear the fault memory. If one (or more) fault(s) concerning the aerials appear(s). UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-202 .: 44 Fault finding . After activating the command. Blank card Card assigned to vehicle Type of card Card frequency (MHz) NO NO Hands-free or simple 433 This card does not belong to the vehicle. NO YES Hands-free or simple 433 Blank card Card assigned to vehicle Type of card Card frequency (MHz) NO NO Hands-free or simple 433 This card does not belong to the vehicle. Normal operation Blank card Card assigned to vehicle Type of card Card frequency (MHz) Abnormal operation Blank card Card assigned to vehicle Type of card Card frequency (MHz) YES NO Hands-free or simple 433 This card is blank.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.ACCESS 87B CARD CONTROL SC005 This command can indicate whether the card is blank. Blank card Card assigned to vehicle Type of card Card frequency (MHz) YES YES Hands-free or simple 433 Contact your Techline. the card belongs to another type of vehicle. the type of card and the card frequency. you can carry out the assignment procedure. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-203 .: 44 Fault finding . the card belongs to the Mégane II vehicle type.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . the card's assignment to the vehicle. check for the presence of earth on track 29 of the instrument panel. The command lasts 7 seconds. This command is for testing immobiliser indicator light operation. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-204 .Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Check the condition and connection of the instrument panel connector. If the fault is still present. replace the instrument panel.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Instrument panel track 29 Track 29 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . Clear the fault memory.PROTECTION 87B ENGINE IMMOBILISER INDICATOR LIGHT AC003 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. The immobiliser indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. Deal with any other possible faults. contact your Techline. Repair if necessary. If okay. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. The instrument panel must be seen present on the multiplex network. With the command activated. Check the condition and connection of the start switch connector. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the start switch connector. Repair if necessary. check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the start switch connector. This command is for testing start switch lighting operation.: 44 Fault finding . If okay. Deal with any other possible faults. replace the switch.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. With the command activated.PROTECTION 87B START SWITCH LIGHTING AC026 NOTES No faults should be present or stored.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Repair if necessary. The start switch light does not come on when the command is activated. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track 4 Track 13 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. The command lasts 7 seconds. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-205 . contact your Techline. If the fault is still present. If okay. With the command activated. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-206 . replace the card holder. This command is for testing card reader operation. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the card holder connector. The command lasts 7 seconds. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH.: 44 Fault finding .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. contact your Techline.PROTECTION 87B CARD HOLDER LIGHTING AC024 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Card holder track 5 Track 25 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If okay: If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the card holder connector. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Card holder track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. Clear the fault memory. contact your Techline. check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the card holder connector.Interpretation of commands KEYLESS VEHICLE . Repair if necessary. The card holder light does not come on when the command is activated. Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. check for the presence of +12 V on track A5 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. With the command activated. NO YES YES AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. AC016 NOTES Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors.Interpretation of commands Heating / Air conditioning 87B RCH RELAY 1. The command lasts 7 seconds. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty. No faults may be present or stored. Clear the fault memory. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. Deal with any other possible faults. Check that the resistances between tracks 2 and 3 and between tracks 3 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector are equal to infinity. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. check for the presence of +12 V on track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. NO With the command activated.: 44 Fault finding .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-207 . Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. With the command activated.Interpretation of commands Heating / Air conditioning 87B AC016 CONTINUED Contact your Techline. check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1. NO Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 11 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. UCH B/C 84 version 2 AFTER REPAIR 87B-208 . NO With the command activated. NO YES Check for the presence of +12 V on track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 NO Check the presence. If everything is okay. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. the condition and connection of the F7 fuse on the power supply fuse board. check for the presence of earth on track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Check for the presence of +12 V on track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 7 of the power supply fuse board. replace the relay.: 44 Fault finding . : 44 Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. No faults may be present or stored. Deal with any other possible faults. check for the presence of +12 V on track B4 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. NO With the command activated. With the command activated. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-209 . This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. check for the presence of +12 V on tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. NO YES Check that the resistances between tracks 1 and 2 and between tracks 4 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty. The command lasts 7 seconds. Ensure the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B4 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of commands Heating / Air conditioning 87B RCH RELAY 2 AC017 NOTES Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. NO Check the presence. If everything is okay.: 44 Fault finding . NO Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 11 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. NO With the command activated. replace the relay. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 9 of the power supply fuse board. check for the presence of earth on track 32 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Clear the fault memory. the condition and connection of the F9 fuse on the power supply fuse board. With the command activated. NO YES Check for the presence of +12 V on track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Deal with any other possible faults.Interpretation of commands Heating / Air conditioning 87B AC017 CONTINUED Contact your Techline. check for the presence of earth on track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. YES Check for the presence of +12 V on track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. UCH B/C 84 version 2 AFTER REPAIR 87B-210 . : 44 Fault finding . If the fault is still present. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. replace the control panel.USER SELECTION 87B AIR-CONDITIONING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT Manual heating and ventilation only. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Deal with any other possible faults. Apply the after ignition. and the air conditioning control panel should light up. This command is for testing air-conditioning indicator light operation. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-211 . Repair if necessary. If okay. The command lasts 7 seconds. contact your Techline. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Control panel track 6 Track 26 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. The indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.Interpretation of commands AIR CONDITIONING . check for the presence of +12 V on track 6 of the heater control panel connector. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. With the command activated.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. AC015 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. The rear screen de-icer indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. This command is for testing rear screen de-icer indicator light operation. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-212 .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Deal with any other possible faults. The command lasts 7 seconds. AC019 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary.: 44 Fault finding . Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Control panel track 4 Track 38 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. With the command activated.Interpretation of commands AIR CONDITIONING . If okay. Apply after ignition. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector.USER SELECTION 87B REAR SCREEN DE-ICER INDICATOR LIGHT Except with climate control. check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the heater control panel connector. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. contact your Techline. If the fault is still present. Clear the fault memory. Repair if necessary. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B REAR FOG LIGHTS AC009 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing fog lights operation. Check the bulbs. The rear fog lights do not come on when the command is activated. Left-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V : 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 1 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3- and 5-door saloon: track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: track 1 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR 87B-213 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B AC009 CONTINUED Right-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 4 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V : 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 6 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3- and 5-door saloon: track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: track 6 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-214 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B LH DIRECTION INDICATOR AC022 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition. Check the bulbs. The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the LH rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s). AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-215 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B LH direction indicator AC022 Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-216 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B RH DIRECTION INDICATOR AC023 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition. Check the bulbs. The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the RH rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-217 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B AC023 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-218 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B INTERIOR LIGHTS AC021 NOTES No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing interior lights operation. Check the bulbs. The interior lights do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the interior lights connectors. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of each interior light. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of each interior light. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the interior light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light Track 1 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-219 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER 87B FOOTWELL/FLOOR LIGHTS AC027 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing footwell/floor lights operation. Check the bulbs. Check the condition and connection of the footwell lighting connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of each footwell light. If okay: If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 1 of each interior light Track 9 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 2 of each footwell light. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light Track 10 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-220 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands WIPERS - WIPER POWER 87B REAR SCREEN WIPER AC007 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing rear wiper operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of the rear screen wiper connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the rear screen wiper connector. If everything is okay, replace the rear screen wiper motor. Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Motor track 1 Track 37 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-221 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands WIPERS - WIPER POWER 87B HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 1 AC030 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing headlight washer 1 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. Check for the presence of earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? YES Faulty on track 1 Faulty on track 2 Carry out the fault finding procedure for command AC031 Headlight washer relay 2 With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? YES Replace the headlight washer pump. NO Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 1 connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track A4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-222 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands WIPERS - WIPER POWER 87B AC030 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 1. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on tracks A2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track A2 Track 13 of UCH connector PE3. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-223 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands WIPERS - WIPER POWER 87B HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 2 AC031 NOTES No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing headlight washer 2 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. Check for the presence of earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? YES Faulty on track 2 Faulty on track 1 Carry out the fault finding procedure for command AC030 Headlight washer relay 1 With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? YES Replace the headlight washer pump. NO Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 2 connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track B4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3 Track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-224 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands WIPERS - WIPER POWER 87B AC031 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 2. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on tracks B2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track B2 Track 14 of UCH connector PE3. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-225 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts NOTES 87B These customer complaints should only be investigated after a complete check has been run using the diagnostic tool. CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER Chart 1 LIGHTING NO REAR FOG LIGHT NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR NO LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR NO SIDE LIGHTS NO DIPPED HEADLIGHTS NO MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS Chart 2 Chart 3 Chart 4 Chart 5 Chart 6 Chart 7 Chart 8 WIPERS, WASHERS NO REAR SCREEN WIPER NO REAR PARK POSITION NO WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION NO WINDSCREEN WIPER NO FRONT AND REAR SCREEN WASHER NO HEADLIGHT WASHERS Chart 9 Chart 10 Chart 11 Chart 12 Chart 13 Chart 14 WINDOW LIFT NO AUTOMATIC WINDOW RAISING AT SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE NO AUTOMATIC RAISING OF ONE OF THE FRONT WINDOWS BY A SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE Chart 15 Chart 16 UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-226 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B NOTES These customer complaints should only be investigated after a complete check has been run using the diagnostic tool. CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS NO AUTOMATIC RAISING OF ONE OF THE REAR WINDOWS BY A SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE PASSENGER'S WINDOW NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE DRIVER'S WINDOW NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE LH REAR WINDOW NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE RH REAR WINDOW ELECTRIC WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE NO SUNROOF CLOSING AT SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE NO SUNROOF OPENING OR CLOSING WHATEVER THE USER'S REQUEST NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 1 NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 2 NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 3 NO FOLDING-IN OR FOLDING-OUT OF ONE OR MORE DOOR MIRRORS NO ADJUSTMENT ON ONE OF THE TWO DOOR MIRRORS Chart 17 Chart 18 Chart 19 Chart 20 Chart 21 Chart 22 Chart 23 Chart 24 Chart 25 Chart 26 Chart 27 POWER NO + ACCESSORIES + AFTER IGNITION REMAINS BLOCKED Chart 28 Chart 29 UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-227 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the condition of the power fuses on the battery's positive terminal. Check the battery voltage. Repair if necessary. Is it possible to switch on the ignition or another power supply level? YES Refer to Chart 1 in multiplexing section "88B". Has the fault disappeared? NO NO Perform locking/unlocking. Did locking/unlocking operate? Refer to the "fault processing, multiplex network inoperative" part of the multiplexing section "88B". YES NO Check the condition and connection of connector PP1. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 1 of the connector PP1 and on track 2 of connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on tracks 3 and 4 of connector PP1. Are the power supplies okay? YES NO Contact your Techline. Repair the faulty connections and fuses up to the battery, checking the passenger compartment relay and fuse boxes and the power supply fuse board. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-228 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 2 No rear fog lights NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition? YES Check state 082 "Rear fog lights request" by actuating the control stalk. Is it present? YES Run command AC009 "Rear fog lights". Is the fog light controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. NO Replace the bulbs. NO Run fault finding on the state. NO Run fault finding on the command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-229 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 3 No right-hand direction indicator NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition? YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply? NO Check state 084 "Right-hand indicator request" by actuating the control stalk. Is it present? YES Run the AC023 "Right-hand indicator" command; is the right-hand indicator controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. NO Replace the bulbs. Check the connector for oxidation. Run fault finding on the state. NO Run fault finding on the command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-230 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 4 No left direction indicator NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition? YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply? NO Check state 083 "Left-hand indicator request" by actuating the control stalk. Is it present? YES Run the AC022 "Left-hand indicator" command; is the left-hand indicator controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. NO Replace the bulbs. Check the connector for oxidation. NO Run fault finding on the state. NO Run fault finding on the command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-231 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 5 No side lights NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition? YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply? NO Check state 081 "Lighting switch position". Is the side lights request on "side lights "? YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit. NO Replace the bulbs. Check the connector for oxidation. NO Run fault finding on the state. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-232 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 6 No dipped headlights NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition? YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply? NO Check state 081 "Lighting switch position". Is the dipped beam headlight request on "dipped beam"? YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit. NO Replace the bulbs. Check the connector for oxidation. NO Run fault finding on the state. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-233 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 7 No main beam headlights NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition? YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply? NO Check state 081 "Lighting stalk position": is the main beam headlight request on "main beam headlight "? YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit. NO Replace the bulbs. Check the connector for oxidation. NO Run fault finding on the state. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-234 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 8 No front fog lights NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check state 111 "Front fog lights request". Is it present? YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit. Run fault finding on the state. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-235 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts 87B Chart 9 No rear screen wiper NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check state 080 "Rear screen wiper request" for present. Is it present? YES Run command AC007 "Rear screen wiper". Check the power supply of the wiper motor: On track 2 for +12 V. On track 3 for earth. Is the rear wiper controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. NO Run fault finding on the state. NO Run fault finding on the command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-236 Check state 097 "Rear screen wiper park position" for absent. YES Run fault finding on the state.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Is it absent? NO Contact the Techline.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 10 No rear screen wiper park position NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-237 . AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . Is it present? YES Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. Check state 077 "Wiper stalk position" Park position request. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic . NO Run fault finding on the state. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-238 .Fault finding charts 87B Chart 11 No windscreen wiper park position NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check whether state 114 "Wiper request by rain sensor" is "active". Check state 077 "Wiper stalk position".: 44 Diagnostic . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-239 . AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. YES Protection and Switching Unit fault finding.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 12 No windscreen wiper NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. is the position on "intermittent wiping". "slow speed" or "fast speed"? NO Run fault finding on the state. NO Run fault finding on the state.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. If everything is okay: Replace the windscreen washer pump. is earth present? YES Check the hoses. NO Run fault finding on the state. is +12 V present? YES Check for an earth on track 1 of the window washer pump.: 44 Diagnostic . NO AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 13 No front and rear screen washer NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-240 . Check the continuity and insulation of track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector. NO Check the continuity and insulation of track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector. Windscreen washer Check state 078 "Windscreen washer request". Is it present? YES Check for +12 V on track 2 of the window washer pump when activated. : 44 Diagnostic . Is it present? YES Check for +12 V on track 1 of the window washer pump when activated. NO Check the continuity and insulation of track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector. is +12 V present? YES Check for an earth on track 2 of the window washer pump. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-241 .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. is earth present? YES Check the hoses. If everything is okay: Replace the windscreen washer pump.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 13 CONTINUED Rear screen washer Check state 079 "Windscreen washer request". NO Check the continuity and insulation of track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector. NO Run fault finding on the state. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. YES Run commands AC030 "Headlight washer relay 1" and AC031 "Headlight relay 2" Do the commands operate? YES Check the condition of the pipes and nozzles. Repair if necessary. Check whether dipped headlights state ET081 "Lighting stalk position" is on side lights. NO Run fault finding on the state. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-242 . YES Check whether dipped headlights state ET078 "Windscreen washer request" is present on side lights. NO Run fault finding on the command.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 14 No headlight washers NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . NO Run fault finding on the state. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check power supply on track 4 of the earth modules Repair if necessary.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 15 No automatic window raising at second press on card or handle NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check manual operation of the four windows: Do they operate by 50 mm steps? YES Redo programming of the four windows. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-243 . NO Check on 25 A and 40 A fuses.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic . AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-244 . Chart 20. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Open the 4 windows and with the card request automatic raising.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 16 No automatic raising of one of the front windows by a second press on card or handle NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Chart 19. Redo programming of the four windows. and deal with that which corresponds. NO Go over the list of symptoms.: 44 Diagnostic . Is there a confirmation of the fault? YES YES Do the manual controls cause raising by 50 mm steps? NO Check correct operation of the one-touch window. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-245 . and deal with that which corresponds. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 17 No automatic raising of one of the rear windows by a second press on card or handle NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Chart 21. Is there a confirmation of the fault? YES YES Do the manual controls cause raising by 50 mm steps? NO Check correct operation of the one-touch window. Redo programming of the four windows. Open the 4 windows and with the card request automatic raising.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. NO Go over the list of symptoms.: 44 Diagnostic . Chart 22. Check. Passenger switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-246 .Fault finding charts 87B Chart 18 No raising or lowering of the passenger's one-touch window NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Passenger switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver switch. NO Replace the switch.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. whether the window lift operates.: 44 Diagnostic . YES Check on switch according to the method (Section 84A). Passenger switch on track B1 Track 3 of the black connector of the driver switch. Repair if necessary. on the driver's control panel. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Passenger switch on track A2 Track 1 of the motor. Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window-lift motor.: 44 Diagnostic . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-247 . NO Replace the switch. Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Passenger switch on track B1. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Run command AC025. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Passenger switch on track A3. Run fault finding on this command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Run fault finding on this state. YES Replace the engine. YES Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor. Is it active? YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. YES Check on state 087 "One-touch window enabling".PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Track 1 of the motor.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 18 CONTINUED Check on switch according to the method 84A. Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track 2 of the motor. Is it active? YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. YES Check on state 087 "One-touch window enabling".Fault finding charts 87B Chart 19 No raising or lowering of the driver's one-touch window NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check the fuses and change them if necessary. YES Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window-lift motor. YES Replace the engine. Repair if necessary YES Check for earth on track 3 of the window lift motor. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black connector of the driver switch track 5 Track 2 of the motor. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-248 . Replace the switch. Repair if necessary NO Run command AC025. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Repair if necessary.: 44 Diagnostic . NO Run fault finding on this state. Run fault finding on this command.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. White connector of the driver switch track 4 Track 1 of the motor. YES Check on switch according to the method (Section 84A). LH rear switch on track B1 Track 5 of the white connector of the driver control panel. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. YES Check on indicator light and whether state ET089 is present. whether the window lift operates. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: LH rear switch on track B2 Track 1 of the motor. LH rear switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor. Check.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. LH rear switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver control panel. Repair if necessary. NO Run fault finding on this state. Check on switch according to the method 84A. on the driver's control panel.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 20 No raising or lowering of the one-touch LH rear window NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-249 . LH rear switch on track A2 Track B1 of the child safety switch connector. Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window lift motor. Repair if necessary. NO Run fault finding on this state. NO Replace the switch. Run command AC025. Check on state 87 "One-touch window enabling". YES Replace the engine. Is it active? YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track A3 of the LH rear switch. Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Track B1 of the LH rear switch.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-250 . and repair if necessary. Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track 2 of the motor. Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor and the vehicle. Run fault finding on this command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Track 1 of the motor. Repair if necessary.: 44 Diagnostic . Check on switch according to the method 84A.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 20 CONTINUED NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. : 44 Diagnostic . on the driver control panel. Check on switch according to the method 84A. YES Check whether state ET089 is present. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-251 .Fault finding charts 87B Chart 21 No raising or lowering of the one-touch RH rear window NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: RH rear switch on track B2 Track 1 of the motor RH rear switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor RH rear switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver switch RH rear switch on track B1 Track 5 of the white connector of the driver switch RH rear switch on track A2 Track B1 of the child safety switch connector Repair if necessary. the window lift operates. Check whether.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. NO Run fault finding on this state. Run fault finding on this command. Repair if necessary. Run command AC025. Is it active? YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window lift motor. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Repair if necessary.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 21 CONTINUED NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. YES Replace the engine. Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor and the vehicle. and repair if necessary. NO Replace the switch. Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track 2 of the motor. NO Run fault finding on this state. Check on state 87 "One-touch window enabling". Check on switch according to the method 84A. White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Track 1 of the motor.: 44 Diagnostic .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-252 . Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track A3 of the RH rear switch. Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Track B1 of the RH rear switch. Fault finding charts 87B Chart 22 The window lifts are not working NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . Check the earth. NO Check the continuity and insulation of the connection. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Is there an earth? YES Check for +12 V on the grey connector. Repair if necessary. NO Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections. If everything is OK. Is there + 12 V? Is there an earth? YES Check the runners. Repair if necessary. On tracks A1 and B2 of the brown connector on passenger's side. If everything is okay: Replace the faulty switch. NO Check on the 40 A fuse of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. Is there + 12 V? YES Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector. replace the faulty electric motor. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-253 .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection. Check for +12 V on track 5 of the white connector on driver's side. Fault finding charts 87B Chart 23 No sunroof closing at second press on card or on handle switch NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Process that corresponding to the fault. Contact your Techline. Redo programming. Open the sunroof and actuate the card or the handle. YES End. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Replace it if necessary. Repair if necessary. Ensure +12 V on track 7. Perform the test with a second card or the handle.: 44 Diagnostic . YES Does central door locking operate with the card? YES NO NO Go over the list of symptoms. Is the fault still present? NO Run complete fault finding on the locking/unlocking system. Repair if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-254 . YES Repair the first card. NO Check the 20 A fuse. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connection: sunroof motor track 9 Track 7 of the PE2 connector of the UCH.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. If the fault persists. Replace the switch. change the sunroof motor.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 24 No sunroof opening or closing whatever the user's request NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-255 .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Repair if necessary. Is there +12 V ? YES NO Check for earth on track 10 of the motor and the vehicle body. Check for +12 V on track 7 of the motor. Replace it if necessary. Check the 20A fuse. Sunroof switch on track 5 Track 2 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 1 Track 1 of the motor.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 25 No sunroof opening in position 1 No sunroof opening in position 2 No sunroof opening in position 3 NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. If the fault persists. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch on track 3 Track 4 of the motor.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-256 . Replace the switch if necessary. replace the electric motor.: 44 Diagnostic . AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Sunroof switch on track 2 Track 3 of the motor. Is there + 12 V? Check the fuse. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 10 Door mirror switch track 1 Track 9 of the left-hand door mirror Track 7 of the right-hand door mirror Track 7 of the left-hand door mirror Track 9 of the right-hand door mirror Replace the door mirror(s).: 44 Diagnostic . Replace it if necessary.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 26 No folding-in or folding-out of one or more door mirrors NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 5 and 1 for folding-in Tracks 4 and 10 Tracks 4 and 1 for folding-out Tracks 5 and 10 Replace the switch if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check for earth.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Check for +12 V on the door mirror switch control. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-257 . : 44 Diagnostic . Door mirror switch track B4 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track A1 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 27 No adjustment on one of the door mirrors NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Tracks A1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward. Replace the door mirror. Replace the switch if necessary. Non-retractable door mirror. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Tracks A3/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Tracks A1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks A3/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track A3 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-258 . Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track B2 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B4 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Right-hand door mirror.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 27 CONTINUED 1 Non-retractable door mirror. Replace the door mirror. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-259 . Tracks B2/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks B2/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Door mirror switch track B1 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Replace the switch if necessary. Repair if necessary. Tracks B1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward. Tracks B1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . Tracks 9/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward. Tracks 9/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Tracks 7/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Replace the door mirror.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 27 CONTINUED 2 Retractable door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 7/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Door mirror switch track 3 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary. Door mirror switch track 9 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror.: 44 Diagnostic .PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-260 . Left-hand door mirror. Replace the switch if necessary. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Tracks 6/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Door mirror switch track 8 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 6/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Right-hand door mirror. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Door mirror switch track 6 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Replace the door mirror.: 44 Diagnostic . Replace the switch if necessary. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-261 . Repair if necessary.Fault finding charts 87B Chart 27 CONTINUED 3 Retractable door mirror. Tracks 8/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. Tracks 8/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward. : 44 Diagnostic . Card perceived as absent? NO Check on state ET075 "+ Accessories present".Fault finding charts 87B Chart 28 No + accessories NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. is the state " Depressed" with action on the switch? YES Check that the card is not perceived as absent by means of the messages on the instrument panel. Check on state ET070 "Start switch". UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-262 . is the state " YES" with action on the switch? NO Run fault finding on the state. NO Check the card with command SC005 and run fault finding on this command. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. NO Run fault finding on the state. Fault finding charts 87B Chart 29 + After ignition remains blocked NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 Diagnostic . NO Run fault finding on the state. UCH B/C 84 version 2 87B-263 . is the state " Depressed" with action on the switch? YES Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check on state ET070 "Start switch".PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Proceed as follows: Switch on the forced + after ignition feed: – with the vehicle card in the card reader. 4F. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II. – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations.Introduction 87B 1. 1681 3. Universal bornier UCH_V44_PRELI/UCH_V48_PRELI/UCH_V4C_PRELI/ UCH_V4D_PRELI/UCH_V4F_PRELI/UCH_V50_PRELI 87B-1 . 4D.: 48. Switching off the forced + after ignition feed: Press the start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds). Dialogys.: 44. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this document): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool). paper version. 44 2. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 50. 4C.187B UCH Vdiag No. Diagnostic tools type: – CLIP Special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 4F. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM). – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not present. 4D. 4C. REMINDER Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle computers. check that the + after ignition feed has cut (computer indicator lights on the instrument panel go out). switch on the forced + after ignition feed. Scénic II Function concerned: UCH Name of computer: UCH Vdiag No. 48. wear). 4D. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display. – the connectors on these lines (corrosion. the fault is present.). Customer complaints . Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation. bent pins.: 44. and which may correspond to a customer complaint. 4F. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied.Fault finding chart When the test using the diagnostic tool is correct but the customer complaint is still present. consult the corresponding fault finding page. 48. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. – the resistance of the component detected as faulty. check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault.Introduction 87B Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since. The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). Therefore. or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. For a stored fault . etc. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. 87B-2 . the fault must be dealt with by customer complaint. Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. For a present fault. 48.Introduction 87B 4.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4D. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no See ALP no. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 1 yes Read the faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults yes Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present no Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log 87B-3 . 4F. UCH Vdiag No. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. 4D. try to locate the source of the fault. Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. to + 12 V or to another wire. 4F. 4C. 87B-4 . Look for signs of oxidation. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs.: 44. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. 48. Look for a short circuit to earth. insulation and wiring harness routing. as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Apply light pressure to the connectors.Introduction 87B 4. Carefully check the fuses. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical measurements of voltage. then section by section. If a fault is detected. Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. insulation and resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines. especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). resistance and insulation are generally correct. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Continuity. use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Twist the wiring harness. repair or replace the wiring harness. If there is a change in status. 4F. – Switch off all the electrical consumers. and enables better analysis of the parts removed. Wait at least 1 minute for the electronic systems to switch off. – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested.Introduction 87B 5. FAULT FINDING LOG IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. 4C. which should be completed during the procedure. Procedure for disconnecting the battery: – Switch off the ignition. 48. Disconnect the battery.UCH Vdiag No. starting with the negative terminal. The FAULT FINDING LOG. enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – check that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. 4D. – use the appropriate tools.: 44. – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87B-5 . IMPORTANT! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. 6. : Other documentation Title and/or part number: FD 15 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .: MR Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.page to print or photocopy .FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1/2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool Revision CLIP OPTIMA 5800 NXR 2 0 ● Customer complaint 875 1194 Door locking/unlocking fault Indicator light comes on 1070 Lights fault 1075 Wiper fault Other Your comments: ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005 009 While driving Sudden fault 010 Gradual deterioration 004 Intermittently Other Your comments: ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of fault finding manual: Fault finding manual No. page to print or photocopy . Present Stored Fault name Specification ● Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no. Supplier No. Parameter name Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: Additional information ● What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments: FD 15 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ● Page 2/2 Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system Part 1 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 5 part no. Software version Calibration No.page to print or photocopy . VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Program No. 4/ Lighting function This function is divided into two sub-functions. 4C. In this function. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Tyre management and Tyre display (see 35B. Heating and Cold loop (see: 62A. 87B-8 . Protection and Starting. 5/ Tyre function This function is divided into three sub-functions which are: Tyre reception. 4D. 4F. Air conditioning ). 2/ Air-conditioning function This function is divided into three sub-functions.System operation 87B General operation: The UCH is involved in the following five functions (shared between several computers): 1/ Access-safety function This function is divided into three sub-functions: Access.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 3/ Wiping function This function is divided into two sub-functions. the UCH manages the triggering of the passenger compartment heating resistor control relays. 48. which are: User selection. which are: Wiper control and Wiper power. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). as well as the heated rear screen and air conditioning indicator lights. which are: Lighting control and Lighting power. Protection and Starting. – hands-free locking (by pressing the handle closure switch or the switch located in the tailgate badge). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . – deadlocking. 1 1. If the vehicle is fitted with: – electric child safety locking. by cutting the optical beam on one of the door handles.System operation 87B The ACCESS/SAFETY function is divided into three sub-functions: Access. – locking/unlocking by pressing the central door locking button.1 Principle of locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the Renault card: 1 Opening element locking motors 2 Encrypted 433 MHz RF connection (315 Mhz in Japan) 3 Card button pressed 87B-9 . If the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free function: – hands-free unlocking of the entire vehicle. 48. There is no master Renault card. – selective opening element unlocking. 4C. The maximum number of Renault cards which can be programmed on the vehicle is 4. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. – locking via the Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID). 1. – automatic relocking.1 ACCESS/SAFETY FUNCTION ACCESS SUBFUNCTION The Megane II allows: – locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the Renault card (remote control function).: 44.1. 4F. – the valet card function. – hands-free tailgate-only unlocking by pressing the tailgate opening switch. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. 87B-10 . The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). When the unlocking button is pressed. if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . the UCH requests the locking motors to unlock. – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. – No card in the card reader. 4D.System operation 87B a/ Main components of the function providing access through the pressing of a button on the Renault card: – Renault card. b/ Unlocking using the unlock button on the card The vehicle may be unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the Renault card (open padlock symbol).315 If the UCH authenticates the Renault card. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – opening element locking motors.315 If the UCH authenticates the Renault card.UCH Vdiag No. ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. 4F. The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). Statuses available for the unlocking function: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received. – No doors open. Pressing the lock button on the Renault card starts the vehicle locking procedure. c/ Locking using the lock button on the card The vehicle may be locked by pressing the lock button on the Renault card (closed padlock symbol). When the locking button is pressed. the UCH requests the locking motors to lock. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – UCH. Pressing the lock button on the Renault card starts the vehicle unlocking procedure.: 44. the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). 48. if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). 315 If the UCH authenticates the Renault card. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card's radio frequency signal (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised.: 44. d) Boot-only locking/unlocking by pressing the "toggle tailgate status" button: The boot alone may be locked/unlocked by pressing the toggle tailgate status button on the Renault card (open tailgate symbol). The statuses available for the boot-only unlocking/locking function (and for the opening rear screen if fitted) are: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received. Pressing the toggle tailgate status button on the Renault card starts the tailgate-only locking/unlocking procedure. the user can access his vehicle using the emergency insert. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. The statuses of the door detected by the UCH as open or closed are displayed using statuses ET053 Driver's door.UCH Vdiag No. ET051 Rear left-hand door. The status of the request to open the rear screen (if fitted) can be checked using status ET062 Rear screen opening request. if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). When the toggle tailgate status button is pressed. The open or closed status of the opening rear screen (if fitted) as seen by the UCH can be checked using status ET041 Opening rear screen .System operation 87B Statuses available for the locking function: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received. a table of 1024 accepted codes has been created. the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). To allow for the case where the signal is not received by the UCH. 87B-11 . The open or closed status of the boot as seen by the UCH can be checked using status ET050 Tailgate/boot. Resynchronisation is performed when the vehicle is started with the card in the card-reader. ET052 Rear right-hand door. – No card in the card reader. 4F. 4D. it will authorise or inhibit opening of the boot depending on the previous status (locked or unlocked). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). e/ Principle of the identifier code: The Renault card is authenticated by the UCH by transmission of a "rolling code" for the access function. The status of the tailgate opening request is visible using status ET062 Tailgate opening request. ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. that is the customer has pressed more than 1024 times outside the reception zone. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ET050 Tailgate/boot and ET041 Opening rear screen (if fitted to the vehicle). ET042 Passenger's door. 4C. If the Renault card does become desynchronised (code transmitted by the Renault card is outside the acceptance limit of the UCH). The UCH and the Renault card can become desynchronised if the limit of 1024 possible presses is exceeded. or by removing/replacing the card battery. The code transmitted automatically increases incrementally each time the card is pressed. 48. 3 Principle of Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID system): The RAID function locks the vehicle as soon as the speed signal is above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) . The RAID function can be activated or deactivated by pressing and holding the electric door-locking button for approximately 5 seconds while the engine is running. the UCH will not authorise vehicle locking and no indicators will flash to warn the user.1.: 44. 4D. In fact. etc. 1.UCH Vdiag No. 87B-12 . Locking is indicated by 2 flashes of the direction indicators. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . the vehicle is not locked as only the boot is locked. This button has no effect if the vehicle has been locked using the card in hands-free or manual mode. in this case.System operation 87B f/ Display: Unlocking is indicated by 1 flash of the direction indicators. 1. 1. When using the "tailgate status toggle" switch. 48. Multiplexing). Command mode AC020 Electric door-locking button indicator light checks the operation of the electric doorlocking button indicator light. (see 88B.1.4 Principle of automatic relocking: Automatic relocking takes place 2 minutes after hands-free or card unlocking if unlocking is not followed by the opening of a door. Activation or deactivation of the RAID function can be viewed using status ET043 RAID function authorisation by electric door-locking button. If the electric central door-locking button is pressed when one door is unlocked it causes all the doors to lock and the warning light to come on.). Note: Unlocking can be performed by the UCH if the airbag computer has detected an impact or if it is faulty (not recognised on the multiplex network. internal fault. Status ET044 Electric door-locking button may be used to check that the button is operating correctly. display is not performed if a toggle request is made when the vehicle is completely unlocked. Acknowledgement is indicated by a buzzer. If one of the opening elements is detected as open when the request for locking the vehicle is made. 4C. 4F.2 Principle of locking/unlocking by pressing the central door locking button: This button is used to lock/unlock the vehicle while stationary or moving.1. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48.UCH Vdiag No. it requests unlocking of the opening elements or boot-only locking motors. 4F. If the Renault card recognises the code.: 44. the UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials and interrogates the access zone (driverside aerial interrogated first). – the locking switches incorporated in the door handles. 4C. If the Renault card is in the access zone. If the Renault card is not hands-free disabled. 4D. If the UCH authenticates the Renault card. – opening element locking motors.5 Principle of hands-free locking/unlocking: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Passenger side optical sensors Driver side optical sensors Handle and boot locking switches Boot/rear screen opening switch Access aerials Opening element locking motors RENAULT Card a/ Main components of the hands-free function: – Renault card. the UCH sends a 125 kHz encrypted signal over the access aerials (initial interrogation is of the aerials on the side of the handle activated). – optical presence sensors located in the door handles.System operation 87B 1. – access aerials integrated in the door handles and the tailgate. – UCH. b/ Hands-free unlocking When a hand is detected inside a handle (interruption of one of the optical beams) or a press on the boot opening switch is detected. – the boot-only opening/opening element locking switch integrated in the boot badge. Hands-free unlocking of the entire vehicle by stage: 1) 2) 3) 4) The user places his/her hand around one of the door handles and the optical sensor detects a presence. 87B-13 .1. it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. it responds to the UCH using a 433 MHz encrypted signal. The UCH confirms that the Renault card code is correct and activates the locking motors. : 44. 4F. The status of the request to open the rear screen can be checked using status ET062 Rear screen opening request. but the card left in the vehicle will temporarily lose its hands-free access and hands-free starting functions until the next unlocking operation (inhibition). it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the Renault card is in the access zone (initial interrogation on the boot side. the UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials. A vehicle card detected by the access aerials. the card is no longer disabled if it is detected by any aerial during unlocking). The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. Commands AC032 Test driver's side external aerials. The AC037 Transmitting aerials fault finding command interrogates the aerials for an update of potential faults. the UCH requests the locking motors to lock. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. If. ET057 Passenger side front/rear optical sensors and boot opening switch status ET060 Tailgate locking button. Operation of the sensors can be viewed using statuses ET055 Driver's side front optical sensor. The status of the tailgate opening request is visible using status ET061 Tailgate opening request. 4D.System operation 87B Conditions required: – – – – Interruption of one of the optical beams in one of the handles or pressing the boot or rear screen opening switch. locking will be possible. the UCH orders unlocking of the boot only. Statuses available for the unlocking function: The UCH receives the unlocking request when an optical beam is cut on one of the handles. 48. These commands are used to check the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and will operate even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. d/ Hands-free locking When a press on a door handle closing switch is detected. When the card is in the interrogated zone. The sensors' power supply can be displayed using the ET054 Optical sensors supplied status. the UCH receives the signal requesting opening (ET061 Tailgate opening request). ET056 Driver's side rear optical sensor. 87B-14 . The card must not be hands-free disabled (a Renault card is disabled for hands-free starting and access if it was present in the vehicle when it was locked. the card reader flashes. then interrogation of both sides of the vehicle). If the Renault card is in the access zone. If the UCH authenticates the card (and if it cannot be detected in the hands-free starting zone). If the UCH authenticates the card. c/ Hands-free unlocking of the boot only When a press on the boot opening switch is detected. The interrogation lasts 1 minute. AC033 Test passenger side external aerials and AC034 Test boot external aerials are used to check each zone separately. however. there is another card in the vehicle. The UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials. System operation 87B Hands-free locking of the entire vehicle by stage: 1) 2) The user presses one of the locking switches on the door handle or tailgate (located in the badge).UCH Vdiag No. The AC037 Transmitting aerials fault finding command interrogates the aerials for an update of potential faults. 48. ET051 Rear left-hand door. If the UCH detects other cards inside the vehicle. Locking is indicated by 2 flashes of the direction indicators. If the UCH detects at least one Renault card in the access zone and this is authenticated (at least one Renault card detected by the external aerials and not detected by the starting aerials. ET059 Passenger's side handle locking switch and ET060 Tailgate locking switch. the card reader flashes. AC033 Test passenger side external aerials and AC034 Test boot external aerials are used to check each zone separately. where applicable. 4F. 4C. The statuses of the doors seen open or closed by the UCH can be displayed using the ET053 Driver's door. it responds to the UCH using a 433 MHz encrypted signal. this is necessary to avoid the vehicle being locked with the card inside). The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. 87B-15 . – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. the ET041 Opening rear screen status. 4D. Commands AC032 Test driver's side external aerials. Statuses available for the locking function: The UCH receives the locking request in the form of an earth. When the card is in the interrogated zone. – No Renault card in the card reader. ET042 Passenger door. – No doors open. – The card must not be hands-free disabled (a Renault card is disabled for hands-free starting and access if it was present in the vehicle when it was locked. If the Renault card authenticates the code. 3) 4) 5) Conditions required: – At least one vehicle card detected by the access aerials and not detected by the starting aerials. it disables these cards for hands-free functions (access and starting) until the next time the vehicle is unlocked. These commands are used to check the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and will operate even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. the UCH sends a 125 kHz encrypted signal to the access aerials (interrogation of the aerials on the side of the activated handle is performed first). it activates the locking motors. ET052 Rear right-hand door and ET050 Tailgate/boot statuses and. when one of the locking buttons on the door handles or in the centre of the boot badge is pressed.: 44. If the Renault card is not disabled for hands-free operation. e/ Display Unlocking is indicated by 1 flash of the direction indicators. The interrogation lasts 1 min. The locking requests can be viewed using statuses ET058 Driver's side handle locking switch. and to the starting aerials. the card is no longer disabled if it is detected by any aerial during unlocking). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. To access CF085.1. the boot. use LC016 Card valet function. The direction indicators flash rapidly three times for deadlocking (in addition to the two flashes for locking). The cards known as "masters" can unlock all the opening elements. It is impossible to deadlock the vehicle if the + accessories feed is active.UCH Vdiag No. lock the whole vehicle. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 1.: 44. the cards can be used in two different customer modes.1. 1. They can start the vehicle. set CF036 Selective opening element opening to WITH . 4F. This function is activated by a long press (+ 2 seconds) on the Renault card locking button or by pressing the door locking button twice. but the cards known as "valets" cannot unlock the glovebox. 4F and 50). special features in certain countries (Mexico): This function controls the valet card option which enables vehicles fitted with it to separately control unlocking of the driver's door. and unlock the driver's door only.8 The Valet card function.6 Principle of Electric Child Safety Locking: The UCH controls the rear door locks to prevent them from being opened with the interior door handles and inhibits operation of the rear electric window switches. if the lights are switched on or if the hazard warning lights are activated. Deadlocking is configured using CF009 Deadlocking. 87B-16 . The function is configured with CF085 Valet card function using the specific command SC008 UCH type. the boot and the passenger opening elements. The configuration Child safety lock can be read using configuration LC035 Child safety lock and modified (see Configurations and programming) using the specific command SC016 Child safety lock (Vdiag 4C. Fault finding can be performed on the child safety lock switch indicator light using command AC076 Child safety lock indicator light. For this function to operate the vehicle must have deadlocking (2 motors) and configuration LC003 Deadlocking must be WITH (see Configuration and programming). To check that this function has been configured correctly.7 Principle of deadlocking: The UCH controls the door locks to prevent unlocking via the interior handles. or the passenger doors and the glovebox. 4D. 4D. The switch statuses and the activation of electric childproof locks can be viewed using the following statuses: – ET233 Child safety switch. – ET159 Rear left-hand door child safety lock. The source of the last deadlocking activation/deactivation can be viewed using statuses ET088 Deadlocking activation source and ET090 Deadlocking deactivation source. When the vehicle is electrically pre-equipped with the valet option and this option has been configured.1. 48. – ET160 Rear right-hand door child safety lock.System operation 87B 1. : 44. 4F. 48.1. 1 2 3 4 Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor 87B-17 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .System operation 87B 1.9 Special features of the tailgate wiring: The tailgate opening control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Phase 1 bodywork without hands-free function: 1 2 3 4 Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor – Phase 1 mechanical with hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 17/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 10/01/2005 for type L. 4C. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. System operation 87B – Phase 2 mechanical with hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. 4F. 1 2 3 4 Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor – Phase 2 bodywork: 1 2 3 4 Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor 87B-18 .: 44. 48. 4D. 4C. UCH Vdiag No. 4F.1. 4D.System operation 87B 1. 1 2 3 4 Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor 87B-19 .10 Special features of opening rear screen wiring: The rear screen opening control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Phase 1 mechanical without hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L. 1 2 3 4 Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor – Phase 1 mechanical with hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L. 4C.: 44. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH Vdiag No. 1 2 3 4 Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor 87B-20 . except phase 2 bodywork 1 2 3 4 Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor – Phase 2 mechanical with hands-free function: orPhase 2 bodywork on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L and vehicle with phase 2 bodywork.System operation 87B – Phase 2 mechanical without hands-free function: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. 4D. 4C.: 44. rear doors and boot opening control 2 Passenger door.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. rear doors and boot closing control 3 Glovebox motor – Vehicle manufactured after 11/07/2005 for BCELJRK type: 1 2 3 4 5 Driver's door and fuel filler flap closing control Driver's door and fuel filler flap opening control Glovebox motor Glovebox locking control relay Glovebox locking control 87B-21 . 4C. 4F. 48.System operation 87B 1.11 Special features of vehicle wiring (Mexico): The glovebox locking/unlocking control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Vehicle manufactured before 11/07/2005 for BCELJRK type: 1 Passenger door.1. 4D. UCH Vdiag No. 1. 4D. 4C. 4F. 48. – Or using command VP016 Deactivate new vehicle storage mode. the windows close automatically (as well as the sunroof. if fitted to the vehicle). The function is available on certain vehicles (see table below) depending on the number of one touch windows on the vehicle and depending on the bodywork phases.1. This function can only be activated in the factory with UCH Vdiag 4F or 50. number of one touch windows and the production number type.12 Principle of automatic window relift: When the doors are locked. and the lock button on the card is pressed twice in succession (or the door or boot if the vehicle is fitted with hands-free function). Before delivering the vehicle to the customer. – The direction indicator warning lights are lit continuously on the instrument panel.: 44. 87B-22 . deactivate this mode: – By flipping down the steering column controls with the after ignition feed off. If Vehicle type All except cabriolet phase 1 and 2 bodywork 4-door phase 1 bodywork 4-door phase 1 bodywork All except cabriolet and 4-door phase 1 bodywork All except cabriolet phase 2 bodywork All except cabriolet phase 1 and 2 bodywork Cabriolet phase 1 and 2 bodywork One-touch window(s) NONE 1 driver OTW 1 driver OTW 1 driver OTW 1 driver OTW 2 or 4 OTW NONE Jxxxxxx OTHERS Production number type Then Function of automatic window relift: NONE NONE WITH WITH NONE WITH NONE The automatic window relift function cannot be configured separately. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .1. it is automatically configured during special command SC008 UCH type according to the vehicle type.System operation 87B 1.13 Principle of new vehicle storage mode: The vehicle is configured in this mode when it leaves the factory to optimise its power consumption: – The immobiliser warning light is inhibited. 4D. authentication is via transponder. This signal is sent to the Renault card. If the result is correct. If no Renault card responds in hands-free mode.: 44. – Unlocking the injection computer.System operation 87B 1. it continues the starting procedure.1 Authentication of the Renault card: Authentication is performed differently depending on whether the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free option or not. 48. 87B-23 .UCH Vdiag No. 4F. 1. a) Authentication of the Renault card when the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free option: When the user presses the start button.2 PROTECTION SUB-FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Steering column lock Injection computer Card reader Start button Starter aerials Renault Card Multiplex network Wire connection The UCH shares control of the vehicle's immobiliser protection system with other computers. If the Renault card is in the card reader. 4C. The aerials stop transmitting once the card is authenticated. De-protection of the vehicle is performed in three consecutive stages: – Authentication of the card (hands-free or card reader) – Unlocking of the steering column lock (to allow after ignition feed to be established). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . the UCH interrogates the card reader. 3/ The UCH decrypts the response and compares it with that stored in its memory .2. 2/ If the Renault card is located in the zone covered by the starting aerials and recognises its UCH. it responds to it directly with a 433 MHz signal giving its identifier. the UCH activates its starting aerials and authenticates a card in the following way: 1/ The UCH activates its three starting aerials which generate a 125 kHz radio frequency signal. System operation 87B Situations where use of the card reader is necessary for hands-free starting: – flat card battery.: 44. 1 2 3 4 Wire connection Card reader Short range TRANSPONDER connection RENAULT Card The statuses and commands available on the card authentication function: – ET070 Start button – ET046 "Immobiliser" – ET014 Power supply level requested 87B-24 . 4D.UCH Vdiag No. The transponder mode does not require a battery in the card. 48. the UCH authenticates the card in the card reader using the transponder mode (short-range data exchange at 125 kHz). – boot open (indication on instrument panel). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The statuses and commands available on the card authentication function: – ET035 Radio frequency frame received – ET070 Start button – ET046 "Immobiliser" – ET014 Power supply level requested – AC036 Internal aerial test b) Authentication of the Renault card when the vehicle is not fitted with the hands-free option: When the user presses the start button. 4F. – vehicle in an area of frequency interference. 4C. 4F.2 Unlocking/locking of the steering column lock: 1 2 3 4 5 Steering column lock Multiplex line Supply Sensor Line Safety line a/ Unlocking the steering column lock Following authentication of the Renault card: 1/ The UCH sends a code to the electric steering column lock with an unlocking request via the multiplex network ( ET119 UCH request to steering column lock ). 87B-25 . 4D.: wheel jammed against a kerb). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The steering column lock remains locked if: – there is excessive mechanical load on the steering column (e. it unlocks and sends its unlocked status to the UCH ( ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal). Note: After ignition feed can only be established if the steering column unlocking procedure is performed correctly.: 44.g. 48.UCH Vdiag No.2. The physical status of the column lock can be displayed by the ET072 Steering column lock status and its programming can be displayed by the ET071 Steering column lock blank status. 3/ When the UCH receives the Steering column unlocking completed signal. 2/ If the electric steering column lock recognises the code. – the battery voltage is too low.System operation 87B 1. 4C. – the power demanded by the column lock is too high (thermal protection of the column lock electric motor). it orders the Protection and Switching Unit to activate the + after ignition relay and the procedure continues. the driver is informed via the message Steering column not locked. after the Renault card is removed from the card reader.: 44. – the Renault card is removed from the card reader following a starting failure due to an engaged gear. 87B-26 . Reactivating protection: the immobiliser is reactivated when the engine stops. – power is demanded by the steering column lock too often. To lock the steering column. certain conditions in which there is a drop in the after ignition feed do not cause the steering column to lock (steering column not locked message).g. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .2.3 Unlocking the injection computer: When the + after ignition feed has been established. the immobiliser remains active. If the codes are identical. start and stop the engine again. the UCH and the injection computer compare their codes via the multiplex network. In the event that a steering column does not lock. 1. This locking operation requires: – a valid 0 mph speed signal. – 3 mins have elapsed following a starting failure due to an engaged gear. – a deactivated + after ignition connection. 4D. the vehicle immobiliser is deactivated (ET046 Immobiliser).UCH Vdiag No. Steering column lock fails if: 1/ Normal non-locking scenarios: – the card is present in the card reader. With regard to vehicles fitted with UCH computer Vdiag 4F or above: – the Renault card is removed from the card reader when the vehicle is being powered by + forced after ignition. If there is a failure. – the speed signal is not available.System operation 87B b/ Locking the steering column The steering column is locked with the engine off. – the airbag unit is disconnected. 4F. – a front door is open following a starting failure due to an engaged gear and the card is not in the reader. – a correctly functioning airbag and no impact detected. – more than 20 minutes has elapsed with the card in the reader and the engine off. forced after ignition feed). When the engine has not been started but the after ignition feed has risen (e. 48. 2/ Abnormal non-locking scenarios: – the airbag unit is faulty or locked. 4C. – the airbag has been triggered. – the vehicle speed is not zero. 4C. Fuel level. if there have been 5 attempts to authenticate the Renault card since the battery fault. the change card battery message is displayed on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started. 1. c/ Storing information on the card A device allowing information relating to the vehicle to be read from the card is available. b/ Low battery warning If the Renault card battery is faulty or flat.2. Oil level. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Mileage before oil change.UCH Vdiag No. the UCH checks for the presence of the Renault card in the passenger compartment (if vehicle is hands-free) or in the card-reader when a door is opened then closed.5 Immobiliser warning light programs Immobiliser warning light Warning light flashes slowly Ignition off Warning light not lit Warning light flashes slowly Ignition on Warning light continuously lit Warning light not lit Vehicle protection status Vehicle protected (immobiliser active or fault with steering lock) New vehicle or blank UCH storage mode Renault card not recognised Injection authentication fault Vehicle unprotected (immobiliser inactive) 87B-27 .4 Renault card monitoring by the UCH: a/ Presence check When the engine is running. Information available: – – – – – – – VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Command AC036 Internal aerial test is used to check the area covered by the starting aerials inside the passenger compartment (hands-free vehicles). Status of OBD warning light. Tyre pressure (if vehicle fitted with SSPP).System operation 87B 1.: 44.2. 48. 4D. 4F. The card reader flashes when the card is detected. If the Renault card is not detected. This command allows a hands-free card to be recognised even if it does not belong to the vehicle. Mileage. a message on the instrument panel and a buzzer warn the driver. If the battery is old or in an area of frequency interference. – access aerials integrated in the door handles and the tailgate. 4C. – Position of the manual gearbox selector lever (see 87G. 4D. the protection function must proceed correctly (immobiliser inactive ET046 Immobiliser). This battery is required for operation in hands-free mode or remote control mode (card button presses).: 44. – opening element locking motors.4.1.1 Renault card: The Renault card has three buttons which allow: – locking of the vehicle. – UCH. the request for the Protection and Switching Unit to activate the starter motor can be viewed using status ET110 UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit. – Brake pedal position ET047 Brake pedal position. – the boot to be locked/unlocked. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . – optical presence sensors located in the door handles. 1. 1.UCH Vdiag No. 87B-28 . The Renault hands-free card allows hands-free operation if it is located in the access and starting zones. Conformity check).4 Main COMPONENTS of the ACCESS/SAFETY function 1. the emergency insert located in the Renault card allows the driver's door to be unlocked. – Automatic gearbox selector lever position ET108 Automatic gearbox selector lever position. For this function to operate normally. Engine compartment connection unit. 48.3 START SUB-FUNCTION The UCH manages the control section of the starting sub-function. – Clutch pedal position ET048 Clutch pedal position. In order to control the starter motor. If the starting conditions are met. 4F. the UCH requires the following status and parameter information to check that the starting conditions have been met: – Start button ET070 Start button. – the boot-only opening/locking switch built into the tailgate badge.1 Main components of the ACCESS sub-function: – Renault card.System operation 87B 1. – the locking switches incorporated in the door handles.4. – unlocking of the vehicle. The Renault card is powered by a 3 V battery. the handle must be pulled to operate a switch which 'wakes up' the UCH to resupply the optical sensors. b) The UCH manages the exchanges with the Renault card. The 433 MHz reception aerial is incorporated in the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function).2 The UCH: a) In hands-free mode the UCH receives the unlocking request through the optical sensors. the signal is not constant when pulling and holding the handle.4. c) The UCH activates the locking motors.1. After authentication from the UCH. 4D. This presence detection starts the hands-free access procedure. The signals are encrypted. The switch signal is parallel to the optical sensor signal: activation of the optical sensor or the switch earths the signal going to the UCH. the UCH activates the locking motors. If the exchanges between the Renault card and the UCH are correct. 4F. Outside hands-free mode: The UCH receives the access requests coming from card presses at 433 MHz (315 MHz in Japan). and the locking request through the locking switches. pull the handle a second time to open the door once the card has been authenticated.3 The optical presence sensors built into the door handles (hands-free vehicles): The optical presence sensors inform the UCH of the hands-free unlocking request for the entire vehicle when the infrared beam is cut in one of the handles (by a hand).1. at a frequency of 125 kHz. the optical sensors are powered at 12 V only for 72 hours after the last change of vehicle lockedunlocked status. In this case. the Renault card responds directly to it at 433 MHz. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . After this period. In hands-free mode: The UCH interrogates and authenticates the Renault card via the access aerials located in the door handles and the tailgate.UCH Vdiag No. 1. Although it is a switch signal. 87B-29 . To limit battery use.: 44. 4C.System operation 87B 1. 48.4. 48. 87B-30 . 4D. The tailgate and rear screen opening switches notify the UCH of a request to open the tailgate or rear screen. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .System operation 87B The handle groups are shown in the diagram below: Driver's side Passenger side UCH Optical sensor + Switch Optical sensor + Switch Optical sensor + Switch Optical sensor + Switch Boot unlocking : Communal sensor supply Note: The tailgate is not fitted with an infrared optical sensor.UCH Vdiag No. 4F.: 44. 4C. – if the card is still not detected. 87B-31 .: 44. 4C. – if the card has not been detected. the UCH activates the aerials on the opposite side. 4F. the UCH interrogates the rear aerial. The access aerial groups are shown in the diagram below: Driver's side UCH Passenger side Tailgate Note: 3-door and 5-door versions are distinguished by different handle aerials. The UCH activates these aerials in the following order: – the side on which the handle has been pulled. Only the tailgate aerial is removable.4 The access aerials built into the door handles and tailgate (hands-free vehicles): The access aerials are built into the door handles and the tailgate. 4D.System operation 87B 1.1.UCH Vdiag No.4. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . informing it of a vehicle locking request. They are not removable. 4C.5 The locking switches built into the door handles and the tailgate badge (hands-free vehicles): These switches are used to lock the opening elements. except for the tailgate switch which is separate from the badge.: 44. The grouping of these switches is shown in the diagram below: Driver's side Locking switch UCH Passenger side Locking switch Locking switch Locking switch Boot lid switch 87B-32 .System operation 87B 1.1. 48.4. The access aerials are then activated. a UCH track is connected to earth. When a switch is pressed.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D. d/ The UCH requests activation of the + after ignition feed from the Protection and Switching Unit.6 Door locking motors: These are direct current motors (12 V supply).2.4.UCH Vdiag No. This battery is necessary to operate in standard and hands-free mode. f/ The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit to supply the starter motor. If the battery is too old. It is possible to replace a coded part with an uncoded part using special procedures in the CLIP tool and the vehicle repair code (See Configuration and programming). 4C. 87B-33 . 48. hands-free starting is not possible.2 Main components of the PROTECTION sub-function: The protection sub-function is based on 4 main coded components: – The Renault cards. – The injection computer.System operation 87B 1. These parts are coded definitively: a part coded for one vehicle may not be used on another vehicle. 4F. 4D. 1. b/ The UCH authenticates the Renault card via the starting aerials for hands-free mode. e/ The UCH manages the exchange with the injection computer: The UCH and the injection computer exchange their codes via the vehicle's multiplex network to deactivate protection and unlock the immobiliser. – The electric steering column lock. or via the card reader for transponder mode. The deadlocking function requires a second motor per door. c/ The UCH manages the exchange with the steering column lock: The UCH sends an unlocking request to the steering column via the vehicle's multiplex network. or if the vehicle is in an area of frequency interference.1.2 The UCH: a/ The UCH detects the starting request (Start button pressed under starting conditions). The door locking motors are controlled by the UCH. but always possible by inserting the Renault card into the reader. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .4.4. 1. – The UCH. 1. The Renault card is powered by a 3 V battery.1 The Renault card: The Renault card enables the vehicle to be started in two modes: – starting by inserting the card into the reader: – hands-free starting without insertion of the card into the card reader (hands-free vehicles).: 44.4. and the steering column responds with the status of the lock bolt.2. It therefore allows authentication of a Renault card without a battery.2.2. 4D.5 The starting aerials (hands-free vehicles) There are 3 transmitter aerials located in the passenger compartment They are controlled by the UCH to interrogate the card during a starting request or in confirming the presence of the card in the vehicle (e.3 The electric steering column lock: The electric steering column lock is controlled by the UCH. 4C. via the multiplex network and by wire connection.UCH Vdiag No.System operation 87B 1. 1. If the card is not detected or recognised during hands-free starting. 48. 1. IMPORTANT! IMPORTANT The steering column lock is: – not removable when the bolt is disengaged. The steering column lock is powered before + after ignition feed. A sensor located on the column lock bolt informs the UCH. The multiplex network unlocks the steering column lock if the code is recognised. The column lock has a "+ after ignition feed present on vehicle" wire signal which inhibits locking while the feed is active. The steering column lock supply is via the after ignition relay (located in the Protection and Switching Unit) in its rest position. The power used allows the whole passenger compartment to be covered.: 44. from where it is distributed to the column lock by the UCH.4.g.6 The card reader: The card reader is connected to the UCH by a wire connection.2. 4F.4. – fitted with a left-hand thread self-shearing mounting bolt. including the boot.4.4. The UCH sends an unlocking request and a code to the steering column lock. 1.2. It replaces the Neimann type lock. It provides the transponder function (like a key recognition ring). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Overspill outside the passenger compartment is minimal. the UCH activates the + after ignition feed via the Protection and Switching Unit. the card reader flashes to tell the customer to insert the Renault card. When unlocking is confirmed. The column lock is no longer supplied. It controls the insertion and retraction of a bolt which locks the steering column. via the vehicle's multiplex network.4 The injection computer: The injection computer is coded and unlocks following the encrypted challenge exchange with the UCH. after a door is opened). that it is unlocked. 87B-34 . – The automatic gearbox computer (if fitted on the vehicle).3. etc. it requests control of the starter from the UPC.1 Start button: The start button transmits the driver's requests to start or stop the engine to the UCH.3.3. and that no other computer on the multiplex network is inhibiting starting of the vehicle.) via the multiplex network.4 Neutral sensor (manual gearbox): Informs the UCH of the position of the gearbox (neutral or gear engaged).UCH Vdiag No.3. 1.4. neutral.3 Main components of the STARTING sub-function: The starting sub-function is based on the following main factors: – The starting conditions being present. – The UCH. 1. 1.4.4.3. 87B-35 . 1. Operation: The unknown status does not automatically require the brake pedal to be replaced.5 Clutch switch (manual gearbox): Sends clutch pedal depressed signal (end of travel) to the UCH. – The Protection and Switching Unit. 4C.4.3 The Protection and Switching Unit: The Protection and Switching Unit activates the starter motor following a request from the UCH via the multiplex network.6 Brake switch: Sends brake pedal depressed signal to the UCH.3.4. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 1.4. because it is a temporary operating status between released pedal status and depressed pedal status (see diagram above). 1.4.: 44. 48.System operation 87B 1.2 The UCH: The UCH ensures that the starting conditions are met. If the conditions are present.7 The automatic transmission computer (if fitted to the vehicle): The computer informs the UCH of the selector position (park.4. 4D. 1.3. 4F. AC017 RCH relay 2 and AC018 RCH relay 3 . The UCH sends the request to the injection system to activate the air conditioning compressor.System operation 87B 2 AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION The type of air conditioning control can be displayed by configuration reading LC013 Air conditioning type and configured using command CF019 Air conditioning type (can be configured during configuration of the UCH by the SC008 UCH type command). 87B-36 . 2. for electric heated rear screen and the signal for passenger compartment blower operation.: 44. Relay 2 controls a passenger compartment heating resistor unit consisting of two resistors. The operation of the air conditioning request button and electric heated rear screen indicator lights can be checked using actuator commands: AC015 Air conditioning button indicator light and AC019 Heated rear screen indicator light. 4D. engine loading and. if the roof is open. The following statuses and parameters produced by the UCH can be displayed: – PR001 Battery voltage – PR002 External temperature – ET015 Passenger compartment blower only with non-regulated air conditioning – ET017 Number of RCH*s required – ET018 Number of RCH*s authorised by alternator alternator charge rate – ET019 Number of RCH*s authorised by injection system – ET020 Number of RCH*s activated – ET021 RCH* control 1 – ET022 RCH* control 2 – ET031 Fast idle request for RCH – ET169 Engine – ET025 Retractable roof for cabriolet version only – ET026 Heated rear screen switch.2 Sub-function: HEATING The UCH manages the passenger compartment heating resistors (RCHs) by controlling power relays according to the request for ventilation in the passenger compartment. the electrical power balance.1 Sub-function: USER SELECTION (Non-regulated air conditioning only) The UCH receives the signal from the air conditioning panel via cable connection for the air conditioning request. The UCH sends the request to the Protection and Switching Unit to start electric heated rear screen de-icing. 4F. for the cabriolet version. the engine coolant temperature. 2. The following statuses can be displayed: – ET029 Air conditioning button. 48. – ET028 Heated rear screen button. Check the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors using actuator commands: AC016 RCH relay 1. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. – ET015 Passenger compartment blower. the external temperature. Relay 1 controls a passenger compartment heating resistor unit consisting of one resistor. 4C. 48. the passenger compartment blower activation signal and whether the engine is in operation. 4D. depending on the external temperature. 4C. *RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors 2. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44.System operation 87B Passenger compartment heating resistor power 0W 333 W 667 W 1000 W Relay 1 0 1 0 1 Relay 2 0 0 1 1 The configuration can be displayed using LC030 Heating resistor types.UCH Vdiag No. 4F.3 Sub-function: COLD LOOP The UCH requests the injection to switch on the compressor via the multiplex network. The following statuses and parameters can be displayed: – ET030 Air conditioning request 2 – ET169 Engine – ET015 Passenger compartment blower – PR002 External temperature 87B-37 . by configuration reading LC064 Rear screen wiper and by configuration CF166 Rear screen wiper.1 WIPING FUNCTION Sub-function: WIPERS CONTROL The UCH receives the driver's request via the wiper control stalk. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. the headlight washers are actuated at the same time as the windscreen washer. only if the headlights are on. The requests made to the UCH via the wiper control stalk can be displayed using the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position and ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring. slow speed and fast speed) and a wiper intermittent speed ring which varies the time between each wipe. The park position is managed by the Protection and Switching Unit. via a wire connection. Special note: If the windscreen wiper is set to low speed when the vehicle is moving and then the vehicle stops. There is no continuous wiping function.System operation 87B 3 3. Special features of headlight washers For vehicles fitted with xenon bulbs. The wiper control stalk has four positions (neutral. ET078 Windscreen washer request.. The statuses corresponding to operation of the rear screen wiper can be displayed using statuses ET080 Rear screen wiper request. 4C. ET097 Rear screen wiper park position and ET109 Reverse gear engaged or ET108 Automatic gearbox lever position. Windscreen wiper: The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit via the CAN network to supply power to the windscreen wiper. the system switches to intermittent wipe. 4D.: 44. If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor. – When the vehicle is stationary.UCH Vdiag No. ET079 Rear screen washer request. intermittent wiping. Rear screen wiper: Rear wiper speed and power supply are also controlled by the UCH. Windscreen washers: The front and rear windscreen washers are controlled directly by the wiper control stalk. except during the rear screen washer control. Windscreen wiper outside neutral position: – The rear screen wiper starts to operate as soon as reverse gear is engaged and rain drops are detected on the windscreen wiper. the wipers operate intermittently every 7 seconds. 87B-38 . over 36 mph (60 km/h) they operate every 3 seconds. (see special features of the rain and light sensor). 4F. These connections are doubled up to the UCH to permit command status reading. 4F.System operation 87B Two cases are possible concerning the control of the headlight washers. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . First case: (vehicles fitted with a SIEMENS Vdiag 44 UPC): the UCH sends the command by cable to two headlight washer relays on a relay plate underneath the UPC. WARNING If the UCH does not manage to determine the position of the control stalk.UCH Vdiag No. the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the windscreen wiper at low speed (defect mode). or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position. Their operation can be checked using commands AC007 Rear screen wiper. 48.2 Sub-function: WIPING POWER The UCH controls the rear screen wiper's power (and that of the headlight washers if the vehicle is fitted with xenon headlights and a SIEMENS Vdiag 44 UPC). AC030 Headlight washer relay 1 and AC031 Headlight washer relay 2. Second case: (vehicles fitted with a LEAR Vdiag 48 or later): the UCH requests the UPC via the multiplex network to activate the washer relays. Rain and light sensor Information displays Multiplex network Steering column control Protection and Switching Unit UCH Rear screen wiper Windscreen wiper Windscreen and rear screen washers Headlight washers 87B-39 .: 44. 4C. 3. 4D. Configuration CF035 Rain/light sensor is available during UCH configuration SC008 UCH type (see Configurations and programming).3 Special features of the rain sensor (if fitted to the vehicle) Rain and light sensor Multiplex network Information displays Steering column control UCH Protection and Switching Unit Side lights Windscreen wiper Dipped headlights Main beam headlights The rain and light sensor is a single sensor. 48.: 44. and by configuration reading LC044 Rain/light sensor. The operation of the rain sensor can be displayed using status ET114 Wiper request by rain sensor. Depending on the vehicle's bodywork. b) Phase 2 bodywork: Automatic operation of the rain sensor remains active following ignition switch-off with the wiper stalk in the Auto position. To reactivate operation when next switching on the ignition. 4D. connected to the UCH by a single connection. This sensor is installed on the windscreen. The rain sensor enables the windscreen wipers to be operated automatically and controls the wiper speeds according to the quantity of water on the windscreen. 4C. the intermittent speed position on the control stalk takes the place of the Auto position. 87B-40 .System operation 87B 3.UCH Vdiag No. with automatic detection activated. place the wiper control stalk in the neutral position then return it to the Auto position. 4F. the rear screen wiper starts to operate if reverse gear is engaged and if the sensor has detected rain for more than 1 minute. For a vehicle which is equipped with a rain sensor. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . two cases are possible for the operation of the rain sensor: a) Phase 1 bodywork: Automatic operation of the rain sensor is inhibited following ignition switch-off with the wiper stalk in the Auto position. When the vehicle is not fitted with a rain sensor. The status ET118 Rain sensor sensitivity ring position can be interpreted if the vehicle is configured with rain sensor and inhibits status ET096 Intermittent wipe ring position. The wiper intermittent speed ring is used to modify the sensor's sensitivity to rain and therefore the time between wipes. The sensor is activated by setting the wiper stalk to AUTO position. System operation 87B 3. 1 Headlight washers relay 1 2 Headlight washers relay 2 – Phase 2 mechanical: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L.4 Special features of the headlight washers control wiring The headlight washers control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Phase 1 mechanical: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L. 1 Headlight washers relay 1 2 Headlight washers relay 2 87B-41 . 48. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . except phase 2 bodywork.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 4F. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 4C.System operation 87B – Phase 2 bodywork: 1 Headlight washers relay 1 2 Headlight washers relay 2 3 Multiplex network 87B-42 . 48. 4F. 4D. Information displays Rain and light sensor Multiplex network Steering column control UCH Protection and Switching Unit Rear fog light Side lights Main beam headlights Direction indicators Dipped headlights Front fog lights Interior lighting 87B-43 .1 LIGHTING FUNCTION Sub-function: LIGHTING CONTROL The UCH receives the request from the driver.: 44. If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk. AC023 Right-hand direction indicator. the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the dipped headlights. 48. via the multiplex network. from the hazard warning lights button and. AC022 Left-hand direction indicator. from the light sensor. 4. Operation of the lights powered by the UCH can be checked using the actuator commands AC009 Rear fog lights. or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position. ET082 Rear fog lights request ET085 Hazard warning lights switch. from the lighting stalk.UCH Vdiag No. if fitted to the vehicle.2 Sub-function: LIGHTING POWER The UCH controls the power supply for the rear fog light (a single one). The interior lighting request can be displayed using the ET112 Interior lighting control status. 4D. the UPC provides power to the xenon bulb computers. ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request. dipped headlights. to provide power to the side lights. If a request to activate the lighting is made. The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit. The following statuses can be displayed: ET081 Lighting stalk position. AC021 Interior lights and AC027 Footwell/floor lighting . direction indicators and interior lighting (roof lights and footwell/floor lights).System operation 87B 4 4. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . main beam headlights and fog lights (front). 4F. ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request. The dipped headlights are still supplied when the main beam headlights are activated. 4C.UCH Vdiag No.System operation 87B 4. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44.3 Special features of the direction indicators There are 2 types of wiring depending on the vehicle: – Phase 1 mechanical: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L. 4D. 1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b Front left-hand direction indicator Front right-hand direction indicator Rear left-hand direction indicator Rear right-hand direction indicator Left-hand side direction indicator Right-hand side direction indicator 87B-44 . 1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b Front left-hand direction indicator Front right-hand direction indicator Rear left-hand direction indicator Rear right-hand direction indicator Left-hand side direction indicator Right-hand side direction indicator – Phase 2 mechanical: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L. 48. This action is confirmed by two beeps. The light sensor enables the side lights and dipped headlights to be operated automatically as soon as the vehicle is in a dark place (tunnel.UCH Vdiag No. 48.4 Special features of the light sensor (if fitted to the vehicle).: 44. Any other operation on the lighting stalk overrides and cancels automatic operation. A beep confirms this action and the message Automatic lighting OFF appears on the instrument panel. gloomy weather conditions. 4D. and by configuration reading LC044 Rain/light sensor. This sensor is installed on the windscreen.System operation 87B 4. connected to the UCH by a single connection. Configuration CF035 Rain/light sensor is available during a UCH configuration SC008 UCH Type (see Configurations and programming). Information displays Rain and light sensor Multiplex network Steering column control UCH Protection and Switching Unit Side lights Windscreen wiper Dipped headlights Main beam headlights The rain and light sensor is a single sensor. switch the engine off and press the AUTO button on the lighting stalk for at least 4 seconds. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .). 4C. The status of the light sensor can be displayed using ET115 Lights on request by light sensor. night. To activate the automatic lighting function. 87B-45 . 4F. press the AUTO button on the lighting stalk for at least 4 seconds. etc. To deactivate the automatic lighting function. 48.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F.Replacement of components 87B For replacing different components.UCH Vdiag No. see the relevant sections in the MR vehicle mechanics (Megane II: see MR 364 Mechanical systems. 4C. Scenic II: see MR 370 Mechanical systems). 4D. 87B-46 . The programming and configurations are described in the following pages of the present document. Restart the procedure". reallocate all Renault cards later. always provide the VIN number of the vehicle and the programming key obtained using the Clip tool. The steering column lock and the injection computer are automatically coded when the + after ignition feed is switched on. – deallocate one or more RENAULT cards (e. To perform this procedure.: 44. the user has a limited time in which to enter the immobiliser code. 48. WARNING When the Clip tool issues the programming key. When requesting an immobiliser code. 4F. – replace the UCH or the injection computer. This immobiliser code is available on RENAULT. – Renault cards. – steering lock. This immobiliser code is necessary to: – add or replace a Renault card .g. they must be programmed with a code to make them operational. This information enables the operator to identify the vehicle.net or by contacting Techline. When fitted to the vehicle. The 4 coded components are: – UCH. Refer to the allocation table. the clip tool displays the message Time elapsed. certain vehicle parts must have already been correctly coded (with the vehicle code).UCH Vdiag No. if lost or stolen). If the time has elapsed. During manufacture. WARNING If not all of the Renault cards are available. 4D. – injection computer.Configurations and programming 87B 1/ GENERAL INFORMATION Opening element and engine immobiliser management system. 87B-47 . The UCH and the cards are not coded when new. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. a 13-character hexadecimal code is assigned to the vehicle to make the engine immobiliser operational. switch on the side lights. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . click on Fault finding. – If it is interrupted.: 44. click on tab Signal. IMPORTANT – Do not interrupt the procedure when it is in progress. program the cards and calibrate and configure the UCH and program the valves. 2/ PROGRAMMING THE UCH (SC004) This operation will allow the UCH to be coded. 4C. The UCH has been programmed to the vehicle. a new programming key will be displayed. 4D. Next. It is now impossible to clear the programmed code. click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu. insert a card belonging to vehicle. 87B-48 .UCH Vdiag No. select line SC004 Program UCH. 4F. – – – – – – – – – – – – run the Multiplex network test. click on tab Result. restart the procedure. The programmed code cannot be erased. Click on Test result. enter the After-Sales code. the tool displays Unknown vehicle configuration: check tool update. then Continue.Configurations and programming 87B Immobiliser code Operation After-Sales Programming the UCH Allocation or de-allocation of a RENAULT Card Programming the steering column lock Programming the injection computer UCH Blank Coded Status of the components Renault card Coded Blank or assigned to the vehicle Coded Coded Injection computer Immaterial Immaterial Steering column lock Immaterial Immaterial YES YES Coded Coded Immaterial Blank Blank Coded NO NO IMPORTANT Once a part is programmed with a code. the code cannot be deleted and the part cannot be reprogrammed with another code. the tool displays Programming in progress and Programming finished. confirm. then UCH. Enter the code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm. remove the card from reader . the tool displays Insert card fully into reader. it is allocated to the vehicle. 48. IMPORTANT These cards must be old Renault cards belonging to the vehicle or new. If the card allocation procedure is interrupted. The vehicle can have up to four cards. – the tool displays Please enter the After-Sales code. 4D. – if the format is correct. select NO and confirm. To finish programming. restart the card allocation procedure to reactivate them. – with the card removed from the reader.: 44. select YES.UCH Vdiag No. the tool displays Insert card fully into reader. 4C. The cards are allocated to the vehicle and the vehicle identification number is stored in the cards and in the UCH. 87B-49 . – the tool displays: Programming in progress. Note: If the same card is inserted twice. – the tool displays Insert card fully into reader. the system does not take this into account and the engine immobiliser warning light remains off. The cards are currently ineffective in this state. 48. it will be necessary to reallocate all the cards later. Important: be sure to insert all cards to be allocated to the vehicle during programming. uncoded Renault cards. – the tool displays: Warning: all previously programmed cards will no longer be usable after the first card has been programmed. – the tool displays Remove card from reader. 4F. – to allocate a second card. enter the After-Sales code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm it. Do not remove the card until the following message appears: One card programmed. – the tool displays: Would you like to program another card?.Configurations and programming 87B 3/ RENAULT CARD ALLOCATION PROCEDURE (SC006) WARNING If not all of the Renault cards are available. – select the Programming menu and select line SC006 Card allocation. the new cards will no longer be blank and can only be allocated to this vehicle. – insert the blank card or one allocated to the vehicle and confirm. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . – insert the blank card or one allocated to the vehicle and confirm. 4D.UCH Vdiag No.Configurations and programming 87B 4/ PROGRAMMING THE INJECTION COMPUTER: The blank injection computer is automatically programmed when + after ignition feed is first activated on the vehicle. Programming will operate correctly if: – the cards and UCH are programmed. After this. – the lock is programmed (to activate + after ignition feed).: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87B-50 . the injection computer has been programmed definitively. 48. 4C. – the injection system is not programmed. The injection computer can no longer be used on another vehicle. 4F. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ENTERING THE RECOMMENDED PRESSURES (VP005) See 35B. – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu. 6/ CHILD SAFETY SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (SC016) This procedure will enable the child safety system. Configurations and programming. Configurations and programming. – follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF104 Child safety lock (WITH or WITHOUT). if fitted to the vehicle. follow the procedure. 48. 4D. 4C. There are two types of wiring: single or double input. – confirm the line SC016 Child safety. 4F.1 PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING THE 4 VALVE CODES (SC002) See 35B. The child safety function is configured. – finish by confirming and clearing the stored faults.: 44. Tyre pressure monitoring system. – confirm.UCH Vdiag No. – Single input: on vehicles manufactured before 10/01/2005 1 Rear left-hand door 2 Rear right-hand door 87B-51 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Configurations and programming 87B 5/ FUNCTION: TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM 5. to be configured for optimum running during the replacement of a UCH. Tyre pressure monitoring system. 5. : 44. – – – – – – – – click on Repair mode and in the Configuration writing menu. confirm.UCH Vdiag No. CF114 Body type (phase 1 or phase 2). confirm the line CF135 Protection and Switching Unit computer type. – a screen prompts the user to verify that the specifications configured are those for the vehicle. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT) Important: the Valet function is only available on vehicles for the MEXICAN market (this configuration is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a UPC Vdiag 44): only if UCH Vdiag 50. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF135 UPC computer type (SIEMENS Vdiag 44 or OTHER). 48. 87B-52 . – confirm and follow the procedure.Configurations and programming 87B – Double input: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 1 Rear left-hand door 2 Rear right-hand door 7/ PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING UPC TYPE (CF135) This configuration is only available with a UCH Vdiag 4F or 50. CF112 Headlight washers on vehicle (WITH or WITHOUT): only if UCH Vdiag 50. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . This procedure will enable certain functions of the UCH computer to be configured to differentiate between a vehicle fitted with a phase 1 electronic layout and a vehicle fitted with a phase 2 electronic layout. 4D. 4F. follow the procedure. – confirm. 4C. confirm.1 Vdiag 44. CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING. (This status will only be available if the following conditions are met: CF036 Selective opening of opening elements = WITH). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE.Configurations and programming 87B 8/ UCH TYPE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (SC008) 8. CF022 Factory fitted perimeter protection (WITH or WITHOUT): function only available on vehicles for the Mexican market.UCH Vdiag No. confirm line SC008 UCH type. 4F. AUTOMATIC. CF035 Rain/light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT). – confirm. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate). CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT). follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT). CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED. or 1800 W). – CF173 One-touch window(s)/Sunroof (WITH or WITHOUT). – check that the options configured are those desired and finish. follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF036 Selective opening of the opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT) Only if CF010 = WITHOUT – confirm. HEAT INSULATING). 1000 W. MANUAL). Function only available for vehicles on the Mexican market. – – – – – – – – – – – – – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu. CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system (WITH or WITHOUT).: 44. 48. 48 This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. 4D. 87B-53 . CF087 Front fog light (WITH or WITHOUT). CF100 Deadlocking (WITH or WITHOUT). – confirm. – confirm. – follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate).: 44. 1000 W. AUTOMATIC. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT).Configurations and programming 87B 8. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT). CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system function (WITH or WITHOUT). CF028 Engine type (F or K). CF022 Factory fitted perimeter protection (WITH or WITHOUT). CF012 Rain sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF036 Selective opening of opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF010 = WITHOUT.UCH Vdiag No. Function only available on vehicles sold in Mexico. CF016 PAX system type tyre (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF097 = MPV or extended MPV or cabriolet and if CF023 = WITH. 87B-54 . – check that the options configured are those desired and finish. CF083 One touch window(s) (WITH or WITHOUT): Absent if CF097 = Cabriolet. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT). – confirm line SC008 UCH type. HEAT INSULATING). CF029 External temperature sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). 4D. CF013 Light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF014 = WITHOUT. CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE. Only if CF036 = WITH and CF023 = WITHOUT. CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING. 48. – confirm. CF020 Type of driving style (Right-hand or Left-hand). 4F. – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu. MANUAL). CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED. or 1800 W). Function only available on vehicles sold in Mexico. CF011 Gearbox type (BVA or BVM). 4C.2 Vdiag 4C and 4D: This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. : 44. HEAT INSULATING). – confirm. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF188 Production number type (Jxxxxxx or OTHER): only if CF097 = 4-doors and CF173 = 1 OTW Phase 1.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF036 = WITH and CF023 = WITHOUT. – confirm. 1 OTW phase 2 = 1 driver side one touch window with a phase 2 bodywork vehicle. The production number is located on the oval plate on the vehicle's right-hand side B-pillar. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF036 Selective opening of opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF010 = WITHOUT CF016 PAX system type tyre (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF097 = MPV or extended MPV and if CF023 = WITH. If the production number does not start with the letter J. 48. 4D. 87B-55 . CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT). – confirm line SC008 UCH type. – confirm. 1000 W. – confirm. IMPORTANT Only configure WITH valet card function when the vehicle is electrically pre-equipped with the valet option. AUTOMATIC. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . – follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate). CF189 Protection type (TYPE 1. follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF173 One touch window(s)/sunroof (1 OTW phase 1/1 OTW phase 2/2 or 4 OTW/WITHOUT): Absent if CF097 = Cabriolet. MANUAL). CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE. WITHOUT = no one touch windows on the vehicle. CF035 Rain/light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). – confirm. CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system (WITH or WITHOUT). or 1800 W). follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT). 4F. 1 OTW phase 1 = 1 driver side one touch window with a phase 1 bodywork vehicle. CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING. Incorrect configuration may cause certain pieces of equipment to malfunction. – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu. 2 or 4 OTW = 2 or 4 one touch windows. select Jxxxxxx. TYPE 2 = with Cobra type alarm and WITHOUT = without factory fitted perimeter protection and without Cobra alarm. If the production number starts with the letter J. The production number consists of 7 characters: 1 letter indicating the production plant followed by 6 figures. – check that the options configured are those desired and finish.Configurations and programming 87B 8. CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED. TYPE 2 or WITHOUT): TYPE 1 = with factory fitted perimeter protection. select Other.3 Vdiag 4F and 50: This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. 4D 44.: 44. 48. 4F and 50 44. 48. 4D. 4F and 50 44. 4F and 50 44. 4C. 48. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. 4D. 4D. 4F and 50 UCH configurations according to the vehicle equipment which can be configured to the CLIP diagnostic tool: Configuration reading LC001 LC002 LC003 LC004 LC005 LC006 LC007 LC008 LC009 LC010 LC011 LC012 LC013 Choice of configuration WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT Manual/Automatic WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT Cabriolet/3-door/All except E and C WITH/WITHOUT Heating/Automatic/ Manual RIGHT-HAND/ LEFT-HAND DRIVE WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT Configuration Hands-free function External temperature sensor Deadlocking One-touch window(s) Gearbox type Rain detector Light sensor Daytime running lights Hazard warning lights illuminated upon impact Tyre type Runflat tyre Vehicle type Automatic relocking Type of air conditioning Name of configuration SC008 UCH type CF029 CF009 SC008 UCH type CF011 SC008 UCH type SC008 UCH type CF014 automatic configuration SC008 UCH type SC008 UCH type CF018 SC008 UCH type LC014 Driving layout CF020 LC015 LC016 Front fog lights Valet card function CF021 SC008 UCH type 87B-56 . 48. 48. 4D. 4D. 4D. 4D 44. 4C. 48. 48. 4D. 4C. 4F and 50 44. 4D. 4C. 48. 4D. 4C. 48. 4F and 50 4C. 4C. 4C. 4D 44. 4F and 50 44. 4F and 50 4C. 4F and 50 4C and 4D 44. 4F and 50 44. 4D. 4F. 48. 4D 44. 4C.Configurations and programming 87B Vdiag 44. 48. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 48. 4C. 4F and 50 44. 4D. 48. 4D. 48. 4C. 4D. 4C. 4F and 50 44. 4F and 50 44. 4C. 4C. 4C.: 44. 48. 4D 4C. 4C. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D. 48. 4F and 50 44. 48.Configurations and programming 87B Vdiag 44. 4F. 4C. 4F and 50 4C. 4F and 50 44. 4C. 4D. 4C. 4D. 4D. 4F and 50 44 and 48 4F and 50 4F and 50 4F and 50 4F and 50 UCH configurations (continued): Configuration reading LC017 LC018 LC019 LC020 LC021 Choice of configuration WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT TINTED/HEAT INSULATING F ENGINE/K ENGINE/M ENGINE WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT NONE/1000 W/ 1800 W WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT ACTIVE/INACTIVE WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT Configuration Tyre Pressure Monitor Function Hazard warning lights switched on by ABS Rear screen wiper park position control Factory fitted perimeter protection Type of windscreen Name of configuration SC008 UCH type CF024 automatic configuration SC008 UCH type SC008 UCH type LC023 LC025 LC029 LC030 Engine type See-me-home lighting: Selective opening element opening Heating resistor type CF028 CF032 SC008 UCH type SC008 UCH type SC016 Child safety LC035 Child safety automatic configuration LC041 LC044 LC064 LC070 New vehicle storage mode Rain/light sensor Rear screen wiper One-touch window(s)/ sunroof VP016 SC008 UCH type CF166 SC008 UCH type 87B-57 . 48. 4F and 50 44. 4D. 48.UCH Vdiag No. 48. 48. 4C. 4D. 4D. 4D 44. 48. 4D. 4F and 50 44. 4C. 4D. 48. 4C. 4F and 50 87B-58 . 4D. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F and 50 4C. 4C. 4D. 48. 4D. 48. 4F and 50 44. 48. 4C.Configurations and programming 87B Specific UCH commands: Specific commands SC001 SC002 SC003 SC004 SC005 SC006 SC008 SC016 Name of Specific command Reading the valve set and stored codes Programming the 4 valve codes Spare UCH programming Card check Card allocation Type of UCH Child safety Vdiag 44.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4D.: 44. 4F and 50 44. 4F. 4C. 4D. 48. 4C. 4C. 4D. 4F and 50 44. 4F and 50 44. 48. 4F and 50 44. 48. 4D. 4D. 4F and 50 44. 48.: 44. 4D. 4F. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Fault summary table 87B Vdiag Tool fault DF001 DF002 DF003 DF004 DF005 DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 DF010 DF011 DF012 DF013 DF014 DF015 DF016 DF017 DF018 DF019 DF020 DF021 DF022 DF023 DF024 DF025 DF026 DF027 UCH Steering lock Clutch switch circuit' Diagnostic tool title Brake light switch circuit Card Front left-hand wheel valve sensor Front right-hand wheel valve sensor Rear right-hand wheel valve sensor Rear left-hand wheel valve sensor Steering column control unit circuit Rain/light sensor circuit Right-hand direction indicator circuit Left-hand direction indicator circuit Card reader circuit Optical sensor circuit At least 2 identical codes/summer set At least 2 identical codes/winter set Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed Front internal aerial circuit Rear internal aerial circuit Centre internal aerial circuit Driver's side front external aerial circuit Passenger side front external aerial circuit Driver's side rear external aerial circuit Passenger side rear door external aerial circuit External temperature sensor circuit 44. 4D. 48. 50 87B-59 . 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 50 87B-60 . 4F.: 44. 4C. 4F.Fault summary table 87B Vdiag Tool fault DF029 DF030 DF031 DF032 DF033 DF034 DF035 DF072 DF073 DF074 DF075 Steering lock circuit Anti-locking line Diagnostic tool title One-touch window connection Tailgate external aerial Driver-side external aerial(s) Passenger-side external aerial(s) Internal aerial circuit Child safety circuit Right-hand door child safety lock circuit 4D. 48. 4D. 48. 4D. 4F. 50 Left-hand door child safety lock circuit Timed supply circuit 44.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults.DEF: Internal electronic fault 2. UCH_V44_DF001P/UCH_V48_DF001P/UCH_V4C_DF001P/ UCH_V4D_DF001P/UCH_V4F_DF001P /UCH_V50_DF001P 87B-61 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48.DEF: Internal electronic fault NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform locking/unlocking by pressing button on card. 4F.Interpretation of faults 87B UCH DF001 PRESENT 1. deal with it first. Deal with any other faults. Contact the Techline.: 44. If the fault appears. 4C. carry out this fault finding procedure. Special notes: If a fault concerning the steering column lock is present or stored. DEF: 4.DEF: 6. 4F. if it is present.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. replace the steering column lock. Make another attempt to lock/unlock the column. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults.: 44. replace the steering column lock. Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. NOTES Special notes: Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. 2.Interpretation of faults 87B STEERING COLUMN LOCK 1. deal with fault DF029 Steering column lock circuit. UCH_V44_DF002P/UCH_V48_DF002P/UCH_V4C_DF002P/ UCH_V4D_DF002P/UCH_V4F_DF002P /UCH_V50_DF002P 87B-62 .DEF: Steering lock internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault Mechanical fault on column Steering column lock authentication fault Steering column lock authentication fault UCH internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault DF002 PRESENT Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: Firstly. 1.DEF: 2.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. 4C.DEF: 8.DEF: 7.DEF: 5. 48.DEF: 3. If the fault is still present. 4D. 4F. contact the Techline. The steering column lock does not belong to this vehicle (or the UCH and/or the cards do not belong to this vehicle). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. replace the steering column lock.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. while pressing the start button.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. The steering column lock does not belong to this vehicle (or the UCH and/or the cards do not belong to this vehicle). 87B-63 . If the fault is still present.: 44.UCH Vdiag No. 4.Interpretation of faults 87B DF002 CONTINUED 1 3. 48.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. contact the Techline. 5. Fit the correct steering column lock (or UCH and/or cards). Fit the correct steering column lock (or UCH and/or cards). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. Release the column by turning the steering wheel. If the fault is still present without mechanical fault (with the wheels set straight ahead). 4D. If the fault is still present. use command VP032 Vehicle speed on initialisation to reconfigure the ABS or the ABS/ESP. Make another attempt to lock/unlock the column. Make five attempts to start and lock the column. 4C. If the fault is still present. Deal with DF029 Steering column lock circuit first.Interpretation of faults 87B DF002 CONTINUED 2 6. 4F. replace the UCH.: 44. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. replace the steering column lock. replace the steering column lock. 8. 7. If the vehicle is fitted with a Vdiag 0F ABS computer. If the fault is still present. or a Vdiag 0B or Vdiag 11 ABS/ESP computer: establish dialogue with the ABS or ABS/ESP computer and check that PR020 Vehicle speed on initialisation is correctly configured.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. If the fault is still present. If the configuration is incorrect.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 87B-64 .DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. Deal with any other faults. 4D. repair the connector. Check the insulation to + 12 V and the continuity of the following connection: Clutch switch track 1 track 5 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector Check for earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch.) If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. oxidised. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair.). Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_DF003/UCH_V48_DF003/UCH_V4C_DF003/ UCH_V4D_DF003/UCH_V4F_DF003/UCH_V50_DF003 87B-65 .Interpretation of faults 87B DF003 PRESENT OR STORED CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT CO. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. CO. Electrical wiring repair. oxidised. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. broken. repair the connector. 4C.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault appears after a road test at speed > 60 mph (100 km/h). If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. If the fault is still present. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults.1 NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track clutch switch connector (tabs bent. etc. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connection. If the connection is OK and earth is present. Clear the stored faults. etc. contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track UCH connector PE1 (tabs bent. 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). replace the clutch pedal switch. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4D. Refer to the interpretation of status ET047 Brake pedal position. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 48. 4C.Interpretation of faults 87B DF004 PRESENT OR STORED BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault becomes present after 10 successive transitions of more than 1 second between the released status and depressed status.: 44. 4F. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. Note: The fault could prevent cruise control/speed limiter operation. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_DF004/UCH_V48_DF004/UCH_V4C_DF004/ UCH_V4D_DF004/UCH_V4F_DF004/UCH_V50_DF004 87B-66 . 48. 4D. Check the condition of the card battery and that it is inserted the right way round. UCH_V44_DF005/UCH_V48_DF005/UCH_V4C_DF005/ UCH_V4D_DF005/UCH_V4F_DF005/UCH_V50_DF005 87B-67 . Replace the battery if necessary.UCH Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. After each battery change. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. Deal with any other faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C.Interpretation of faults 87B DF005 PRESENT OR STORED CARD DEF : Card battery low DEF NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform 5 start operations with each vehicle card. check that the fault does not recur after 5 starts.: 44. The correspondence between fault numbers and the valve concerned is described below: – DF006 = Front left-hand valve sensor.: 44.UCH Vdiag No. If programming is unsuccessful. 4D. 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system .DEF: 5. replace them with wheels with a valve fitted with a sensor and carry out a road test. repeat programming of the 4 valves. 4C. carry out programming of the 4 valves. – DF008 = Rear right-hand valve sensor. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH_V44_DF006P/UCH_V48_DF006P/UCH_V4C_DF006P/UCH_V4D_DF006P/UCH_V4F_DF006P/UCH_V50_DF006P/ UCH_V44_DF007P/UCH_V48_DF007P/UCH_V4C_DF007P/UCH_V4D_DF007P/UCH_V4F_DF007P/UCH_V50_DF007P/ UCH_V44_DF008P/UCH_V48_DF008P/UCH_V4C_DF008P/UCH_V4D_DF008P/UCH_V4F_DF008P/UCH_V50_DF008P/ UCH_V44_DF009P/UCH_V48_DF009P/UCH_V4C_DF009P/UCH_V4D_DF009P/UCH_V4F_DF009P/UCH_V50_DF009P 87B-68 . If the fault is still present. 4F. if the fault is present as of the first kilometres. start to program the four valve codes according to the procedure SC002 Programming the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming). Regarding Scenic II: see MR 370. For faults DF006 to DF009. Before any operation.DEF: 7. – DF007 = Front right-hand valve sensor. mechanical systems. replace the valve. Mechanical systems. 48.DEF: 4. – DF009 = Rear left-hand valve sensor. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If there are. and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.DEF: 8.DEF: 6. Deal with any other faults. ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves. Clear the stored faults. Check that there are no wheels with rubber valves. If the fault is still present. 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system ).DEF: 3.DEF: Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault NOTES Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions ( Mégane II: see MR 364.Interpretation of faults 87B DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 PRESENT FRONT LEFT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR FRONT RIGHT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR REAR RIGHT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR REAR LEFT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR 2. When the sensor has been replaced. replace the valve concerned following the procedure described in the MR (see Instructions). Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. 48. otherwise replace the wiring. DF010 PRESENT OR STORED 1. 5. repair the connector.). otherwise replace the wiring. 3. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 (tabs bent.DEF: The combined stalk is not connected or not correctly connected (stalk or UCH side).UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. 4.DEF 3. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. not being supplied or has an internal electronic fault. Check the condition and connection of the black 12-track steering column control connector (tabs bent.DEF: Combined stalk trip computer function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. oxidised. 4F. repair the connector.DEF: Combined stalk direction indicator function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault.DEF: Combined stalk wiping function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault. etc.DEF 4.DEF: Combined stalk lighting function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault. UCH_V44_DF010/UCH_V48_DF010/UCH_V4C_DF010/ UCH_V4D_DF010/UCH_V4F_DF010/UCH_V50_DF010 87B-69 .). 2. then carry out this fault finding procedure. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. broken.DEF NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault becomes present after an operation on the stalk.DEF 5. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised.DEF 2.Interpretation of faults 87B STEERING COLUMN SWITCH COMBINED CIRCUIT 1. Electrical wiring repair. broken.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 4C.Interpretation of faults 87B DF010 CONTINUED Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering column switch 12-track black connector track 1 track 2 track 14 track 9 track 11 track 12 track 17 track 18 track 13 track 16 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 14 Track 9 Track 12 Track 15 Track 4 Track 17 Track 11 Track 5 Track 2 Track 19 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults.: 44. contact the Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. 48. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. 87B-70 . 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If these connections are sound. check the condition and connection of the sensor supply 7.Interpretation of faults 87B DF011 PRESENT OR STORED RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. Replace it if necessary. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . check the continuity and insulation on the following connection: sensor track 1 track 3 of UCH PP3 connector. etc. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for + 12 V APC on track 1 of the rain/light sensor (timed + 12 V AVC if vehicle was manufactured after June 2005). If the fault appears. then cover the sensor and/or place water on it.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. broken. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.DEF: Communication disrupted 2. 4F. 4C.UCH Vdiag No.). carry out this fault finding procedure. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 1. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.DEF: Internal electronic fault NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Run the automatic wiper system and automatic light illumination system. If not correct. UCH_V44_DF011/UCH_V48_DF011/UCH_V4C_DF011/ UCH_V4D_DF011/UCH_V4F_DF011/UCH_V50_DF011 87B-71 .DEF NOTES None For vehicles which were manufactured after June 2005.5A fuse located on the Protection and Switching Unit. Clear the stored faults. Check for any intermediate connectors using the vehicle wiring diagram and repair if necessary. 4D. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track sensor connector (tabs bent. oxidised. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for earth on track 3 of the sensor. 48. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of faults 87B DF011 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: sensor track 2 track 1 of UCH PE2 connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline.DEF NOTES If fault is present Replace the sensor. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. 48.: 44. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . broken. 87B-72 . 2. Deal with any other faults.). oxidised.UCH Vdiag No. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. DEF: Bulbs not working or open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after action on the right-hand direction indicator control stalk.Interpretation of faults 87B DF012 PRESENT OR STORED RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT CO. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1. Special note: The fault becomes stored after changing a bulb. 48. Check for earth on the following components: Track 1 headlight. Track 1 repeater. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Track 2 indicator. Replace them if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light black connector. apply this fault finding procedure. With the command running. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light black connector. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight connectors of the right-hand indicator repeater and the rear right-hand light. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. 4-door hatch: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_DF012/UCH_V48_DF012/UCH_V4C_DF012/ UCH_V4D_DF012/UCH_V4F_DF012/UCH_V50_DF012 87B-73 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4C. Check the bulbs . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. repair the connector. check for + 12 V on the following components: Track 3 headlight.: 44. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). track 5 of the 12-track grey connector PP3 of the UCH Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 2 vehicles (vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight track 5 of the 12-track grey PP3 connector of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 1 vehicles (vehicles manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. 87B-74 . Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector.UCH Vdiag No. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light black connector.: 44. repair the connector.Interpretation of faults 87B DF012 CONTINUED 1 Check the condition and connection of connector PP3 and connector PP1 on the UCH. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF012 CONTINUED 2 Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 87B-75 . repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light black connector. check the bulbs again and if still not correct. Deal with any other faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . track 2 of the black connector PP1 4 of the UCH If correct. check the connection between the UCH and front and rear lights (see wiring diagram). replace the rear lights(s). 4C.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. then apply this fault finding procedure. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Special note: The fault becomes stored after changing a bulb. check for + 12 V on the following components: Track 3 headlight. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. 48. Deal with any other faults. Check the bulbs . repair the connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Replace them if necessary. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). With the command running. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Track 1 repeater. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Check for earth on the following components: Track 1 headlight.: 44.DEF: Bulbs not working or open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after action on the left-hand direction indicator control stalk. Electrical wiring repair. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF013 PRESENT OR STORED LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT CO. UCH_V44_DF013/UCH_V48_DF013/UCH_V4C_DF013/ UCH_V4D_DF013/UCH_V4F_DF013/UCH_V50_DF013 87B-76 . Track 2 indicator. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 87B-77 . track 4 of the 12-track grey connector PP3 of the UCH Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 2 vehicles (vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight track 4 of the 12-track grey connector PP3 of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the fault memory. Electrical wiring repair. Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 1 vehicles (vehicles manufactured before 10/01/ 2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. repair the connector. 4D. 4C. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF013 CONTINUED 1 Check the condition and connection of connector PP3 and connector PP2 on the UCH. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. check the connection between the UCH and the front and rear lights (see wiring diagram). replace the rear lights(s). otherwise replace the wiring. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 48. 4D. 87B-78 . track 12 of the 12-track black connector PP2 of the UCH If correct.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. repair the connector. 4C. check the bulbs again and if still not correct. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Clear the fault memory. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.Interpretation of faults 87B DF013 CONTINUED 2 Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4F. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of faults 87B DF014 PRESENT OR STORED CARD READER CIRCUIT CC. 4F. UCH_V44_DF014/UCH_V48_DF014/UCH_V4C_DF014/ UCH_V4D_DF014/UCH_V4F_DF014/UCH_V50_DF014 87B-79 . check for a square pulse signal on track 3 of the card reader connector: Connect the oscilloscope between track 3 of the connector and a bodywork earth. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 black connector and the 40-track UCH PE1 blue connector (tabs bent. broken. the card reader is supplied and controlled for 20 min). oxidised. switch on and switch off the engine.: 44.0 CC. If the fault is still present. Clear the stored faults. Adjust the oscilloscope as follows: Calibration on 5 V/division Time base 100 ms/division Using an oscilloscope check for a square pulse signal coming from the UCH on track 3 of the card reader connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline.1 DEF : : : : Short circuit to earth Open circuit or short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Internal electronic fault NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Insert the card into the card reader. 4C. etc. otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. 48. Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4 Card reader track 6 Card reader track 3 track 39 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH track 21 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.). CC. Carry out fault finding on the card reader circuit with the card in the card reader (after the engine is switched off. 4D. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring.). leaving the card in the card reader. broken. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. etc.0 NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. Using an oscilloscope . repair the connector.0 CO. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline.Interpretation of faults 87B DF014 CONTINUED 1 CO. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 87B-80 .0 NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. broken. Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4 Card reader track 6 Card reader track 3 Card reader track 5 track 39 of the 40-track black connector PE2 of the UCH track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH track 21 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH track 25 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track black connector PE2 and the 40-track UCH blue connector PE1 (tabs bent. broken. 4C.). oxidised. repair the connector. Check for + 12 V on track 3 of the card reader. oxidised.: 44. Clear the stored faults. etc. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the card reader if necessary. Check for earth on track 5 of the card reader. etc. otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for earth on track 5 of the card reader. Electrical wiring repair. broken. 87B-81 .). broken. repair the connector. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF014 CONTINUED 2 CC. otherwise replace the wiring. DEF NOTES None Replace the card reader if necessary. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. 4D.1 NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. oxidised. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Replace the card reader if necessary. 48. oxidised. repair the connector. Check the insulation against + 12 V on the following connections: Card reader track 4 Card reader track 6 Card reader track 5 track 39 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH track 25 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present.: 44.). etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track black connector PE2 and the 40-track UCH blue connector PE1 (tabs bent. Electrical wiring repair. 4C. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). the statuses must be INACTIVE. track 22 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH track 23 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH.Interpretation of faults 87B DF015 PRESENT OR STORED OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT CC. UCH_V44_DF015/UCH_V48_DF015/UCH_V4C_DF015/ UCH_V4D_DF015/UCH_V4F_DF015/UCH_V50_DF015 87B-82 . Deal with any other faults. 48. ET057 Front/rear passenger optical sensor. repair the connector. 4D.0 : Short circuit to earth NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Lock the vehicle and place your hand in each handle. otherwise replace the wiring. If a status remains INACTIVE after placing a hand inside the handle: Check for 12 V on track 3 of the sensor(s). 4F. contact the Techline. If one of the statuses remains ACTIVE . Electrical wiring repair. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: Driver's side front sensor track 1 Driver's side rear sensor track 1 Passenger side front sensor track 1 Passenger side rear sensor track 1 track 21 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH. carry out this fault finding procedure. Check the statuses of the sensors to determine which sensor is in short circuit: without a hand being placed inside the handles. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check that ET054 Optical sensors supplied is YES. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. consult the interpretation of status ET054. replace the faulty sensor. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. track 23 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH. then replace the sensor concerned. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4C. ET055 Driver's side optical sensor. If the fault appears. ET056 Driver's rear optical sensor. If the fault is still present. disconnect the faulty sensor(s): if. If the connections are correct and the power supply is present. after disconnection. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). the status returns to INACTIVE . Clear the stored faults. If status ET054 remains NO. Fault DF017 At least 2 identical codes/winter set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the winter wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case. restart programming of the four valves according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming). Clear the stored faults. 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF016 DF017 PRESENT AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES/SUMMER SET AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES/WINTER SET NOTES Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve. UCH_V44_DF016P/UCH_V48_DF016P/UCH_V4C_DF016P/UCH_V4D_DF016P/UCH_V4F_DF016P/UCH_V50_DF016P/ UCH_V44_DF017P/UCH_V48_DF017P/UCH_V4C_DF017P/UCH_V4D_DF017P/UCH_V4F_DF017P/UCH_V50_DF017P 87B-83 . check that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves. Fault DF016 At least 2 identical codes/summer set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the summer wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Mechanical systems.UCH Vdiag No. Before any operation. In this case. and that the spare wheel has not been fitted on the same axle assembly. 4C. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. Mechanical systems. 4F. Regarding Scenic II: see MR 370. or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions ( Mégane II: see MR 364. 4D. 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system). restart programming of the four valves according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming). 48. Fault DF019 4 Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the winter tyre set and the winter tyre set is selected. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system ). 4D. Before any operation. In the status menu.: 44. 4C. 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system and for Scenic II : see MR 370 Mechanical systems. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No. note the valve codes allocated for the type of tyre stored in the memory. note the type of tyre set stored in the memory (summer or winter). Deal with any other faults. In the status menu. Program the four valve codes using the procedure SC002 Programming the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming). and that the spare wheel has not been fitted. Clear the stored faults. UCH_V44_DF018P/UCH_V48_DF018P/UCH_V4C_DF018P/UCH_V4D_DF018P/UCH_V4F_DF018P/UCH_V50_DF018P/ UCH_V44_DF019P/UCH_V48_DF019P/UCH_V4C_DF019P/UCH_V4D_DF019P/UCH_V4F_DF019P/UCH_V50_DF019P 87B-84 .Interpretation of faults 87B DF018 DF019 PRESENT PROGRAMMING OF 4 CODES IN SUMMER SET NOT PERFORMED PROGRAMMING OF 4 CODES IN WINTER SET NOT PERFORMED NOTES Special notes: No operation involving changing a valve. or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (Mégane II: see MR 364 Mechanical systems. 4F. ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves. Fault DF018: Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the summer tyre set (after replacing the sensors or UCH). contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH grey connector PE3 (tabs bent. repair the connector. 4D. etc. repair the connector. 4C. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector track 1 3-track connector track 3 track 25 of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of faults 87B DF020 PRESENT OR STORED FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. UCH_V44_DF020/UCH_V48_DF020/UCH_V4C_DF020/ UCH_V4D_DF020/UCH_V4F_DF020/UCH_V50_DF020 87B-85 . 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the front internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Replace the aerial if necessary. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. broken.). otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. if the fault becomes present. broken. etc. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults.). oxidised. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector track 1 3-track connector track 3 track 35 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 36 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. 48. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH grey connector PE3 (tabs bent. etc. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_DF021/UCH_V48_DF021/UCH_V4C_DF021/ UCH_V4D_DF021/UCH_V4F_DF021/UCH_V50_DF021 87B-86 . then carry out this fault finding procedure. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of faults 87B DF021 PRESENT OR STORED REAR INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. broken. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. broken. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults.). if the fault becomes present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the rear internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent. repair the connector. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. oxidised. etc. 4F.: 44. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.). repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44.). then carry out this fault finding procedure. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. oxidised. 4C. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH grey connector PE3 (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. broken.). Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the centre internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector track 3 3-track connector track 1 track 37 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 26 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. UCH_V44_DF022/UCH_V48_DF022/UCH_V4C_DF022/ UCH_V4D_DF022/UCH_V4F_DF022/UCH_V50_DF022 87B-87 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). etc. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of faults 87B DF022 PRESENT OR STORED CENTRE INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. if the fault becomes present. contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). broken. Replace the aerial if necessary. 48. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2 4-track connector track 1 track 39 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 27 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. broken. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. 48.). 4D. if the fault becomes present. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of faults 87B DF023 PRESENT OR STORED DRIVER'S SIDE FRONT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.).: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the driver's side front door external aerial (tabs bent. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. Replace the aerial if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. etc. etc. UCH_V44_DF023/UCH_V48_DF023/UCH_V4C_DF023/ UCH_V4D_DF023/UCH_V4F_DF023/UCH_V50_DF023 87B-88 . repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. broken. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger side front door external aerial (tabs bent. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. etc. 48. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 2 track 34 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 31 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). if the fault becomes present. contact the Techline.). broken. 4D. then carry out this fault finding procedure. Electrical wiring repair. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. UCH_V44_DF024/UCH_V48_DF024/UCH_V4C_DF024/ UCH_V4D_DF024/UCH_V4F_DF024/UCH_V50_DF024 87B-89 . repair the connector.). otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of faults 87B DF024 PRESENT OR STORED PASSENGER SIDE FRONT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. etc. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. broken. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. repair the connector. repair the connector. 4C. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. 4D. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 2 track 28 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 38 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. if the fault appears. 48.). then carry out this fault finding procedure. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of faults 87B DF025 PRESENT OR STORED DRIVER'S SIDE REAR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Replace the aerial if necessary. UCH_V44_DF025/UCH_V48_DF025/UCH_V4C_DF025/ UCH_V4D_DF025/UCH_V4F_DF025/UCH_V50_DF025 87B-90 .). otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. etc. Clear the stored faults. Verify that configuration CF097 Vehicle type has been correctly performed. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the driver's side rear door external aerial (tabs bent.: 44. etc. repair the connector. broken. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. then carry out this fault finding procedure. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair).). otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. etc.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent.Interpretation of faults 87B DF026 PRESENT OR STORED PASSENGER SIDE REAR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Verify that configuration CF097 Vehicle type has been correctly performed. UCH_V44_DF026/UCH_V48_DF026/UCH_V4C_DF026/ UCH_V4D_DF026/UCH_V4F_DF026/UCH_V50_DF026 87B-91 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . broken. 4D. Deal with any other faults.: 44. repair the connector. Replace the aerial if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 2 track 32 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 33 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. if the fault becomes present.). Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger side rear door external aerial (tabs bent. Electrical wiring repair. 48. Clear the stored faults. 4C. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor Track 1 Temperature sensor Track 2 Track 3 of the 40-track black connector of the UCH. UCH_V44_DF027/UCH_V48_DF027/UCH_V4C_DF027/ UCH_V4D_DF027/UCH_V4F_DF027/UCH_V50_DF027 87B-92 . broken). otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). (if the vehicle is not fitted with an external temperature sensor. perform the following fault finding procedure. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults. If NO. oxidised. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). check that configuration CF029 External temperature sensor has been correctly configured as WITHOUT . Electrical wiring repair. 4D. 4F.0 : Short circuit to earth CO. Check the 40-track UCH black connector PE2 (tabs bent. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the 2-track green connector of the temperature sensor (tabs bent. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. Track 13 of the 40-track black connector of the UCH.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault reappears as stored following the fault being cleared Check whether the passenger door mirror is fitted with a temperature sensor. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. broken. oxidised. Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of faults 87B DF027 PRESENT OR STORED EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT CC. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. vehicle is not fitted with it. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.). If YES. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. 4D.Interpretation of faults 87B DF027 CONTINUED Measure the sensor resistance between tracks 3 and 4 of the 4-track passenger electric door mirror black connector. Approximate temperature in °C between 0 and 5 between 11 and 15 between 21 and 25 between 31 and 35 Sensor resistance in Ω between 5400 and 6200 between 3700 and 4400 between 2500 and 3000 between 1700 and 2100 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline. 87B-93 . Replace the sensor if necessary.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . g.DEF : Short circuit to + 12 V on the steering column lock sensor connection None NOTES Special note: Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. otherwise replace the wiring.DEF : Short circuit to earth on the steering column lock sensor connection 5. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock black connector.). Check the condition and connection of connectors PE2. repair the connector.DEF : Lock earth absent or multiplex network faulty (e.DEF : Open circuit on the steering column lock sensor connection 6. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. PP2 on the UCH and connectors PEH (UPC Vdiag 44) or CT1 (UPC Vdiag 48) on the UPC (bent or broken tabs. 4D. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. CC. Electrical wiring repair.: lock disconnected) or lock power supply absent 2. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3 Steering column lock on track 6 Steering column lock on track 2 Steering column lock on track 5 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 track 1 of the UCH connector PP2 track 1 of the PEH or CT1 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. UCH_V44_DF029P/UCH_V48_DF029P/UCH_V4C_DF029P/ UCH_V4D_DF029P/UCH_V4F_DF029P /UCH_V50_DF029P 87B-94 .: 44.DEF : Open circuit (e. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of faults 87B STEERING LOCK CIRCUIT DF029 PRESENT CC.UCH Vdiag No.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V 1. 4F. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present.g. 48. Electrical wiring repair. steering lock ⇒ UCH connection) 4. contact the Techline.1 NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 and PE2 connectors of the UCH (tabs bent. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3 Steering column lock on track 6 Steering column lock on track 2 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 4C. 4F. Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the steering column lock 6-track black connector and the bodywork earth . Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-95 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. Electrical wiring repair.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 1 1. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the fault is still present. 4D.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.DEF 2. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock black connector. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 87B-96 . broken. 4C.). Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock connector (tabs bent.). Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). etc. 48.Interpretation of faults 87B DF029 CONTINUED 2 4. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring.DEF NOTES Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes. 4F. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .DEF 5. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. broken. Check the continuity and the insulation of the following connection: Steering column lock on track 4 track 1 of the UCH PE1 connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.DEF 6. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE1 (tabs bent. oxidised. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. 4D. etc.). repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of connector PEH (UPC Vdiag 44) or connector CT1 (UPC Vdiag 48) of the UPC (bent or broken tabs. UCH_V44_DF030P/UCH_V48_DF030P/UCH_V4C_DF030P/ UCH_V4D_DF030P/UCH_V4F_DF030P /UCH_V50_DF030P 87B-97 . otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair.1 NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock connector (tabs bent.Interpretation of faults 87B ANTI-LOCKING LINE DF030 PRESENT CO : Open circuit NOTES None CO.UCH Vdiag No. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. Check the presence and condition of the F5D fuse on the UPC (Vdiag 44 UPC) or the F18 fuse (Vdiag 48 UPC or later). Wiring: Precautions for repair).). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. contact the Techline. 48. 4F.: 44. broken. repair the connector. oxidised. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Steering column lock track 5 track 1 of the 12-track PEH or CT1 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 40-track connector PE2 on track 7 track 6 of the window winder connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. etc.UCH Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. ignore this fault. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO. 87D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C.). If the vehicle has a Mégane II ph2 bodywork: see MR 366 Fault finding. 4D. broken. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline. etc. repair the connector. Electric windows . Deal with any other faults. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the electric windows (tabs bent. NOTES Special note: If the vehicle is not fitted with one-touch windows. broken. 48.Sunroof . repair the connector.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault becomes present after a one-touch window has been activated. otherwise replace the wiring.). Refer to the information about Electric windows in the Fault finding chart section. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent.Interpretation of faults 87B DF031 PRESENT OR STORED ONE TOUCH WINDOW CONNECTION CC. UCH_V44_DF031/UCH_V48_DF031/UCH_V4C_DF031/ UCH_V4D_DF031/UCH_V4F_DF031/UCH_V50_DF031 87B-98 . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. then apply this fault finding procedure. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2 4-track connector track 1 track 40 of the black 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 29 of the black 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. contact the Techline. UCH_V44_DF032/UCH_V48_DF032/UCH_V4C_DF032/ UCH_V4D_DF032/UCH_V4F_DF032/UCH_V50_DF032 87B-99 . oxidised. repair the connector. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. If the fault is still present.: 44. etc. 4C.). Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the boot external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent. then carry out this fault finding procedure. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. broken. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of faults 87B DF032 PRESENT OR STORED LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT EXTERNAL AERIAL CO. repair the connector.). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. broken. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. if the fault appears. Replace the aerial if necessary.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). broken. a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials on the same side). Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 2 track 39 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 27 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 28 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 38 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. contact the Techline. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector.).UCH Vdiag No. broken.Interpretation of faults 87B DF033 PRESENT OR STORED DRIVER'S SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Disconnect one aerial then the other to identify which is the cause of the fault. Replace the aerial if necessary. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic. 4F. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 (tabs bent. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. UCH_V44_DF033/UCH_V48_DF033/UCH_V4C_DF033/ UCH_V4D_DF033/UCH_V4F_DF033/UCH_V50_DF033 87B-100 . Deal with any other faults. if the fault appears. 4D. 4C. then carry out this fault finding procedure. etc. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. Check the condition and connection of the driver's side external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. etc. (The aerials are connected by side.). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Disconnect one aerial then the other to identify which is the cause of the fault.). otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the passenger side external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 1 4-track connector track 2 track 34 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 31 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 32 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 33 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. UCH_V44_DF034/UCH_V48_DF034/UCH_V4C_DF034/ UCH_V4D_DF034/UCH_V4F_DF034/UCH_V50_DF034 87B-101 . (The aerials are connected by side.UCH Vdiag No. broken. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 (tabs bent. etc. broken. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Replace the aerial if necessary. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. repair the connector.). 4C. then carry out this fault finding procedure.Interpretation of faults 87B DF034 PRESENT OR STORED PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO. Wiring: Precautions for repair). contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials on the same side). Electrical wiring repair.: 44. 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. if the fault becomes present. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 3-track connector on track 3 Centre aerial. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.). 3-track connector on track 1 Front aerial. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. (The 3 aerials are interconnected in the UCH. Wiring: Precautions for repair). a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials). otherwise replace the wiring. 48. 3-track connector on track 3 track 25 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 24 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 37 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 26 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 35 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 track 36 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. if the fault becomes present. Replace the aerial if necessary. then carry out this fault finding procedure. broken. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. etc. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 3-track connector on track 1 Rear aerial. contact the Techline.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding. oxidised. etc. 3-track connector on track 3 Centre aerial. 4C. Check the condition and connection of the front internal aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent. Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. Clear the stored faults. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 (tabs bent.UCH Vdiag No. broken.). Disconnect the aerials one by one to identify which is the cause of the fault. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of faults 87B DF035 PRESENT OR STORED INTERNAL AERIALS CIRCUIT CO. Check the continuity and insulation to earth of the following connections: Front aerial. UCH_V44_DF035/UCH_V48_DF035/UCH_V4C_DF035/ UCH_V4D_DF035/UCH_V4F_DF035/UCH_V50_DF035 87B-102 . If the fault is still present. 3-track connector on track 1 Rear aerial. 4D. repair the connector. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3 Child safety lock switch track B1 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. UCH_V44_DF072/UCH_V48_DF072/UCH_V4C_DF072/ UCH_V4D_DF072/UCH_V4F_DF072/UCH_V50_DF072 87B-103 . repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. reconfigure the child safety lock function using the special command SC016 Child safety lock (see Configurations and programming). Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector.Interpretation of faults 87B DF072 PRESENT OR STORED CHILD SAFETY CIRCUIT CC CO : Short circuit : Open circuit CO CC NOTES If DF074 Left-hand door child safety lock circuit and DF073 Right-hand door child safety lock circuit are present. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. Interpretation of faults 87B DF073 PRESENT OR STORED RIGHT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK CIRCUIT CC CO : Short circuit : Open circuit CO CC NOTES If DF072 Left-hand door child safety lock circuit and DF073 Right-hand door child safety lock circuit are present. repair the connector. repair the connector. UCH_V44_DF073/UCH_V48_DF073/UCH_V4C_DF073/ UCH_V4D_DF073/UCH_V4F_DF073/UCH_V50_DF073 87B-104 .UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE1 and PP2 connectors. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3 Child safety lock switch track B1 Rear right-hand door locking motor 6-track black connector track B Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 Track 11 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). reconfigure the child safety lock function using the special command SC016 Child safety lock (see Configurations and programming). Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. repair the connector. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. repair the connector. repair the connector. repair the connector. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3 Child safety lock switch track B1 Rear left-hand door locking motor 6-track black connector track E Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 Track 11 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. UCH_V44_DF074/UCH_V48_DF074/UCH_V4C_DF074/ UCH_V4D_DF074/UCH_V4F_DF074/UCH_V50_DF074 87B-105 . otherwise replace the wiring. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair.: 44. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE1 and PP2 connectors. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of faults 87B DF074 PRESENT OR STORED LEFT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK CIRCUIT CC CO : Short circuit : Open circuit CO CC NOTES None Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. Before any check on the UCH tracks. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair). opening of a door causes time-delayed power supply. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 10 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3. Clear the stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. indicated by lighting of the starting switch and the instrument panel. 4F. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline. UCH_V44_DF075/UCH_V48_DF075/UCH_V4C_DF075/ UCH_V4D_DF075/UCH_V4F_DF075/UCH_V50_DF075 87B-106 . 48. Check for an earth on track 1 of the 12-track UCH PP3 connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the UCH and the connectors on the UPC. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. unlock the vehicle. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of faults 87B DF075 PRESENT OR STORED TIMED SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC : Short circuit NOTES After unlocking. 48. 4F. refer to the interpretation of parameter PR001 9 < X < 16 NONE ACCESSORIES TIMED AFTER-IGNITION FEED ACTIVE INACTIVE DEPRESSED RELEASED 315 433 INTERNAL EXTERNAL 315 433 ET014: Control power level None ET087: UCH ET098: One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation. + after ignition feed present. MAIN COMPUTER STATUSES AND PARAMETERS Parameter or Status checked or Action PR001: Battery voltage Sub-function Display and notes Fault finding In the event of a fault. Trip Computer button UCH frequency (in MHz) Type of UCH RF aerial Card frequency (in MHz) In the event of a fault. 4D.Conformity check 87B Note: Certain statuses and parameter do not affect all the Vdiags. NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET098 None None None ET195: ET205: ET010: UCH_V44_CCONF/UCH_V48_CCONF/UCH_V4C_CCONF/ UCH_V4D_CCONF/UCH_V4F_CCONF/UCH_V50_CCONF 87B-107 .: 44. consult the interpretation of status ET087 In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Application condition: engine stopped. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. : 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . consult the interpretation of status ET055 In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed present. 4C.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). consult the interpretation of status ET066 In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET057 ET045: ET066: Access ET067: Card detected button Card button press recognised Optical sensors supplied Front optical sensor (driver's side) Rear driver side optical sensor Passenger side front/ rear optical sensor ET054: ET055: ET056: ET057: 87B-108 . 48. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access Parameter or Status checked or Action Number of cards programmed Card frequency (in MHz) UCH frequency (in MHz) Type of UCH RF aerial RF frame received Sub-function Display and notes 1 2 3 4 315 433 315 433 INTERNAL YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE Fault finding PR013: None ET010: ET195: ET205: None None None In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET056 In the event of a fault.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. Application condition: engine stopped. consult the interpretation of status ET067 In the event of a fault. 4F. consult the interpretation of status ET045 In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET054 In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET059 In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET060 Signal interpreted if vehicle configured WITH Child safety lock. consult the interpretation of status ET061 ET059: ET060: ET086: ET053: Access ET042: Driver's door Passenger door ET194: Passenger's door or bonnet ET051: Rear left-hand door ET052: Rear right-hand door ET061: Open tailgate request 87B-109 . consult the interpretation of status ET053 In the event of a fault. Application condition: engine stopped. consult the interpretation of status ET058 In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed present. consult the interpretation of status ET052 In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET042 In the event of a fault.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. 4C. 48.: 44. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . consult the interpretation of status ET042 In the event of a fault. ABSENT = Button not pressed. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 1): Parameter or Status checked or Action ET058: Locking buttons on driver's side handles Locking buttons on passenger side handles Locking tailgate button Electric child safety lock Sub-function Display and notes DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED DEPRESSED RELEASED ACTIVE INACTIVE OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED PRESENT = Tailgate opening button pressed. In the event of a fault. Fault finding In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET051 In the event of a fault.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). 4D. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 2): Parameter or Status checked or Action ET050: Tailgate/Boot Open rear screen request Opening rear screen Sub-function Display and notes OPEN CLOSED ABSENT PRESENT OPEN CLOSED PRESSED RELEASED PRESSED RELEASED ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE INACTIVE Fault finding In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . refer to the interpretation of status ET044 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of fault DF072 In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed present.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). consult the interpretation of status ET050 None None In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET233 In the event of a fault. Application condition: engine stopped. 48. 4F. consult the interpretation of status ET159 In the event of a fault.UCH Vdiag No. ET159: ET087: *CPE: Electric central door locking 87B-110 .: 44. consult the interpretation of status ET087 ET062: ET041: ET044: CPE* button ET233: Access ET230: Child safety switch Child safety ET160: Rear right-hand door child safety lock Rear left-hand door child safety lock One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation. 4C. consult the interpretation of status ET160 In the event of a fault. : 44. In the event of a fault.UCH Vdiag No. carry out fault finding on the Airbag computer (see 88C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET069 ET088: Deadlocking activation source In the event of a fault. 48. + after ignition feed present. 4F. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 3): Parameter or Status checked or Action Sub-function Display and notes AUTOMATIC = automatic relocking if there is no action on the opening elements within 2 minutes of unlocking. consult the interpretation of status ET088 87B-11 1 . Electric central door locking = locking by pressing button on centre console HANDS-FREE = locking by pressing the door handle or tailgate switch RAID FUNCTION = Renault Anti-Intruder Device. 4C. consult the interpretation of status ET068 Access ET069: Most recently unlocked by If the status = Airbag . Application condition: engine stopped. Operates from approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). CARD = locking with card FAULT FINDING = Locking with actuator AC004 Opening element locking CPE LONG = locking by pressing and holding down centre console button HANDS-FREE = optical sensors CPE = electric central door locking button CARD = by card FAULT FINDING = AC005 IMPACT SIGNAL = following impact signal AIRBAG = unlocking by the airbag computer following an accident CARD HANDS-FREE FAULT FINDING Fault finding ET068: Most recently locked by In the event of a fault. Airbag and pretensioners). 4D. 48. 4D. 4F. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 4): Parameter or Status checked or Action Sub-function Display and notes CPE CARD HANDS-FREE FAULT FINDING APC ACTIVE INACTIVE Fault finding ET090: Access ET043: Deadlocking deactivation source In the event of a fault.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 87B-112 . 4C. consult the interpretation of status ET090 Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID) via the central locking function In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET043.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Application condition: engine stopped. + after ignition feed present. consult the interpretation of status ET070 In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . consult the interpretation of status ET072 ET072: Steering column lock ET014: Control power level None ET250: Injection Injection immobiliser code None In the event of a fault. 3 or 4 YES NO LOCKING UNLOCKING INCORRECT CORRECT FAULTY UNLOCKED UNDETERMINED SEMI-ACTIVATED SHORT CIRCUIT INCONSISTENT LOCKED UNLOCKED NONE ACCESSORIES TIMED AFTER-IGNITION FEED PROGRAMMED BLANK INCORRECT CORRECT Fault finding In the event of a fault. 2. 4F.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). consult the interpretation of status ET071 None None ET008: Blank UCH Number of cards programmed Unprogrammed steering column lock UCH request to steering column lock Steering column lock immobiliser code PR013: ET071: ET119: ET248: Protection ET073: Steering column lock sensor signal In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET229 ET229: 87B-113 . 4C. consult the interpretation of status ET073 In the event of a fault. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Protection Parameter or Status checked or Action ET070: Start button Sub-function Display and notes PRESSED RELEASED YES = If the UCH is blank.UCH Vdiag No. 4D.: 44. Application condition: engine stopped. + after ignition feed present. refer to the interpretation of status ET008 None In the event of a fault. 1. 48. NO = If the UCH is programmed. UCH Vdiag No. Application condition: engine stopped. + after ignition feed present. ACTIVE = Vehicle protected. YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO Fault finding ET046: Engine immobiliser In the event of a fault. 4C. refer to the interpretation of status ET046 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET075 ET116: Protection ET117: Card code received Card code valid ET045: RF signal received ET075: + Accessories feed present 87B-114 . refer to the interpretation of status ET117 In the event of a fault.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . starting impossible. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Protection (continued) Parameter or Status checked or Action Sub-function Display and notes INACTIVE = Vehicle unprotected.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET116 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET045 In the event of a fault. 48. 4D. 4F. ready to start. consult the interpretation of status ET070 In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed present. refer to the interpretation of status ET169 ET108: Automatic gearbox lever position ET048: Starting ET047: Clutch pedal position Brake pedal position ET110: UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit ET169: Engine 87B-115 . consult the interpretation of status ET108 In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of status ET048 In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . consult the interpretation of status ET110 In the event of a fault. KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub:function: Starting Parameter or Status checked or Action ET070: Start button Sub-function Display and notes DEPRESSED RELEASED NOT IN NEUTRAL P NEUTRAL REAR DEPRESSED RELEASED NOT FOUND RELEASED DEPRESSED INCONSISTENT ENGINE STOPPED INACTIVE AFTER-IGNITION STARTING STOPPED Fault finding In the event of a fault. 4F. 48.: 44. 4C. consult the interpretation of status ET047 In the event of a fault.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). 4D. Application condition: engine stopped.UCH Vdiag No. : 44.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). 4D. 48. 4F. AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: User selection Parameter or Status checked or Action ET029: Air conditioning button Sub-function Display and notes DEPRESSED RELEASED PRESSED if the heated rear screen button on the air conditioning control panel is pressed. refer to the interpretation of status ET028 ET028: User selection Heated rear screen button ET015: Passenger compartment blower In the event of a fault. Fault finding In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET029 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET015 87B-116 .UCH Vdiag No. 4C. + after ignition feed present. RELEASED otherwise ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: This status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning). Application condition: engine stopped. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4 or 5 Heating Passenger compartment blower ET015: In the event of a fault. Application condition: engine stopped. 2. 3. refer to the interpretation of status ET017 In the event of a fault. 48. 4 or 5 ET018: 0. 3. In the event of a fault. 1. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . refer to the interpretation of status ET021 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET019 9 < X < 16 PR002: External temperature Temperature in °C ET017: Number of RCH required Number of RCH authorised by alternator Number of RCH authorised by injection computer 0. 4 or 5 ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning). 4F. 3. 2. 2. 4 or 5 ET019: 0. + after ignition feed present. 4C. 0.: 44. refer to the interpretation of status ET018 In the event of a fault. AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: Heating Parameter or Status checked or Action PR001: Battery voltage Sub-function Display and notes Fault finding In the event of a fault. 1. 1. refer to the interpretation of status ET022 ET021: RCH* 1 relay control Passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay control ACTIVE INACTIVE ET022: ACTIVE INACTIVE *RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor 87B-117 . 1. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. refer to the interpretation of parameter PR001 In the event of a fault.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of parameter PR002 In the event of a fault. 3. 2. refer to the interpretation of status ET015 ET020: Number RCH* activated. refer to the interpretation of status ET020 In the event of a fault. UCH Vdiag No. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. Application condition: engine stopped.: 44.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: Heating (continued) Parameter or Status checked or Action ET023: RCH* 3 relay control Sub-function Display and notes ACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE Fast idle speed to prevent battery discharge STOPPED CLOSED NOT CLOSED ABSENT ACTIVE INACTIVE Fault finding In the event of a fault. 4F. refer to the interpretation of status ET169 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET025 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET031 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET026 ET031: Fast idle speed request for RCH* Heating ET169: Engine ET025: Retractable roof ET026: Heated rear screen switch *RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor 87B-118 . + after ignition feed present. 4D. refer to the interpretation of status ET023 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET169 ET169: Engine STOPPED ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning). + after ignition feed present. AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: Cold Loop Parameter or Status checked or Action ET030: Air conditioning request 2 Sub-function Display and notes ACTIVE INACTIVE Fault finding In the event of a fault.: 44.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET030 In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F.UCH Vdiag No. refer to the interpretation of status ET015 PR002: External temperature In the event of a fault. Application condition: engine stopped. refer to the interpretation of parameter PR002 87B-119 . Temperature in °C Cold loop ET015: Passenger compartment blower In the event of a fault. 4D. 48. 4C. UCH Vdiag No. 4F.: 44.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). 48. 4C. 4D. SSPP) In bar In °C In bar In °C 87B-120 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre approval Parameter or Status checked or Action ET040: Tyre pressure monitoring system Tyre pressure appropriate for the speed Vehicle speed Tyre pressure imbalance Sub-function Display and notes OUT OF USE ACTIVE YES NO In mph NONE FRONT REAR FRONT/REAR YES NO Fault finding In the event of a fault. refer to Configuration and programming ET037: PR008: ET036: ET045: ET032: Tyre receiver ET033: ET034: ET035: PR003: PR019: PR004: PR020: RF signal received Front left-hand wheel valve signal Front right-hand wheel valve signal Rear right-hand wheel valve signal Rear left-hand wheel valve signal Front left-hand wheel pressure Front left-hand tyre temperature Front right-hand wheel pressure Front right-hand tyre temperature OK ABSENT OVER-INFLATED PUNCTURED UNDER-INFLATED Without (See 35B. Application condition: engine stopped. + after ignition feed present. 48. Application condition: engine stopped.UCH Vdiag No. + after ignition feed present.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). SSPP) 87B-121 . 4F. 4D.: 44. FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre approval (continued) Parameter or Status checked or Action PR005: PR021: Tyre receiver PR006: PR022: Rear left-hand wheel pressure Rear left-hand tyre temperature In bar In °C Rear right-hand wheel pressure Rear right-hand tyre temperature Sub-function Display and notes In bar In °C Fault finding Without (See 35B. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). SSPP) PR014: PR015: PR059: PR017: PR018: 87B-122 . 4C. 48. Application condition: engine stopped. 4D. + after ignition feed present.: 44. 4F. FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre management Parameter or Status checked or Action PR009: Front wheel low speed recommended pressure Rear wheel low speed recommended pressure Front wheel high speed recommended pressure Rear wheel high speed recommended pressure Left/right pressure difference threshold Low under-inflation threshold Puncture report threshold Cold over-inflation threshold Warm over-inflation threshold Fault finding See 35B. SSPP Sub-function Display and notes PR010: PR012: Tyre management PR011: In bar Without (See 35B.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. SSPP Sub-function Display and notes ACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE STATUS 1 STATUS 2 INCONSISTENCY Without (See 35B. 4F. SSPP) 87B-123 . 48. FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre display Parameter or Status checked or Action ET039: Tyre display ET016: Buzzer activation request STOP warning light on request Fault finding See 35B. 4D.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped. + after ignition feed present. Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET085 In the event of a fault. Application condition: engine stopped.: 44. refer to the interpretation of status ET111 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET113 In the event of a fault. 4D. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. refer to the interpretation of status ET082 In the event of a fault. LIGHTING FUNCTION Sub-function: Lighting command Parameter or Status checked or Action Sub-function Display and notes PARK SIDE DIPPED MAIN FLASH PRESENT ABSENT Fault finding ET081: Lighting switch position In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET169 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of statuses ET083 In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . refer to the interpretation of status ET115 In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed present. refer to the interpretation of status ET081 In the event of a fault. 48. refer to the interpretation of statuses ET084 ET115: Request to switch on lights by light sensor ET169: Engine STOPPED ET113: Lighting control ET111: Automatic lighting button Front fog lights request Rear fog lights request Hazard warning lights button Left-hand direction indicator request Right-hand direction indicator request DEPRESSED RELEASED PRESENT ABSENT PRESENT ABSENT DEPRESSED RELEASED PRESENT ABSENT PRESENT ABSENT ET082: ET085: ET083: ET084: 87B-124 . refer to the interpretation of parameter PR008 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET078 In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Application condition: engine stopped. 4D. In the event of a fault.UCH Vdiag No. refer to the interpretation of status ET108 ET109: ET108: Automatic gearbox lever position 87B-125 . 4C. WIPING FUNCTION Sub function: Wiper control Parameter or Status checked or Action PR008: Vehicle speed Sub-function Display and notes Fault finding In the event of a fault.: 44.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET080 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET096 ET114: Wiper control ET078: ET080: ET097: ET079: PRESENT ABSENT PRESENT ABSENT PRESENT ABSENT PRESENT ABSENT PRESENT ABSENT YES NO NOT IN NEUTRAL P NEUTRAL REAR In the event of a fault. 4F. 48. refer to the interpretation of status ET077 In mph SWITCHING OFF INTERMITTENT LOW AND HIGH SPEEDS ET077: Wiper stalk position ET096: Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position Rain sensor sensitivity ring position Wiper request by rain sensor Windscreen washer request Rear screen wiper request Rear screen wiper park position Rear screen washer request Reverse gear engaged ET118: 1 2 3 4 In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed present. refer to the interpretation of status ET114 In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET097 In the event of a fault. check the reverse gear switch and its connections. refer to the interpretation of status ET079 In the event of a fault. UCH Vdiag No. Application condition: engine stopped. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44.Conformity check 87B NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). 48. 4D. 4C. + after ignition feed present. LIGHTING FUNCTION Sub-function: Lighting power Ü Parameter or Status checked or Action ET112: Interior lighting control Sub-function Lighting power Display and notes ACTIVE INACTIVE Fault finding None 87B-126 . V4F. V48. V50 V48. V4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . V48. V50 V44. V4C. V4D.UCH Vdiag No. 48. 4C. V4C. V50 V44. V48. V4D. V50 V48. V4F. V50 *RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor 87B-127 . V4C.Status summary table 87B Vdiag Tool status ET008 ET010 ET014 ET015 ET016 ET017 ET018 ET019 ET020 ET021 ET022 ET023 ET025 ET026 ET028 ET029 ET030 ET031 ET032 ET033 ET034 ET035 ET036 ET037 ET038 ET039 ET040 ET041 ET042 UCH blank Diagnostic tool title V44. V4D Card frequency (in MHz) Control power level Passenger compartment blower Buzzer activation request Number of RCH* required Number of RCH* authorised by alternator Number of RCH* authorised by injection computer Number RCH* activated.: 44. V4C. V48. RCH* 1 relay control RCH* 2 relay control RCH* 3 relay control Retractable roof Heated rear screen switch Heated rear screen button Air conditioning button Air conditioning request 2 Fast idle speed request for RCH* Front left-hand wheel valve signal Front right-hand wheel valve signal Rear right-hand wheel valve signal Rear left-hand wheel valve signal Tyre pressure imbalance Tyre pressure appropriate for speed Service warning light "on" request STOP warning light on request Tyre pressure monitoring system Opening rear screen Passenger door V44. V4F. 4D. V4F. V4C. V50 V44. V4D. V4F. V4C. V4C. V48. V4F. V4D. 4F. V4D. UCH Vdiag No. passenger side Locking tailgate button Open tailgate request Open rear screen request Card detected button Card button press recognised Most recently locked by Most recently unlocked by Start button Unprogrammed steering lock Steering lock Steering lock sensor signal + Accessories present V44.: 44. V4F. V4F. V4D. V4C. 4F. V48. 48. V50 V48. V4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . V4D. V4D. 4D. V4C.Status summary table 87B Vdiag Tool status ET043 ET044 ET045 ET046 ET047 ET048 ET050 ET051 ET052 ET053 ET054 ET055 ET056 ET057 ET058 ET059 ET060 ET061 ET062 ET066 ET067 ET068 ET069 ET070 ET071 ET072 ET073 ET075 Diagnostic tool title RAID* function authorisation by CPE* CPE* button RF frame received Engine immobiliser Brake pedal position Clutch pedal position Tailgate/Boot Rear left-hand door Rear right-hand door Driver's door Optical sensors supplied Front optical sensor (driver's side) Rear driver side optical sensor Passenger side front/rear optical sensor Locking button on driver's side handles Locking buttons on handles. V4F. V50 *Automatic locking when driving *Electric central door locking 87B-128 . V48. V50 V44. 4C. : 44. V48. V50 V44. V4C V44. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. V48. V4F. 4F.Status summary table 87B Vdiag Tool status ET077 ET078 ET079 ET080 ET081 ET082 ET083 ET084 ET085 ET086 ET087 ET088 ET090 ET096 ET097 ET098 ET108 ET109 ET110 ET111 ET112 ET113 ET114 ET115 ET116 ET117 ET118 ET119 Wiper stalk position Diagnostic tool title Windscreen washer request Rear screen washer request Rear screen wiper request Lighting switch position Rear fog lights request Left-hand direction indicator request Right-hand direction indicator request Hazard warning lights button Electric child safety lock One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation. V4D. 4D. V4F. V4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deadlocking activation source Deadlocking deactivation source Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position Rear screen wiper park position Trip Computer button Automatic gearbox lever position Reverse gear engaged UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit Front fog lights request Interior lighting control Automatic lighting button Wiping request via rain sensor Request to switch on lights by light sensor Card code received Card code valid Rain sensor sensitivity ring position UCH request to steering column lock V44. V50 87B-129 . 48. V4C. V48. V4C. V48. V4F. V50 87B-130 . V4F.: 44. 48. V50 Injection V44. V4C. V4F. V50 V4D. V50 V44.UCH Vdiag No. V50 Rear right-hand door child safety lock Engine Passenger's door or bonnet UCH frequency (in MHz) Type of UCH RF aerial Injection immobiliser code Child safety Child safety switch Steering column lock immobiliser code V4F. V50 V4F. V4F. V4D. V4D. V4F. V50 V44. 4F. V4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . V48. V48. 4D.Status summary table 87B Vdiag Tool status ET159 ET160 ET169 ET194 ET195 ET205 ET229 ET230 ET233 ET248 ET250 Diagnostic tool title Rear left-hand door child safety lock V4D. V4D. V4C. 4C. V4F. V50 V4C. V4C. – programming or reallocation of the cards. 4C. 4F. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 48. Carry out the following operations: – programming and configuration of the UCH. UCH_V44_ET008/UCH_V48_ET008/UCH_V4C_ET008/ UCH_V4D_ET008/UCH_V4F_ET008/UCH_V50_ET008 87B-131 .Interpretation of statuses 87B BLANK UCH ET008 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Programmed UCH. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ET008 is YES. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.UCH Vdiag No. (see Configuration and Programming) ET008 is NO.: 44. 4D. In the event of an inconsistency. when the start switch is pressed. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. TIMED. no power supply. Deal with any other faults. 4F. contact Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH_V44_ET014/UCH_V48_ET014/UCH_V4C_ET014/ UCH_V4D_ET014/UCH_V4F_ET014/UCH_V50_ET014 87B-132 . 4C.: 44. when a door is opened. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. + ACCESSORIES feed. + AFTER IGNITION FEED when starting or on forced + after ignition feed.Interpretation of statuses 87B CONTROL POWER LEVEL ET014 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Clear the stored faults. 48. Special note: This status displays the power level. NONE. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_ET015/UCH_V48_ET015/UCH_V4C_ET015/ UCH_V4D_ET015/UCH_V4F_ET015/UCH_V50_ET015 87B-133 . 4F. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. broken tabs. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc. Electrical wiring repair. 4D.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Check the control panel (see 62C. repair the connector. ET015 is Inactive the ventilation control on the air conditioning control panel is not 0. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 8-track control panel connector Track 7 8-track control panel connector Track 1 Track 30 of the 40-track grey connector PE2 on the UCH Track 32 of the 40-track grey connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Apply to manual air conditioning and heating systems.). broken. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. Manual air conditioning). oxidised. etc.). 48.Interpretation of statuses 87B PASSENGER COMPARTMENT BLOWER ET015 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. NOTES Special note: Status ET016 is STATUS 1 or STATUS 2 if the SSPP buzzer is activated.: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. ET016 is STATUS 2. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . A tyre is punctured or there is a severe under-inflation. Repair or replace the tyre if necessary.Interpretation of statuses 87B BUZZER ACTIVATION REQUEST ET016 There must be no present or stored faults. Adjust the pressures of the four tyres to the recommended pressures. Repair or replace the tyre if necessary. Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ET016/UCH_V48_ET016/UCH_V4C_ET016/ UCH_V4D_ET016/UCH_V4F_ET016/UCH_V50_ET016 87B-134 . 4C. This signal is only valid for vehicles fitted with runflat tyres. Adjust the pressures of the four tyres to the recommended pressures. Request for buzzer activation to warn the driver that the vehicle speed is too high when the vehicle has one or more punctured tyres. 48. ET016 is STATUS 1 Request for activation of the buzzer linked to display of a puncture warning message on the instrument panel. 4F. 4F. PR002: External temperature < 5 °C Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability . 4 or 5.60 %. Climate control Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature. Check the consistency of these statuses and parameters. Special note: Manual air conditioning (not automatic) Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature.UCH Vdiag No. the external temperature and electrical availability. 2.: 44. 4C. NOTES The passenger compartment heating resistor control conditions are: Manual air conditioning (not automatic): ET169 Engine is Running. the external temperature. alternator load < 70 % (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). ET015 Passenger compartment blower is Active. Climate control: ET169 Engine is Running. In the event of a fault. Heat demand by the user (refer to the climate control computer). Deal with any other faults. electrical availability. will be 0.Interpretation of statuses 87B NUMBER OF RCHs REQUIRED ET017 There must be no present or stored faults. alternator load < 70 % (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH_V44_ET017/UCH_V48_ET017/UCH_V4C_ET017/ UCH_V4D_ET017/UCH_V4F_ET017/UCH_V50_ET017 87B-135 . consult the interpretation of these statuses and parameters. depending on the conditions. 4D. Clear the stored faults. PR002: External temperature < 5 °C Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability . RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 1. The status.60 %. 48. 3. the internal temperature and the user's request. This information allows the number of passenger compartment heating resistors to be supplied depending on the available power.: 44. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. 4 or 5. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. 2. 4C. 48. Special note: This information is usable only on vehicles fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET018 NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY ALTERNATOR There must be no present or stored faults. Calculation performed by the UCH according to the alternator power available (information supplied by the UPC). depending on the conditions.UCH Vdiag No. NOTES In the event of a fault. 3. 1. perform fault finding on the UPC (see 87G. UCH_V44_ET018/UCH_V48_ET018/UCH_V4C_ET018/ UCH_V4D_ET018/UCH_V4F_ET018/UCH_V50_ET018 87B-136 . 4D. Parameter PR010 of the alternator load UPC should be less than 70 % so that the passenger compartment heating resistors can be authorised by the alternator. will be 0. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Engine compartment connection unit). The status. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. depending on the conditions. Conditions for authorisation of passenger compartment heating resistor by the injection: – injection system status ET111 Fixed number of RCHs should be NO.: 44. 4C. 48. 1. 4F. 2. – injection system status ET112 RCH cut-off should be NO. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults. run fault finding on the injection system (see 13B. 4 or 5. This information allows the number of passenger compartment heating resistors to be supplied depending on the engine load. Special note: Calculation performed by the UCH depending on the maximum power authorised by the injection computer. The status.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET019 NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY INJECTION There must be no present or stored faults. will be 0. NOTES In the event of a fault. UCH_V44_ET019/UCH_V48_ET019/UCH_V4C_ET019/ UCH_V4D_ET019/UCH_V4F_ET019/UCH_V50_ET019 87B-137 . 3. Clear the stored faults. Diesel injection or 17B. contact the Techline. Petrol injection). Interpretation of statuses 87B ET020 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS There must be no present or stored faults. 2. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 48. – ET019 Number of RCHs authorised by injection computer > 0. – Battery voltage > 12 V. will be 0. depending on the conditions. 3. Clear the stored faults. The status. Deal with any other faults. The maximum number of passenger compartment heating resistors controlled will be the maximum number indicated by statuses ET017. ET018. – ET018 Number of RCHs authorised by alternator > 0. – Internal temperature < 10 °C – User temperature setpoint in warm position (> 20 °C) – PR002 External temperature < 5 °C – ET015 Passenger compartment blower ACTIVE. 4D. or 4. and depending on the air conditioning function program. Check that these statuses and parameters are working properly. the UCH controls the Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors needed to provide the service. consult the interpretation of these statuses and parameters.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ET020/UCH_V48_ET020/UCH_V4C_ET020/ UCH_V4D_ET020/UCH_V4F_ET020/UCH_V50_ET020 87B-138 . NOTES Special note: The UCH controls the passenger compartment heating resistor relays according to the authorisation from the injection computers and Protection and Switching Unit. If all the conditions are satisfied. The passenger compartment heating resistor control conditions are: – Heater motor running. ET019. In the event of a fault. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 1. – PR010 (UPC) Alternator charge < 70 %.: 44. 4F. Interpretation of statuses 87B ET021 ET022 ET023 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 1 RELAY CONTROL PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 2 RELAY CONTROL PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 3 RELAY CONTROL NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. ET017 Number of heating resistors required. 4D. temperature setpoint on the heater control panel. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. UCH_V44_ET021/UCH_V48_ET021/UCH_V4C_ET021/UCH_V4D_ET021/UCH_V4F_ET021/UCH_V50_ET021/ UCH_V44_ET022/UCH_V48_ET022/UCH_V4C_ET022/UCH_V4D_ET022/UCH_V4F_ET022/UCH_V50_ET022/ UCH_V44_ET023/UCH_V48_ET023/UCH_V4C_ET023/UCH_V4D_ET023/UCH_V4F_ET023/UCH_V50_ET023 87B-139 . contact Techline. Deal with any other faults. Check the parameters needed to switch on the Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors. 4F. battery voltage. ET019 Number of heating resistors authorised by injection computer and ET020 Number of heating resistors controlled . the signal is interpretable if the vehicle is configured with RCH 1000 W or RCH 1800 W. AC017 RCH 2 relay.: 44. If all the requisite conditions are consistent and the status remains INACTIVE . 48. AC018 RCH 3 relay. ET018 Number of heating resistors authorised by alternator. Carry out the fault finding procedure for commands AC016 RCH 1 relay. In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . external temperature. check the operation of statuses ET015 Passenger compartment blower. 4C. alternator load. internal temperature. For statuses ET021 and ET022. the signal is interpretable if the vehicle is configured with RCH 1800 W . For status ET023. Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. If the vehicle is not a cabriolet. 48. status ET025 will be ABSENT. 4D.Interpretation of statuses 87B RETRACTABLE ROOF ET025 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. contact the Techline. In case of inconsistency. 4C. In case of inconsistency. 4F. ET025 is ABSENT The position of the retractable roof is unknown. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH_V44_ET025/UCH_V48_ET025/UCH_V4C_ET025/ UCH_V4D_ET025/UCH_V4F_ET025/UCH_V50_ET025 87B-140 . ET025 is NOT CLOSED The retractable roof of the vehicle is not closed. Deal with any other faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. If the vehicle is a cabriolet. ET025 is CLOSED The retractable roof of the cabriolet vehicle is closed. Clear the stored faults. In case of inconsistency. contact the Techline. status ET025 is CLOSED or NOT CLOSED. UCH_V44_ET026/UCH_V48_ET026/UCH_V4C_ET026/ UCH_V4D_ET026/UCH_V4F_ET026/UCH_V50_ET026 87B-141 . otherwise. Verify that status ET028 Heated rear screen switch is PRESSED.Interpretation of statuses 87B HEATED REAR SCREEN CONTROL ET026 There must be no present or stored faults. 4D. ET026 Inactive despite a rear de-icing request by the user. NOTES Special note: Operation of the heated rear screen requires the engine status to be Running. MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING Verify that status ET142 Engine operating phase is Running. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. carry out fault finding on the injection system. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present.: 44. Clear the stored faults. carry out fault finding on the injection system. carry out a fault finding procedure on the air conditioning computer. otherwise. 48. Climate control Verify that status ET142 Engine operating phase is Running. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. otherwise refer to interpretation of this status. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. etc. Clear the stored faults. ET028 Released with press on the button. NOTES Special note: Information interpretable if the vehicle is configured with Heating or Manual Air Conditioning (SC008 UCH type and CF019 Type of air conditioning). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH black connector PE2 (tabs bent. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. etc. repair the connector.). otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B HEATED REAR SCREEN BUTTON ET028 There must be no present or stored faults. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Air conditioning control panel 8-track black connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track black connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.). 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. broken. Check the control panel (see 62C. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. ET028 Pressed without press on the button. If the fault is still present. UCH_V44_ET028/UCH_V48_ET028/UCH_V4C_ET028/ UCH_V4D_ET028/UCH_V4F_ET028/UCH_V50_ET028 87B-142 . broken tabs.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. contact the Techline. Deal with any other faults. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Manual air conditioning). otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. oxidised. Check the control panel (see 62C. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track black connector PE2 (tabs bent. etc. 4F. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair.). Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. broken. 48. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. 4C. etc.Interpretation of statuses 87B AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON ET029 There must be no present or stored faults. Manual air conditioning). Deal with any other faults. repair the connection. Wiring: Precautions for repair). NOTES Special note: Information interpretable if the vehicle is configured with Manual Air Conditioning (SC008 UCH type and CF019 Type of air conditioning). UCH_V44_ET029/UCH_V48_ET029/UCH_V4C_ET029/ UCH_V4D_ET029/UCH_V4F_ET029/UCH_V50_ET029 87B-143 .). broken tabs. otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Climate control panel 8-track black connector on track 7 track 30 of the 40-track UCH black connector PE2. MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING Verify that status ET169 Engine is Running. Climate control Carry out fault finding on the climate control computer (see 62C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The engine must be running. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. contact the Techline. Special note: This is the request for air conditioning sent by the UCH to the injection computer. contact the Techline. Clear the stored faults. Verify that status ET015 Passenger compartment ventilation is ACTIVE. 4F. – In the case of a vehicle fitted with climate control. Manual air conditioning).UCH Vdiag No.Interpretation of statuses 87B AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST 2 ET030 There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES ET030 Inactive despite a climate control request. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If it is not. 4D. If status ET015 is INACTIVE carry out fault finding on this status. UCH_V44_ET030/UCH_V48_ET030/UCH_V4C_ET030/ UCH_V4D_ET030/UCH_V4F_ET030/UCH_V50_ET030 87B-144 . carry out fault finding on the injection system. by request from the user or the climate control computer in automatic mode. If status ET029 is RELEASED carry out fault finding on this status. by pressing on the air conditioning button. This request may reach the UCH in two ways: – In the case of a vehicle fitted with manual air conditioning. 48. If the fault is still present.: 44. Verify that status ET029 Air conditioning button is PRESSED by pressing the button. 4C. 48. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline.: 44. UCH_V44_ET031/UCH_V48_ET031/UCH_V4C_ET031/ UCH_V4D_ET031/UCH_V4F_ET031/UCH_V50_ET031 87B-145 . Deal with any other faults.UCH Vdiag No. ET031 Inactive with engine at idling speed with the passenger compartment heating resistors switched on. In case of inconsistency.Interpretation of statuses 87B FAST IDLE REQUEST FOR RCH ET031 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4C. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4D. 4F. : 44. broken. otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The continuity of the lock switch on tracks 2 and 1 in the rest position. Electrical wiring repair. oxidised. oxidised.). etc. 48. repair the connector. If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. UCH_V44_ET042/UCH_V48_ET042/UCH_V4C_ET042/ UCH_V4D_ET042/UCH_V4F_ET042/UCH_V50_ET042 87B-146 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. In case of inconsistency. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. The insulation of the lock switch on tracks 2 and 1 in the engaged position.Interpretation of statuses 87B PASSENGER DOOR ET042 NOTES There must be no faults present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger door lock (tabs bent. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. Replace the lock if it is not correct.). 4D. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. etc. repair the connection. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Passenger lock black 4-track Track 1 Track 15 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1. Wiring: Precautions for repair). broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. Interpretation of statuses 87B ET043 AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHILE DRIVING FUNCTION AUTHORISATION BY CENTRAL LOCKING SWITCH NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Clear the stored faults. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds without the after ignition feed to lock the vehicle (specification for Spain). Deal with any other faults.: 44. UCH_V44_ET043/UCH_V48_ET043/UCH_V4C_ET043/ UCH_V4D_ET043/UCH_V4F_ET043/UCH_V50_ET043 87B-147 . 4F. CAR: Automatic locking when driving CPE: Electric central door locking AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. Press the vehicle unlock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to deactivate automatic locking when driving (the locking when driving status is inactive). 48. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to activate automatic locking (the locking when driving status is active). 4C. Check that the UCH is configured with Locking when driving. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . oxidised. Check: The continuity of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch pressed). CPE: Electric central door locking AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Electric central locking 8-track switch Track 5 Central door locking 8-track switch Track 6 Track 6 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1 Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent. The insulation of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch OFF). 4D.Interpretation of statuses 87B Electric door lock button ET044 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). broken. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Replace the switch if it is not correct. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track grey connector of the Central Door Locking switch (tabs bent. etc. Clear the stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. Check continuity of the 8-track connector track 1 and the vehicle earth. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. Deal with any other faults.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector.). repair the connection. UCH_V44_ET044/UCH_V48_ET044/UCH_V4C_ET044/ UCH_V4D_ET044/UCH_V4F_ET044/UCH_V50_ET044 87B-148 .). etc. repair the connection. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. 48. If the fault is still present. If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. perform a test with a card belonging to another vehicle. 48. contact the Techline. If the status remains NO. 4F. Clear the stored faults.: 44. UCH_V44_ET045/UCH_V48_ET045/UCH_V4C_ET045/ UCH_V4D_ET045/UCH_V4F_ET045/UCH_V50_ET045 87B-149 . Check with the vehicle's second card. check status ET066 Card button press received. NOTES Special note: This status is used for the Unlocking/Locking and hands-free starting functions. 4C. 4D. ET045 NO on pressing one of the card buttons. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B RF FRAME RECEIVED ET045 There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. This status simply makes it possible to check the condition of the UCH internal receiver aerial. If the status changes to YES. 7 If these statuses are correct. ET046 Active with starting request but no after ignition present. 4D. this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. Check status ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal. check the injection computer. Power supply level required + after ignition.: 44. if it is released. if ACTIVE . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact Techline. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 6 Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay. 48. UCH_V44_ET046/UCH_V48_ET046/UCH_V4C_ET046/ UCH_V4D_ET046/UCH_V4F_ET046/UCH_V50_ET046 87B-150 . if it is YES.Interpretation of statuses 87B ENGINE IMMOBILISER ET046 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. it should be pressed in the event of the button being pressed. ET046 Active present forced after ignition feed level Check and repair if necessary: Status of engine immobiliser in the injection system. Check that status ET072 Steering column lock is unlocked. perform fault finding on this status. If the fault is still present. Clear the stored faults. 4C. 5 Check if status ET110 UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit is + after ignition. 1 Insert the card into the reader 2 Check if the card is allocated to the vehicle with command SC006 Card allocation. contact the Techline. 3 Check status ET070 Start switch. 4F. run fault finding on this status. if locked run fault finding on this status. run fault finding on this status. 4 Check that status ET071 Steering column lock blank is NO. Deal with any other faults. if locked. Wiring: Precautions for repair). to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. using a wiring diagram. 48.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. Status 047 Inconsistency when pressing on the pedal.: 44. UCH_V44_ET047/UCH_V48_ET047/UCH_V4C_ET047/ UCH_V4D_ET047/UCH_V4F_ET047/UCH_V50_ET047 87B-151 . otherwise replace the wiring. This treatment applies only in cases in which the status is inconsistent or undetermined. contact the Techline. repair the connector. Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is incorrect. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation against + 12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 36 of connector PE2 of the UCH. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). the automatic gearbox computer. The line is shared with the injection computer and. In the event of faulty insulation. if fitted. During pedal travel. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. If the fault is still present. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. Deal with any other faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. with foot hard down on the accelerator or completely released from the brake pedal. Electrical wiring repair. with the brake pedal switch in between the released and depressed positions (see System operation). Electrical wiring repair. it is therefore necessary. with the switch piston free.Interpretation of statuses 87B BRAKE PEDAL POSITION ET047 NOTES The accessories relay must operate. it is possible to repair an undetermined or inconsistent status on status ET047 Brake pedal position when the pedal is left in an "indeterminate zone". Special note: Switch on forced after ignition. Remove the brake pedal switch and check the insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch. : 44. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. 48. If the fault is still present. using a wiring diagram. repair the connector. contact the Techline.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET047 CONTINUED 1 Status 047 Undetermined without depressing on the pedal. Electrical wiring repair. to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. if fitted. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. if not replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. With the UCH and brake light switch disconnected: Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: UCH connector PE2 Track 36 Track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 87B-152 . it is therefore necessary. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). – With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected. Contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. with the switch piston depressed. Deal with any other faults. Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is not correct. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection UCH connector PP3. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. if it is still not correct. Remove the brake pedal switch and check the continuity of the connection between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check for 12 V on track 4 of the brake pedal switch connector. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. the automatic transmission computer. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). In the event of faulty insulation. Wiring: Precautions for repair). The line is shared with the injection computer and. check the insulation to earth and the continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 3 of connector PP3 of the UCH. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. The line is shared with the ABS computer or the electronic stability program (ESP) relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is not correct.UCH Vdiag No. it is therefore necessary. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. contact the Techline. 4D. with the brake light switch piston depressed. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. With the brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch. using a wiring diagram. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET047 CONTINUED 2 Status 047 Inconsistency without depressing the pedal. Electrical wiring repair. to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these components. 4C. 48. In the event of faulty insulation. 87B-153 . If the fault is still present. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation to + 12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 27 of the UCH connector PE2. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these components. If it is still faulty. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. With the brake pedal switch disconnected: Check for 12 V on track 2 of the brake pedal switch connector. 4D. repair the connector. contact Techline. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of fuse 1H in the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. it is therefore necessary. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is not correct. 87B-154 . Deal with any other faults.: 44. 4F. repair the connector. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 1H of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. with the brake pedal switch piston free. Electrical wiring repair. The line is shared with the ABS computer or the ESP relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. – Check the condition and connection of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Wiring: Precautions for repair). In the event of faulty insulation. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). using a wiring diagram. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: UCH connector PE2 Track 27 Track 1 of the brake pedal switch connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. With the brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the continuity of the connection between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET047 CONTINUED 3 Status 047 Undetermined with the pedal depressed. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. 4C. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. Check the connection and condition of the clutch pedal switch connector. contact the Techline. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Track 5 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. 48. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Clutch pedal switch on track 1 If the fault is still present. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Status 048 Released with the pedal depressed. Remove the clutch pedal switch and check for earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch connector. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults.: 44. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. NOTES Special note: Switch on forced after ignition. Electrical wiring repair. UCH_V44_ET048/UCH_V48_ET048/UCH_V4C_ET048/ UCH_V4D_ET048/UCH_V4F_ET048/UCH_V50_ET048 87B-155 .Interpretation of statuses 87B CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION ET048 There must be no present or stored faults. Only replace the clutch pedal switch if it is not correct. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in the pedal depressed position. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Clutch pedal switch on track 1 If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 87B-156 . 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. 48. Deal with any other faults. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. Remove the clutch pedal switch and check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in pedal released position. Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET048 CONTINUED Status 048 Depressed without depressing the pedal. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. repair the connector. Track 5 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. repair the connector. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. Only replace the clutch pedal switch if it is not correct. UCH_V44_ET050/UCH_V48_ET050/UCH_V4C_ET050/ UCH_V4D_ET050/UCH_V4F_ET050/UCH_V50_ET050 87B-157 . Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate lock 4-track white connector track 3 Track 8 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. broken. 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. repair the connection.). etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the white 4-track connector of the tailgate lock (tabs bent. If the fault is still present. etc. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. repair the connector. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Replace the lock if it is not correct. 4F. 4C. contact the Techline. The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position.: 44. oxidised. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B TAILGATE/BOOT ET050 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. broken. otherwise replace the wiring. oxidised.: 44. repair the connector. etc.UCH Vdiag No. Check: The insulation of the rear left-hand door lock switch on tracks 6 and 4 (door open). Deal with any other faults. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the fault is still present. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring.). 48. 4F. oxidised. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair.). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear left-hand 6-track lock track 4 Track 19 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. UCH_V44_ET051/UCH_V48_ET051/UCH_V4C_ET051/ UCH_V4D_ET051/UCH_V4F_ET051/UCH_V50_ET051 87B-158 . otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track white connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. broken.Interpretation of statuses 87B REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR ET051 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent. The continuity of the rear left-hand door lock switch on tracks 6 and 4 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. Clear the stored faults. broken. Deal with any other faults. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the rear right-hand door lock (tabs bent. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .). repair the connector. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. UCH_V44_ET052/UCH_V48_ET052/UCH_V4C_ET052/ UCH_V4D_ET052/UCH_V4F_ET052/UCH_V50_ET052 87B-159 .UCH Vdiag No. broken. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent. etc. repair the connector. Check: The insulation of the rear right-hand door lock switch on tracks 1 and 3 (door open). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Replace the lock if it is not correct. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear right-hand 6-track lock track 3 Track 16 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. 4C. broken.: 44.Interpretation of statuses 87B REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR ET052 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. oxidised. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. Clear the stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. The continuity of the rear right-hand door lock switch on tracks 1 and 3 (door closed). 4D. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the driver's door lock (tabs bent. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_ET053/UCH_V48_ET053/UCH_V4C_ET053/ UCH_V4D_ET053/UCH_V4F_ET053/UCH_V50_ET053 87B-160 . Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of statuses 87B DRIVER'S DOOR ET053 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent. Replace the lock if it is not correct. broken.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. broken. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. Check: The insulation of the driver's door lock switch on tracks 4 and 3 (door open). 4F. oxidised. 4C.). The continuity of the driver's door lock switch on tracks 4 and 3 (door closed). etc.UCH Vdiag No. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Driver's door lock 6-track connector track 4 Track 17 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. oxidised. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). etc. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. If everything is correct. UCH_V44_ET054/UCH_V48_ET054/UCH_V4C_ET054/ UCH_V4D_ET054/UCH_V4F_ET054/UCH_V50_ET054 87B-161 . Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. the UCH cuts out the optical sensors' power supply. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for continuity of the handle pulled switch on tracks 1 and 2. Check the continuity between track 23 of the 40-track connector PE3 and track 2 of the black 3-track connector of the optical sensor. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Is there an earth? YES NO Contact the Techline.Interpretation of statuses 87B OPTICAL SENSORS SUPPLIED ET054 NOTES After 72 hours without an attempt to open the vehicle. 4C. contact the Techline. The vehicle is immobilised after more than 72 hours: Check the insulation to 12 V for the following track (door handle pulled): track 23 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. pull the handle to wake-up the UCH. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. Check the earth on track 3 of the connector.UCH Vdiag No. The vehicle has been immobilised for fewer than 72 hours: Check that the UCH is in hands-free configuration by reading the configuration LC001 Hands-free function. and if there is insulation change the handle. To restore the power supply to the optical sensors. Repair if necessary. Clear the stored faults. If the fault is still present. Check the earth on track 23 of the 40-track connector PE of the UCH by pulling a handle. 4D. NO Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver side front sensor track 3 Passenger side front sensor track 3 Passenger and driver's rear sensors track 3 Driver's side front sensor track 1 Passenger side front sensor track 1 Rear right-hand sensor track 1 Rear left-hand sensor track 1 Sensors track 2 Track 21 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3 Track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3 Track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3 Track 22 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3 Earth Track 3 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. then switch it off. Deal with any other faults. Check the condition of the optical sensor. Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Switch the ignition on. replace the sensor. Electrical wiring repair. If necessary. AFTER REPAIR UCH_V44_ET055/UCH_V48_ET055/UCH_V4C_ET055/UCH_V4D_ET055/UCH_V4F_ET055/UCH_V50_ET055/ UCH_V44_ET056/UCH_V48_ET056/UCH_V4C_ET056/UCH_V4D_ET056/UCH_V4F_ET056/UCH_V50_ET056/ UCH_V44_ET057/UCH_V48_ET057/UCH_V4C_ET057/UCH_V4D_ET057/UCH_V4F_ET057/UCH_V50_ET057 87B-162 .: 44. dirt). lock the vehicle and pull the handle. 4D. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. 48. If the status is inactive. make sure the corresponding status is active.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET055 ET056 ET057 FRONT OPTICAL SENSOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) DRIVER'S SIDE REAR OPTICAL SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE FRONT/REAR OPTICAL SENSORS NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the fault is still present. Is the status ACTIVE? YES Check the condition of the reflective surface inside the handle (frost. contact the Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. Place your hand behind the door handle. Check that the status ET054 Optical sensor supplied is YES. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. The continuity between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Pressed position). 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.: 44. oxidised. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. oxidised. Clear the stored faults. If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_ET058/UCH_V48_ET058/UCH_V4C_ET058/UCH_V4D_ET058/UCH_V4F_ET058/UCH_V50_ET058/ UCH_V44_ET059/UCH_V48_ET059/UCH_V4C_ET059/UCH_V4D_ET059/UCH_V4F_ET059/UCH_V50_ET059 87B-163 . Replace the handle if necessary. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH (tabs bent. Check for earth on track 4 of the door handle.). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch on the driver's side door handles on track 3 Switch on the passenger side door handles on track 3 Switch on the door handles on track 4 Track 30 of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. broken. otherwise replace the wiring. etc. broken. repair the connector.). Track 6 of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 Earth If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B ET058 ET059 LOCKING BUTTONS ON DRIVER'S SIDE HANDLES LOCKING BUTTONS ON PASSENGER SIDE HANDLES NOTES There must be no faults present. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. Check: The insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Released position). otherwise replace the wiring. etc. Check the condition and connection of the blue 9-track connector of the door (tabs crushed. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH (tabs bent. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. oxidised. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B LOCKING BUTTON ON TAILGATE ET060 NOTES There must be no faults present. Check for earth on track 2 of the tailgate locking button. Check: The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the tailgate button (Released position). 4C. repair the connector. oxidised. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the transparent 2-track connector of the tailgate locking button (tabs bent.). UCH_V44_ET060/UCH_V48_ET060/UCH_V4C_ET060/ UCH_V4D_ET060/UCH_V4F_ET060/UCH_V50_ET060 87B-164 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate locking button on track 1 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults. broken. repair the connector.). etc. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Replace the switch if necessary. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. Deal with any other faults. etc. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the tailgate button (Pressed position). Electrical wiring repair.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for an earth on track 5 of the 40-track connector PE3 with the button pressed.UCH Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. 4D. ET061 Absent when the button is pressed. Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. replace the switch. Check for earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Is there an earth? Contact the Techline. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B TAILGATE OPENING REQUEST ET061 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 (with the button pressed). If there is insulation. 4F. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. repair the connector. YES NO AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C.: 44. Check the continuity between the 40-track connector PE3 on track 5 of the UCH and track 2 of the 2-track connector of the tailgate opening switch. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. UCH_V44_ET061/UCH_V48_ET061/UCH_V4C_ET061/ UCH_V4D_ET061/UCH_V4F_ET061/UCH_V50_ET061 87B-165 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If there is continuity. 4F. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 87B-166 . contact the Techline. Check for insulation against earth on track 5 of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET061 CONTINUED ET061 Present when there is no request on the button. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. replace the switch If the fault is still present. Clear the stored faults. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Try pressing a button on a different card (card for the vehicle or another vehicle). contact the Techline. 4C. 4F. UCH_V44_ET066/UCH_V48_ET066/UCH_V4C_ET066/ UCH_V4D_ET066/UCH_V4F_ET066/UCH_V50_ET066 87B-167 .: 44. ET066 NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card.Interpretation of statuses 87B CARD BUTTON PRESS RECEIVED ET066 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the fault is still present. check the condition of the battery of the card in question. check that there is no radio frequency interference in the area surrounding the vehicle. 4D. Clear the stored faults. Replace it if necessary. 48. Deal with any other faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. If the status remains NO. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed. If the status changes to YES. UCH_V44_ET067/UCH_V48_ET067/UCH_V4C_ET067/ UCH_V4D_ET067/UCH_V4F_ET067/UCH_V50_ET067 87B-168 . check the condition of the card battery. 4F.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B CARD BUTTON PRESS RECOGNISED ET067 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If ET066 Card button press received is NO. program the cards. contact the Techline. Resynchronise the cards by activating forced after ignition with the card in the card reader. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. ET067 NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed. 4D. 48. Replace it if necessary. If the fault is still present and ET066 Card button press received is YES. 4C. Clear the stored faults. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the Clip tool using the AC004 Opening element locking command *Electric central door locking *Automatic locking when driving AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. UCH_V44_ET068/UCH_V48_ET068/UCH_V4C_ET068/ UCH_V4D_ET068/UCH_V4F_ET068/UCH_V50_ET068 87B-169 . 48.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4D. HANDS-FREE: detection of a close request by pressing of button in the handles or tailgate badge.Interpretation of statuses 87B SOURCE OF LAST LOCK ET068 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.: 44. Deal with any other faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . RAID* FUNCTION: the UCH controls locking according to the speed signal from the vehicle. 4F. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. CPE* : the UCH orders locking of the whole vehicle following a press on the electric central door locking button. AUTOMATIC: The UCH orders locking if the opening of a door or a hands-free or card unlocking request is not detected within 30 seconds after unlocking. Indicates which mode is the source of the last locking or unlocking operation. *Electric central door locking AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. HANDS-FREE: detection of a hand in the handle. CPE*: the UCH orders unlocking of the whole vehicle following a press on the electric central door locking button. 4D. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the Clip tool using the AC005 Opening element unlocking command IMPACT INFORMATION: following an impact signal detected. Clear the stored faults.: 44.Interpretation of statuses 87B SOURCE OF LAST UNLOCK ET069 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. UCH_V44_ET069/UCH_V48_ET069/UCH_V4C_ET069/ UCH_V4D_ET069/UCH_V4F_ET069/UCH_V50_ET069 87B-170 . 4F. AIRBAG: following an impact signal detected. Makes it possible to know what mode is the source of the last unlocking operation. Deal with any other faults. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press.UCH Vdiag No. UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. Replace the switch if necessary. oxidised. Check for earth on track 2 of the ON/OFF button connector. 4C. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the engine ON/OFF button (tabs bent. 48.Interpretation of statuses 87B START BUTTON ET070 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the brown section of the 40-track white connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent. 4D. oxidised. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check: The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the On/Off button in the Pressed position. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. broken. If the fault is still present.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the On/Off button in the Released position. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). broken. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: On/Off control button on track 1 On/Off control button on track 4 track 7 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH track 13 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. UCH_V44_ET070/UCH_V48_ET070/UCH_V4C_ET070/ UCH_V4D_ET070/UCH_V4F_ET070/UCH_V50_ET070 87B-171 . 4F. etc.). contact the Techline.). Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. If the steering column lock status remains YES. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of statuses 87B STEERING COLUMN LOCK UNPROGRAMMED ET071 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 48. contact the Techline. try to start the vehicle again. Check that when pressing on the disengaged clutch pedal or on the brake pedal or the ON/OFF button that the UCH issues an unlock signal (if the steering is locked).UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ET071/UCH_V48_ET071/UCH_V4C_ET071/ UCH_V4D_ET071/UCH_V4F_ET071/UCH_V50_ET071 87B-172 . If the fault is still present. verify that the card has been authenticated by the UCH. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 4D. 4C. Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Interpretation of statuses 87B STEERING COLUMN LOCK ET072 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4D. UCH_V44_ET072/UCH_V48_ET072/UCH_V4C_ET072/ UCH_V4D_ET072/UCH_V4F_ET072/UCH_V50_ET072 87B-173 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. If the status is INCONSISTENT. 48.UCH Vdiag No. 4F.: 44. refer to dealing with fault DF029 Steering column lock circuit. Deal with any other faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. oxidised. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the continuity between track 1 of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock and the vehicle earth.). repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of statuses 87B STEERING COLUMN LOCK SENSOR SIGNAL ET073 There must be no present or stored faults. 4D. Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock (tabs bent. 4C.). The status should be unlocked with after ignition feed present or semi activated to + accessories. Wiring: Precautions for repair). NOTES Special note: Perform locking/unlocking. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. UCH_V44_ET073/UCH_V48_ET073/UCH_V4C_ET073/ UCH_V4D_ET073/UCH_V4F_ET073/UCH_V50_ET073 87B-174 . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. ET073 Faulty when the steering column is not unlocked. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. oxidised. repair the connector. broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. etc. Electrical wiring repair. ET073 Short circuit when the steering column is not unlocked.UCH Vdiag No. Check the power supply to the lock for 5 min after the locking-unlocking operation. Check the power supply on track 2 of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock. 4F. If everything is OK. contact the Techline. ET073 Unlocked and + after ignition absent. 4F.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET073 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3 Steering column lock on track 6 Steering column lock on track 4 Track 10 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH Track 20 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH Track 1 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. with the ignition off. Wiring: Precautions for repair). The status remains UNLOCKED. ET073 Semi-activated and + after ignition present. In case of inconsistency. 48. 4C.: 44. see dealing with fault DF029: Steering column lock circuit. Deal with any other faults. The status is UNDETERMINED in the event that neither the lock nor the lock sensor can inform the UCH regarding its position. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. but the UCH cannot determine its position precisely. In the semi-activated status. ET073 Undetermined . 4D. contact the Techline. Clear the stored faults. 87B-175 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Refer to processing of the DF029 Steering column lock circuit fault. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. in case of failure of the airbag system or the speed signal. the lock bolt is pulled out. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track A2 of the fuse box by pressing the button. If there is 12 V .: 44. check the continuity of the following connection: Track 34 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. If there is no 12 V . NO Check at UCH output for + 12 V on track 34 of the 40-track connector PE2 If NO. Check the power-supply fuses. Check on track A4 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box for a + 12 V by pressing the start switch. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). NOTES Special note: Check that the start switch operates correctly: ET070 Start button. 4C. ET075 is YES but + accessories is absent. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ET075 is NO but + accessories feed is absent. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the relay. Electrical wiring repair. Check the + 12 V feed on track E1 and E17 of the passenger compartment fuse box and relay 1 (left-hand side of the centre console). check the wiring harness. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 48. 4D. UCH_V44_ET075/UCH_V48_ET075/UCH_V4C_ET075/ UCH_V4D_ET075/UCH_V4F_ET075/UCH_V50_ET075 87B-176 . Track A2 the of passenger compartment fuse and relay box.Interpretation of statuses 87B + ACCESSORIES PRESENT ET075 There must be no present or stored faults. repair the connector. Is there an earth? YES Check + 12 V before ignition feed on track A3 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. If YES. 4F. Clear the stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4D.Interpretation of statuses 87B WIPER STALK POSITION ET077 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . check the steering column control connectors. Clear the stored faults. UCH_V44_ET077/UCH_V48_ET077/UCH_V4C_ET077/ UCH_V4D_ET077/UCH_V4F_ET077/UCH_V50_ET077 87B-177 .: 44.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH PE2 black connector track 4 UCH PE2 black connector track 11 UCH PE2 black connector track 2 Track 2 15-track black connector of the steering column control Track 14 15-track black connector of the steering column control Track 9 15-track black connector of the steering column control If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. Deal with any other faults. In the event of an inconsistency. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. If the fault is still present. tabs bent. broken. broken. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. Check for + 12 V on track 6 of the steering column control connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. track 1 Black 6-track steering column control connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 6-track steering column control connector. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. change the control.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. if insulated. UCH_V44_ET078/UCH_V48_ET078/UCH_V4C_ET078/UCH_V4D_ET078/UCH_V4F_ET078/UCH_V50_ET078/ UCH_V44_ET079/UCH_V48_ET079/UCH_V4C_ET079/UCH_V4D_ET079/UCH_V4F_ET079/UCH_V50_ET079 87B-178 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. repair the connector. ET078 Absent when the control stalk is pressed. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ET079 Absent when the control stalk is pressed. Wiring: Precautions for repair).g. front windscreen washer control on. Check the steering column control black connector. track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 (front) Track 28 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (rear). etc. Check the black 6-track steering column control connector (e. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. contact the Techline. 4D.).Interpretation of statuses 87B ET078 ET079 WINDSCREEN WASHER REQUEST REAR SCREEN WASHER REQUEST NOTES There must be no faults present. track 2 Black 6-track steering column control earth connector. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults. rear windscreen washer control on. E.UCH Vdiag No. Tracks 1 and 6 . Vehicle earth If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the UCH 40-track connector PE1. Electrical wiring repair.g. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. connector poorly connected. otherwise replace the wiring. If continuity.: connector connected. if insulated. Tracks 2 and 6 . 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. change the control. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B REAR SCREEN WIPER REQUEST ET080 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. ET080 Rear screen wiper request is Absent with stalk in Rear screen wiper requested position. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: Set the lighting stalk to rear fog lights. Result 1 ET082 Rear fog lights request ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed Present High speed Result 2 Absent Low speed Result 3 Absent Low speed Result 4 Present High speed See ALP 10 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. 4F. 48. track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. 4C. 4D. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to high speed position. Deal with any other faults.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ET080/UCH_V48_ET080/UCH_V4C_ET080/ UCH_V4D_ET080/UCH_V4F_ET080/UCH_V50_ET080 87B-179 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. 4C. 4D. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 9 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 2 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. 87B-180 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET080 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 9 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. 48.: 44. repair the connector. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. Clear the stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Off. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Position the wiper intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ET081/UCH_V48_ET081/UCH_V4C_ET081/ UCH_V4D_ET081/UCH_V4F_ET081/UCH_V50_ET081 87B-181 . Deal with any other faults.: 44. 4D. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Result 1 ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position 1 Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector.Interpretation of statuses 87B LIGHTING STALK POSITION ET081 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 48. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk in the right-hand direction indicator position. 87B-182 . Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. 4D.: 44. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 3 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. Clear the stored faults. 87B-183 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. Deal with any other faults.: 44. track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Set control stalk to rear screen wiper. Result 1 ET080 Rear screen wiper request ET096 Rear screen wiper speed ring position Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. 4D.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 2 ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Side light requested . 4C. 4C. Clear the stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. repair the connector. 87B-184 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 2 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 9 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 48. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 9 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 3 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 3 ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Main beam requested. 4C. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET098 Trip Computer button: Press the button at the end of the control stalk. otherwise replace the wiring. 87B-185 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4D. Result 1 ET098 Trip Computer button ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 3 Steering column control track 5 Track 14 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 12 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline.: 44.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 4 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 13 Result 2 Steering column control track 18 Track 2 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 5 UCH 40-track connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults. 48. 4F. 4C. 87B-186 . If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. 4D. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 9 Steering column control track 3 Result 3 Steering column control track 9 Steering column switch track 5 Track 2 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 14 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 5 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Track 12 UCH 40-track connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. 4F. 4D. Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. 87B-187 .Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 5 ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Hazard lights requested . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1.: 44. Result 1 ET077 Wiper stalk position ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position" Off 4 Result 2 Intermittent facility 1 Result 3 Intermittent facility 4 Result 4 Off 1 Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1 Steering column switch track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. 87B-188 . repair the connector. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 5 Steering column control track 8 Result 3 Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 6 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering column control track 8 Result 2 Track 17 UCH 40-track connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1.UCH Vdiag No. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Result 1 ET077 Wiper stalk position ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position" Off 4 Result 2 Intermittent facility 1 Result 3 Intermittent facility 4 Result 4 Off 1 Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering column switch track 5 Result 1 Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. 4D. 87B-189 . repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults. 48. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. Electrical wiring repair.: 44.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 7 ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Dipped beam requested . Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. 87B-190 . 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 5 Steering column control track 8 Result 3 Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B ET081 CONTINUED 8 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering column control track 8 Result 2 Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. Clear the stored faults.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. 4F. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. Result 1 ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request ET080 Rear screen wiper request Present Absent Result 2 Absent Present Result 3 Absent Absent Result 4 Present Present See ALP 4 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. UCH_V44_ET082/UCH_V48_ET082/UCH_V4C_ET082/ UCH_V4D_ET082/UCH_V4F_ET082/UCH_V50_ET082 87B-191 . Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator position. track 2 Result 1 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). ET082 Rear fog lights request is Absent with stalk position on Rear fog lights. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4C.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place the wiper stalk in rear screen wiper position.Interpretation of statuses 87B REAR FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET082 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4D. 4D. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. 87B-192 . 4F. Clear the stored faults. If the fault is still present. 4C. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 4 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 2 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET082 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 4 Track 9 UCH 40-track connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.Interpretation of statuses 87B LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET083 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request: place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator position. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. track 17 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. 48.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ET083/UCH_V48_ET083/UCH_V4C_ET083/ UCH_V4D_ET083/UCH_V4F_ET083/UCH_V50_ET083 87B-193 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. ET082 Rear fog lights request: set the lighting stalk to the rear fog lights position. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. Result 1 ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request ET082 Rear fog lights request Present Absent Result 2 Absent Present Result 3 Absent Absent Result 4 Present Present See ALP 4 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 15-track steering column control black connector. ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request is Absent with stalk position on left-hand indicator. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. 4C. 4D. repair the connector. 48. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. 4C. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-194 . contact the Techline. 4D. Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET083 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. 4C. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. position 3 Present 4 Result 2 Absent 3 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 3 See ALP 5 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. 48. Result 1 ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position. UCH_V44_ET084/UCH_V48_ET084/UCH_V4C_ET084/ UCH_V4D_ET084/UCH_V4F_ET084/UCH_V50_ET084 87B-195 . ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request is Absent with stalk in right-hand indicator position.Interpretation of statuses 87B RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET084 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. position 3: place the lighting stalk in rear fog lights position. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET084 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. 4F. repair the connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 48.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 87B-196 . repair the connector. broken. contact your Techline. Clear the stored faults. 48. 4F. ET085 Hazard warning lights button is Absent after pressing the button. connector properly connected. Check the F16 15A fuse of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box on the left-hand side of the centre console. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.g. Deal with any other faults. Replace it if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Switch track 7 Track 3 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C.: 44. Check the button (press): tracks 6 and 7. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. tabs bent. replace the switch. connector properly connected. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Check the 8-track grey connector of the door/warning switch (e. tabs bent. Electrical wiring repair. if there is insulation. if there is continuity. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check for + 12 V on track 3. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. repair the connector.Interpretation of statuses 87B HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BUTTON ET085 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. UCH_V44_ET085/UCH_V48_ET085/UCH_V4C_ET085/ UCH_V4D_ET085/UCH_V4F_ET085/UCH_V50_ET085 87B-197 . broken. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. Track 35 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised). oxidised).g.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. oxidised). oxidised). repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Track 35 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2.UCH Vdiag No.g. Check the button (press): tracks 6 and 7. repair the connector. broken. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-198 . contact your Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Switch track 7 Track 3 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1. if there is insulation.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET085 CONTINUED ET085 Hazard warning lights button is Present without pressing the button.: 44. 4C. 4F. replace the switch. 48. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. broken. otherwise replace the wiring. connector properly connected.g. connector properly connected. tabs bent. Check the 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e. tabs bent. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. if there is continuity. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the 8-track grey connector of the door/warning switch (e. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 40-track connector PE2 on track 7 Track 6 of the window winder motor connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. contact Techline. Clear the stored faults. Is there an earth? NO Check earth at UCH output on track 7 of the 40-track connector PE2. 48. Check for earth on track 6 of the connector on the electric window suspected as faulty.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of statuses 87B ONE-TOUCH WINDOW CONTROL/SUNROOF AUTHORISATION ET087 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. ET087 One touch window control/sunroof authorisation is Active and neither of the one touch window controls works. If earth is present. 4C. YES Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor. If there is no earth. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. UCH_V44_ET087/UCH_V48_ET087/UCH_V4C_ET087/ UCH_V4D_ET087/UCH_V4F_ET087/UCH_V50_ET087 87B-199 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D. Deal with any other faults. + accessories level power supply raised at least once. configure using CF173 ONE-TOUCH WINDOW(S)/SUNROOF (can be configured during configuration of the UCH using the SC008 UCH TYPE command). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 4D. 48. NO AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Is there an earth? YES Operating conditions: Door open if fault.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET087 CONTINUED ET087 One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation is Inactive and neither of the one touch window controls works.UCH Vdiag No. If LC070 is WITHOUT . 87B-200 . Run command AC025 One-touch window/sunroof authorisation. Check that configuration LC070 ONE-TOUCH WINDOW(S)/SUNROOF is WITH . check the doors. 4F. and check for earth on track 6 of the electric window connector. Deal with any other faults. 4C. Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor. 48. CARD: press on card button. ET088 Source of deadlock activation.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults. + after ignition feed: no deadlocking at this power supply level. CPE*: on pressing the locking/unlocking button. FAULT FINDING: using the tool with the ignition on by running command AC004 Central door locking. Enables determination of what component is the source of the last locking or unlocking operation.: 44. UCH_V44_ET088/UCH_V48_ET088/UCH_V4C_ET088/UCH_V4D_ET088/UCH_V4F_ET088/UCH_V50_ET088/ UCH_V44_ET089/UCH_V48_ET089/UCH_V4C_ET089/UCH_V4D_ET089/UCH_V4F_ET089/UCH_V50_ET089 87B-201 . 4C. CARD: upon pressing the card for the second time. *Electric central door locking AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. ET090 Source of deadlock deactivation. HANDS-FREE: placing a hand in the handle. HANDS-FREE: on pressing the door handle button for the second time. FAULT FINDING: using the tool with ignition on by running command AC005 Central door unlocking. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B ET088 ET089 SOURCE OF DEADLOCK ACTIVATION SOURCE OF DEADLOCK DEACTIVATION NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4D. Result 1 ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request ET077 Wiper stalk position Present Off Result 2 Absent Low speed Result 3 Absent Off Result 4 Present Low speed Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector.Interpretation of statuses 87B WIPER STALK INTERMITTENT SPEED RING POSITION ET096 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to the low speed position. Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_ET096/UCH_V48_ET096/UCH_V4C_ET096/ UCH_V4D_ET096/UCH_V4F_ET096/UCH_V50_ET096 87B-202 .UCH Vdiag No.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. track 2 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. 48. Clear the stored faults. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Set the lighting stalk to the left-hand indicator. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 2 requested. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87B-203 . otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. 48. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET096 CONTINUED 1 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector.: 44. 4C. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 2 Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults. 48. Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the lighting stalk on the left-hand direction indicator. 4F. Result 1 ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request ET077 Wiper stalk position High speed Present Low speed Result 2 Absent High speed Result 3 Absent Low speed Result 4 Present High speed Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to the low speed position.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET096 CONTINUED 2 ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 3 requested. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. 87B-204 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. 87B-205 . Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 13 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2. contact the Techline. Clear the stored faults.: 44. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET096 CONTINUED 3 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. track 4 Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. 4F.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET096 CONTINUED 4 ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 4 requested. 4C.: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No. ET081 Lighting stalk position: set the lighting stalk to main beam headlights position. Result 1 ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed ET081 Lighting stalk in the main beam headlights position High speed Dipped headlights Result 2 Low speed Main beam Result 3 Low speed Dipped headlights Result 4 High speed Main beam Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: set the windscreen wiper stalk to high speed. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. 87B-206 . otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4D. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87B-207 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 4 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 2 Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET096 CONTINUED 5 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. 4F. UCH_V44_ET097/UCH_V48_ET097/UCH_V4C_ET097/ UCH_V4D_ET097/UCH_V4F_ET097/UCH_V50_ET097 87B-208 . 48. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults. Check the rear screen wiper motor. broken). If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear screen wiper motor on track 2 Track 37 of connector PE2 of the UCH. repair the connector.Interpretation of statuses 87B REAR SCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ET097 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent.UCH Vdiag No. Check fitting. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. ET097 Rear screen wiper park position is Absent Check the condition and connection of the 3-track white connector of the rear screen wiper (tabs bent. 4F. Check the continuity of the connection between connector track 3 and vehicle earth. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. replace the wiper motor. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). broken). If everything is OK. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. ET098 Trip computer button is Released after press on the button. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F.: 44. 4C. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to dipped headlights position.UCH Vdiag No. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: set the lighting stalk to the rear fog lights position. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. This status must change to Pressed when the button is pressed. otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. 48.Interpretation of statuses 87B TRIP COMPUTER BUTTON ET098 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. UCH_V44_ET098/UCH_V48_ET098/UCH_V4C_ET098/ UCH_V4D_ET098/UCH_V4F_ET098/UCH_V50_ET098 87B-209 . track 2 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. Result 1 ET082 Rear fog lights request ET081 Dipped headlights wiper stalk position Present Off Result 2 Absent Dipped headlights Result 3 Absent Off Result 4 Present Dipped headlights Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. 4F. contact the Techline.: 44. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 2 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 11 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. 87B-210 . otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. 48.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET098 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 11 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. Clear the stored faults. run fault finding on the automatic gearbox. 4F. with a gear shift to position D. gear selector lever on position N.: 44. 4C. gear selector lever on position R. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. NEUTRAL. contact your Techline. Deal with any other faults. gear selector lever on position P. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH_V44_ET108/UCH_V48_ET108/UCH_V4C_ET108/ UCH_V4D_ET108/UCH_V4F_ET108/UCH_V50_ET108 87B-211 . REVERSE. ABSENT. no automatic gearbox. NOT IN NEUTRAL. P.Interpretation of statuses 87B AUTOMATIC GEARBOX LEVER POSITION ET108 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If there is an incorrect position. 4D. 48. Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. 4F.: 44. UCH_V44_ET109/UCH_V48_ET109/UCH_V4C_ET109/ UCH_V4D_ET109/UCH_V4F_ET109/UCH_V50_ET109 87B-212 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. 4D. ET109 Reverse gear engaged is NO when reverse gear is engaged. 48. 4C. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET109 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Clear the stored faults. If the status does not correspond to the current user request.UCH Vdiag No. Deal with any other faults. This status gives information concerning the type of request made by the UCH to these computers. 48.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET110 UCH REQUEST TO INJECTION COMPUTER OR PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. START: when starting is requested. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. carry out a test of the multiplex network. 4D. + AFTER IGNITION FEED: on pressing the start button for more than 5 seconds. 4F. If the fault is still present. 4C. contact the Techline. INACTIVE: without action on the vehicle. UCH_V44_ET110/UCH_V48_ET110/UCH_V4C_ET110/ UCH_V4D_ET110/UCH_V4F_ET110/UCH_V50_ET110 87B-213 .: 44. ENGINE STOP: when an engine stop is requested. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. ET111 Front fog lights request is Absent with stalk position on Front fog lights. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place control stalk on rear screen wiper request.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B FRONT FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET111 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 48. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. 4D. 4F. Result 1 ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request ET080 Rear screen wiper request Present Absent Result 2 Absent Present Result 3 Absent Absent Result 4 Present Present Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. UCH_V44_ET111/UCH_V48_ET111/UCH_V4C_ET111/ UCH_V4D_ET111/UCH_V4F_ET111/UCH_V50_ET111 87B-214 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. track 2 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator.: 44. Interpretation of statuses 87B ET111 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 11 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. 4C. 87B-215 . Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 2 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 11 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present. 48. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector.: 44. if there is an earth.Interpretation of statuses 87B INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ET112 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present. If NO.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. check the earth on track 10 of the PP3 connector of the UCH. UCH_V44_ET112/UCH_V48_ET112/UCH_V4C_ET112/ UCH_V4D_ET112/UCH_V4F_ET112/UCH_V50_ET112 87B-216 . replace the faulty switch. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . check the continuity and insulation of the wiring harness between the UCH and the switch connectors (see wiring diagram). otherwise replace the wiring. ET112 Interior lighting control is Inactive when the interior lighting is on. Check whether the footwell/floor switches operate correctly. if YES. 4D. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: set the stalk to the rear fog lights position. track 9 Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B AUTOMATIC LIGHTING BUTTON ET113 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. UCH_V44_ET113/UCH_V48_ET113/UCH_V4C_ET113/ UCH_V4D_ET113/UCH_V4F_ET113/UCH_V50_ET113 87B-217 . 4C. Result 1 ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position" Present 4 Result 2 Absent 1 Result 3 Absent 4 Result 4 Present 1 Change the steering column control Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector. ET113 Released with one press on the button. 4D. Clear the stored faults. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET113 CONTINUED Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Result 2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 15-track steering column control track 14 Result 3 Black 15-track steering column control track 12 Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. Deal with any other faults. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-218 . 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of statuses 87B WIPER REQUEST BY RAIN SENSOR ET114 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. If the + 12 V feed is not correct. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Make sure that the other positions of the wiper control are working properly. otherwise replace the wiring. oxidised tabs). bent. Electrical wiring repair. check the insulation. 4F. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 24-track connector (broken. Deal with any other faults.5 A) Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. 4C. Check the + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector. The status should change to ACTIVE if there is any water on the windscreen on the sensor position. Check the condition and connection of the rain and light sensor connector (tabs broken.: 44. bent. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Fuse on UPC F5F (7. oxidised). Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. track 3 Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector If the + 12 V feed is not correct for vehicles manufactured after June 2005. UCH_V44_ET114/UCH_V48_ET114/UCH_V4C_ET114/ UCH_V4D_ET114/UCH_V4F_ET114/UCH_V50_ET114 87B-219 . continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: 12-track UCH grey connector PP3. check the insulation. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Make sure that the vehicle is fitted with the rain and light sensor. Electrical wiring repair. 48. Electrical wiring repair. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: 40-track UCH grey connector PE2.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. track 1 Track 2 of the rain and light sensor connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 87B-220 . Check configuration LC044 Rain/light sensor. repair the connector. 48. 4C.: 44.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET114 CONTINUED Check the insulation. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. UCH_V44_ET115/UCH_V48_ET115/UCH_V4C_ET115/ UCH_V4D_ET115/UCH_V4F_ET115/UCH_V50_ET115 87B-221 . oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.: 44. Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of statuses 87B REQUEST FROM LIGHT SENSOR TO SWITCH ON HEADLIGHTS ET115 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: 12-track UCH grey connector PP3. Wiring: Precautions for repair). check the insulation. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Fuse on UPC F5F (7.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Make sure that the other lighting control positions are working properly. bent. The status should change to ACTIVE when the sensor is hidden from the surrounding light by placing a thumb over it or in darkness. Make sure that the vehicle is fitted with the rain and light sensor. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. track 3 Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector If the + 12 V feed is not correct for vehicles manufactured after June 2005. repair the connector. oxidised tabs). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.5 A) Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. 4C. Check the + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 24-track connector (broken. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the rain and light sensor connector (tabs broken. 48. check the insulation. otherwise replace the wiring. bent. Deal with any other faults. If the + 12 V feed is not correct. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults. 4C. contact the Techline.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET115 CONTINUED Check the insulation.: 44. Check configuration LC044 Rain/light sensor. 87B-222 . 4F. Clear the stored faults. track 1 Track 2 of the rain and light sensor connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: 40-track UCH grey connector PE2. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. UCH_V44_ET116/UCH_V48_ET116/UCH_V4C_ET116/ UCH_V4D_ET116/UCH_V4F_ET116/UCH_V50_ET116 87B-223 . try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any other operation. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. tabs broken. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. oxidised). otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present. 48. contact the Techline. 4F. replace the faulty card. ET116 Inactive card belonging to the vehicle. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B CARD CODE RECEIVED ET116 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the status becomes Active using the second card of the vehicle. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . bent. carry out the following checks: Check the 8-track connector of the card-reader and the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (example: connector incorrectly connected. Check the continuity and insulation against earth on the following connections: Card reader track 3 Card reader track 4 Card reader track 6 Track 21 of the 40-track black connector PE2 of the UCH Track 39 of the 40-track black connector PE2 of the UCH Track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. If status ET116 Card code received remains Inactive. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the status remains INACTIVE. Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. Electrical wiring repair. Replace the card reader if necessary. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any other operation. If the status remains INACTIVE. 48.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4D. UCH_V44_ET117/UCH_V48_ET117/UCH_V4C_ET117/ UCH_V4D_ET117/UCH_V4F_ET117/UCH_V50_ET117 87B-224 . Replace the cards if necessary. Assign the cards using the specific command SC006 Assign card. ET117 Inactive card belonging to the vehicle. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults. replace the faulty card. contact the Techline. If the status becomes Active using the second card of the vehicle. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of statuses 87B CARD CODE VALID ET117 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4F.: 44. if not perform configuration using specific command SC016 Child safety (see Configurations and programming ). IMPORTANT After disconnecting the battery. 4F. Replace the faulty lock.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the 12-track UCH black connector PP2 (tabs bent. oxidised tabs). oxidised). repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Status only visible if Vdiag 4C. 4D. 48. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. bent. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. contact the Techline. NOTES Check that configuration LC035 Child safety is WITH. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Rear left-hand door lock connector track 6 Rear right-hand door lock connector track 1 Track 11 of the 12-track PP2 black connector of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. there may be an inconsistency between a request on the switch and the status of one or two lock(s). 4F and 50 UCH. If the fault is still present. deactivate and reactivate the switch until the warning light comes on when the switch is pressed.Interpretation of statuses 87B ET159 ET160 REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK There must be no present or stored faults. Check the insulation. UCH_V44_ET159/UCH_V48_ET159/UCH_V4C_ET159/UCH_V4D_ET159/UCH_V4F_ET159/UCH_V50_ET159/ UCH_V44_ET160/UCH_V48_ET160/UCH_V4C_ET160/UCH_V4D_ET160/UCH_V4F_ET160/UCH_V50_ET160 87B-225 . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. broken. repair the connector. In this case.UCH Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the lock connector (broken. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check for earth on track 5 (left-hand side) or on track 2 (right-hand side) of the rear door lock connector. Deal with any other faults. UCH Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Multiplexing). or 17B + 17C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of statuses 87B Engine ET169 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. contact the Techline. Petrol injection). Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. In the event of an inconsistency. 48. 4D. test the multiplex network (see 88B. 4F. Diesel injection. 4C. UCH_V44_ET169/UCH_V48_ET169/UCH_V4C_ET169/ UCH_V4D_ET169/UCH_V4F_ET169/UCH_V50_ET169 87B-226 . Deal with any other faults.: 44. Run fault finding on the injection system (see 13B. UCH_V44_ET229/UCH_V48_ET229/UCH_V4C_ET229/ UCH_V4D_ET229/UCH_V4F_ET229/UCH_V50_ET229 87B-227 . Clear the stored faults.: 44. 4D. ensuring that the steering column lock unlocks correctly and that + after ignition is correctly established. INCORRECT Try to start the vehicle. contact the Techline. First check the operation of status ET046 Engine immobliser.Interpretation of statuses 87B INJECTION IMMOBILISER CODE ET229 There must be no present or stored faults. 48. 4C. NOTES Apply the checks only if the status remains INCORRECT after the ignition is switched off and back on. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Deal with any other faults.187B UCH Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Carry out a multiplex network test. Run fault finding on the injection system. check using configuration reading LC035 Childproof locks" that the UCH is correctly configured as WITH childproof locks . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. 48. If WITHOUT . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UCH_V44_ET230/UCH_V48_ET230/UCH_V4C_ET230/ UCH_V4D_ET230/UCH_V4F_ET230/UCH_V50_ET230 87B-228 . 4D. V4F and V50). ET230 Childproof locks is Inactive although the childproof lock switch has been pressed. Verify that ET233 Childproof lock switch is Pressed. using the following statuses: ET053: Driver's door ET042: Passenger door ET051: Rear left-hand door ET052: Rear right-hand door If the fault is still present. Deal with any other faults. If Press. 4C.Interpretation of statuses 87B CHILD SAFETY ET230 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. V4D. check that all the doors are correctly closed. refer to interpretation of ET233. Clear the stored faults. configuration WITH child safety lock is carried out with special command SC016 Child safety lock (V4C.: 44. If Inactive. If WITH. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. bent.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 48. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No.1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track child safety lock switch black connector (tabs broken. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of statuses 87B CHILDPROOF LOCK SWITCH ET233 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. oxidised tabs). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. 4D. repair the connector. repair the connector. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE1 (broken. Wiring: Precautions for repair). For continuity between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Pressed position). 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Childproof switch connector track B1 Track 11 of the white 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. UCH_V44_ET233/UCH_V48_ET233/UCH_V4C_ET233/ UCH_V4D_ET233/UCH_V4F_ET233/UCH_V50_ET233 87B-229 . bent. contact the Techline. Check the insulation. oxidised). otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check: For insulation between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Released position). Clear the stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Replace the switch if necessary. 4F. 48.Parameter summary table 87B Tool parameter PR001 PR002 PR003 PR004 PR005 PR006 PR008 PR009 PR010 PR011 PR012 PR013 PR014 PR015 PR017 PR018 PR019 PR020 PR021 PR022 PR023 PR059 Battery voltage External temperature Front left-hand wheel pressure Front right-hand wheel pressure Rear right-hand wheel pressure Rear left-hand wheel pressure Vehicle speed Diagnostic tool title Front wheels low speed recommended pressure Rear wheels low speed recommended pressure Rear wheels high speed recommended pressure Front wheel high speed recommended pressure Number of cards programmed Left/right pressure difference threshold Low under-inflation threshold Cold over-inflation threshold Warm over-inflation threshold Front left-hand tyre temperature Front right-hand tyre temperature Rear right-hand tyre temperature Rear left-hand tyre temperature Heat difference threshold between wheels Puncture report threshold 87B-230 . 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. 4D.: 44. 4D. 16A. Starting-charging). Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR004 Battery voltage. If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of parameters 87B BATTERY VOLTAGE PR001 NOTES Check for correct tightness of the battery terminals. Engine running: 10. Checking the charging circuit. check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit.: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 48. 4F.5 V . 4C.5 V < X < 16 V .3 V difference between the 2 values). run fault finding on the battery and charging circuit (see Technical Note 6014. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. UCH_V44_PR001/UCH_V48_PR001/UCH_V4C_PR001 / UCH_V4D_PR001/UCH_V4F_PR001/UCH_V50_PR001 87B-231 . Engine stopped: 11 V < X < 13. If the values are consistent.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2 .). otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. 48. oxidised. broken. repair the connector.). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor Track 1 Temperature sensor Track 2 Track 3 of the black 40-track UCH connector Track 13 of the black 40-track UCH connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . pins bent. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector.: 44. pins bent. contact the Techline. broken. etc. If the fault is still present. oxidised. Sensor resistance (Ω) Between 5400 and 6200 Between 3700 and 4400 Between 2500 and 3000 Between 1700 and 2100 AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of parameters 87B EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002 NOTES None Check the 2-track green connector of the temperature sensor (example: connector incorrectly connected. etc. Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Approximate temperature (°C) Between 0 and 5 Between 11 and 15 Between 21 and 15 Between 31 and 35 Replace the sensor if necessary. 4D. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). UCH_V44_PR002/UCH_V48_PR002/UCH_V4C_PR002 / UCH_V4D_PR002/UCH_V4F_PR002/UCH_V50_PR002 87B-232 . Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Check 40-track black connector of the UCH (example: connector incorrectly connected. Clear the stored faults. 48. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. UCH_V44_PR008/UCH_V48_PR008/UCH_V4C_PR008 / UCH_V4D_PR008/UCH_V4F_PR008/UCH_V50_PR008 87B-233 .: 44. Deal with any other faults. contact the Techline. 4F.Interpretation of parameters 87B VEHICLE SPEED PR008 NOTES None Run complete fault finding on the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D.UCH Vdiag No. Clear the stored faults. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Command summary table 87B Vdiag Tool command AC003 AC004 AC005 AC006 AC007 AC008 AC009 AC015 AC016 AC017 AC018 AC019 AC020 AC021 AC022 AC023 AC024 AC025 AC026 AC027 AC030 AC031 AC032 AC033 AC034 AC036 AC037 AC076 Diagnostic tool title Immobiliser warning light Central locking Unlocking doors and luggage compartment Driver's door unlocking Rear screen wiper Front fog lights Rear fog lights Air conditioning button indicator light RCH* 1 relay RCH* 2 relay RCH* 3 relay Heated rear screen indicator light CPE* button indicator light Interior lights Left-hand direction indicator Right-hand direction indicator Card reader lighting One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation. V4F. V4D.: 44. V4C. Start button lighting Footwell lights Headlight washer relay 1 (only if Vdiag 44 UPC) Headlight washer relay 2 (only if Vdiag 44 UPC) Driver's side external aerial test Passenger side external aerial test Luggage compartment external aerial test Internal aerial test Transmitter aerial fault finding Child safety lock indicator light V44. V50 *RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor *CPE: Electric central door locking 87B-234 . 4F. 4D. V48.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4F.Command summary table 87B Vdiag Special Commands SC001 SC002 SC003 SC004 SC005 SC006 SC008 SC016 Description Reading the valve set and the stored codes Programming the 4 valve codes Spare UCH programming Card check Card allocation Type of UCH Child safety V44. V4D. V50 V4C. V4D.: 44. V50 Settings VP004 VP005 VP016 Enter VIN Description Vdiag V44. V50 V4F. V48.UCH Vdiag No. V4F. 4C. 4D. V4C. V50 Entering recommended pressures New vehicle storage mode deactivation 87B-235 . 48. V4F. V4C. V4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . V4F. V48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. The immobiliser indicator light does not come on when the command is performed. This command is for testing whether the immobiliser warning light is working.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. replace the instrument panel. 4F. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. With the command activated. 87B-236 . repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). The instrument panel must be detected as present on the multiplex network. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). check for earth on track 29 of the instrument panel. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. If correct. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Instrument panel track 29 Track 29 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.Interpretation of commands 87B IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT AC003 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the instrument panel connector. The command lasts 10 seconds . Deal with any other faults. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. Note: The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. This command is for testing locking relay operation. 87B-237 . If OK. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. Check for earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks. Electrical wiring repair. check for + 12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track D. otherwise replace the wiring. replace the faulty lock(s). tracks A and B. Clear the stored faults. Fuel tank flap lock motor. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 3. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track A. If faulty: A AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . One or more doors do not lock when the command is activated.Interpretation of commands 87B LOCK DOORS AND TAILGATE AC004 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.: 44. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. tracks C and D. If faulty: If OK: With the command activated. repair the connector. repair the connector. tracks 1 and 3. taking the earth on track B. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. taking the earth on track C. 4C. taking the earth on track 1. otherwise replace the wiring. 4D.: 44. contact the Techline. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 87B-238 . 4C. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of commands 87B AC004 CONTINUED Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver's door lock track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Driver's door lock track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3 Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track B Rear right-hand door bolt track C Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track A Rear right-hand door bolt track D Track 6 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2 Track 5 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2 Track 8 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2 Track 7 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. 48. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. tracks 1 and 3. If faulty: A AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. tracks A and B. Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. 87B-239 . repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Check for earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks. check for + 12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track C. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 1. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If faulty: If OK: With the command activated. Fuel tank flap lock motor. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. taking the earth on track D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track B. taking the earth on track 3.Interpretation of commands 87B AC005 AC006 UNLOCK DOORS AND TAILGATE DRIVER'S DOOR UNLOCKING NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. 4D.: 44. One or more doors do not unlock when the commands are activated. If OK. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. repair the connector. 48. tracks C and D. Electrical wiring repair. This command is for testing unlocking relay operation. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. Deal with any other faults. taking the earth on track A. replace the faulty lock(s). Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks. The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. otherwise replace the wiring. : 44. 87B-240 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. repair the connector.Interpretation of commands 87B AC005 AC006 CONTINUED Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver's door lock track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Driver's door lock track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track B Rear right-hand door bolt track C Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track A Rear right-hand door bolt track D Track 6 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH Track 5 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH Track 8 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH Track 7 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. 4C. Deal with any other faults. If the fault is still present. 48. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. 4D. repair the connector. check for an + 12 V on track 1 of the rear screen wiper connector. With the command activated. Electrical wiring repair. replace the rear screen wiper motor. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen wiper motor connector. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B REAR SCREEN WIPER AC007 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Motor track 1 Motor track 2 Track 3 of connector PP2 of the UCH Track 37 of connector PE2 of the UCH. Deal with any other faults. Check for an earth on track 3 of the rear screen wiper connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 87B-241 . otherwise replace the wiring. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of connector PE3 on the UCH. 4F.: 44. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If everything is correct. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. Deal with any other faults.: 44. 4D. repair the connector. – the condition of the bulbs. 87B-242 . repair the connector. 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. If correct. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the bulb(s). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of connector PPA on the UPC (Vdiag 44) or connector AN on the UPC (Vdiag 48 or above). Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check for earth on R9 connection then check the connections of the bulb connectors. Check for + 12 V on the fog light connectors when they are being controlled by command AC004. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. Replace the bulbs if necessary. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC008 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of the front fog lights fuse. 4D. Clear the stored faults. 87B-243 . 4C. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. Vdiag 48 or above Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 2 Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 3 Track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector Track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of commands 87B AC008 CONTINUED Vdiag 44 Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 8 Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 7 Track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector Track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of commands 87B REAR FOG LIGHTS AC009 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. check the bulbs again. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. check for + 12 V on track 2 of the rear light black connector. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). and if still not OK replace the rear light. Electrical wiring repair. contact the Techline. Check for an earth on track 1 of the black rear light connector. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Left-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. This command is for testing operation of the rear fog lights. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of the rear light black connector Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4C. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the bulbs. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If OK. Check the condition and connection of UCH connector PP3. Deal with any other faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 87B-244 . 4D. 4F. contact the Techline. repair the connector. check for + 12 V on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Electrical wiring repair. If OK. If the fault is still present. With the command activated. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. This command is for testing operation of the rear fog lights. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 87B-245 . Check the condition and connection of UCH connector PP3.Interpretation of commands 87B AC009 CONTINUED NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. and if still not OK replace the rear light. Right-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. check the bulbs again. Check for an earth on track 4 of the rear light black connector. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 3 of the rear light black connector Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the bulbs.: 44.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. 4F. repair the connector. 4C. The indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. This command is for testing operation of the air-conditioning indicator light. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. and the air conditioning control panel should light up. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. 87B-246 . Apply the after ignition feed. The command lasts 7 seconds. Clear the stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Track 26 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH Earth AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. contact the Techline. check for + 12 V on track 6 of the heater control panel connector. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Control panel track 6 Control panel track 5 If the fault is still present.: 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. With the command activated. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of commands 87B AC015 AIR-CONDITIONING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT Manual air conditioning only NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. If OK. 4D. replace the control panel. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check for earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. : 44. 87B-247 . 4F. The command lasts 7 seconds. check for + 12 V on track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Deal with any other faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. Electrical wiring repair. NO YES YES AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. There must be no present or stored faults. NO Check for + 12 V on track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1. repair the connector. Check that the resistances between tracks 2 and 3 and between tracks 3 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector are equal to infinity. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A5 of passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Check for earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of commands 87B Passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay AC016 NOTES Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. With the command activated. 4D. 4C. Interpretation of commands 87B AC016 CONTINUED 1 Contact the Techline. NO With the command activated. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults. NO AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 33 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. YES With the command activated. check for earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.UCH Vdiag No. check for earth on track 33 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. 87B-248 . 4D. 4C.: 44. 48. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. YES With the command activated. NO Check the presence. 4D. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of commands 87B AC016 CONTINUED 2 Check for + 12 V on track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay. the condition and connection of the F7 fuse on the power supply fuse board. 48. 4F. check for earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay. 87B-249 .: 44. replace the relay. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 7 of the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. NO Ensure insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of passenger compartment heating resistance relay 1 and track 33 of the PPH2 (Vdiag 44) or CN (Vdiag 48) connector of the UPC. If everything is OK.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. There must be no present or stored faults.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-250 . 4D. 48. Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. NO YES YES AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. The command lasts 7 seconds. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty. Check for earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B5 of passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay and tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector. check for + 12 V on tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Verify that the resistances between tracks 1 and 2 and between tracks 4 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector are equal to infinity.Interpretation of commands 87B Passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay AC017 NOTES Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. With the command activated. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. Clear the stored faults. 4F. check for + 12 V on track B5 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. NO With the command activated. 87B-251 . check for an earth on track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. 48.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. YES With the command activated. 4C. check for an earth on track 22 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. 4D. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 22 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. NO With the command activated. NO AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.: 44. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of commands 87B AC017 CONTINUED 1 Contact the Techline. the condition and connection of the F9 fuse on the power supply fuse board. 48. 87B-252 . YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 9 of the power supply fuse board. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. Repair if necessary. YES Check for + 12 V on track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. replace the relay. Deal with any other faults. 4F. Clear the stored faults. NO Check the presence. If everything is OK. 4D.Interpretation of commands 87B AC017 CONTINUED 2 Check for + 12 V on track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. NO Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B2 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 11 of connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) or CN (Vdiag 48 or above) of the UPC. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. If OK. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. With the command activated. This command is for testing operation of the heated rear screen indicator light.UCH Vdiag No. Check for of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. 87B-253 . otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Apply after ignition feed. check for + 12 V on track 4 of the heater control panel connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Control panel track 4 Track 38 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). replace the control panel. The command lasts 7 seconds. 48. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of commands 87B AC019 HEATED REAR SCREEN INDICATOR LIGHT Except with climate control NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. The heated rear screen indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Clear the fault memory. 4D.: 44. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. This command is used to test whether the button has a power supply. *Electric central door locking AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. The command lasts 7 seconds. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. replace the button. 4F. repair the connector. Check for earth on track 4 of the central door locking button. otherwise replace the wiring. check for + 12 V on track 5 of the central door locking button connector. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. When the command is performed. 87B-254 . Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: CPE* button track 5 CPE* button track 2 Track 14 of connector PE1 of the UCH Track 6 connector PE1 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. If OK. The central door locking button light does not come on when the command is performed. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B CENTRAL LOCKING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT AC020 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check the connection and condition of the central door locking button connector.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B INTERIOR LIGHTS AC021 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Clear the stored faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for earth on track 3 of each interior light. contact the Techline. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of each interior light Track 1 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3 If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. 4D. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 87B-255 . With the command activated.: 44. 4F. check for + 12 V on track 2 of each interior light. and if still not OK replace the interior light(s). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the bulbs. repair the connection. If the fault is still present. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. The interior lights do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. If OK. This command is for testing interior lights operation.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. check the bulbs again. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the interior lights connectors. 48. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Check for earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 87B-256 . Electrical wiring repair. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of commands 87B Left-hand direction indicator AC022 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Electrical wiring repair. If OK. Check the bulbs. repair the connector. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. check the bulbs again. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector. The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. check for + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. repair the connector. Apply after ignition feed. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. and if still not OK replace the rear light(s). With the command activated. the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. Clear the stored faults. 4C. 4F. : 44. 4D. Track 4 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3 AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. 4C.Interpretation of commands 87B AC022 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4F. 48. contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. 87B-257 . If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check for earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight. repair the connector. The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. replace the rear light(s). otherwise replace the wiring. If correct. check the bulbs again. 4D. Deal with any other faults.Interpretation of commands 87B RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC023 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Apply after ignition feed. 4-door hatch: on track 5 of the rear light connector. otherwise replace the wiring. and if still correct. With the command activated. 87B-258 . Electrical wiring repair. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Clear the stored faults. Check the bulbs. check for + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. the right-hand repeater and the rear right-hand light. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. 4F.: 44.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. Clear the stored faults. Track 4 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3 AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B AC023 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Deal with any other faults. 4D. repair the connector.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-259 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. If the fault is still present. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. repair the connector. With the command activated. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Track 25 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. 48. repair the connector. If OK. Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If OK: If faulty: Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. The command lasts 7 seconds. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. This command is for testing card reader operation. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Card reader track 5 If the fault is still present. 4C. Check for an earth on track 5 of the card reader connector. 87B-260 . repair the connector.Interpretation of commands 87B CARD READER LIGHT AC024 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the card reader connector. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Card reader track 2 If the fault is still present. The card reader light does not come on when the command is activated. Electrical wiring repair. Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH. Electrical wiring repair. replace the card reader. check for + 12 V on track 2 of the card reader connector. This command is used to operate the window motors. 4C. see the procedure for this status.Interpretation of commands 87B ONE-TOUCH WINDOW CONTROL/SUNROOF AUTHORISATION. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults. 87B-261 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. After activation. 4F. If there is a fault. take a reading of the ET087 One-touch window/sunroof authorisation status to verify a change of status. 48. The command lasts 7 seconds. Clear the stored faults. after the UCH has been replaced or minor loss of authorisation. AC025 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. 4D.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. This command is for testing operation of the start button. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. 87B-262 . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48.Interpretation of commands 87B START BUTTON LIGHTING AC026 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. check for + 12 V on track 4 of the start button connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. 4D. The command lasts 7 seconds.UCH Vdiag No. Check for earth on track 2 of the start button connector. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. With the command activated. Electrical wiring repair. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Check the connection of the start button connector. repair the connector. replace the button. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Deal with any other faults. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Start button track 4 Track 13 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If OK. The button light does not come on when the command is activated. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . repair the connector. 4C. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of commands 87B FOOTWELL LIGHTS AC027 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 1 of each interior light If the fault is still present. repair the connector. 4C. check for earth on track 2 of each footwell light. Electrical wiring repair. 87B-263 . otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of each interior light If the fault is still present. repair the connector. This command is for testing footwell/floor lights operation. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. Track 10 of the 12-track connector PP3 of the UCH AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. repair the connector. Track 9 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH With the command activated.UCH Vdiag No. If OK: If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Clear the stored faults. Check for + 12 V on track 1 of each footwell light. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the footwell lighting connectors. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. 48. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. Check the bulbs. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. 4D. Run the fault finding procedure for command AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. Is there an earth? Not on track 1.: 44. check for + 12 V on track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Electrical wiring repair. This command is for testing headlight washer 1 operation. Check for earth on track A4 of the relay connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 If everything is OK. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4C. repair the connector. With the command activated. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. replace the relay. Is there + 12 V? YES Replace the headlight washer pump. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B AC030 HEADLIGHT WASHER 1 RELAY (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 UPC) NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check for earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. 4D. 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). YES Not on track 2. 48. NO A Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer 1 relay connector. 87B-264 . otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. The command lasts 3 seconds. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. replace the relay. Electrical wiring repair. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Relay connector track A2 Track 13 of the UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. repair the connector. 87B-265 . 4F. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. If everything is OK. Clear the stored faults. Check for + 12 V on tracks A2 and A5 of the relay connector.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. With the command activated. Electrical wiring repair. check for earth on track A2 of the relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of commands 87B AC030 CONTINUED Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 1. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Is there an earth? YES NO Check the condition and connection of connector PE3 on the UCH. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. replace the relay. Check for earth on track B4 of the relay connector. YES With the command activated. Run the fault finding procedure for command AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3 If everything is OK. 48. Is there an earth? Faulty on track 1. NO A Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 2 connector. repair the connector. Not correct on track 2. Wiring: Precautions for repair). The command lasts 3 seconds. check for + 12 V on track 2 of the headlight washer pump. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Track 2 headlight washer pump AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. Is there + 12 V? YES Replace the headlight washer pump. repair the connector. Clear the stored faults. Headlight washer 2 relay Check for an earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump.Interpretation of commands 87B AC031 HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 2 (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 UPC) NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 87B-266 . This command is used to test the operation of headlight washer 2 or for locking the glovebox if the vehicle is fitted with one of these functions: This command is only active for UPC Vdiag 44 (see System operation). 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. 4F. With the command running. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If everything is OK. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 2 track B3 Track 1 headlight washer pump If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Interpretation of commands 87B AC031 CONTINUED 1 Check the condition and connection of headlight washer 2 relay. If the fault is still present. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. check for earth on track B2 of the relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Relay connector track B2 Track 14 of the UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Is there earth? YES NO Check the condition and connection of connector PE3 on the UCH. 87B-267 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check for + 12 V on tracks B2 and A5 of the relay connector. repair the connector. Deal with any other faults. replace the relay. otherwise replace the wiring. Electrical wiring repair. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. 48. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. check the following connection: track 8 of the black 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH track 2 black glovebox connector track 3 black glovebox connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Interpretation of commands 87B AC031 CONTINUED 2 Glovebox locking If after command AC031. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. 48.: 44. the glovebox does not unlock: Check for + 12 V between track 3 of the glovebox connector and the earth during command AC031. Clear the stored faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. Deal with any other faults. If there is no 12 V. repair the connector. check the following connection: track 22 white 40-track connector PE1 (green section) of the UCH If there is + 12 V. 4D. 87B-268 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the fault is still present. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. This command takes 1 minute. repair the connector. repair the connector. 87B-269 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). View the flashing of the card reader. broken. Deal with any other faults. etc. etc. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. broken. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1 4-track aerial connector track 2 Track 27 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 39 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.). Electrical wiring repair.Interpretation of commands 87B DRIVER'S SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC032 NOTES Before performing this command. There must be no present or stored faults. Clear the stored faults. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . otherwise replace the wiring.). it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. 48. contact the Techline. oxidised. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector.UCH Vdiag No. Front door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. broken. 4D. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track aerial connector track 1 4-track aerial connector track 2 Track 28 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 38 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. Replace the aerial if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. oxidised. broken.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. Deal with any other faults. etc. 48.Interpretation of commands 87B AC032 CONTINUED Rear door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. repair the connector. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. etc. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system.). Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .). repair the connector. 87B-270 . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. 4C. View the flashing of the card reader. Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. etc.). otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. 4F. Electrical wiring repair. broken. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. Clear the stored faults. Electrical wiring repair. Front door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. If the range exceeds 1. Electrical wiring repair.). This command takes 1 minute.UCH Vdiag No. 87B-271 . otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of commands 87B PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033 Before performing this command.50 m. check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. There must be no present or stored faults. repair the connector. 4D. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1 4-track aerial connector track 2 Track 31 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 34 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. oxidised. contact the Techline. broken. etc. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the passenger-side external aerials. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44.Interpretation of commands 87B AC033 CONTINUED Rear door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present. 87B-272 . repair the connector. etc. Deal with any other faults. Replace the aerial if necessary. broken. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1 4-track aerial connector track 2 Track 32 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 33 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector.). repair the connector. etc. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair.). 48. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Wiring: Precautions for repair). oxidised. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . broken. contact the Techline. Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector.: 44. etc. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the external aerial on the tailgate side. This command is for checking the hands-free luggage compartment access zone and works even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. 48. There must be no present or stored faults. contact the Techline. Electrical wiring repair. oxidised. broken.).50 m. Clear the stored faults. This command takes 1 minute. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. etc. If the range exceeds 1. repair the connector. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. repair the connector. View the flashing of the card reader. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1 4-track aerial connector track 2 Track 29 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 40 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 87B-273 .Interpretation of commands 87B LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC034 Before performing this command.). otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. Electrical wiring repair. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. check that there is no short circuit to the aerial earth. broken. Interpretation of commands 87B INTERNAL AERIAL TESTING AC036 NOTES Before performing this command.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. 4D. it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault.). Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 3-track aerial connector track 1 3-track aerial connector track 3 Track 25 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 24 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. View the flashing of the card reader. oxidised. Electrical wiring repair. broken. Electrical wiring repair. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. If the fault is still present. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. broken. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.). AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the internal aerials. Deal with any other faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. There must be no present or stored faults. This command takes 1 minute. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults.: 44. etc. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. etc. 87B-274 . otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent. repair the connector. FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Replace the aerial if necessary. 4F. : 44. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). etc. 4F. repair the connector.). broken. 48. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent.). Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. broken. Deal with any other faults. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. 87B-275 .Interpretation of commands 87B AC036 CONTINUED 1 BOOT INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 3-track aerial connector track 1 3-track aerial connector track 3 Track 35 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 36 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. If the fault is still present. Replace the aerial if necessary. Clear the stored faults.UCH Vdiag No. oxidised. contact the Techline. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. 48.). repair the connector.: 44. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. broken. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 3-track aerial connector track 1 3-track aerial connector track 3 Track 26 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 Track 37 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent.UCH Vdiag No.). 4F. broken. If the fault is still present. 4C. Replace the aerial if necessary. etc. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Clear the stored faults. oxidised. repair the connector. etc.Interpretation of commands 87B AC036 CONTINUED 2 CENTRE INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent. otherwise replace the wiring. 87B-276 . otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. perform fault reading. Clear the stored faults.Interpretation of commands 87B TRANSMITTER AERIAL FAULT FINDING AC037 There must be no present or stored faults. 87B-277 . 4F. refer to the processing of this (these) fault(s).: 44. This command takes 1 minute. 48. After activating the command. 4D. If one (or more) fault(s) concerning the aerials appear(s).UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Deal with any other faults. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. NOTES Special note: This command is used to run fault finding on the internal and external transmitter aerials on open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V. 4C. repair the connector. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Deal with any other faults. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. 87B-278 . 4D. 4F. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Clear the stored faults. contact the Techline. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out another fault finding check on the system. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Locking switch track A2 Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. This command is for testing child safety indicator light operation. The child safety switch light does not come on when the command is activated. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 48.UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace the wiring. The command lasts 7 seconds. otherwise replace the wiring.Interpretation of commands 87B CHILD SAFETY INDICATOR LIGHT AC076 NOTES There must be no present or stored faults. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 of the child safety lock switch connector. : 44. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Customer complaints 87B NOTES Only refer to these customer complaints after a full check with the diagnostic tool.UCH Vdiag No. WASHERS NO REAR SCREEN WIPER ALP 9 NO REAR PARK POSITION ALP 10 NO WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ALP 11 NO WINDSCREEN WIPER ALP 12 NO FRONT AND REAR SCREEN WASHER ALP 13 NO HEADLIGHT WASHERS (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 UPC) ALP 14 87B-279 . NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER ALP 1 LIGHTING NO REAR FOG LIGHTS ALP 2 NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ALP 3 NO LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ALP 4 NO SIDE LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB) ALP 5 NO DIPPED BEAM LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB) ALP 6 NO MAIN BEAM LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB) ALP 7 NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS ALP 8 WIPERS. 4F. 4D. 4C. 4C.Customer complaints 87B ALP 15 ELECTRIC WINDOWS NO PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOWS) NO PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS) NO PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER'S ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOW AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOW) NO DRIVER'S WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOWS) NO DRIVER'S WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS) NO DRIVER'S WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER'S ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOW AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOW) NO OPERATION ON REAR LEFT-HAND WINDOW (REAR ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS) NO OPERATION ON REAR RIGHT-HAND WINDOW (REAR ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS) NO ELECTRIC WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOWS) ALP 16 ALP 17 ALP 18 ALP 19 ALP 20 ALP 21 ALP 22 ALP 23 87B-280 .UCH Vdiag No. 4F.: 44. 48. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 4F.: 44. 2 or 3 THE SUNROOF IS DIFFICULT TO CLOSE OR THE ANTI-PINCH IS TRIGGERED WITHOUT ANY APPARENT OBSTACLE FAULT LOCKING/UNLOCKING VIA BUTTON ON CARD FAULT LOCKING/UNLOCKING TAILGATE VIA CARD BUTTON BOOT OPENING FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE) REAR SCREEN OPENING FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE) LOCKING/UNLOCKING FUEL FILLER FLAP FAULT ALP 25 ALP 26 ALP 27 ALP 28 ALP 29 ALP 30 ALP 31 UNLOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE ALP 32 LOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE ALP 33 HANDS-FREE TAILGATE UNLOCKING FAULT ALP 34 FAULT OPENING THE REAR SCREEN IN HANDS-FREE MODE CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING FAULT ON ONE OR MORE DOORS AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING OPERATION FAULT (RAID) ALP 35 ALP 36 ALP 37 WINDOWS FAIL TO CLOSE AFTER TWO ATTEMPTS TO LOCK ALP 38 87B-281 . 48. 4D.Customer complaints 87B ALP 24 OPENING ELEMENTS NO SUNROOF OPENING AND CLOSING NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 1. Customer complaints 87B ALP 39 ANTITHEFT AND STARTING RECORDED FAULTS NO + ACCESSORIES FEED FORCED AFTER-IGNITION FEED FAILS THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS. 48. BUT WORKS WITH CARD IN READER THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED THE STARTER BRIEFLY RUNS BUT THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED IMPOSSIBLE TO SHUT OFF ENGINE ALP 40 ALP 41 ALP 42 ALP 43 ALP 44 ALP 45 STEERING COLUMN LOCK DOES NOT LOCK ALP 46 STEERING COLUMN LOCK DOES NOT UNLOCK ALP 47 STARTING ERRATIC ALP 48 87B-282 . CARD IN READER THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS IN HANDS-FREE MODE.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 4F. 4C. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F.Customer complaints 87B ALP 49 DOOR MIRRORS NO FOLDING-IN OR FOLDING-OUT OF ONE OR MORE DOOR MIRRORS CANNOT ADJUST ONE OF THE TWO DOOR MIRRORS ALP 50 SUPPLY + AFTER IGNITION FEED REMAINS BLOCKED ALP 51 87B-283 . 48.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 4C. UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. Multiplexing). 4F.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the battery voltage. Check for earth on track 1 of connector PP1 and on track 2 of connector PP3 of the UCH. YES NO Check the condition and connection of connector PP1 of the UCH. Did locking/unlocking operate? YES Refer to ALP 1 (see 88B. Multiplex network out of service (see 88B Multiplexing ). 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. UCH_V44_ALP1/UCH_V48_ALP1/UCH_V4C_ALP1/ UCH_V4D_ALP1/UCH_V4F_ALP1/UCH_V50_ALP1 87B-284 . Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 4 of connector PP1 of the UCH. Repair if necessary. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . checking the passenger compartment relay and fuse boxes and the power supply fuse board. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. Is there contact or another feed level? NO Perform locking/unlocking. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. NO Contact the Techline. Are the power supplies correct? YES Repair the faulty connections and fuses up to the battery. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition of the power fuses on the battery's positive terminal. Has the fault disappeared? NO Refer to the section Interpretation of faults. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 2 No rear fog lights NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. NO Apply interpretation of ET082 Rear fog light request. Is status ET082 present? YES Perform command AC009 Rear fog lights. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Does the fog light come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. NO Apply interpretation of command AC009 Rear fog light. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. Are the bulbs in good condition? YES Check status ET082 Rear fog lights request by actuating the control stalk. 48. NO Replace the bulbs. UCH_V44_ALP2/UCH_V48_ALP2/UCH_V4C_ALP2/ UCH_V4D_ALP2/UCH_V4F_ALP2/UCH_V50_ALP2 87B-285 . Check the bulbs. 4D.: 44. 4F. NO Apply interpretation of command AC023 Right-hand direction indicator.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ALP3/UCH_V48_ALP3/UCH_V4C_ALP3/ UCH_V4D_ALP3/UCH_V4F_ALP3/UCH_V50_ALP3 87B-286 . otherwise replace the wiring. NO Apply interpretation of status ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request. Is there a supply? NO Check status ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request by actuating the control stalk.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Does the right-hand direction indicator come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. Is status ET084 present? NO Replace the bulbs. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check the bulbs. 48. If the fault is still present. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4C. YES Perform command AC023 Right-hand direction indicator. repair the connector. contact the Techline. Are the bulbs in good condition? YES Check the + 12 V supply and earth on the bulb connectors (see interpretation of DF012 Right-hand direction indicator circuit).Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 3 NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. YES Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Is there a supply? NO Check status ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request by actuating the control stalk. NO Apply interpretation of status ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request. NO Apply interpretation of command AC022 Left-hand direction indicator. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Does the left-hand direction indicator come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Check the bulbs. contact the Techline.: 44. 48. UCH_V44_ALP4/UCH_V48_ALP4/UCH_V4C_ALP4/ UCH_V4D_ALP4/UCH_V4F_ALP4/UCH_V50_ALP4 87B-287 . YES Perform command AC022 Left-hand direction indicator . Are the bulbs in good condition? YES Check the + 12 V supply and earth on the headlight connectors (see interpretation of DF013 Left-hand direction indicator circuit). otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. YES Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. If the fault is still present. repair the connector. Is status ET083 present? NO Replace the bulbs.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 4 No left-hand direction indicator NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. Is there a supply? NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position. NO Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Are the bulbs in good condition? YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 5 of the headlights and earth on track 1. 48. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. NO Replace the bulbs. Wiring: Precautions for repair). YES Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Is the side lights request on side lights? YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. 4D. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. UCH_V44_ALP5/UCH_V48_ALP5/UCH_V4C_ALP5/ UCH_V4D_ALP5/UCH_V4F_ALP5/UCH_V50_ALP5 87B-288 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 5 No side lights (lights without xenon bulb) NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.: 44. Check the bulbs. repair the connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. NO Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position. 4C. 4D. Are the bulbs in good condition? YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 2 of the headlights and earth on track 1. YES Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Is the dipped beam headlight request on dipped beam? YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit and check the dipped headlight F8C fuses (Vdiag 44 UPC) and F3 and F4 fuses (Vdiag 48 or above UPC) on the UPC. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.: 44. 48. Is there a supply? NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position. Check the bulbs.UCH Vdiag No.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 6 No dipped beam lights (lights without xenon bulb) NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. Repair if necessary. NO Replace the bulbs. UCH_V44_ALP6/UCH_V48_ALP6/UCH_V4C_ALP6/ UCH_V4D_ALP6/UCH_V4F_ALP6/UCH_V50_ALP6 87B-289 . Is there a supply? NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 7 No main beam lights (lights without xenon bulb) NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Check the F8A and F8B fuses (Vdiag 44 UPC) and F6 and F7 fuses (Vdiag 48 or above UPC). 48. 4F. Repair if necessary. 4D. UCH_V44_ALP7/UCH_V48_ALP7/UCH_V4C_ALP7/ UCH_V4D_ALP7/UCH_V4F_ALP7/UCH_V50_ALP7 87B-290 .UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . YES Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. NO Replace the bulbs. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Are the bulbs in good condition? YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 4 of the headlights and earth on track 1.: 44. 4C. Check the bulbs. NO Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position. Does the side light request occur on main beam? YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4C. NO Apply interpretation of command AC008 Front fog lights. Check status ET111 Front fog lights request with the stalk in the front fog lights position. contact the Techline.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 8 No front fog lights NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 48.: 44. NO Apply interpretation of ET111 Front fog light request. 4F. Do the front fog lights come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. Is status ET111 Present? YES Perform command AC008 Front fog lights. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. UCH_V44_ALP8/UCH_V48_ALP8/UCH_V4C_ALP8/ UCH_V4D_ALP8/UCH_V4F_ALP8/UCH_V50_ALP8 87B-291 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Is status ET080 Present? YES Perform command AC007 Rear screen wiper. contact the Techline. 4F.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 9 No rear screen wiper NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. for + 12 V . Check the power supply of the wiper motor: On track 2. NO Apply interpretation of status ET080 Rear screen wiper request. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . NO Perform fault finding on command AC007 Rear screen wiper. UCH_V44_ALP9/UCH_V48_ALP9/UCH_V4C_ALP9/ UCH_V4D_ALP9/UCH_V4F_ALP9/UCH_V50_ALP9 87B-292 . If the fault is still present.: 44. 48. Check status ET080 Rear screen wiper request with the stalk in the rear screen wiper position. for earth. Is the rear screen wiper working? YES Check the UCH connectors. On track 3. 4C. 4C.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 10 No rear park position NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 48. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. YES Apply interpretation of status ET097 Rear screen wiper park position. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F.: 44. UCH_V44_ALP10/UCH_V48_ALP10/UCH_V4C_ALP10/ UCH_V4D_ALP10/UCH_V4F_ALP10/UCH_V50_ALP10 87B-293 . Check status ET097 Rear screen wiper park position.UCH Vdiag No. Is status ET097 absent? NO Contact the Techline. 4D. : 44. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check status ET077 Wiper stalk position park position request. 48. UCH_V44_ALP11/UCH_V48_ALP11/UCH_V4C_ALP11/ UCH_V4D_ALP11/UCH_V4F_ALP11/UCH_V50_ALP11 87B-294 .UCH Vdiag No.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 11 No windscreen wiper park position NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. NO Apply interpretation of status ET077 Wiper stalk position. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4C. Is status ET077 present? YES Contact the Techline. 4D. contact the Techline. repair the connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 12 No windscreen wiper NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.UCH Vdiag No. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the fault is still present. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Check the continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Windscreen wiper motor connector track 5 Track 1 of connector CN (Vdiag 48 or above) or 12-track brown connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) of the UPC Track 2 of connector CN (Vdiag 48 or above) or 12-track brown connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) of the UPC Track 6 of connector CN (Vdiag 48 or above) or 12-track brown connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) of the UPC Windscreen wiper motor connector track 4 Windscreen wiper motor connector track 2 Check for an earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor connector.: 44. 48. Check the condition of the windscreen wiper motor connections (with battery disconnected) and the UPC connections. otherwise replace the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4C. 4D. UCH_V44_ALP12/UCH_V48_ALP12/UCH_V4C_ALP12/ UCH_V4D_ALP12/UCH_V4F_ALP12/UCH_V50_ALP12 87B-295 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Windscreen washer Check status ET078 Front windscreen washer request by actuating the control stalk. 4F.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. NO Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. UCH_V44_ALP13/UCH_V48_ALP13/UCH_V4C_ALP13/ UCH_V4D_ALP13/UCH_V4F_ALP13/UCH_V50_ALP13 87B-296 . If everything is OK: Replace the washer fluid pump. 4C. Is status ET078 present? YES Check for + 12 V between tracks 2 and 1 of the washer fluid pump when it is in operation. 48. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4D. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Is there + 12 V? YES Check the hoses. NO Apply interpretation of status ET078 Front windscreen washer request. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 13 No front and rear screen washer NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. repair the connector. 48. Is there + 12 V? YES Check the hoses. 87B-297 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Is status ET079 present? YES Check for + 12 V between tracks 2 and 1 of the washer fluid pump when it is in operation. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Repair if necessary.: 44. 4F. 4C. Rear screen washer Check status ET079 Rear windscreen washer request by actuating the control stalk. contact the Techline. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. NO Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. If everything is OK: Replace the windscreen washer pump.UCH Vdiag No. 4D.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 13 CONTINUED NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present. NO Apply interpretation of status ET079 Rear screen wiper request. Can commands AC030 and AC031 be run? NO Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position. YES Check the condition of the pipes and nozzles. YES Run commands AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay and AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay. 4D. YES Check whether status ET078 Front windscreen washer request is "Present" when the stalk is operated. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Repair if necessary. 4F. contact the Techline. NO Apply interpretation of status ET078 Windscreen washer request. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4C. UCH_V44_ALP14/UCH_V48_ALP14/UCH_V4C_ALP14/ UCH_V4D_ALP14/UCH_V4F_ALP14/UCH_V50_ALP14 87B-298 . Place the stalk on side lights and check whether status ET081 Lighting stalk position is on Side lights . NO Apply interpretation of commands AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay and AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. 48.: 44.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 14 No headlight washers (only if VDIAG 44 UPC) NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Refitting ). 87D. Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. Fault finding chart. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting ). NO YES Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . Are the feeds correct? AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 87D. Electric windows Sunroof. shunt track A3 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track A2 and track B1 with track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector).: 44. 87D. UCH_V44_ALP15/UCH_V48_ALP15/UCH_V4C_ALP15/ UCH_V4D_ALP15/UCH_V4F_ALP15/UCH_V50_ALP15 87B-299 . Electric windows Sunroof. Does the window move? YES Replace the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. 4C. Shunt track 5 of the driver's window winder switch connector with tracks 2 and 3 of the driver's window winder switch connector. 4D. 48.UCH Vdiag No. Are the feeds correct? YES Shunt track A3 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector and track B1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track A2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector to lower the window (to raise it. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal .Refitting). 4F.Sunroof.Sunroof. Electric windows .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 15 Passenger window does not operate (driver and passenger electric window) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. NO NO Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. Check for + 12 V again on tracks A1 and B2 of the passenger's electric window switch. Electric windows . Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. 87D. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting ) and disconnect its connector. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B2 of the passenger's electric window switch. UCH Vdiag No. 4F. Electrical wiring repair.Refitting) . repair the connector. 4C. repair the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. 48. Reconnect the window winder switch and activate it. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Does the voltmeter display the correct supply? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). 87B-300 .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 15 CONTINUED Connect a voltmeter between track 1 and track 2 of the passenger window winder connector. contact the Techline. Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal . 51A.: 44. NO Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch connector track 3 Passenger's window winder switch connector track 2 Track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector Track B1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector Check the intermediate connectors if there is a continuity fault. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Passenger's window winder switch connector track A3 Passenger's window winder switch connector track 2 Track 1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector Track B1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector Check the intermediate connectors if there is a continuity fault. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. Side opening element mechanisms. 4D. otherwise replace the wiring. Does the voltmeter display the correct supply? NO Check the continuity on the following connection: Window winder motor connector track 4 Track 1M passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector YES Check that the right-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. NO Check for an earth on track 3 of the passenger's window winder connector. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal . If the earth is not in good condition.: 44. Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. If the earth is faulty. clean and retighten the terminal. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting ) and disconnect its connector. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electric windows Sunroof. UCH_V44_ALP16/UCH_V48_ALP16/UCH_V4C_ALP16/ UCH_V4D_ALP16/UCH_V4F_ALP16/UCH_V50_ALP16 87B-301 .UCH Vdiag No. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . Is the earth correct? NO YES Connect a voltmeter between track 3 and track 4 of the passenger window winder connector. 48. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87D.Refitting). see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. Electrical wiring repair. Check the intermediate connectors and the fuse if there is a continuity or supply fault. replace the wiring. Shunt track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track B2 to lower the window ( tracks B1 and A2 for cabriolets) and to raise the window shunt track A2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track B2 (tracks A3 and A2 for cabriolets). repair the connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 16 Passenger window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger window) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Fault finding chart.Sunroof. otherwise replace the wiring. 87D. Electric windows . Does the window move? YES Replace the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Electric window riser motor connector track 6 NO Track 7 connector PE2 brown section of the UCH Using a multimeter. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Electrical wiring repair. 51A. repair the connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 16 CONTINUED NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 87B-302 . Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal . Check the intermediate connectors if there is a continuity fault. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. contact the Techline. Side opening element mechanisms. check for + 12 V between tracks 4 and 6 of the passenger window winder connector. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 2 Window riser motor connector track 1 Track A2 of the window winder switch connector ( A3 cabriolet) Track A1 of the window winder switch connector ( B1 cabriolet) NO Is the continuity of the connections correct? YES NO If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Is the voltage approximately 12 V? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. check for + 12 V on track A2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector and track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. 48.Refitting ). 4F. Is the voltage approximately 12 V? YES Using a multimeter. 87D.Sunroof. Is the feed correct? YES NO AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check for + 12 V on track B2 of passenger's window winder switch connector and for + 12 V on track A1. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal . Does the window move? YES Replace the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Are the feeds correct? YES Shunt track B1 of the passenger's electric window switch connector with track A2 and shunt track A3 with track A1 to lower the window (shunt track A3 of the passenger's electric window switch with track A2 and track B1 with track B2 to raise the window).Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 17 Passenger's window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger's electric window) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. 48. 4F. Check for + 12 V on track 2 of the white connector of the driver's window lift switch.Sunroof. Electric windows . 87D. Electric windows Sunroof. Electric windows .: 44. NO NO Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. 87D. see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. UCH_V44_ALP17/UCH_V48_ALP17/UCH_V4C_ALP17/ UCH_V4D_ALP17/UCH_V4F_ALP17/UCH_V50_ALP17 87B-303 .Refitting) and disconnect its connector. 4C. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting ) and disconnect its connector.UCH Vdiag No. Fault finding chart. Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting ). 4D. Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair).Refitting ).UCH Vdiag No. Electric windows Sunroof. Electrical wiring repair. Are the feeds correct? YES Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. 4D. 87D. is the supply correct? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 17 CONTINUED 1 Connect a voltmeter between tracks 1 and 2 of the passenger window winder connector. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 1 Window riser motor connector track 2 Track A3 of the passenger's window winder connector Track B1 of the passenger's window winder connector NO Shunt track 2 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector with track 1 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector and track 3 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector. Side opening element mechanisms. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Reconnect the window winder switch and activate it. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check again for + 12 V on track B2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector and for + 12 V on track A1. NO If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. repair the connector. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal . 51A.Refitting ). 87B-304 .: 44. Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal . 4F. check the intermediate connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 17 CONTINUED 2 Check the continuity n the following connection: Driver's window lift switch connector track 2 Track 5A of the passenger compartment connection unit connector Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch white connector track 1 Driver's window lift switch white connector track 3 Track B2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector Track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector If there is poor continuity. repair the connector. If one of the continuity's is poor. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. check the intermediate connectors. 87B-305 . otherwise replace the wiring. 4D. repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. 4C. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 18 Driver window does not operate (driver and passenger electric windows) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. 4F. Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems. If the earth is not in good condition. see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. 4C.Sunroof. Electric windows Sunroof. NO A AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Electric windows . clean and retighten the terminal. Does the window move? YES Replace the driver's electric window switch.: 44. Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal . If the earth is faulty. 48.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal . Is the feed correct? YES Shunt track 5 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector with track 5 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector and shunt track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector to lower the window (to raise the window shunt track 5 of the driver's side switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector and shunt track 5 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector with track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector.Refitting). replace the wiring. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . 87D. Check for + 12 V on track 5 of the white connector of the driver's electric window switch. 87D. (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. NO Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. Fault finding chart. UCH_V44_ALP18/UCH_V48_ALP18/UCH_V4C_ALP18/ UCH_V4D_ALP18/UCH_V4F_ALP18/UCH_V50_ALP18 87B-306 .Refitting) and disconnect its connector. 4D. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. : 44. 51A. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. 4C. Side opening element mechanisms. Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting ). AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 87B-307 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . is the supply correct? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. 48. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. NO Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 1 Window riser motor connector track 2 Track 5 of the driver's window lift switch black connector Track 4 of the driver's window lift switch white connector If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4D. 4F. Reconnect the window winder switch and activate it.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 18 CONTINUED Connect a voltmeter between tracks 1 and 2 of the driver's window winder connector. 4C. If the earth is not in good condition. 87D. Does the window move? YES Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. Shunt track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector to lower the window (to raise the window. 4F. UCH_V44_ALP19/UCH_V48_ALP19/UCH_V4C_ALP19/ UCH_V4D_ALP19/UCH_V4F_ALP19/UCH_V50_ALP19 87B-308 . Electric windows Sunroof. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87D. Fault finding chart. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal . Is the earth correct? YES NO Check for earth on track 3 of the black connector of the driver's window winder. shunt track 5 of the driver's side window winder black connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. Is the earth correct? YES NO Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis.Refitting). Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 4D. If the earth is faulty. NO Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . 48.Sunroof.Refitting) and disconnect its connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 19 Driver's window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger window) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. clean and retighten the terminal. replace the wiring. Electric windows . Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal . Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. Is the feed correct? Is the feed correct? YES Check for + 12 V between track 6 and track 4 of the driver's window winder connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 19 CONTINUED 1 Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 4 Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the driver's window lift motor black connector. Is the feed correct? YES Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the white connector of the driver's window lift switch and on track 5 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. otherwise replace the wiring. 4F. check the intermediate connector. NO Track 1L of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box If the continuity is faulty. otherwise replace it. Is the feed correct? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44. 87B-309 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting ). Electrical wiring repair. 4D. Side opening element mechanisms. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair. check the intermediate connector. NO B NO Check the continuity on the following connection: Driver's window winder connector track 6 Track 7 of the brown section of connector PE2 of the UCH In the event of a continuity fault. repair the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A. 4C. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 48. 51A. Side opening element mechanisms. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. repair the connector. If the fault is still present.: 44.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 19 CONTINUED 2 Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch white connector track 4 Driver's window lift switch black connector track 5 Track 1 of the driver's window winder Track 2 of the driver's window winder NO If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. contact the Techline. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4D. otherwise replace it. 51A. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting ). 87B-310 . 4F. Is the continuity good? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. NO Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. Is the earth correct? YES NO Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. 4C. If the earth is faulty. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 87D. Does the window move? YES Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. If the earth is not in good condition. 48. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. Is the earth correct? YES NO Check for earth on track 3 of the black connector of the driver's window winder. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Fault finding chart. replace the wiring.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 20 Driver's window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger's electric window) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. 87D.: 44.Refitting).Sunroof.Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Shunt track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector to lower the window (to raise the window. Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal . shunt track 5 of the driver's side window winder black connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector. Electric windows Sunroof. see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . clean and retighten the terminal. Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal . 4F. UCH_V44_ALP20/UCH_V48_ALP20/UCH_V4C_ALP20/ UCH_V4D_ALP20/UCH_V4F_ALP20/UCH_V50_ALP20 87B-311 . Electric windows . Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Side opening element mechanisms. check the intermediate connector. Is the feed correct? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4C. NO Track 1L of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box If the continuity is faulty. otherwise replace the wiring. check the intermediate connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Is the feed correct? YES Check for + 12 V between track 6 and track 4 of the driver's window winder connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting ).UCH Vdiag No. otherwise replace it. Electrical wiring repair. NO B NO Check the continuity on the following connection: Driver's window winder connector track 6 Track 7 of the brown section of connector PE2 of the UCH In the event of a continuity fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A. 87B-312 . repair the connector. 4D. 4F. 51A.: 44.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 20 CONTINUED 1 Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 4 Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the driver's window lift motor black connector. Is the feed correct? YES Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the white connector of the driver's window lift switch and on track 5 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. repair the wiring. 48. Electrical wiring repair. Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 20 CONTINUED 2 Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch white connector track 4 Driver's window lift switch black connector track 5 Track 1 of the driver's window winder Track 2 of the driver's window winder NO If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87B-313 . 4C. 4D. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A. Is the continuity good? YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. 48. repair the wiring. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Side opening element mechanisms. Electrical wiring repair. Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting ).: 44. 51A. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector. otherwise replace it. Shunt tracks A2 and B2 (A3 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear left-hand window winder switch connector to lower the window (to raise it shunt tracks A1 and A2 (B1 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear left-hand window winder switch connector). 4C.Refitting) and disconnect the connectors from the LH rear window winder and from the LH rear window winder switch. see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. 72A.Refitting).Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 21 Rear left-hand window does not operate (rear one-touch electric windows) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter.Sunroof. UCH_V44_ALP21/UCH_V48_ALP21/UCH_V4C_ALP21/ UCH_V4D_ALP21/UCH_V4F_ALP21/UCH_V50_ALP21 87B-314 . Window riser motor connector track 1 (track 2 for cabriolet) Is the continuity good? A AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the wiring. 4D. Fault finding chart. otherwise replace it. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 2 (track 1 for cabriolet) Track A1 (track B1 for cabriolet) of the rear left-hand window winder connector Track B2 (track A3 for cabriolet) of the driver's window lift white connector YES YES Replace the rear left-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems.UCH Vdiag No. Rear window winder switch on rear door: Removal . Electric windows . Electrical wiring repair. Rear window winder switch: Removal . 87D. Rear side door trim: Removal . NO If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A.Sunroof. Remove the rear left-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems. Electric windows . Does the window move? NO Remove the rear left-hand door trim (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork. 87D.: 44.Refitting) and disconnect its connector. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . Side opening trims. Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 21 CONTINUED 1 Check for + 12 V between tracks 4 and 3 of the rear left-hand window winder switch connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). otherwise replace the wiring. Check that the rear left-hand end panel earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. 4D. Is the feed correct? YES Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6 Track 7 of connector PE2 of the UCH NO Check for + 12 V between track 4 of the rear left-hand window winder switch connector and the chassis earth. check the intermediate connector. 4C. replace the wiring. 48. B AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. clean and retighten the terminal.UCH Vdiag No. Is the feed correct? NO YES If the continuity is faulty. 4F. If the earth is faulty. If the earth is not in good condition. 87B-315 . repair the connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. repair the connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 21 CONTINUED 2 Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6 Track 20 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector If the continuity is faulty. 4C. Electrical wiring repair. check the intermediate connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fuse is in good condition and the fault is still present.: 44. 87B-316 . check the rear window riser motor 40A fuse. 4D. contact the Techline. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the continuity is correct. 4F. 48. Electric windows . Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 2 (track 1 for cabriolet) Track A1 (track B1 for cabriolet) of the rear left-hand window winder switch connector Track B2 (track A3 for cabriolet) of the driver's window lift white connector YES YES Replace the rear left-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems. Rear side door trim: Removal . see 87D Electric windows Sunroof.Sunroof. Does the window move? NO Remove the rear right-hand door trim (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork.Refitting) and disconnect the connectors from the RH rear window winder and from the RH rear window winder switch.Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair.Refitting). 87D. Fault finding chart. 48. 4D. Rear window winder switch: Removal . otherwise replace it.UCH Vdiag No. 72A. UCH_V44_ALP22/UCH_V48_ALP22/UCH_V4C_ALP22/ UCH_V4D_ALP22/UCH_V4F_ALP22/UCH_V50_ALP22 87B-317 .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 22 Rear right-hand window does not operate (rear one-touch electric windows) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Electric windows . repair the wiring. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . 4C.Sunroof. NO If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A. Side opening trims. Remove the rear right-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems. 4F. 87D. Window riser motor connector track 1 (track 2 for cabriolet) Is the continuity good? A AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Shunt tracks A2 and B2 (A3 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear right-hand window winder switch connector to lower the window (to raise it shunt tracks A1 and A2 (B1 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear left-hand window winder switch connector).: 44. Rear window winder switch on rear door: Removal . Check for + 12 V between tracks 4 and 3 of the rear right-hand window winder switch connector. check the intermediate connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F.UCH Vdiag No. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 22 CONTINUED 1 NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. If the earth is faulty. replace the wiring. Is the feed correct? NO YES If the continuity is faulty. 48. repair the connector. Check that the rear right-hand end panel earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. 4C. clean and retighten the terminal. 4D. If the earth is not in good condition. 87B-318 . Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Is the feed correct? YES Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6 Track 7 of connector PE2 of the UCH NO Check for + 12 V between tracks 4 of the rear right-hand window winder switch connector and the chassis earth. B AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.: 44. 4D. 87B-319 . If the continuity is correct.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. If the fuse is in good condition and the fault is still present. check the rear window riser motor 40A fuse. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4F. check the intermediate connector. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. repair the connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 22 CONTINUED 2 Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6 Track 20 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector If the continuity is faulty. contact the Techline. 48. otherwise replace the wiring. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. Sunroof. check the intermediate connector. 87D. Is the feed correct? YES NO Check the continuity on the following connection: Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and secured correctly.Refitting) and disconnect its connector.: 44. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Is the feed correct? YES Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems. replace the wiring. Electric windows . If the earth is not in good condition. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.Sunroof. Check for + 12 V between track 5 of the driver's window riser switch white connector and track 4 of the driver's window riser black connector. 48. clean and retighten the terminal. Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal . 4D.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 23 No windows operate (driver and passenger electric windows) NOTES Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. contact the Techline. repair the connector. If the fault is still present. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. contact the Techline. Window riser motor connector track 6 Track 5 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector If the continuity is faulty. 4F.Refitting). Fault finding chart. 4C. 87D. otherwise replace the wiring.UCH Vdiag No. Electrical wiring repair. If the earth is faulty. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork. Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems. If the fault is still present. NO Check for + 12 V between track 5 of the driver's window riser switch white connector and the chassis earth. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electric windows . see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. UCH_V44_ALP23/UCH_V48_ALP23/UCH_V4C_ALP23/ UCH_V4D_ALP23/UCH_V4F_ALP23/UCH_V50_ALP23 87B-320 . 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. 4F. Is the feed correct? YES NO Check the continuity on the following connection: See ALP 26. Track 2E of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector Track 7 of the sunroof black connector A Left-hand dashboard/cross member earth Track 10 of the sunroof black connector If one of the continuities is faulty. NO Check for + 12 V on track 7 of the sunroof black connector. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Carry out UCH configuration reading and check that command LC070 (ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS/SUNROOF) is configured WITH. Electrical wiring repair.UCH Vdiag No.Sunroof. Fault finding. Is command LC070 configured WITH? YES Move the sunroof control to the Closed position and press and hold the central part of the control. contact the Techline. Fault finding chart. If a connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. After pressing the central part of the control for approximately 10 seconds. 87D Electric windows . repair the connector. otherwise replace the wiring. UCH_V44_ALP24/UCH_V48_ALP24/UCH_V4C_ALP24/ UCH_V4D_ALP24/UCH_V4F_ALP24/UCH_V50_ALP24 87B-321 . check the intermediate connector. does the roof move smoothly? YES NO Modify the configuration (see Configurations and programming). 4C. Wiring: Precautions for repair).: 44.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 NO SUNROOF OPENING AND CLOSING NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present. see MR 366. 4D. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). insulation and the absence of the interference resistance to + 12 V and to earth of the following connection: UCH black connector PE2 track 7 Track 9 of the sunroof black connector NO If the continuity is faulty. 4C.: 44. otherwise replace the wiring. repair the connector. Is fault DF031 One touch window connection present? YES Check the continuity. check the intermediate connectors. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 87B-322 . Electrical wiring repair. 48.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 CONTINUED 1 Use the diagnostic tool to read the faults in the UCH.UCH Vdiag No. : 44.Refitting). Check the resistance between track 1 of the connector and the chassis earth. check the intermediate connector. otherwise replace the wiring. Wiring: Precautions for repair). repair the connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 CONTINUED 2 Disconnect the connector from the sunroof switch (see MR 364 Mechanical. 87B-323 . 4F.sunroof. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . check the conformity and correct operation of the sunroof switch. Electrical wiring repair.Refitting ). 4C.UCH Vdiag No. 87D Electric windows sunroof. Is the value shown less than 30 Ohms? NO Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical. 48. 87D Electric windows . sunroof switch: Removal . NO If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 4D. If the continuity is faulty. Sunroof motor: Removal . Check the continuity on the following connection: Sunroof switch connector track 1 Track 1 of the sunroof motor black connector YES Using the multimeter and table (ALP 24 CONTINUED 6 ). Is the connection correct? YES AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 10 Sunroof switch black connector track 7 Track 10 black section of union R301 Track 21 black section of union R301 NO If the continuity is faulty. check for + 12 V between tracks 7 and 10 of the sunroof motor connector. otherwise replace the wiring. 48. 4C. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical systems. 87D Electric windows-sunroof. Is the feed correct? YES Replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric windows . 4F. After repairing the condition of the wiring. Using a multimeter. If the fault is still present. check the intermediate connector R339. repair the connector. Using the wiring diagram which corresponds to the vehicle.Refitting ) and disconnect union R301. contact the Techline.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 CONTINUED 3 Disconnect the black connector from the sunroof motor. 4D.sunroof: Removal Refitting ). 87B-324 . Electrical wiring repair. Sunroof motor: Removal . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. check the conformity of union R301. initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D. Electric sunroof: Initialisation). AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.: 44. Wiring: Precautions for repair).UCH Vdiag No. : 44. If the fault is still present. check the intermediate connector R339. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Is the feed correct? YES NO Using the wiring diagram which corresponds to the vehicle.Refitting). 87D Electric windows . Ensure continuity on the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 10 Sunroof switch black connector track 7 Track 10 black section of union R301 Track 21 black section of union R301 If the continuity is faulty. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. 87B-325 . 87D Electric windows-sunroof. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Sunroof motor: Removal . repair the connector. initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D. 4C.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. 4F.Refitting) and disconnect union R301. Sunroof motor: Removal . Is the control correct? YES NO Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical. Electrical wiring repair. Check for + 12 V between tracks 7 and 10 of the sunroof motor connector. contact the Techline . otherwise replace the wiring. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical systems.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 CONTINUED 4 Replace the control (see MR Mechanical systems. check the conformity of union R301. Electric sunroof: Initialisation ).sunroof. Sunroof switch: Removal Refitting). Wiring: Precautions for repair). After repairing the condition of the wiring. 87D Electric windows sunroof. 4C.sunroof. Is the feed correct? YES NO Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical systems. Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 CONTINUED 5 Check using status ET087 Sunroof/one touch window authorisation that authorisation for the UCH to open the sunroof is ACTIVE . Sunroof motor: Removal .: 44. 87D Electric windows-sunroof.UCH Vdiag No. repair the connector. 48. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 4F. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electric sunroof: Initialisation ). 87B-326 . 4D. contact the Techline . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Ensure continuity on the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 9 Track 7 of connector PE2 of the UCH If the continuity is faulty. Check for + 12 V between tracks 7 and 9 of the sunroof motor connector. use the wiring diagram corresponding to the vehicle to check intermediate connectors R339 and R301.Refitting). AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Sunroof motor: Removal . initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D. After repairing the condition of the wiring.Refitting) and disconnect union R301. If the fault is still present. 87D Electric windows . 100 Ω Max. 4D. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. 100 Ω Max. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 24 CONTINUED 6 Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 3 Sunroof switch black connector track 2 Sunroof switch black connector track 5 Track 4 of the sunroof motor black connector Track 3 of the sunroof motor black connector Track 2 of the sunroof motor black connector If the continuity is faulty. otherwise replace the wiring.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. After repairing the wiring. Control position Closed Tilt position Sliding position 1 Sliding position 2 Sliding position 3 Pressed Tracks 1 and 2 100 Ω Max.UCH Vdiag No. 87B-327 . infinite infinite infinite 100 Ω Max. 100 Ω Max.Refitting). Electric sunroof: Initialisation). repair the connector. infinite infinite 100 Ω Max. 48. Tracks 1 and 3 100 Ω Max. replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric window-sunroof: Removal . 4C. If the continuity and insulation of the following connections is correct. initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 100 Ω Max. 4F. use the wiring diagram corresponding to the vehicle to check the conformity of intermediate connector R339. 100 Ω Max. 100 Ω Max. Tracks 1 and 5 infinite infinite 100 Ω Max. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 25 No sunroof opening position 1. 2 or 3 NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 48. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. Fault finding chart. Tracks 1 and 5 infinite infinite 100 Ω Max. 4F. 100 Ω Max. see 87D Electric windows Sunroof. 100 Ω Max. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles the Mégane II phase 2 bodywork. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 100 Ω Max. 100 Ω Max. UCH_V44_ALP25/UCH_V48_ALP25/UCH_V4C_ALP25/ UCH_V4D_ALP25/UCH_V4F_ALP25/UCH_V50_ALP25 87B-328 . infinite infinite infinite 100 Ω Max. Control position Closed Tilt position Sliding position 1 Sliding position 2 Sliding position 3 Pressed Tracks 1 and 2 100 Ω Max. Does the sunroof operate in at least one of the control positions? YES Disconnect the sunroof switch and check its conformity and correct operation using a multimeter and the table below. infinite infinite 100 Ω Max. Tracks 1 and 3 100 Ω Max. NO See ALP 24. 100 Ω Max. 4C. 100 Ω Max.: 44. use the wiring diagram corresponding to the vehicle to check the conformity of intermediate connector R339. 4D.Refitting). (see MR Mechanical systems. 4C. initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D. otherwise replace the wiring. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the continuity and insulation of the following connections is correct. 87D Electric windows sunroof. Sunroof switch: Removal Refitting). 87B-329 .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 25 CONTINUED Replace the control. repair the connector. Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Is the control correct? YES NO Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 3 Sunroof switch black connector track 2 Sunroof switch black connector track 5 Track 4 of the sunroof motor black connector Track 3 of the sunroof motor black connector Track 2 of the sunroof motor black connector If the continuity is faulty. After repairing the condition of the wiring. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. Electrical wiring repair.: 44. 48. replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric window-sunroof: Removal .UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D Electric sunroof: Initialisation ).sunroof: Removal Refitting). 4C. Non-side opening element mechanisms. Initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D Electric sunroof: Initialisation).Sunroof. Refit the sunroof mobile panel (see MR 365 Bodywork.Refitting). Has the fault been solved? NO Open the sunroof fully (if not possible. see Defect mode and safe mode). YES Clean the mechanism and the rails with an air gun. Does the moving panel slide without meeting a point of resistance? NO Remove the moving sunroof panel (see MR Bodywork.UCH Vdiag No. etc. 4F. see MR 366. UCH_V44_ALP26/UCH_V48_ALP26/UCH_V4C_ALP26/ UCH_V4D_ALP26/UCH_V4F_ALP26/UCH_V50_ALP26 87B-330 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 48.Refitting). Fault finding chart.) are present in the rails. Remove the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical.: 44. Non-side opening element mechanisms. Mobile sunroof panel: Removal Refitting ). 87D Electric windowssunroof. Fault finding. 52A. Are there any foreign bodies in the rails? NO YES End of fault finding. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork . 4D. Visually check that no foreign bodies (sand.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 26 The sunroof is difficult to close or the anti-pinch is triggered without any apparent obstacles NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. YES Replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric windows . Slide the moving panel of the sunroof manually. 52A. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . leaves. Moving sunroof panel: Removal . Sunroof motor: Removal . 87D Electric windows . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Sunroof: Removal Refitting). 4D. 87B-331 . Non-side opening element mechanisms.Refitting ).Refitting). 52A Non-side opening element mechanisms. Non-side opening element mechanisms.Refitting). Sunroof deflector: Removal . linkages and mechanisms (see MR 365 Bodywork.Refitting). 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UCH Vdiag No. Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation ). 4F. Does the anti-pinch still trigger? YES Replace the sunroof (see MR Bodywork. Mobile sunroof panel: Removal . Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). 4C. 48. NO Replace the sunroof deflector (see MR 365 Bodywork.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 26 CONTINUED Manually check that all of the linkages (front and rear) slide correctly. Initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Is the fault still present? YES Is the anti-pinch triggered when the sunroof reaches the deflector? YES Remove the sunroof deflector (see MR Bodywork. Sunroof: Removal . Lubricate the rails. NO End of fault finding. Refit the moving sunroof panel. NO Replace the sunroof (see MR Bodywork.: 44. Non-side opening element mechanisms. Sunroof deflector: Removal . 52A Non-side opening element mechanisms. 52A. Test with the other card. Check that status ET014 Supply level requested is not APC. If not. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ET042 Passenger's door. Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing the card's lock or unlock button. apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. UCH_V44_ALP27/UCH_V48_ALP27/UCH_V4C_ALP27/ UCH_V4D_ALP27/UCH_V4F_ALP27/UCH_V50_ALP27 87B-332 . 4C. flat. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that no opening element is detected as open by the UCH (look at the symbol on the instrument panel). 4F.UCH Vdiag No. apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. contact the Techline. incorrect model). Check the condition of the battery (inserted the wrong way round. If not. – Check that the UCH for the vehicle is not blank. apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. 48. Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing the card's lock or unlock button. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. If not. ET051 Rear left-hand door. check that the external UCH aerial is connected correctly. – The UCH which has just been replaced does not have the correct part number (external or internal UCH aerial). First carry out a function fault finding check. – If the vehicle is a Scenic II fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system. Check that statuses ET041 Opening rear screen.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 27 Fault locking/unlocking tailgate via card button. Move the vehicle to try again.: 44. Check that the UCH on the vehicle has not been used on another vehicle. NOTES Check that there is no after ignition feed or card in the card reader. If not. 4D. If the fault is still present after having carried out a test with the other card: – There may be radiofrequency interference in the area (ET066 Card button press received is NO for both cards). If the fault is still present. Use the correct UCH part number. ET052 Rear left-hand door and ET053 Driver's door are CLOSED . ET050 Tailgate/Boot. 4C. Check the condition of the batteries. If not. NO Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing the card's lock or unlock button. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. First carry out a function fault finding check. 48. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Test with the other card. Check if the direction indicator lights flash once on unlocking and twice on locking. If not. UCH_V44_ALP28/UCH_V48_ALP28/UCH_V4C_ALP28/ UCH_V4D_ALP28/UCH_V4F_ALP28/UCH_V50_ALP28 87B-333 . YES Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Tailgate/Boot. Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Tailgate/Boot. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 4F. If not.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 28 Fault locking/unlocking tailgate via card button NOTES Check that there is no after ignition feed or card in the card reader. apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. : 44. contact the Techline. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked. Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT after pressing the tailgate opening button. UCH_V44_ALP29/UCH_V48_ALP29/UCH_V4C_ALP29/ UCH_V4D_ALP29/UCH_V4F_ALP29/UCH_V50_ALP29 87B-334 . apply the fault finding procedures for this status. 4D. 4F. Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Tailgate/Boot.UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4C.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 29 Opening luggage compartment fault (not hands-free) NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. If the fault is still present. 48. If not. If not. If the fault is still present. Check that status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the rear screen opening button is pressed. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.: 44. 4C. If not. 4F.UCH Vdiag No. 48. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. contact the Techline. If not. 4D. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked. UCH_V44_ALP30/UCH_V48_ALP30/UCH_V4C_ALP30/ UCH_V4D_ALP30/UCH_V4F_ALP30/UCH_V50_ALP30 87B-335 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET041 Opening rear screen. apply the fault finding procedures for this status.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 30 Opening rear screen fault (not hands-free) NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. 48. try locking and unlocking to make sure the lock bolt slides properly. 4F.: 44. repair the connector. 4D. earth present on track 1 and + 12 V on track 3 of the flap lock connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH connector PP2 track 6 UCH connector PP2 track 5 Track 1 of the fuel filler flap lock connector Track 3 of the fuel filler flap lock connector If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. earth present on track 3 and + 12 V on track 1 of the flap lock connector. 4C. The locking/unlocking should function on the driver's door. If correct.UCH Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the fuel filler flap lock connector. otherwise replace the wiring. UCH_V44_ALP31/UCH_V48_ALP31/UCH_V4C_ALP31/ UCH_V4D_ALP31/UCH_V4F_ALP31/UCH_V50_ALP31 87B-336 . Wiring: Precautions for repair).Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 31 Fault locking/unlocking fuel filler flap NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. If the fault is still present. Check for earth on both tracks of the flap lock connector. make sure the flap is properly positioned in relation to the motion of the lock bolt. replace the fuel filler flap lock. contact the Techline. Check while: Locking. If correct. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . With the flap open. Unlocking. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Unless the vehicle has not been unlocked for over 72 hours. Carry out a conformity check before using this procedure. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. If not. If any status fails to change. 48. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. 4D. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. The card may be inhibited: unlock the vehicle by pressing the card button and check to see if the hands-free unlocking fault is still present.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 32 Unlocking fault in hands-free mode NOTES Check that there is no after ignition feed. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. ET056 or ET057 become active when a hand is passed in front of the corresponding sensor. program the cards. Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. First carry out a function fault finding check. Note: One of these statuses becomes active if the vehicle has not been unlocked for 72 hours and the corresponding door handle is pulled. Test on all the doors.: 44.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. pulling the handle activates it. Check that statuses ET055. replace the faulty card. If the unlocking fault in hands-free mode affects all the cards: Check that the optical sensors are receiving power by checking status ET054 Optical sensors supplied. 4F. If the fault only affects one card. apply the fault finding procedure associated with that status. UCH_V44_ALP32/UCH_V48_ALP32/UCH_V4C_ALP32/ UCH_V4D_ALP32/UCH_V4F_ALP32/UCH_V50_ALP32 87B-337 . 4D. 48. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. If not correct.5 m. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side external aerial test AC033 Passenger's side external aerial test The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. 4F. By checking statuses ET058 Driver's side handle lock buttons and ET059 Passenger side handle lock buttons. In the event of a present or stored fault. refer to the procedure for it. Configure the UCH in hands-free function (see Configurations and programming ). but not its recognition. Check that no lock button on the door handle is stuck in the pressed position. 87B-338 . 4C.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 32 CONTINUED Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. If the fault is still present. apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. IMPORTANT This mode allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. Check that one of the cards has not been disabled (locked in the vehicle). The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. program the cards. If the fault is still present.UCH Vdiag No. If not correct. Conduct the tests with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. Configure the UCH in hands-free function (see Configurations and programming ). First carry out a function fault finding check. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. UCH_V44_ALP33/UCH_V48_ALP33/UCH_V4C_ALP33/ UCH_V4D_ALP33/UCH_V4F_ALP33/UCH_V50_ALP33 87B-339 . In the event of a present or stored fault.: 44.5 m. contact the Techline.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 33 Locking fault in hands-free mode NOTES Check that there is no after ignition feed or card in the card reader. This mode allows the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected. but not recognised. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. Visually check that the lock buttons are not stuck in the down position. refer to the procedure for it. 4D. 48. 4C. If the fault only affects one card. activate the + after ignition feed with this card and attempt to unlock again with it. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. ET059 and ET060 indicating a press on the lock button for each door or the luggage compartment become active when the button is pressed. Make sure statuses ET058. replace the faulty card. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. Test all the lock buttons. See the section for dealing with the status(es) concerned. Make sure all the doors are fully closed (check that the interior lights are off or switch on the ignition to check that no door is open from the instrument panel symbol). The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side external aerial test AC033 Passenger's side external aerial test AC034 Luggage compartment external aerial test. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the tailgate is being unlocked. replace the tailgate lock. repair the connector. NO YES Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector.: 44. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. 4D. Vehicle locked . 4F. UCH_V44_ALP34/UCH_V48_ALP34/UCH_V4C_ALP34/ UCH_V4D_ALP34/UCH_V4F_ALP34/UCH_V50_ALP34 87B-340 .UCH Vdiag No. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. when pressing on the opening button. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 34 Fault opening the luggage compartment in hands-free mode NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . When the tailgate unlocking button is pressed. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Electrical wiring repair. If the fault is still present. If correct. if the card is present and recognised. otherwise replace the wiring. contact the Techline. 48. If not. Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT after pressing the tailgate opening button. Test with the other card. 4D. contact the Techline.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 34 CONTINUED 1 Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the fault is still present. reprogram the card(s). This mode allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. 87B-341 . program the cards. If all is correct. Run command AC034 Tailgate external aerial test and check the card coverage zone. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4C. In the event of a present or stored fault. use the fault finding procedure associated with each command. replace them. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.UCH Vdiag No. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration.5 m. If the system still does not work. If not correct. but not its recognition. refer to the procedure for it. The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone.: 44. 48. UCH Vdiag No. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.: 44. when pressing on the opening button. 4D. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Make sure the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Opening rear screen. If the fault is still present. Electrical wiring repair. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 48. 4C. replace the tailgate lock. repair the connector. Electrical wiring repair.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 34 CONTINUED 2 NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 87B-342 . If not. use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wiring: Precautions for repair). Check. 4F. If correct. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT after pressing the tailgate opening button. otherwise replace the wiring. otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. repair the connector. contact the Techline. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If not correct. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. contact the Techline. 4F. NO YES Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. If correct. the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. Repair if necessary. Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If the fault is still present. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 35 Fault opening the rear screen in hands-free mode NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. If not. 4C. Test with the other card. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.: 44. UCH_V44_ALP35/UCH_V48_ALP35/UCH_V4C_ALP35/ UCH_V4D_ALP35/UCH_V4F_ALP35/UCH_V50_ALP35 87B-343 . if the card is present and recognised. replace the rear screen lock.UCH Vdiag No. Check. Repair if necessary. Vehicle locked . when pressing on the opening button. When the rear screen opening button is pressed. 4D. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. contact the Techline.: 44. 4F. 4C. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration.UCH Vdiag No. This mode allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. apply the fault finding procedure for this command. refer to the procedure for it. If the system still does not work. In the event of a present or stored fault. The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. 48. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. 87B-344 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . replace them. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. but not its recognition. If the fault is still present. If all is correct. reprogram the card(s).5 m. Run command AC034 Tailgate external aerial test and check the card coverage zone.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 35 CONTINUED 1 Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. program the cards. If not. contact the Techline. repair the connector. 48. If correct. Check. repair the connector. If not. replace the tailgate lock. 4D. when pressing on the opening button. 4C. use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Make sure the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Opening rear screen. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. Make sure status ET061 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. otherwise replace the wiring. If not correct.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 35 CONTINUED 2 NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.UCH Vdiag No.: 44. Electrical wiring repair. Wiring: Precautions for repair). Electrical wiring repair. otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A. If the fault is still present. 4F. Wiring: Precautions for repair). 87B-345 . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. AC005 Central door unlocking and AC006 Unlocking by driver.UCH Vdiag No. Use commands AC004 Central door locking. 4D. Check whether configuration LC029 Selective unlocking of opening elements is WITH. 4C. If the fault is still present. Reconfigure with command CF036 Selective unlocking of opening elements. 4F. Apply the fault finding procedure associated with these commands.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 36 Fault locking/unlocking one or more doors NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. if necessary. to confirm the fault. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. contact the Techline. UCH_V44_ALP36/UCH_V48_ALP36/UCH_V4C_ALP36/ UCH_V4D_ALP36/UCH_V4F_ALP36/UCH_V50_ALP36 87B-346 . 48. UCH_V44_ALP37/UCH_V48_ALP37/UCH_V4C_ALP37/ UCH_V4D_ALP37/UCH_V4F_ALP37/UCH_V50_ALP37 87B-347 .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 37 Automatic locking when driving operation fault (RAID) NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure the RAID function is active by checking status ET043 RAID function authorised by central door looking . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. Check for faults in the airbag system.: 44. Check for faults in the ABS system. 4F. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. Check the consistency of the vehicle speed signal. contact the Techline. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present. Make sure no door is detected open by the UCH. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. See the procedure for dealing with this status if necessary.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 38 Windows fail to close after two locking requests NOTES Make sure the vehicle is really equipped with a one-touch electric window.UCH Vdiag No. 4C. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. 4D. Make sure status ET087 One-touch electric window authorisation is ACTIVE. 48.: 44. If the fault is still present. UCH_V44_ALP38/UCH_V48_ALP38/UCH_V4C_ALP38/ UCH_V4D_ALP38/UCH_V4F_ALP38/UCH_V50_ALP38 87B-348 . 4F. If not correct. of the relay plate.: 44. of the Protection and Switching Unit (UPC). When the vehicle is unlocked. Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 10 of the PP3 12-track connector of the UCH. Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the UCH and the connectors on the UPC. UCH_V44_ALP39/UCH_V48_ALP39/UCH_V4C_ALP39/ UCH_V4D_ALP39/UCH_V4F_ALP39/UCH_V50_ALP39 87B-349 . repair the connector. check the Start button operation using status ET070 Start button and use the fault finding procedure associated with this status if necessary. or – switching on the hazard warning lights (ET085 Hazard warning lights button). run status fault finding for the faulty component. If correct. If nothing happens. carry out fault finding on the multiplex network and instrument panel. of the Passenger Compartment Fuse and Relay Box. The vehicle should switch to timed power (approximately 20 minutes) after the driver's door is opened (ET053 Driver's door). 4F. the connectors of the + battery housing (Power fuses). use the fault finding procedure for status ET075 + accessories feed present. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A.UCH Vdiag No. If not. of the Passenger Compartment Fuse and Relay Box option. otherwise replace the wiring. If not correct. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. contact the Techline. the instrument panel should light up for a moment. apply ALP No dialogue with the UCH.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated NOTES Check the battery voltage. Check for earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the 12-track connector PP3 of the UCH. 4C. and check the condition of. Wiring: Precautions for repair). If the fault is still present. Begin the fault finding with the ignition off and the vehicle locked. or – switching on the side lights (ET081 Lighting switch position). Electrical wiring repair. Run fault finding on. try by: – pushing the Start button (ET070 Ignition switch). 48. The vehicle goes into accessories feed mode when the Start button is pressed (timed power active). 4D. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . of the power plate (maxi fuses). If the Start button operates correctly. 4D. ET116 Card code received is ACTIVE. Make sure statuses: ET008 Blank central unit is NO. – ET072 Steering column lock is UNLOCKED.: 44. If not deal with ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated first. card in reader. run fault finding on the UPC. Test with the other card.UCH Vdiag No. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If everything is correct. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Check that status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes + after ignition feed after a request for forced after ignition feed. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . starting conditions not met. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz. UCH_V44_ALP40/UCH_V48_ALP40/UCH_V4C_ALP40/ UCH_V4D_ALP40/UCH_V4F_ALP40/UCH_V50_ALP40 87B-350 . 48. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. – ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal is UNLOCKED. Make sure that there is no Insert card message on the instrument panel. ET117 Card code valid is ACTIVE. meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. meaning the card is not recognised. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. It can be checked while trying to activate after ignition feed if the verlog indicator light: – Remains on. Review of the procedure for forcing after ignition feed: + accessories feed off. 4C. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. Make sure the steering column lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – statuses: – ET071 Steering column lock blank is NO. If the fault is still present. followed by a long press (approximately 5 seconds) on the Start button.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 40 Forced after-ignition feed fails NOTES Check the battery voltage. contact the Techline. It can also be checked while trying to start. if the Start button flashes. ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. Make sure the steering column lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO. 4D.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 41 The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails. meaning the card is not recognised. 4C.: 44. First carry out a function fault finding check. If everything is correct. – ET116 Card code received is ACTIVE. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz. Make sure statuses: – ET008 Blank central unit is NO. contact the Techline. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . – If ET116 becomes ACTIVE. 4F. apply the fault finding for DF014 CC. Check that the start-up conditions are met: It can be checked while attempting to start if the immobiliser warning light: – Remains on. If the message "Insert card" is displayed on the instrument panel. run a test with the 2nd vehicle card (if the vehicle only has one card. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If the fault is still present. take a card from another MEGANE II vehicle and try to start the vehicle). Check the following statuses: – ET116 Card code received must be ACTIVE. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes START after a request to start. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary.UCH Vdiag No.0. reallocate the card SC006 Card allocation. meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. UCH_V44_ALP41/UCH_V48_ALP41/UCH_V4C_ALP41/ UCH_V4D_ALP41/UCH_V4F_ALP41/UCH_V50_ALP41 87B-351 . If the message "Insert card" is not displayed on the instrument panel. replace the faulty card. the card has not been detected or recognised. If the fault is still present. – If ET116 remains INACTIVE. card in reader NOTES Check the battery voltage. 48. If not deal with ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated first. If it is inactive. – ET117 Card code valid is ACTIVE. run fault finding on the UPC. it should not be detected by the internal aerials. Switching to +accessories feed should work. but works with card in reader NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. This mode allows of a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected as present. contact the Techline. Check that the start-up conditions are met: Check that the tailgate is detected as closed by the UCH using status ET050 Tailgate/ Boot. refer to the procedure for it. Test with the other card. If not deal with ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated first. check that the external UCH aerial is connected correctly. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. In the event of a present or stored fault. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. If not correct. If not.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 42 The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails in hands-free mode. replace the battery. Run command AC036 Internal aerial test and check the card coverage zone. Check the part number of the UCH and that it is hands-free. When the card is outside the vehicle.UCH Vdiag No. The card my be inhibited or the vehicle has not been unlocked electrically: unlock by pressing the card button and check if the hands-free starting fault is still present. 48. Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the hands-free starting fault affects every card: Make sure the UCH is properly configured for hands-free operation. 4D. 4C. replace the faulty card. If the fault is still present. apply the relevant fault finding procedure for each command. UCH_V44_ALP42/UCH_V48_ALP42/UCH_V4C_ALP42/ UCH_V4D_ALP42/UCH_V4F_ALP42/UCH_V50_ALP42 87B-352 . If the battery is flat or an incorrect model is being used. Reconfigure if necessary. If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system. If the hands-free starting fault affects only one card: Check that the card battery has been inserted the right way round. Carry out the tests with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. but not recognised. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone.: 44. program the cards. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is START if the start-up conditions are met when the start button is pressed. If the fault is still present. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. If everything is correct. run fault finding on the ignition circuit in the Protection and Switching Unit. 4F.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 43 The vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed NOTES Check the battery voltage. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Make sure the start-up conditions are met (no gear engaged). 4C. contact the Techline. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function.: 44. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to check if the injection is still protected (lit continuously). If there is a fault.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. see the procedure for this status. UCH_V44_ALP43/UCH_V48_ALP43/UCH_V4C_ALP43/ UCH_V4D_ALP43/UCH_V4F_ALP43/UCH_V50_ALP43 87B-353 . 48. : 44. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 48. 4F. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. 4D. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (if it remains on).UCH Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present. 4C. UCH_V44_ALP44/UCH_V48_ALP44/UCH_V4C_ALP44/ UCH_V4D_ALP44/UCH_V4F_ALP44/UCH_V50_ALP44 87B-354 .Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 44 The starter briefly runs but the vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed NOTES Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. when the button is pressed. If not. make sure the card is not detected as absent by the UCH. UCH_V44_ALP45/UCH_V48_ALP45/UCH_V4C_ALP45/ UCH_V4D_ALP45/UCH_V4F_ALP45/UCH_V50_ALP45 87B-355 .UCH Vdiag No. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed with the vehicle stationary. Make sure the button presses are detected correctly by the UCH with status ET070 Start button. If not. If there is a fault. run fault finding on the ABS.: 44. Check whether the engine switches off if the Start button is pressed twice. 48. contact the Techline. Check that status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is STOP. If the fault is still present. 4D. see the procedure for dealing with this status. 4C.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 45 Impossible to stop engine NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 4F. If it does. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. see the procedure for this status. particularly by checking the messages on the instrument panel. Remember: With hands-free. the steering locks after the ignition is switched off as soon as the card is removed. With regard to vehicles fitted with UCH computer Vdiag 4F or above: – the Renault card is removed from the card reader when the vehicle is being powered by + forced after ignition. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check for any faults in the Airbag computer (impact detected) and ABS/ESP computers. – more than 20 minutes has elapsed with the card in the reader and the engine off. 4F. – the Renault card is removed from the card reader following a starting failure due to an engaged gear. contact the Techline. In the event of a fault. Check that the steering column lock belongs to the vehicle using status ET248 Steering column lock immobiliser code . The conditions for a drop in + after ignition feed without the steering column locking are: – the card is present in the card reader. 48. It should be between 9 V and 16 V . the steering locks the instant the ignition is switched off. see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering column lock and ET073 Steering column lock signal. Check that these conditions are not present. – power is demanded by the steering column lock too frequently.UCH Vdiag No. 4D. 4C. – a front door is open following a starting failure due to an engaged gear and the card is not in the reader. UCH_V44_ALP46/UCH_V48_ALP46/UCH_V4C_ALP46/ UCH_V4D_ALP46/UCH_V4F_ALP46/UCH_V50_ALP46 87B-356 . If the fault is still present. – the vehicle speed is not zero. – 3 mins have elapsed following a starting failure due to an engaged gear. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed.: 44. Check the battery voltage.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 46 Steering column lock does not lock NOTES Make sure there are no steering lock faults. With the card in the reader. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . g. Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering column lock and ET073 Steering column lock signal. 48. – the card reader does not flash. – there is a message on the instrument panel Column not unlocked or Turn steering wheel + Start. Check that the steering column is not under any mechanical stress (e. UCH_V44_ALP47/UCH_V48_ALP47/UCH_V4C_ALP47/ UCH_V4D_ALP47/UCH_V4F_ALP47/UCH_V50_ALP47 87B-357 . If the steering column is under stress.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 47 Steering column lock does not unlock NOTES – the immobiliser warning light flashes normally.: 44. try to start the vehicle again by lifting the steering column (and pulling the card out of the reader if a message requests this).UCH Vdiag No. contact the Techline. 4F.: wheel(s) jammed against pavement). see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . In the event of a fault. 4C. If the fault is still present. Check that the steering column lock belongs to the vehicle using status ET248 Steering column lock immobiliser code . 4F. UCH_V44_ALP48/UCH_V48_ALP48/UCH_V4C_ALP48/ UCH_V4D_ALP48/UCH_V4F_ALP48/UCH_V50_ALP48 87B-358 . If the fault is still present. Automatic transmission Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. contact the Techline. Manual gearbox Make sure that the clutch pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET048 Clutch pedal position in the UCH is consistent. Particularly by checking that status ET108 Automatic transmission lever position in the UCH is consistent. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Particularly by checking that status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH is consistent. Make sure that the clutch pedal switch is working correctly. 4C. In the event of a fault.: 44.UCH Vdiag No. apply fault finding procedure DF003 Clutch switch circuit. apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. contact the Techline. use the fault finding procedure for status ET005.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 48 Erratic starting NOTES Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 48. If the fault is still present. Particularly by checking that status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH is consistent. In the event of a fault. Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET005 Manual gearbox selector lever position in the Protection and Switching Unit is consistent. In the event of a fault. apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. use fault finding procedure for status ET108. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. In the event of a fault. 4D. Make sure that the gear selector lever is working correctly. In the event of a fault. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Left-hand door mirror track 9 Right-hand door mirror track 7 Left-hand door mirror track 7 Right-hand door mirror track 9 Track 10 door mirror switch Track 1 door mirror switch If the fault is still present. 4C. Check for + 12 V on the mirror switch control. 4F. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check the continuity on the switch between the following tracks: for folding-in: Tracks 5 and 1 Tracks 4 and 10 for folding-out: Tracks 4 and 1 Tracks 5 and 10 Replace the switch if necessary. Check for earth on the switch. 4D. 48. Repair if necessary. UCH_V44_ALP49/UCH_V48_ALP49/UCH_V4C_ALP49/ UCH_V4D_ALP49/UCH_V4F_ALP49/UCH_V50_ALP49 87B-359 . Replace it if necessary. Is there + 12 V? Check the mirror power supply fuse. replace the door mirror(s).UCH Vdiag No.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 49 No folding-in or folding-out of one or more door mirrors NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. UCH Vdiag No. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track A3 Door mirror switch track A1 Door mirror switch track B4 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. 4D. UCH_V44_ALP50/UCH_V48_ALP50/UCH_V4C_ALP50/ UCH_V4D_ALP50/UCH_V4F_ALP50/UCH_V50_ALP50 87B-360 . 48. Replace the switch if necessary. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks A3/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. replace the door mirror(s). Tracks A1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Tracks A3/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Left-hand door mirror. Non-retractable door mirror. Tracks A1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 50 Cannot adjust one of the two door mirrors NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present. 4C.: 44. 4F. Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks B2/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks B1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 50 CONTINUED 1 NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Track 4 of the right-hand door mirror. replace the door mirror(s). Non-retractable door mirror. 4F. Tracks B2/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. 48. Track 3 of the right-hand door mirror. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track B2 Door mirror switch track B1 Door mirror switch track B4 Track 2 of the right-hand door mirror. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4D. If the fault is still present. Right-hand door mirror. Tracks B1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 4C. 87B-361 . Replace the switch if necessary. 87B-362 . 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Replace the switch if necessary. Tracks 7/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward.UCH Vdiag No.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 50 CONTINUED 2 NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. 4D. 4C. Retractable door mirror. Tracks 9/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.: 44. Tracks 9/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Replace the door mirror. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Door mirror switch track 9 Door mirror switch track 3 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 7/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. 48. Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Left-hand door mirror. 87B-363 . Track 3 of the right-hand door mirror. 4C. Tracks 8/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 50 CONTINUED 3 NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. replace the door mirror(s). Tracks 6/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: 44. 4D. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. 48. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 6/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. If the fault is still present. Retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror.UCH Vdiag No. Track 4 of the right-hand door mirror. Tracks 8/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Door mirror switch track 8 Door mirror switch track 6 Track 2 of the right-hand door mirror. Replace the switch if necessary. : 44. 48.Fault Finding Chart 87B ALP 51 + after ignition feed remains blocked NOTES Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. 4F. UCH_V44_ALP51/UCH_V48_ALP51/UCH_V4C_ALP51/ UCH_V4D_ALP51/UCH_V4F_ALP51/UCH_V50_ALP51 87B-364 . NO Apply interpretation of status ET070 Start button. is the status Pressed when the button is pressed? YES Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check status ET070 Start button. 4C. 4D.UCH Vdiag No. 50 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool. 0 87C-1 Edition 3 . hands-free). Dialogys.187C VSC Vdiag No. – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM). paper version. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Renault card in the card reader (keyless vehicle scenario 1. standard. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights are on. – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not present. top of the range. the Passenger Compartment Central Unit (UCH) and the Protection and Switching Unit: – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool). Note: The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are supplied when the dipped headlights are lit. not hands-free and scenario 2.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .: 04 2. SCOPE OF DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Scénic II Function concerned: Keyless vehicles VDIAG No. VSC84 1.Introduction 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION 1. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault Finding Procedures (this document and the technical notes for the injection fitted to the vehicle. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Special tooling required Multimeter Elé 1681 Universal bornier 3. Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is in order.).0 87C-2 Edition 3 . A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart VSC84 1. or they are still present but cannot be diagnosed in the current context). This section features the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters.VSC Vdiag No. – the resistance of the component detected as faulty. If the fault is confirmed when the notes are applied. Faults Faults are displayed as present or stored (they appeared in a certain context and have since disappeared. etc. If a status is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values. Special notes on checking the conformity of the keyless vehicle function The keyless vehicle function conformity check is divided into three parts. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. The statuses and parameters related to these sub-functions are listed with their respective computers. note the faults displayed and apply the Notes section. and the conditions for checking them. and which may correspond to a customer complaint.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . but the customer complaint is still present. the fault is present. – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation. For a present fault. The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when using the diagnostic tool with + after ignition feed activated (without any system components being operated). check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault. the fault should be dealt with as a customer complaint . – press the Start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds). – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation. antitheft and starting. These parts represent the three sub-functions of the keyless vehicle function : door locking system. this step is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display. Therefore. For a stored fault. you should consult the corresponding fault finding page.Introduction 87C Proceed as follows to cut off the + after ignition feed: – disconnect the diagnostic tool. – ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out. wear). Customer complaints . Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. bent pins. apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. Introduction 87C 4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit? no See ALP 1 yes Read faults Faults found no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present no Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log VSC84 1.VSC Vdiag No.0 87C-3 Edition 3 .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. which should be completed during the procedure. – Make sure there is no fault with the clutch switch to prevent unwanted starts. The FAULT FINDING LOG. ● to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .VSC Vdiag No. – Do not smoke. FAULT FINDING LOG NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. IMPORTANT! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG FOR EACH FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE. – Use the appropriate tools. and enables better analysis of the parts removed. – Avoid the use of a booster battery (prohibited with 24 V). It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement.Introduction 87C 5. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. ● for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. You will always be asked for this log: ● when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. 6.0 87C-4 Edition 3 . VSC84 1. : Other documentation Title and/or part number: FD 18 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .: MR Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Door locking List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1/2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool Revision CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint 875 1072 Door locking/unlocking fault Interior lighting faults 1473 Card or remote control fault 881 Indicator light comes on Other Your comments: ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005 009 While driving Sudden fault 010 Gradual deterioration 004 Intermittently Other Your comments: ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of diagnostic manual: Fault finding manual no. Supplier no.page to print or photocopy . Part 2 part no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Door locking ● Page 2/2 Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system Part 1 part no.page to print or photocopy . Parameter name Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments: FD 18 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Part 3 part no. Program no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. Part 5 part no. Part 4 part no. Present Stored Fault name Specification ● Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no. its range can cover the exterior aerials (risk of locking/unlocking impossible but starting possible with the card outside the vehicle).System operation 87C Diagram of the hands-free function 2 3 4 5 : range of the door aerials : range of the boot aerial : range of the interior aerials : range of two aerials that may not be covered if a phase inversion occurs in either one. the vehicle can be locked/ unlocked with the card approximately 2 m or more from the vehicle. If an exterior aerial has a short circuit to earth.DOOR LOCKING 187C SYSTEM Fault finding .0 87C-7 Edition 3 . VSC84 1. the range may double. If an interior aerial has a short circuit to earth. Note: In the event of an aerial earth short-circuit. Using the diagnostic tool.System operation 87C GENERAL OPERATION The keyless vehicle function is divided into three sub-functions: door locking system. – A malfunction of the Protection and Switching Unit can lead to failure of the steering lock. – Airbag system failure blocks the RAID function and the "airbag triggered" signal unlocks the vehicle. injection for the engine immobiliser. DESCRIPTION OF THE SUB-FUNCTIONS Door locking system sub-function This sub-function encompasses everything involved in opening and closing the vehicle opening elements. Starting sub-function This sub-function covers everything used to start the vehicle. The computers concerned are the UCH. Protection and Switching Unit and (if fitted to the vehicle) automatic or sequential gearbox computer. Note: – Locking is impossible if the ignition is on or the card is in the reader. ● The second procedure consists of performing fault finding by function which allows communications to be established with the three (or four) computers of the keyless vehicle function. Note: – A speed signal > 0 mph inhibits engine switch-off. and the steering lock. Protection sub-function This sub-function includes everything used to protect the vehicle from theft. ● The first procedure is by computer fault finding which makes it possible to communicate with just one computer (select the computer concerned). injection.: 04 187C SYSTEM DOOR LOCKING Fault finding . The UCH alone provides this sub-function. The computers concerned are the UCH. antitheft and starting.0 87C-8 Edition 3 . Note: – An airbag system and/or ABS (speed signal) failure inhibits locking of the steering column. VSC84 1.VSC Vdiag No. – Airbag triggering stops the engine. there are two ways of running keyless function fault finding. – The ABS provides the vehicle speed signal for the Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID) function. VSC Vdiag No.0 87C-9 Edition 3 .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .System operation 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION EXCHANGES BETWEEN THE MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION – lock or unlock request UCH – lock status signal Steering column lock – request for after ignition feed – starting conditions met – request to activate starter UCH – after-ignition feed present signal Protection and Switching Unit – engine immobiliser software lock exchange UCH – starting conditions met signal Injection computer UCH – speed signal ABS computer UCH Injection computer – absence or presence of fault Airbag computer – card response Card reader – card present and allocated to vehicle interrogation Card VSC84 1. 0 87C-10 Edition 3 .VSC Vdiag No.System operation 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION TO CONTROL THE DOORS Deadlocking Front left-hand door status switch/lock motor UCH Front right-hand door status switch/lock motor Rear right-hand door status switch/lock motor Rear left-hand door status switch/lock motor Luggage compartment status switch/lock motor open luggage compartment request switch Radio frequency reception aerial Central door locking button Card reader ABS Speed signal Vehicle multiplex network Card Instrument panel AIRBAG Only in the event of a fault Protection and Switching Unit Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . VSC Vdiag No.0 87C-11 Edition 3 .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .System operation 87C Front right-hand door lock button Front right-hand door lock button KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF CONTROLS OR COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION TO CONTROL THE DOORS (HANDS-FREE) Central door locking button Front right-hand door lock button Front right-hand door lock button Front right-hand door lock button Deadlocking Lock motor / front left-hand door status switch Lock motor / front right-hand door status switch Lock motor / rear right-hand door status switch Lock motor / rear left-hand door status switch Lock motor / luggage compartment status switch Front right-hand door aerial Front left-hand door aerial Rear left-hand door aerial Rear right-hand door aerial Luggage compartment aerial Interior aerials UCH Radio aerial Card reader Switch/ optical sensor Switch/ optical sensor Switch/ optical sensor Switch/ optical sensor Open luggage compartment request switch Card ABS Speed signal Vehicle multiplex network Instrument panel AIRBAG Only in the event of a fault Protection and Switching Unit Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1. VSC Vdiag No.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .System operation 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION FOR ANTITHEFT UCH Start button Immobiliser warning light Lock power supply Lock position signal Card reader Card Vehicle multiplex network Steering column lock Switch at rest supply ABS Safety line Speed signal Protection and Switching Unit AIRBAG Instrument panel Only in the event of a fault Injection computer After ignition feed supply Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.0 87C-12 Edition 3 . 0 87C-13 Edition 3 .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .VSC Vdiag No.System operation 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF ANTITHEFT CONTROLS OR COMPONENTS USED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION (HANDS-FREE) UCH Start button Immobiliser warning light Lock power supply Lock position signal Front interior aerial Central interior aerial Hands-free card Rear interior aerial Vehicle multiplex network Steering column lock Switch at rest supply ABS Safety line Speed signal Protection and Switching Unit AIRBAG Instrument panel Only in the event of a fault Injection computer After ignition feed supply Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1. : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .System operation 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION FOR STARTING UCH Brake pedal switch Clutch pedal switch Start button Luggage compartment switch Vehicle multiplex network Automatic or sequential gearbox (if fitted to the vehicle) Gear selector Starter motor After ignition feed supply ABS Speed signal Protection and Switching Unit AIRBAG After ignition feed supply Only in the event of a fault Reverse gear switch (and neutral switch for manual gearbox) Injection Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.VSC Vdiag No.0 87C-14 Edition 3 . be sure to properly enter all configurations to avoid operational inconsistencies.: 04 187C SYSTEM DOOR LOCKING Fault finding .VSC Vdiag No. – reading and writing various system configurations. VSC84 1.0 87C-15 Edition 3 . repair mode provides access to: – special commands. After replacing a computer.System operation 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION REPAIR MODE In the diagnostic tool. because this could be the origin of the fault or customer complaint. IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIR MODE It is essential to check the consistency of system configurations. The presence of the hands-free option can be determined visually by looking for optical sensors on the door handles. steering wheel on the right or left.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . No.0 87C-16 Edition 3 . ALL EXCEPT E84 or E84 ALONE (E84 corresponds to the cabriolet model) CF033 Electric child safety lock CF020 Type of driving style CF017 Vehicle type VSC84 1. Allows the vehicle to lock up after 30 seconds. Whether or not the switch is present can be determined visually on the driver's door. if no opening element has been opened since the vehicle was unlocked. RIGHT or LEFT Depending on the dashboard. CF009 Deadlocking CF036 Selective door opening CF018 Automatic relocking WITH or WITHOUT Customer's choice. WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment.VSC Vdiag No. WITH or WITHOUT WITH depending on country where used. switch off the ignition and wait for a minute. CF010 Configuration Hands-free function Note: WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.Configuration 87C NOTES After configuring the instrument panel. 0 87C-17 Edition 3 . All cards to be allocated to the vehicle must be submitted. Allows the conformity of the card and its allocation to the vehicle to be checked.Specific command table 87C NOTES After configuring the instrument panel. or those already allocated to the vehicle to be reprogrammed. SC004 Configuration UCH programming Note: Allows a blank UCH to be programmed. No. switch off the ignition and wait for a minute. SC006 Card allocation Allows blank cards to be programmed for the vehicle.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.VSC Vdiag No. SC005 Card check SC003 Spare VSC84 1. RIGHT or LEFT Depending on the dashboard. steering wheel on the right or left. The presence of the hands-free option can be determined visually by looking for optical sensors on the door handles. if no opening element has been opened since the vehicle was unlocked. LC003 Deadlocking LC029 Selective opening of opening elements WITH or WITHOUT LC012 Automatic relocking WITH or WITHOUT Customer's choice. LC026 Electric child safety lock LC014 Type of driving style LC011 Vehicle type VSC84 1.0 87C-18 Edition 3 . then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.VSC Vdiag No. switch off the ignition and wait for a minute. Allows the vehicle to lock up after 30 seconds. WITH or WITHOUT WITH depending on country. ALL EXCEPT E84 or E84 ALONE (E84 corresponds to the cabriolet model). Whether or not the switch is present can be determined visually on the driver's door.Specific command table 87C NOTES After configuring the instrument panel. No.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . LC001 Configuration Hands-free function Note: WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. engine off. ignition on.VSC Vdiag No. Test conditions: card in vehicle.0 87C-19 Edition 3 . Access Order 0 Function UCH PR013: ET045: ET066: ET067: ET053: ET042: ET051: ET052: ET061: ET050: ET062: Parameter or Status checked or Action Number of cards programmed Radiofrequency signal received Press card button received Press card button recognised Driver's door Passenger door Rear left-hand door Rear right-hand door Open tailgate request Tailgate Open rear screen request Display and Notes 2 (maximum 4) YES YES YES OPEN or CLOSED OPEN or CLOSED OPEN or CLOSED OPEN or CLOSED PRESENT (button pressed) OPEN or CLOSED PRESENT (button pressed) If there is a fault.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Fault finding VSC84 1.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .VSC Vdiag No.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction.0 87C-20 Edition 3 . Access Order 0 (continued) Function UCH (continued) ET041: ET044: ET089: ET086: ET087: ET068: Parameter or Status checked or Action Opening rear screen Electric door-locking button Button depressed Childproof lock button Button depressed Electric child safety lock One-touch electric window authorisation Most recently locked by Display and Notes OPEN or CLOSED PRESSED PRESSED ACTIVE ACTIVE or INACTIVE CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or AIRBAG or CARD or FAULT FINDING CARD or FAULT FINDING + AFTER IGNITION FEED or ELECTRIC CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING ACTIVE Fault finding ET069: Most recently unlocked by If there is a fault. Test conditions: card in vehicle. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. ET088: ET090: Central locking system activated Deadlocking system inactive ET043: RAID function authorisation by central locking button VCS84 1. engine off. ignition on. engine off. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction.0 87C-21 Edition 3 . Access Order 0 (continued) Function UCH (continued) AC004: AC006: AC005: AC020: AC029: AC025: Parameter or Status checked or Action Central door locking Unlock driver's door Unlock opening elements Central door locking button indicator light Child safety lock indicator light One-touch electric window authorisation Display and Notes The opening elements lock The driver's door unlocks The opening elements unlock The indicator light should come on The indicator light should come on Activates or deactivates pushbutton operation If there is a fault.VSC Vdiag No.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Test conditions: card in vehicle. Fault finding VSC84 1. ignition on. : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Test conditions: card in vehicle.VSC Vdiag No.0 87C-22 Edition 3 .Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. ET054: ET055: YES ACTIVE ET056: ACTIVE ET057: ACTIVE ET058: ACTIVE VSC84 1. Access with hands-free Order 0 Function UCH PR013: ET045: Parameter or Status checked or Action Number of cards programmed Radiofrequency signal received Press on one of the card buttons Press on card button received Press on one of the card buttons Press on card button recognised Press on one of the card buttons Optical sensor supplied Front driver side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor Rear driver side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor Front/rear passenger side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor Locking button on driver's handle Button depressed Display and Notes 2 (maximum 4) YES Fault finding ET066: YES ET067: YES If there is a fault. engine off. ignition on. ignition on. Test conditions: card in vehicle.VSC Vdiag No.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . VSC84 1. engine off.0 87C-23 Edition 3 . see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. Access with hands-free Order 0 (continued) Function UCH (continued) ET059: Parameter or Status checked or Action Locking button on passenger handle Button depressed Luggage compartment locking button on tailgate Driver's door Passenger door Rear left-hand door Rear right-hand door Open tailgate request Tailgate Open rear screen request Opening rear screen Electric door-locking button Button depressed Childproof lock button Button depressed Electric child safety lock One-touch electric window authorisation Display and Notes PRESSED Fault finding ET060: ET053: ET042: ET051: ET052: ET061: ET050: ET062: ET041: ET044: ET089: ET086: ET087: PRESSED OPEN or CLOSED OPEN or CLOSED OPEN or CLOSED OPEN or CLOSED PRESENT (button pressed) OPEN or CLOSED PRESENT (button pressed) OPEN or CLOSED PRESSED PRESSED ACTIVE ACTIVE or INACTIVE If there is a fault. The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the driver's side aerials. Access with hands-free Order 0 (continued) Function UCH (continued) ET068: Parameter or Status checked or Action Most recently locked by Display and Notes HANDS-FREE or CENTRAL LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING HANDS-FREE or CENTRAL LOCKING or AIRBAG or CARD or FAULT FINDING CARD or HANDSFREE or FAULT FINDING + AFTER IGNITION FEED or CENTRAL LOCKING or CARD or HANDSFREE or FAULT FINDING ACTIVE Switches on aerial fault finding (interior and exterior) and reports a fault if one of the aerials fails.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. ignition on.0 Fault finding ET069: Most recently unlocked by ET088: Central locking system activated Deadlocking system inactive ET090: ET043: AC037: RAID function authorisation by central locking button Aerial fault finding If there is a fault. VSC84 1.VSC Vdiag No.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . AC032: Driver's side exterior aerial test 87C-24 Edition 3 . Test conditions: engine stopped. Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. The driver's door unlocks. AC004: AC006: AC005: AC020: AC029: AC025: Central door locking Unlock driver's door Unlock opening elements Central door locking button indicator light Child safety lock indicator light One-touch electric window authorisation VSC84 1.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. Test conditions: card in vehicle.0 87C-25 Edition 3 . ignition on. Access with hands-free Order 0 (continued) Function UCH (continued) AC033: Parameter or Status checked or Action Passenger side exterior aerial test Display and Notes The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the passenger side aerials. The indicator light should come on. The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the luggage compartment aerial. engine off. Allows or blocks one-touch button operation. The indicator light should come on. Fault finding AC034: Luggage compartment exterior aerial test If there is a fault.VSC Vdiag No. The opening elements unlock. The opening elements lock. : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . The card reader light flashes as soon as a hands-free card is detected within range of the luggage compartment aerial.0 87C-26 Edition 3 . Test conditions: card in vehicle.VSC Vdiag No.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Protection Order 0 Function UCH Parameter or Status checked or Action ET008: ET046: ET070: ET116: ET117: ET045: ET071: ET072: ET073: PR008: PR013: AC037: blank UCH Engine immobiliser Ignition switch pressed Card code received Valid card code RF signal received Unprogrammed steering lock Steering lock Steering lock sensor signal Vehicle speed Number of cards programmed Transmitter aerial fault finding NO UNLOCKED UNLOCKED 0 mph 2 (maximum 4) Switches on aerial fault finding (interior and exterior) and reports a fault if one of the aerials fails. engine off. ignition on. Display and Notes NO INACTIVE PRESSED Fault finding AC036: Interior aerial test VSC84 1. If there is a fault. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . The switch should light up.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. ignition on. The card reader should light up. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. Protection Order 0 (continued) Function UCH AC003: AC026: AC024: 1 Protection and Switching Unit S3000/ EDC16 injection ET008: Parameter or Status checked or Action Immobiliser warning light Starter switch light Card reader Starting authorised Display and Notes The warning light should come on. Fault finding 2 ET006: ET003: ET077: Code programmed Engine immobiliser Impact detected Starting Engine immobiliser Code programmed Battery voltage YES INACTIVE NO AUTHORISED INACTIVE YES > 11 volts DDCR Injection ET076: ET003: ET006: PR074: VSC84 1. engine off. Test conditions: card in vehicle.0 87C-27 Edition 3 . YES If there is a fault.VSC Vdiag No. : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.VSC Vdiag No. ET091: Engine running ET093: Engine stalled 2 Injection S3000 ET076: ET048: PR071: Starting Actuator relay control Computer feed voltage 87C-28 Edition 3 .Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. engine off. Test conditions: card in vehicle. Starting Order 0 (continued) Function Protection and Switching Unit ET003: ET005: ET008: 1 UCH ET075: ET110: Parameter or Status checked or Action After ignition relay power Manual gearbox selector lever Authorisation to start + accessories feed present UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit Automatic transmission selector position Brake pedal position: Pedal depressed Clutch pedal position: Pedal depressed Engine stopped Engine started Display and Notes PRESENT NEUTRAL YES YES INACTIVE (STARTING or request for starting) PARK or NEUTRAL DEPRESSED DEPRESSED YES NO (YES with starter on) NO (YES engine running) NO (YES if engine stalled) AUTHORISE D ACTIVE > 11 V VSC84 1.0 Fault finding ET108: ET047: ET048: ET092: ET094: If there is a fault. ignition on. ignition on.Conformity check (hands-free) 87C KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. engine off.VSC Vdiag No. see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned. Fault finding VSC84 1.0 87C-29 Edition 3 . Starting Order 2 (continued) Function Injection EDC16 ET001: ET076: ET038: Injection DDCR ET001: ET076: ET038: PR074: Parameter or Status checked or Action Computer + after ignition feed Starting Engine Computer + after ignition feed Starting Engine Battery voltage Display and Notes PRESENT AUTHORISED STOPPED PRESENT AUTHORISED STOPPED > 11 V If there is a fault.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Test conditions: card in vehicle. VSC Vdiag No.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . No faults must be present. Hands-free features: When a card is left in the vehicle. OPENING ELEMENT LOCKING SYSTEM FAULTS NOTED LOCKING/UNLOCKING FAULT WHEN PRESSING BUTTON ON CARD LOCKING/UNLOCKING LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FAULT WHEN PRESSING BUTTON ON CARD OPENING LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE) ALP 1 ALP 2 ALP 3 OPENING REAR SCREEN FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE) ALP 4 LOCKING/UNLOCKING FUEL FILLER FLAP FAULT ALP 5 UNLOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE ALP 6 LOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE ALP 7 FAULT OPENING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT IN HANDS-FREE MODE ALP 8 FAULT OPENING THE REAR SCREEN IN HANDS-FREE MODE ALP 9 FAULT LOCKING/UNLOCKING ONE OR MORE DOORS ALP 10 FAULT WITH RAID FUNCTION ALP 11 WINDOWS FAIL TO CLOSE AFTER TWO ATTEMPTS TO LOCK ALP 12 VSC84 1. otherwise.0 87C-30 Edition 3 . deal with them before starting this procedure.Customer complaints 87C NOTES Check the battery voltage. Test the multiplex network. its hands-free operation is blocked. Activate after ignition feed with the card to restore it. Test the multiplex network. ANTITHEFT AND STARTING FAULTS NOTED NO + ACCESSORIES FEED ALP 13 FORCED AFTER-IGNITION FEED FAILS THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS. No faults must be present.Customer complaints 87C NOTES Check the battery voltage. CARD IN READER THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS IN HANDSFREE MODE.VSC Vdiag No. its hands-free operation is blocked.0 87C-31 Edition 3 .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . deal with them before starting this procedure. Hands-free features: When a card is left in the vehicle. otherwise. Activate after ignition feed with the card to restore it. BUT WORKS WITH CARD IN READER THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED THE STARTER BRIEFLY RUNS BUT THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED IMPOSSIBLE TO SHUT OFF ENGINE ALP 14 ALP 15 ALP 16 ALP 17 ALP 12 ALP 19 STEERING COLUMN LOCK FAILS ALP 20 STARTING ERRATIC ALP 21 VSC84 1. Test with another card. apply the fault finding procedures for those commands.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing on the card's lock or unlock button.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 1 Locking/unlocking fault when pressing button on card NOTES Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. If not. VSC84 1.VSC Vdiag No. If not.0 87C-32 Edition 3 . If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. Check the condition of the batteries. First carry out a function fault finding check. Run commands AC004 Lock opening elements and AC005 Unlock opening elements to find out if the locks work and the UCH can control them. If the fault is still present.VSC Vdiag No. VSC84 1. contact the Techline. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate. No Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing on the card's lock or unlock button. apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the condition of the batteries. Check if the direction indicator lights flash once on unlocking and twice on locking.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . If not. First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 2 Locking/unlocking luggage compartment fault when pressing button on card NOTES Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. If not.0 87C-33 Edition 3 . Yes See ALP 3 (non-hands-free model) or 8 (hands-free model). Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed.VSC Vdiag No. VSC84 1. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked. If the fault is still present.0 87C-34 Edition 3 . Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .Fault finding chart Luggage compartment opening fault (Not hands-free) 87C ALP 3 NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. If not. contact the Techline. If not. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. 0 87C-35 Edition 3 . VSC84 1. contact the Techline. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked. If not. Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the rear screen opening button is pressed. (Not hands-free) 87C ALP 4 NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. If not. Make sure the rear screen is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET041 Opening rear screen. If the fault is still present. apply the fault finding procedures for this status.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .Fault finding chart Rear screen opening fault. apply the fault finding procedures for this status.VSC Vdiag No. Check the condition and connection of the fuel filler flap lock connector. contact the Techline. The locking/unlocking should function on the driver's door. Track 1 of the fuel filler flap lock connector Track 3 of the fuel filler flap lock connector VSC84 1. With the flap open. If okay.0 87C-36 Edition 3 . make sure the flap is properly positioned in relation to the motion of the lock bolt. Check for the earth on both tracks of the flap lock connector.VSC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. If okay.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . try locking and unlocking to make sure the lock bolt slides properly. Check while: Locking. If the fault is still present. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH connector PP2 track 6 UCH connector PP2 track 5 Repair if necessary.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 5 Fuel filler flap locking/unlocking fault NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. replace the fuel filler flap lock. earth present on track 3 and + 12 V on track 1 of the flap lock connector. earth present on track 1 and + 12 V on track 3 of the flap lock connector. Unlocking. Note: One of these statuses becomes active if the vehicle has not been opened for 72 hours and the corresponding door handle is pulled! Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check .VSC Vdiag No. apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. If any status fails to change. First carry out a function fault finding check. If not. Check that statuses ET055. activate after ignition feed with the card and try unlocking again with the card. ET056 or ET057 become active when a hand is passed in front of the corresponding sensor. In the event of a present or stored fault. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side exterior aerial test AC033 Passenger's side exterior aerial test The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. contact the Techline.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 6 Unlocking fault in hands-free mode NOTES Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader.0 87C-37 Edition 3 .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . apply the fault finding procedure associated with that status. Carry out a conformity check before using this procedure. refer to the procedure for it. If not correct. program them. Make sure the optical sensors are receiving power by checking status ET054 Optical sensors supplied. Make sure one of the cards is not blocked (locked in the vehicle). Unless the vehicle has not been opened for over 72 hours. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. Test on all the doors. but not its recognition. VSC84 1. pulling the handle wakes it up. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. If the fault is still present. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card.5 m. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. Make sure all the doors are fully closed (check that the interior lights are off or switch on the ignition to check that no door is open from the instrument panel symbol). contact the Techline. If not correct.5 m. Make sure one of the cards is not blocked (locked in the vehicle). Test all the lock buttons. In the event of a present or stored fault. program them. but not its recognition. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side exterior aerial test AC033 Passenger's side exterior aerial test AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone.0 87C-38 Edition 3 . Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check .VSC Vdiag No. Visually check that the lock buttons are not stuck in the pressed position. If the fault is still present. refer to the procedure for it. activate after ignition feed with the card and try unlocking again with the card. ET059 and ET060 indicating a press on the locking button for each door or the luggage compartment become active when the button is pressed. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 7 Locking fault in hands-free mode NOTES Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. Make sure statuses ET058. See the section for dealing with the status(es) concerned. apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. VSC84 1. Test with another card.5 m. refer to the procedure for it. reprogram the card(s). program them. when pressing on the opening button. VSC84 1. Vehicle locked . The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. If the fault is still present. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. contact the Techline. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. use the fault finding procedure associated with each command. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. If the fault is still present.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. When the tailgate opening button is pressed. No Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. but not its recognition. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. Run command AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. If the system still does not work. replace them. If correct. If everything is okay. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. contact the Techline.VSC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Yes Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. In the event of a present or stored fault. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. Check.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 8 Fault opening the luggage compartment in hands-free mode NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. if the card is present and recognised. If not correct. If not. replace the tailgate lock.0 87C-39 Edition 3 . : 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . If not. Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Opening rear screen. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector.VSC Vdiag No. use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. Vehicle unlocked. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. VSC84 1. If not correct.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 8 CONTINUED NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check.0 87C-40 Edition 3 . replace the tailgate lock. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. Check. If correct. when pressing on the opening button. contact the Techline. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. contact the Techline. If okay. Check. Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. reprogram the card(s). If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. Run command AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. contact the Techline. VSC84 1. but not its recognition. the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone.5 m. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. replace the rear screen lock. use the relevant fault finding procedure. Yes Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. If not. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. use the fault finding procedure for this command. Repair if necessary. refer to the procedure for it. program them. if the card is present and recognised. If everything is okay.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Test with another card. Vehicle locked .VSC Vdiag No. If the fault is still present. No Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. If the system still does not work. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1. when pressing on the opening button.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 9 Fault opening the rear screen in hands-free mode NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check.0 87C-41 Edition 3 . If not. replace them. When the rear screen opening button is pressed. In the event of a present or stored fault. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Make sure status ET062 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed.VSC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. when pressing on the opening button. VSC84 1. Check. If not. for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. replace the rear screen lock.0 87C-42 Edition 3 . apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Vehicle unlocked. If the fault is still present. If not. apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If okay. Repair if necessary.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 9 CONTINUED NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. contact the Techline. Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Opening rear screen. Apply the fault finding procedure associated with these commands. If the fault is still present.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Check whether configuration LC029 Selective opening element opening is WITH. to confirm the fault.0 87C-43 Edition 3 . Use commands AC004 Central door locking.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 10 Fault locking/unlocking one or more doors NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. if necessary. AC005 Central door unlocking and AC006 Unlocking by driver. Reconfigure with command CF036 Selective opening element opening.VSC Vdiag No. VSC84 1. contact the Techline. Check the validity of the vehicle speed signal.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 11 Fault with RAID function NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. Check for faults in the ABS system. Check for faults in the airbag system. If the fault is still present.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Make sure no door is considered open by the UCH.0 87C-44 Edition 3 . contact the Techline.VSC Vdiag No. VSC84 1. Make sure the RAID function is active by checking status ET043 RAID function authorised by central door looking . Fault finding chart 87C ALP 12 Windows fail to close after two attempts to lock NOTES Make sure the vehicle is really equipped with a one-touch electric window.0 87C-45 Edition 3 . If the fault is still present.VSC Vdiag No. VSC84 1. Make sure status ET087 One-touch electric window authorisation is ACTIVE. See the treatment for this status if necessary.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . contact the Techline. If okay. the instrument panel should light up for a moment. run fault finding on the faulty component's status. try by: – pushing the Start button (ET070 Ignition switch ).VSC Vdiag No. If not.0 87C-46 Edition 3 . If nothing happens. apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network and instrument panel. The vehicle should switch to timed power (approximately 20 minutes ) after the driver's door is opened ( ET053 Driver's door). use ALP "No dialogue with UCH" in the UCH section. or – switching on the hazard warning lights (ET085 Hazard warning lights button).Fault finding chart 87C ALP 13 No + accessories feed NOTES Check the battery voltage. contact the Techline. use the fault finding procedure for status ET075 + accessories feed present. VSC84 1. When the vehicle is unlocked.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . If not okay. If the Start button works properly. Begin the fault finding with the ignition off and the vehicle locked. check Start button operation with status ET070 Ignition switch and apply the fault finding procedure associated with this status if necessary. If not okay. The vehicle goes into accessories feed mode when the Start button is pressed (timed power active). or – switching on the side lights (ET081 Lighting switch position). If the fault is still present. starting conditions not met. Make sure the steering column lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO. If the fault is still present. It can be checked while trying to activate after ignition feed if the verlog indicator light: – remains on. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. first use ALP 13. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. followed by a long (approximately 5 seconds) press on the Start button. card in reader. Test with another card. VSC84 1. meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes + after ignition feed after a request for forced after ignition feed.0 87C-47 Edition 3 . run Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. Make sure statuses: ET008 Blank central unit is NO.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 14 Forced after-ignition feed fails NOTES Check the battery voltage. meaning the card is not recognised. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . If not. contact the Techline. Review of the procedure for forcing after ignition feed: + accessories feed off. Switching to + accessories feed should work. ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz. Make sure there is no "Insert card" message on the instrument panel. ET011 Blank card is PROGRAMMED.VSC Vdiag No. If everything is okay. ET012 Card allocated is YES. meaning the card is not recognised. reallocate the cards SC006 Card allocation.CC. contact the Techline. ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. – If the fault is still present. – If INACTIVE. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz. If the message "Insert card" appears on the instrument panel. – If ET116 remains INACTIVE. run Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. If the message "Insert card" is not displayed on the instrument panel. replace the faulty card. meaning that the steering lock is not recognised.0 87C-48 Edition 3 . Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes START after a request to start. – If ET116 becomes ACTIVE. if the Start button flashes. apply ALP 13 UCH first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: It can be checked while attempting to start if the immobiliser warning light: – Remains on.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .VSC Vdiag No. If not. VSC84 1. If the fault is still present. take a card from another SCENIC II vehicle and try to start the vehicle).Fault finding chart 87C ALP 15 The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails. card in reader NOTES Check the battery voltage. Make sure statuses: – ET008 Blank central unit is NO. Switching to + accessories feed should work. It can also be checked while trying to start. Make sure the steering lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO. check the following statuses: – ET116 Card code received must be ACTIVE.0. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. run a test with the second vehicle card (if the vehicle had only one card. First carry out a function fault finding check. – ET012 Card allocated is YES. apply the fault finding procedure for DF014 . the card has not been detected or recognised. – ET011 Card blank is PROGRAMMED. If everything is okay. contact the Techline. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check . If not okay. program them.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 16 The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails in hands-free mode. When the card is outside the vehicle. apply ALP 13 first. but not its recognition. Run command AC036 Interior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. Make sure the UCH is properly configured for hands-free operation. If not. In the event of a present or stored fault. Test with another card. but works with card in reader NOTES First carry out a function fault finding check. Check that the start-up conditions are met: Make sure the luggage compartment is considered closed by the UCH with status ET050 Tailgate. If the fault is still present. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. Switching to + accessories feed should work. use the relevant fault finding procedure for each command. VSC84 1. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card. refer to the procedure for it.0 87C-49 Edition 3 .VSC Vdiag No. Reconfigure if necessary.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . Conduct the tests with the other cards associated with the vehicle. it should not be detected by the interior aerials. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration. see the procedure for this status. Make sure the start-up conditions are met (no gear engaged). run fault finding on the ignition circuit in the Protection and Switching Unit.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 17 Vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed NOTES Check the battery voltage.VSC Vdiag No. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. If the fault is still present. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (if it remains on). If everything is okay.0 87C-50 Edition 3 . If there is a fault.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . contact the Techline. VSC84 1. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is START if the start-up conditions are met when the button is pressed. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. VSC84 1. contact the Techline. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (if it remains on).: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding .0 87C-51 Edition 3 . If the fault is still present.VSC Vdiag No.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 18 The starter briefly runs but the vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed NOTES Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. If the fault is still present. make sure the card is not considered absent by the UCH. If there is a fault. Make sure the button presses are properly perceived by the UCH with status ET070 Ignition switch. see the procedure for this status. If not. If not. contact the Techline.VSC Vdiag No. particularly by checking for messages on the instrument panel. See whether the engine shuts off if the Start button is pressed twice. If it does.0 87C-52 Edition 3 . Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is STOP after when the button is pressed.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 19 Impossible to stop engine NOTES Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed with the vehicle at rest. run fault finding on the ABS.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . VSC84 1. see the treatment for this status. the steering locks the instant the ignition is switched off.0 87C-53 Edition 3 . It should be between 9 V and 16 V .: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . the steering locks after the ignition is switched off as soon as the card is removed. see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. contact the Techline. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed. With card in reader.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 20 Steering lock fails NOTES Make sure there are no steering lock faults. Make sure there are no airbag computer faults. If the fault is still present. Remember: With hands-free. VSC84 1. Check the battery voltage. In the event of a fault.VSC Vdiag No. Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering lock and ET073 Steering lock signal. Make sure the clutch pedal switch works properly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH. apply fault finding procedure DF003 Clutch switch circuit. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET005 Manual gearbox gear lever position in the Protection and Switching Unit. use fault finding procedure for status ET108. In the event of a fault. In the event of a fault.Fault finding chart 87C ALP 21 Starting erratic NOTES Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET048 Clutch pedal position in the UCH. apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. Make sure that the gear selector lever is working correctly. VSC84 1.VSC Vdiag No. Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Manual gearbox Make sure the clutch pedal switch works properly.0 87C-54 Edition 3 . In the event of a fault. Automatic transmission Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking the validity of status ET108 Automatic transmission lever position in the UCH. apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. If the fault is still present. use fault finding procedure for status ET005. contact the Techline. In the event of a fault. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH.: 04 DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding . contact the Techline. In the event of a fault. If the fault is still present. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Essential special tooling Multimeter Universal terminal unit Elé.: 0000 VDIAG No. proceed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool. – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds). PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool). not hands-free and scenario 2.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY 187F SENSOR Fault finding . – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled. 1681 3. To cut off + after ignition. Proceed as follows: – Renault card on the card holder (keyless vehicle scenario 1.Vdiag No.1. paper. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM).: 04 2. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting) and the dipped headlights are on. hands-free). Note: The left-hand and right-hand Xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit.0 87F-1 . – Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document describes the fault-finding applicable to all Electronic Central Units with the following characteristics: Vehicle(s): Scénic II Function concerned: Parking aid Name of computer: AAP Program no. REMINDERS Procedure To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers. basic. AAP X84 . paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting). top of the range.Introduction 87F 1. – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. you should consult the corresponding fault finding page.Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct. A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault. the fault is present. For a present fault. AAP X84 . wear). or whether they remain but are not diagnosed within the current context). – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation. – the resistance of the faulty component.Introduction 87F Faults Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since. apply the method described in the Interpretation of faults section. but the customer complaint persists. – Checks that the system operates correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. If a state is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values. Deal with the fault. note the faults displayed and apply the Notes section.).1.Vdiag No. This phase therefore allows: – Fault finding on faults which are not displayed but which may correspond to a customer complaint.0 87F-2 . – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied. Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . Customer complaints . For a stored fault . This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). If the fault is not confirmed. etc. bent pins. the problem should be dealt with according to the customer complaint. yes Read faults no Faults present Conformity check yes Deal with faults found The symptom persists no Problem solved Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts 5 no The symptom persists Problem solved The symptom persists no Problem solved yes Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log AAP X84 .0 87F-3 .Vdiag No.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .Introduction 87F 4.1. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses Print the system fault finding log (available in CLIP or in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Notes) Connect CLIP Dialogue with the ECU? no See CHART 1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires obeying safety rules to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. – Use the proper tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG. IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS DONE. 6.Vdiag No. AAP X84 . ● For certification requests when replacing parts that must be certified.0 87F-4 . which should be completed during the fault finding procedure. It is an essential item when discussing the fault with the constructor. It is therefore used to decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the removed parts. FAULT FINDING LOG 87F WARNING: WARNING All problems involving a complex system call for thorough diagnostics with the appropriate tools. ● Which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. You will always be asked for this report: ● When requesting technical assistance from the Techline.1. ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out.Introduction 5.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .FAULT FINDING LOG System: Parking aid List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1 / 2 Administrative identification Date Sheet completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool Version CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint 1198 No sound signal 1198 Constant sound signal 1198 The system does not detect obstacles Other Your comments ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 011 009 When switched on Sudden breakdown 005 999 While driving When reverse gear is engaged 004 Intermittently Other Your comments ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure Type of fault finding manual: Fault Finding Manual No.: Other documentation Title and/or part no.: Workshop Repair Manual Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: FD 24 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Supplier no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Parking aid ● Page 2 / 2 Identification of the computer and system parts replaced Part 1 part no. Program no.page to print or photocopy . Part 3 part no. Present Stored Fault title Specification ● Conditions when fault occurs State or parameter no. Part 2 part no. Part 4 part no. Name of parameter Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments FD 24 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Part 5 part no.page to print or photocopy . : 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .0 87F-7 . The audible warning is activated when the car is 150 cm from the obstacle. The function can be turned on again by a second brief press (the red light on the switch goes out) or by turning the ignition off and back on. the frequency of the warning signal increases. DEACTIVATING THE SYSTEM The parking aid system can be deactivated in two ways: – Temporary deactivation: a brief press (one second) on the parking aid switch on the instrument panel deactivates the system (the red light on the switch comes on). detecting. The sensors operate over a distance range from 20 . suspended or off) with status ET003 "Parking aid function" (see conformity check or status interpretation). a computer and a buzzer. – The system can only be activated with + after ignition feed. The function can be turned on again only by a second long press (the red light on the switch goes out). As the distance diminishes.1. the warning signal becomes steady. The system assists the driver during parking maneouvres by warning of any obstacles behind the car.Vdiag No. Activation is signalled by a brief 0. Note: The status screen of the fault-finding tool can be used to determine the state of the system (ready. When the distance reaches 20 . – The system only works when the vehicle is in reverse gear. Fault finding A low 5-second audible signal informs the driver that a system fault has occurred when the ignition is switched on. – Permanent deactivation: the parking aid system can be deactivated for a longer time with a long press (about three seconds) on the parking aid switch on the instrument panel (the red light on the switch comes on).System operation 87F FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The system consists of four sensors mounted in the rear bumper.5-second ON tone. – The sensors and the computer calculate the distance between the car and any obstacles. – The driver is informed of the distances by a buzzer. AAP X84 .30 cm.30 cm minimum to 150 cm maximum. Vdiag No.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .1.0 87F-8 . AAP X84 .Track allocation 87F Computer track 1 2 3 4 Description + 12 volts after ignition + 12 volts alarm Computer EARTH Reverse-gear signal (+ 12 volts) Destination track Track 11 of the Protection and Communication Unit PPH2 connector Track 2 of the parking aid alarm Track 9 of the Protection and Communication Unit PPH2 connector Track B2 of the parking aid switch Track 1 of the parking aid alarm 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Indicator light control Alarm earth Diagnostic line K + 12 volts proximity sensors Proximity sensors earth Track 7 of the diagnostic socket Track 1 of the 4 proximity sensors Track 3 of the 4 proximity sensors Parking-aid switch on/off signal Right-hand inner sensor signal Left-hand inner sensor signal Left-hand outer sensor signal Right-hand inner sensor signal Track B1 of the parking aid switch Track 2 of the inner right sensor Track 2 of the inner left sensor Track 2 of the outer left sensor Track 2 of the outer right sensor Note: The computer and alarm are located on the left side of the luggage compartment behind the interior lining. AAP X84 . There are five selections: – NONE – LOW – MEDIUM – LOUD – MAXIMUM Configuration "CF006 TONE SETTING)" is used to adjust the tone of the buzzer. the 3-second timer prevents the activation tone from sounding every time the driver switches from Park to Drive. Two types of vehicle can be programmed: – J84 / R84 TA: Short and long Scénic II with automatic transmission.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . read configuration service). The configuration adapts the sensors' detection field to the type of body. In fact. Following computer configuration. – J84 / R84 BVM: Short and long Scénic II with manual transmission. the volume and tone of the buzzer can be adjusted (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu. the configuration has to be confirmed by reading configuration "LC005 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION" (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu. configuration service). The type of gearbox associated with the body type (automatic or manual transmission) determines the timing of the parking aid coming on.Vdiag No. SETTING OPTIONS At the customer's request.1. the parking aid coming on is indicated by a brief 5-second activation tone (vehicle is in reverse gear). the configuration has to be confirmed by reading configurations "LC001 BUZZER VOLUME" and "LC006 TONE SETTING" (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu. configuration service). Configuration "CF001 BUZZER VOLUME)" is used to adjust the volume. There are three selections: – 800 Hz – 1000 Hz – 2000 Hz (high-pitch) After the computer has been configured. In vehicles with automatic transmission. read configuration service).Configuration and programming 87F CONFIGURATION AFTER REPLACING THE COMPUTER Following a computer replacement. the parking aid computer has to be reconfigured to inform it of the body type with configuration " CF005 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION" (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu.0 87F-9 . 0 87F-10 .1.Vdiag No.Summary table of faults 87F DTC 90 01 90 02 90 04 90 03 Fault names DF002 OUTER LEFT SENSOR DF003 INNER LEFT SENSOR DF004 OUTER RIGHT SENSOR DF005 INNER RIGHT SENSOR DF006 BUZZER DF007 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY DF008 COMPUTER FAULT DF012 PARKING AID SWITCH LIGHT 90 06 90 07 90 05 90 10 AAP X84 .: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . 1.Interpretation of faults 87F DF002 PRESENT OR STORED LEFT-HAND OUTER SENSOR CC. Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. measure resistances inside the computer: The computer resistance between track 15 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 k Ω. If the above check fails to solve the problem. NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off. AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. remove the rear bumper and disconnect the outer left proximity sensor's 3-track connector.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1. Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off.DEF: Internal electronic fault. Replace the connector if necessary.0 87F-11 . Replace the sensor if the resistance is not 98 k Ω ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks. With the 16-track connector disconnected. The computer resistance between track 15 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. With the ignition off. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Left-hand outer sensor Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 If the above checks fail to solve the problem. replace the outer left proximity sensor. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Track 9 Track 15 Track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. AAP X84 . see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function". If the readings do not match the above values. Check the condition of the sensor connector.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . contact your Techline.Vdiag No. – Deal with any other possible faults. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). If the readings do not match the above values. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not 98 k Ω ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. replace the inner left proximity sensor.DEF: Internal electronic fault. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Track 9 track 14 track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). contact your Techline. If the above check fails to solve the problem. With the 16-track connector disconnected.Interpretation of faults 87F DF003 PRESENT OR STORED LEFT-HAND INNER SENSOR CC.0 87F-12 . disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. Left-hand inner sensor Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 If the above checks fail to solve the problem. AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. – Deal with any other possible faults.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . With the ignition off. or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks. AAP X84 . Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO. NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off. remove the rear bumper and disconnect the inner left proximity sensor's 3-track connector. measure resistances inside the computer: The computer resistance between track 14 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 k Ω. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth).0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1. see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function".Vdiag No.1. Replace the connector if necessary. The computer resistance between track 14 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Replace the connector if necessary. see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function". – Follow the instructions to confirm repair.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1. NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off.1.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO. measure resistances inside the computer: The computer resistance between track 16 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 k Ω. If the above check fails to solve the problem.Interpretation of faults 87F DF004 PRESENT OR STORED RIGHT-HAND OUTER SENSOR CC. AAP X84 . AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. The computer resistance between track 16 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. replace the outer right proximity sensor. or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks. If the readings do not match the above values.0 87F-13 . With the 16-track connector disconnected. – Deal with any other possible faults. Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). With the ignition off.DEF: Internal electronic fault. Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector.Vdiag No. remove the rear bumper and disconnect the outer right proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Right-hand outer sensor Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 If the above checks fail to solve the problem. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. contact your Techline.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Track 9 Track 16 Track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not 98 k Ω ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. – Deal with any other possible faults. With the 16-track connector disconnected. Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). remove the rear bumper and disconnect the inner right proximity sensor's 3-track connector. If the above check fails to solve the problem. Right-hand inner sensor Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 If the above checks fail to solve the problem. Replace the connector if necessary. contact your Techline.DEF: Internal electronic fault.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .0 87F-14 .1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Track 9 Track 13 Track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).Interpretation of faults 87F DF005 PRESENT OR STORED RIGHT-HAND INNER SENSOR CC. If the readings do not match the above values. see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function". With the ignition off. AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. measure resistances inside the computer: The computer resistance between track 13 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 k Ω. replace the inner right proximity sensor.Vdiag No. NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off. Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. The computer resistance between track 13 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. AAP X84 . Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off. Check the condition of the sensor connector. or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not 98 k Ω ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize).0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair.1. Vdiag No.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO. If the above checks fail to solve the problem. The computer should have a resistance of 314 Ω. With the 16-track connector disconnected. contact your Techline .Interpretation of faults 87F DF006 PRESENT OR STORED BUZZER CC. Measure the resistance of the buzzer between track 1 and track 2 . With the ignition off.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off. If the reading does not match the above values. AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. Replace the connector if necessary. or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks. disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation.0 87F-15 . – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. replace the buzzer. NOTES Special notes: This fault is indicated by the absence of a 1-second signal from the buzzer when shifting into reverse. Check the connection and condition of the connector on the buzzer. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 . continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Buzzer Track 2 Track 2 Track 6 Track 1 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).1. measure the resistance inside the computer between track 2 and track 6 . Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω. see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function". remove the rear bumper to access the sensors.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . If the sensor power supply tests okay (no short circuit). – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Turn on the ignition and disconnect the sensors. one at a time. NOTES Special notes: The sensors receive a 12-volt power supply directly from the computer.0 : Short circuit to earth Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault appears as present or stored again after: – clearing the fault.Interpretation of faults 87F DF007 PRESENT OR STORED SUPPLY VOLTAGE SENSORS CC. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer connector Track 9 Track 10 Repair if necessary. reconnect the computer connector and four sensor connectors. If there is not a 12-V power supply between the tracks specified above. The power reading between track 9 (+ 12 V) and track 10 (earth) should be the same as the battery voltage ( ± 0.5 V).Vdiag No. measure the sensor power supply coming from the computer. and shifting into reverse. switching the ignition off and on. contact your Techline. Replace the faulty sensor. If the fault persists. AAP X84 . Sensors Track 1 of the four sensors Track 3 of the four sensors AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. – Deal with any other possible faults.1. With the parking aid computer 16-track connector connected and the ignition on.0 87F-16 . Switch off ignition and disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. to see if any of the sensors causes the power supply to drop. Interpretation of faults 87F DF008 PRESENT OR STORED COMPUTER FAULT 1.1. If the fault is present and characterized 3.DEF : Electric fault inside computer 3. and shifting into reverse.DEF . With the ignition off. If the fault recurs. disconnect the parking aid computer connector to make sure the power supply is okay and check the insulation. switching the ignition off and on. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory. switch off the ignition and disconnect the parking aid computer supply fuse (see vehicle diagram). if the fault recurs. contact your Techline.Vdiag No.DEF : Electric fault inside computer Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault appears as present or stored again after: – clearing the fault. Plug the fuse back in.0 87F-17 . – Deal with any other possible faults. continuity and absence of interference resistance in the following connections: Parking aid computer connector Track 1 + After ignition (track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector) Track 3 Earth Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). – Follow the instructions to confirm repair.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . switch the ignition back on. After following the instructions. and the buzzer fails to sound when shifting into reverse. NOTES Special notes: If the fault is present and characterized 1. AAP X84 . the system operates in defect mode (substitute values are used). check the connections and condition of the parking aid computer connector (no damage to the connections). contact your Techline. and do a fault reading. If the above checks fail to solve the problem.DEF : Electric fault inside computer 2.DEF . With the ignition off.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse and pressing the switch to turn off the parking aid. Parking aid computer connector Track 5 If the connection just checked is okay (no open or short circuit). – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Check for an earth on track B3 of the parking aid switch connector. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 . Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Parking aid switch connector Track B2 Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR – Clear the fault memory.1. and there is an earth on track B3 of the switch but the problem persists. Remove the parking aid switch and check the connections and condition of its connector. disconnect the parking-aid switch connector to check the insulation.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.0 87F-18 . replace the parking aid switch.Interpretation of faults 87F DF011 PRESENT OR STORED WARNING LIGHT CC.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .Vdiag No. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the computer power supply and earth (see wiring diagrams). apply fault-finding procedure DF007. PR006: PARKING AID SWITCH PRESS DETECTED when the switch is pressed. Sensor supply voltage Computer supply voltage PR020: 10. if there is a problem. If there is a problem. If there is a problem with this parameter. If the problem is still present. 2 Parking aid ON/ OFF switch.4 V If the switch does not operate as specified: Replace the switch.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY 187F SENSOR Fault finding . carry out a fault finding test on the charging circuit. Order Function Setting Status Checked or Action ET003: Parking aid function Display and notes READY (system operating and ready to detect) DETECTING (if the system is detecting) Fault finding 1 Parking aid system status SUSPENDED (if the system is temporarily switched off) OFF (if the system is completely switched off) ET004: For more information or.5 V < X < 14. check the insulation. Fault-finding test conditions: ignition on. 10.1.5 V < X < 14.Conformity check 87F NOTES Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. RELEASED when released.Vdiag No.4 V 3 Supplies ET001: 4 Reverse gear selection Reverse gear engaged YES or NO AAP X84 . In the event of a problem: see the fault finding procedure for status ET001.0 87F-19 . see the fault finding for status ET003. 1. refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR001 . In the event of a problem. In the event of a problem. Order Function Parameter or State Check or Action ET002: Buzzer control Display and notes ON when the buzzer sounds.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR005 . (value beyond detection: 255 cm). refer to the fault finding procedure for status ET002. refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR003 . 20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. Fault finding 5 Buzzer control If there is a fault. (value beyond detection: 255 cm). 20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle.0 87F-20 . Fault-finding test conditions: ignition on. PR001: Left hand outer sensor distance 20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm). 20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm).Conformity check 87F NOTES Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. OFF otherwise. In the event of a problem.Vdiag No. PR002: Left hand inner sensor distance PR003: 6 Proximity sensors Right hand outer sensor distance PR004: Right hand inner sensor distance PR005: Shortest distance calculated AAP X84 . In the event of a problem. (value beyond detection: 255 cm). refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR004 . In the event of a problem. refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR002 . 20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. With the ignition off . and absence of interference resistance in the following connection: Parking aid computer connector Track 4 Repair if necessary. If the reversing lights fail to function as specified. AAP X84 .0 87F-21 . Make sure the reversing lights working properly: they should come on when shifting into and go off when shifting out of reverse. whether or not in reverse). continuity. disconnect the parking aid computer connector to check the insulation (against + 12 V).Vdiag No.1.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .Interpretation of states 87F REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET001 NOTES Special note: This fault finding applies if reverse-gear status is not properly displayed (status displays YES or NO steadily. make the necessary repairs. Rear left hand lights connector Track 2 AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. replace the buzzer. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. medium. Select the volume setting preferred by the customer (low. make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive. If the distance is off or if the distance setting remains at 255 cm. the computer has to be reconfigured with command CF001 "Buzzer volume". If the above checks fail to solve the problem. Measure the resistance between the buzzer's two tracks. mud. make sure the real distance matches the value displayed by the fault-finding tool (PR001 to PR004). With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen ("repair mode" menu). make sure the parking aid system is really on with status ET003 "Parking aid function" (parking aid switch light off). snow etc. Reconfigure the computer if necessary with command CF005 "Vehicle identification".: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . If the volume setting is NONE.Interpretation of states 87F BUZZER CONTROL ET002 NOTES There must be no faults present or stored. automatic or manual transmission). on the rear bumper).Vdiag No. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω. With the vehicle near (20 to 150 cm) an obstacle. ET002 remains OFF. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Track 2 Track 6 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). high. If the status displayed is suspended or off. AAP X84 .0 87F-22 . disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. maximum). With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen. the system has to be reactivated by a one.1. With the ignition off. Buzzer Track 1 Track 2 ET002 ON but buzzer fails to sound. make sure that the parking aid system is properly configured for the type of body on which it is installed (LC005 "Vehicle identification": Mégane. make sure the buzzer volume is not turned down full ( LC001: NONE). With the fault-finding tool's "main data" screen. See the interpretation of status ET003 .or three-second press. the parking aid switch light is on. If the status is not as specified. With the ignition off. Replace the parking aid switch if it fails to function as specified. check switch operation with an ohmmeter. This status indicates whether the parking aid system is on or off: – ET003: READY This means that. Switch not pressed: insulation between track A2 and B1.0 87F-23 . and absence of interference resistance in the following connection: Parking aid switch connector Track B1 Repair if necessary.Vdiag No. This suspension is permanent (turning the ignition off and on does not reactivate the system). The system can be turned off and on with a long press (three seconds) on the parking aid switch. the parking aid system detects obstacles and the buzzer sounds (the parking aid switch light is off).: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . disconnect the parking aid switch connector to check the insulation (against the earth and + 12 V). Switch pressed: continuity between track A2 and B1. continuity. The system can be suspended and turned back on manually with a brief press (one second) on the parking aid switch. when backing up. Repair if necessary. This status is displayed when in reverse and the parking aid system detects – ET003: SUSPENDED This means the parking aid system is switched off (no detection possible).Interpretation of states PARKING AID FUNCTION 87F ET003 NOTES Special notes: If the parking aid system is suspended or off. AAP X84 . check for an earth on track A2 of the parking aid switch. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. – ET003: OFF This means the parking aid system is switched off (no detection possible).1. The suspension is temporary because the parking aid system comes back on after the ignition is switched off and on. – ET003: DETECTING an obstacle. and there is an earth on track A2 of the switch but the problem persists. Parking aid computer connector Track 12 If the connection just checked is okay (no open or short circuit). If the problem persists. make sure no fault is present or stored. apply the fault-finding procedure to the sensor whose distance reading is wrong (even if the fault-finding tool does not report a fault). snow etc.Vdiag No. If the distance is off or if the distance setting remains at 255 cm. If the distances displayed by the sensors seem wrong or 255 cm is displayed steadily. automatic or manual transmission). use the diagnostic procedure associated with the fault detected by the fault-finding tool. make sure the real distance matches the value displayed by the fault-finding tool ( PR001 to PR004 ).1. NOTES NOTE: The ultrasonic sensors are very fragile. make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive. when removing the rear bumper.Interpretation of parameters 87F PR001 PR002 PR003 PR004 LEFT-HAND OUTER SENSOR DISTANCE LEFT-HAND INNER SENSOR DISTANCE RIGHT-HAND OUTER SENSOR DISTANCE RIGHT-HAND INNER SENSOR DISTANCE Special notes: Before tracking down a possible problem with these parameters.0 87F-24 .: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . make sure that the parking aid system is properly configured for the type of body on which it is installed (LC005 "Vehicle identification": Mégane. mud. Replace the faulty sensor. Therefore. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. on the rear bumper). be careful not to scratch them. If there is one. Reconfigure the computer if necessary with command CF005 "Vehicle identification". There must be no scratches on the detection component (outer metal part) of the sensors. check the condition of the sensor(s). With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen ("repair mode" menu). With the vehicle near (20 to 150 cm) an obstacle. AAP X84 . apply the fault-finding procedure to the sensor whose distance reading is wrong (even if the fault-finding tool does not report a fault). be careful not to scratch them. If the calculated distance is still off or displaying 255 cm steadily. automatic or manual transmission). Reconfigure the computer if necessary with command CF005 "Vehicle identification". make sure that the parking aid system is properly configured for the type of body on which it is installed (LC005 "Vehicle identification": Mégane or Mégane 4X4. make sure no fault is present or stored. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.Vdiag No. which must not have any scratches on the detection component (outer metal part). With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen ("repair mode" menu). see if the calculated distance is accurate. If there is one. Therefore. With the vehicle near (0 to 150 cm) an obstacle. on the rear bumper). Replace the faulty sensor. If the problem persists.Interpretation of parameters 87F SHORTEST CALCULATED DISTANCE PR005 Special notes: Before tracking down a possible problem with these parameters. NOTES NOTE: The ultrasonic sensors are very fragile. AAP X84 . make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive. use the diagnostic procedure associated with the fault detected by the fault-finding tool.1. If the distance is off or if the distance setting remains at 255 cm. This parameter is an average calculated by the computer when an obstacle is placed between two sensors.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . the calculated distance is displayed as 0 cm (critical detection wheel with intermittent or steady alarm). snow etc. Below 30 cm. when removing the rear bumper. check the condition of the sensors. mud.0 87F-25 . : 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding .Vdiag No. NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER CHART 1 NO SOUND SIGNAL CHART 2 CONSTANT SOUND SIGNAL (no obstacle detection) CHART 3 AAP X84 .0 87F-26 .Customer complaints 87F NOTES Only consult the customer complaints after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.1. : 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . engine and passenger compartment fuses. and + 12 V after ignition on track 1 and an earth on track 5 and on track 4 of the diagnostic socket.Vdiag No. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer connector Track 1 Track 3 Track 8 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). Check: – The connection between the diagnostic tool and the diagnostic socket (wiring in good condition). Repair if necessary. AAP X84 . + Before ignition (see vehicle diagram) Earth track 7 of the diagnostic socket (line K) AFTER REPAIR Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. With the ignition off. – the injection. Check for the presence of + 12 V battery on track 16.0 87F-27 .1. Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle.Fault finding chart 87F CHART 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR Check that the system is operating correctly. AAP X84 .Fault finding chart 87F CHART 2 No sound signal NOTES Only investigate this customer complaint after a full check with the diagnostic tool (no faults must be present or stored).1.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . make sure the parking aid system is really on. Is status ET001 okay? Yes At the fault-finding tool's read configuration screen. Is setting LC001 "NONE"? No Check the connection and condition of the connector on the buzzer (located in the left rear wing). Yes No No Turn on the parking aid system by pressing on the switch for 1 or 3 seconds (the red light should go out). Also make sure the reversing lights really come on when reverse is engaged. Reconfigure the buzzer volume with the fault-finding tool (command CF001 "Buzzer volume"). Status ET001 "Reverse engaged" must be "YES". see the interpretation of status ET003.0 87F-28 . Replace the connector if necessary. NOTE: For more details about system activation. Apply the fault-finding procedure for status ET001.Vdiag No. make sure the buzzer volume is not turned down completely (setting LC001 "Buzzer volume" must not be NONE). At the fault-finding tool's main data screen. Status ET003 "Parking aid function" must be "READY" (and the red light on the parking aid switch must be off). make sure reverse really is engaged. Is status ET003 okay? Yes At the fault-finding tool's main data screen. No yes No Track 2 Track 2 Track 6 Track 1 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).Fault finding chart 87F CHART 2 CONTINUED With the fault-finding tool's parameter screen ( PR001. make sure the buzzer has a proper power supply by taking a reading between track 1 and track 2 on the buzzer. PR004). Do the parameters specified above display distances (with an obstacle in front of the rear bumper)? Yes Place an obstacle in front of the rear bumper to have the tool display a distance reading. PR004 ). continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Buzzer Apply the fault-finding procedure for parameters ( PR001. Contact your Techline. disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. is the buzzer receiving power? Yes Measure the resistance between the buzzer's two tracks.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . Is the fault still present? No With the ignition off. PR003. PR003. AFTER REPAIR Check that the system is operating correctly. PR002. During this test. PR002 . AAP X84 .1. make sure the proximity sensors really detect obstacles (between 20 and 150 cm).Vdiag No. Is the fault still present? Replace the alarm. No yes End of fault finding.0 87F-29 . During the detection. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω . make sure the distance reading on the faultfinding tool is 255 cm "out of range" (PR001. Is the fault still present? Yes With no obstacle less than 150 cm in front of the rear bumper.1. continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer Buzzer Track 2 Track 2 Track 6 Track 1 NOTE: The line running from track 6 of the computer must be insulated against + 12 V and the one from track 2 of the computer must be insulated against the earth. disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation. snow etc. No End of fault finding. Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). PR003. PR004). mud. on the rear bumper). AFTER REPAIR Check that the system is operating correctly.0 87F-30 . With the ignition off.Fault finding chart 87F CHART 3 Steady alarm (no obstacle detection) NOTES Only investigate this customer complaint after a full check with the diagnostic tool (no faults must be present or stored). PR002.Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive. If those parameters display a setting even though there is no obstacle in front of the rear bumper. End of fault finding.: 04 PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding . AAP X84 . To cut off the + after ignition feed. Wiring diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM). Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Special tooling required Multimeter Universal bornier 3. – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds).UPC Vdiag No. paper version. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed) and the dipped headlights are on. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): MEGANE II. – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the desired operations.Introduction 187G 87G 1. Proceed as follows: – Put the vehicle card in the card reader. Dialogys.0 87G-1 Edition 5 . SCENIC II Function concerned: UPC Name of computer: UPC VDIAG No. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the fault finding tool). proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool. – Check that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out to confirm that the + after ignition feed has been cut off.: 44 2. UPC84 2. – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled. RECAP Procedure To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers. Note: The left-hand and right-hand discharge bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Introduction 87G Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since. The present or stored status of the fault should be taken into consideration when the fault finding tool is used after the + after ignition feed has been connected (without any of the system components being activated). consult the corresponding fault finding page.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . etc. apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. UPC84 2. check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault. – to check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repair. the fault is present. Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool because they are inconsistent. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. and which may correspond to a customer complaint. or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context).0 87G-2 Edition 5 . – the resistance of the component detected as faulty. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. Customer complaints . For a present fault. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values.UPC Vdiag No. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied.Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present. bent pins. – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation. – the connectors on these lines (corrosion.). For a stored fault . wear). this phase is used: – to carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display. Therefore. the fault should be treated by customer complaints . FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP or in the MR or NT) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no See ALP no.Introduction 87G 4.0 87G-3 Edition 5 .UPC Vdiag No. 1 yes Read the faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use the fault finding charts (ALPs) no The cause is still present Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Look for signs of oxidation. UPC84 2. insulators and wiring harness routing. Apply light pressure to the connectors. then section by section. Resistance check: Check the continuity of entire lines.Introduction 87G Wiring check: Fault finding problems: Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. the +12 V feed or with another wire. Electrical measurements of voltage. as well as their crimping (no crimping on the insulating section).UPC Vdiag No. Look for a short circuit to earth. Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs. repair or replace the wiring harness. especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Tactile inspection: While manipulating the wiring harness. resistance and insulation are generally correct. Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. try to locate the source of the fault. If a fault is detected. Make sure that the connectors are properly tightened. Carefully check the protective parts. If there is a change in status. use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Twist the wiring harness.0 87G-4 Edition 5 . UPC84 2.Introduction 87G 5. You are always asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out.UPC Vdiag No. – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. 6. – Use the appropriate tools. and enables better analysis of the parts removed. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement. The FAULT FINDING LOG. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. which should be completed during the procedure. IMPORTANT! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG FOR EACH FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.0 87G-5 Edition 5 .: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . – to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. page to print or photocopy .FAULT FINDING LOG System: All types List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1/2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN Engine Fault finding tool Update version CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint Please specify: ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs Please specify: ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of fault finding manual: Fault finding manual no: Workshop Repair Manual Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number: FD 97 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . Part 5 part no. Program no. Part 2 part no. Supplier no. To be read with the Fault finding tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Part 4 part no. Parameter name Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify: FD 97 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Present Stored Fault name Specification ● Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no. VDIAG ● Faults found with the fault finding tool Fault no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: All types ● Page 2/2 Computer identification and system parts replaced Part 1 part no. Software version Calibration no.page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . Part 3 part no. it unconditionally controls the after ignition relay. The computer controls the compressor clutch engagement relay. – oil pressure detection. – de-icing. – lighting. GENERAL FUNCTIONING The Protection and Switching Unit (UPC) is involved in the following functions: – distribution and protection of the electric power. – keyless vehicle. Air conditioning For details on the operation of this function and the role of the Protection and Switching Unit in its operation (see 62A. Fan assembly When requested by the engine management.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 2. + after ignition feed The UCH requests the + after ignition feed via the multiplex network. Heating The computer also controls the rear screen de-icer and the electric door mirrors. Distribution and protection of the electric power supply The principal function of the Protection and Switching Unit is to switch and distribute the power supply to the vehicle's systems.0 87G-8 Edition 5 . Another part of the power supply distribution is housed in the engine compartment connection unit but it is not electronically controlled by the computer. – wipers. When the Protection and Switching Unit receives this request.System operation 87G 1. – can inhibit or switch off the starter relay control in response to a signal to prohibit starting transmitted by the injection computer via the multiplex network. Keyless vehicle In the keyless vehicle function. The computer: – receives the start request from the Protection and Switching Unit via the multiplex network. Function layout and general operating mode). the Protection and Switching Unit is involved with the starting sub-function. +12 V battery feed The Protection and Switching Unit receives power from the battery via the 1 track screwed-in connector and redistributes the +12 V around the vehicle. Air conditioning.UPC Vdiag No. – checks that the start conditions are satisfied then instructs the starter relay. Cold loop The computer receives the compressor switch-on request from the injection via the multiplex network. Managing the Power Supply The computer transmits the alternator charge signal via the multiplex network. – air conditioning. the Protection and Switching Unit supplies power to the fan assembly. actuators or computers. Oil pressure detection. – Top of the range Protection and Switching Unit N3.System operation 87G Front wipers The Protection and Switching Unit receives requests from the UCH wipers via the multiplex network. – in the N3 version. PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT LEVELS Vehicles can be equipped with 3 levels of Protection and Switching Unit: – Entry level Protection and Switching Unit N1.0 87G-9 Edition 5 . 2. – windscreen wiper park position Lights The Protection and Switching Unit receives lighting requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. UPC84 2. The N2 and N3 versions can be distinguished in the way the high speed fan assembly is controlled: – in the N2 version. – Top of the range Protection and Switching Unit N2. – main beam headlights. Only the Top of the range Protection and Switching Units N2 and N3 are available as spare parts. The computer then executes the following requests: – side lights – dipped headlights. The Protection and Switching Unit receives the oil pressure sensor signal and makes it available via the multiplex network. the relay is integrated in the Protection and Switching Unit.UPC Vdiag No.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The computer then executes the following requests: – low or high speed windscreen wiper. the Protection and Switching Unit controls an external relay. – front fog light. UPC Vdiag No. UPC84 2.0 87G-10 Edition 5 .: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Allocation of computer tracks 87G The Protection and Switching Unit is located in the engine compartment connection unit (engine compartment). See the Technical Note Wiring Diagram for the faulty vehicle for allocation of tracks and to consult the Wiring Diagrams. 0 87G-11 Edition 5 .: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 87G. UPC84 2. Engine compartment connection unit (Megane) or MR 370 Mechanical. 87G. ● Find the Vehicle Identification Number using command VP003 Write the VIN.UPC Vdiag No. Engine compartment connection unit (Scenic). REPLACING THE COMPUTER See Mechanical MR 364. Following replacement: ● Configure the alternator type using command CF001 Alternator Type (see Configurations and programming).Replacing components 87G 1. Configurations and programming 87G NOTES Ignition on. Configuration Related configuration reading Note: ALTERNATOR TYPE: CF001 TG11 110 VALEO SG12 VALEO LIE8 150 BOSCH SG15L VALEO MELCO 8GM LC001 Enter information about the alternator fitted in the vehicle then confirm. engine off. No.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . (MELCO = Mitsubishi Electronics Corporation) No.UPC Vdiag No.0 87G-12 Edition 5 . UPC84 2. VP003 Other parameters WRITE THE VIN: Note: Enter the vehicle identification number then confirm. UPC Vdiag No.0 87G-13 Edition 5 .Summary of faults 87G Tool fault DF002 DF005 DF009 Associated DTC 9210 920E 920D Fault finding tool title FAN ASSEMBLY HIGH SPEED RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT INTERNAL ELECTRONIC FAULT + AFTER IGNITION FEED CIRCUIT UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault continues.UPC Vdiag No.Interpretation of faults 87G FAN ASSEMBLY HIGH SPEED RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT DF002 PRESENT CC. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory. Measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2. UPC84 2.1 : Short circuit to +12 V NOTES Special notes: The function is inhibited if the fault is present. then run another check with the diagnostic tool. If +12 V is present. check the absence of +12 V on track 2 of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. contact the Techline. Remove the relay and ensure insulation against +12 V on the connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 2 Track 2 of the fan assembly relay connector Repair if necessary.0 87G-14 Edition 5 . Reactivation of the function by a new after ignition request.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the resistance is not 65 Ω ± 10 Ω. replace the relay. Turn the ignition off and back on. contact the Techline.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. Turn the ignition off and back on.Interpretation of faults 87G INTERNAL ELECTRONIC FAULT DF005 PRESENT DEF : Internal electronic fault NOTES None Disconnect the battery for 30 seconds.0 87G-15 Edition 5 . UPC84 2. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory. then reconnect it. then run another check with the diagnostic tool.UPC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and the connection of the + battery feed to the Protection and Switching Unit mounting and to connector P2.Interpretation of faults 87G + AFTER IGNITION FEED CIRCUIT DF009 PRESENT DEF : Consistency NOTES None Check the voltage of the battery. check the insulation against +12 V of the connection between the faulty track on the Protection and Switching Unit and the computers or consumers connected to this track. UPC84 2.UPC Vdiag No.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 7 and 10 of connector PPM2 – tracks 10 and 11 of connector PPH2 If the fault is still present. check the absence of +12 V on track 6 of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. With the ignition off. – fuse 5G (track 7 connector PPM2). – fuse 5H (track 10 connector PPM2). then run another check with the diagnostic tool. check for the presence of +12 V on one of the following tracks on the Protection and Switching Unit: – track 1 of the connector PEH – tracks 6. – fuse 5F (track 11 connector PPH2). AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory. Repair if necessary. – fuse 5E (track 10 connector PPH2). Turn the ignition off and back on. remove the following fuses one by one to pinpoint the faulty track: – fuse 5C (track 6 connector PPM2). – fuse 5D (track 1 connector PEH).0 87G-16 Edition 5 . With the help of a wiring diagram. If +12 Vfound. contact the Techline. With the ignition on. Check that the status of ET026 + after ignition feed is consistent Check the condition of the fuses on the battery positive terminal. MAIN SCREEN Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action ET001: ET027: ET004: Battery warning light Oil pressure contact Reverse gear engaged Display and notes Fault finding 1 2 3 Charging circuit Oil pressure contact Gearbox LIT CLOSED YES NO If there are any faults.0 87G-17 Edition 5 . consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.UPC Vdiag No. Test conditions: Engine stopped. ignition on. UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . KEYLESS VEHICLE: Starting Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action ET004: Reverse gear engaged Display and notes YES NO NEUTRAL NOT IN NEUTRAL NOT SUPPORTED. if the starting conditions are met and the Start button is then pressed NO. ignition on. 2 Starting ET010: Starting conditions met UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Test conditions: Engine stopped. if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic transmission YES.UPC Vdiag No. if the starting conditions are not met or if the Start button is not pressed Fault finding 1 Gearbox ET005: Manual gearbox lever If there are any faults.0 87G-18 Edition 5 .Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure. AIR CONDITIONING: Cold loop Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Low speed fan assembly Display and notes The fan should be heard running at low speed The fan should be heard running at high speed Fault finding AC009: 1 Fan assembly AC010: High speed fan assembly This command cannot be executed in vehicles which are not fitted with air conditioning Compressor clutch should be heard (command prohibited with the engine running) If there are any faults.0 87G-19 Edition 5 . 2 Air conditioning AC008: Compressor control UPC84 2. above 98% The heating resistors of the rear screen and door mirrors (if the vehicle has heated door mirrors) must be receiving power and warming up Fault finding PR010: 1 Starting AC011: Rear screen heating If there are any faults. Test conditions: Engine stopped. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure. ignition on.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.UPC Vdiag No. AIR CONDITIONING: Heating Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Alternator charge Display and notes In % The value must be fixed. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC Vdiag No. 3 Wipers AC006: UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped. INACTIVE The wiper should run at low speed. Fault finding 1 Park position AC012: 2 Wiper protection ET002: AC005: If there are any faults. WIPERS: Wiper power Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Windscreen wiper park position test Windscreen wiper protection Windscreen wiper low speed Windscreen wiper high speed Display and notes The wiper should run for one sweep then stop in its initial position. ignition on. The wiper should run at high speed. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.0 87G-20 Edition 5 . AC001: AC004: UPC84 2.UPC Vdiag No. The front fog lights should come on.0 87G-21 Edition 5 .: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Test conditions: Engine stopped.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Fault finding AC003: Side lights 1 Lighting AC002: Dipped headlights Main beam headlights Front fog lights If there are any faults. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure. ignition on. LIGHTING: Lighting power Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and notes The front and rear side lights and number plate lights should light up along with the controls and switches in the passenger compartment. The dipped beam headlights should come on. The main beam headlights should come on. Operating Condition: engine running.0 87G-22 Edition 5 .UPC Vdiag No. MAIN SCREEN Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action ET001: ET027: ET004: Battery warning light Oil pressure contact Reverse gear engaged Display and notes Fault finding 1 2 3 Charging circuit Oil pressure contact Gearbox OFF OPEN YES NO If there are any faults.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . consult the corresponding fault finding procedure. UPC84 2. if the starting conditions are not met or if the Start button is not pressed Fault finding 1 Gearbox ET005: Manual gearbox lever If there are any faults.UPC Vdiag No.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.0 87G-23 Edition 5 . 2 Starting ET010: Starting conditions met UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . if the starting conditions are met and the Start is then button pressed NO. Operating Condition: engine running. KEYLESS VEHICLE: Starting Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action ET004: Reverse gear engaged Display and Notes YES NO NEUTRAL NOT IN NEUTRAL NOT SUPPORTED. if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic transmission YES. The heating resistors of the rear screen and door mirrors (if the vehicle has heated door mirrors) must be receiving power and warming up Fault finding PR010: Alternator charge 1 Starting AC011: Rear screen heating If there are any faults. AIR CONDITIONING: Heating Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and notes In % The value varies according to the consumption of electricity.0 87G-24 Edition 5 .Cold loop: Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Low speed fan assembly Display and notes The fan should be heard running at low speed The fan should be heard running at high speed Fault finding AC009: 1 Fan assembly AC010: High speed fan assembly This command cannot be executed in vehicles which are not fitted with air conditioning (command prohibited with engine running) If there are any faults. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.UPC Vdiag No. 2 Air conditioning AC008: Compressor control UPC84 2. Operating Condition: engine running. AIR CONDITIONING .Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . consult the corresponding fault finding procedure. Operating Condition: engine running.0 87G-25 Edition 5 . Wipers AC006: UPC84 2. WIPERS: Wiper power Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Windscreen wiper park position test Windscreen wiper protection Windscreen wiper low speed Windscreen wiper high speed Display and notes The wiper should be activated for one sweep then stop in its initial position.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.UPC Vdiag No. INACTIVE The wiper should run at low speed. The wiper should run at high speed.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Fault finding Park position AC012: Wiper protection 1 ET002: AC005: If there are any faults. consult the corresponding fault finding procedure. Fault finding AC003: Side lights 1 Lighting AC002: Dipped headlights Main beam headlights Front fog lights If there are any faults. Operating Condition: engine running.0 87G-26 Edition 5 . AC001: AC004: UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . The dipped beam headlights should come on. LIGHTING: Lighting power Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and notes The front and rear side lights and number plate lights should light up along with the controls and switches in the passenger compartment.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. The main beam headlights should come on.UPC Vdiag No. The front fog lights should come on. 0 87G-27 Edition 5 .Statuses and parameters summary table 87G Tool status ET001 ET002 ET004 ET005 ET010 ET013 ET026 ET027 Fault finding tool title BATTERY WARNING LIGHT WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED MANUAL GEAR LEVER POSITION STARTING CONDITIONS MET HIGH SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY RELAY CONTROL + AFTER IGNITION FEED Tool parameter PR010 Fault finding tool title ALTERNATOR CHARGE UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Vdiag No. Switch off the ignition and ensure the insulation against +12 V and the continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit PEM connector track 8 Track 1 of the 2-track alternator connector Repair if necessary. Check consistency with the instrument panel warning light. ensure insulation against earth and continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit PEM connector track 8 Track 1 of the 2-track alternator connector Repair if necessary. With the ignition on. Check the status and the connection of the PEM connector on the Protection and Switching Unit and the connections on the alternator. With engine running.Interpretation of statuses 87G BATTERY WARNING LIGHT ET001 NOTES Check that the status is OUT with engine running and LIT with engine stopped.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ignition on. Perform a fault finding procedure on the charge circuit if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. check that the battery voltage is well above +12 V. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults.0 87G-28 Edition 5 . UPC84 2. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. NOTES Make sure that nothing is mechanically blocking movement of the wiper arms (blades stuck. the Protection and Switching Unit has found an abnormal high speed wiper operation for more than 6 seconds (blocked or jamming).: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . then check the park position using the command AC012 Test windscreen wiper park position .0 87G-29 Edition 5 . – If the status is TIME DELAYED. the wipers are functioning normally. These statuses are in order of severity or persistence of wiper malfunction. the wipers are stopped for 10 seconds after a fault has been found is persisting (blocked or jamming). – If the status is BLOCKED . – If the status is INACTIVE.Interpretation of statuses 87G WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION ET002 First check the good operation of the windscreen wiper motor by running the commands AC005 Windscreen wiper low speed and AC006 Windscreen wiper high speedcontrols. The status returns to INACTIVE as soon as the UCH requests another wiping setpoint (wiper control adjusted. Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. the wipers are stopped for 30 seconds after a period of malfunction greater than 2 minutes. Check the condition and connection of connectors PPH2. Check that the windscreen wiper mechanism is not sticking. Repair if necessary. or request by the rain sensor). wipers are therefore restricted to low speed following a request for high speed wipers. condition and assembly of the wiper mechanism linkage and no object is interfering with the motion of the mechanism). PEH on the Protection and Switching Unit and of the windscreen wiper motor. – If the status is LOW SPEED. UPC84 2. windscreen wiper motor connector Repair if necessary. windscreen wiper motor connector Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 2 Track 4. contact the Techline. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . windscreen wiper motor connector Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 1 Track 5. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults.0 87G-30 Edition 5 . UPC84 2. If the fault is still present.UPC Vdiag No.Interpretation of statuses 87G ET002 (continued) Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PEH track 6 Track 2. Repair if necessary. check for the presence of +12 V on track 9 of connector PPM2. UPC84 2. With the ignition on and reverse engaged.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . MANUAL GEARBOX Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit.0 87G-31 Edition 5 . With reverse gear engaged.Interpretation of statuses 87G REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET004 NOTES Check fuse 5C on the Protection and Switching Unit and replace if necessary. contact the Techline. If not correct. If the fault is still present.UPC Vdiag No. Replace the reverse gear switch if necessary. ensure the continuity and insulation against earth of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 9 Track 1 (track 3 of ND0 gearbox) of switch Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 6 Track 2 (track 1 of ND0 gearbox) of switch Repair if necessary. check the continuity of tracks 1 and 2 (or tracks 1 and 3 of ND0 gearbox) of switch. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline.Interpretation of statuses 87G ET004 (continued) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Check the condition and connection of the multifunction switch connector and connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. UPC84 2. With reverse gear engaged. Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Replace the multifunction switch if necessary. check the continuity of tracks 1 and 2 of the switch. check for the presence of +12 V on track 9 of connector PPM2. If not correct.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 87G-32 Edition 5 . With the ignition on and reverse engaged. ensure the continuity and insulation against earth of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 9 Track 1 of the multifunction switch Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 6 Track 2 of the multifunction switch Repair if necessary. contact the Techline.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the status and the connection of the neutral connector switch and connectors PPM2 and PEM of the Protection and Switching Unit. there should be an open circuit between tracks 1 and 2 of the switch when in gear. If not correct. check for the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connection between the switch and track 6 of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. UPC84 2. If faulty. replace the switch. ensure the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connection between the switch and track 6 of the connector PEM on the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. If not correct. With the ignition on and in neutral. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. With the ignition on.0 87G-33 Edition 5 . check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 (track 1 if equipped with ND0 gearbox) of the neutral switch connector. Check the correct operation of the switch: there should be continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the switch when the gearbox is in neutral. check for the presence of +12 V on track 6 of connector PEM.Interpretation of statuses 87G MANUAL GEAR LEVER POSITION ET005 NOTES Check fuse 5C on the Protection and Switching Unit and replace if necessary. Only applies to vehicles fitted with automatic transmission. Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. UPC Vdiag No. contact the Techline. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. OPEN engine running. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. UPC84 2. Make sure that the sensor is securely mounted on the engine. Check the insulation against +12 V and the continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PEM track 12 Track 1 of the pressure sensor Repair if necessary.Interpretation of statuses 87G OIL PRESSURE CONTACT ET009 NOTES CLOSED engine stopped. Check the status and the connection of connector PEM of the Protection and Switching Unit and of the oil pressure sensor.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 87G-34 Edition 5 . AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Check the proper operation of the gearbox switches on the statuses ET004 Reverse gear engaged and ET005 Manual gearbox gear lever position then perform fault finding on the starting and engine management functions of the Protection and Switching Unit. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of statuses 87G STARTING CONDITIONS MET ET010 NOTES No particular notes. contact the Techline. If the conditions are met and the starter does not work. UPC84 2. consult Fault Finding Chart 2.0 87G-35 Edition 5 . Check in the Keyless vehicle function that the starting conditions are met. The Protection and Switching Unit is involved with the starting function in that it manages the gearbox switches.UPC Vdiag No.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . : 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . With the ignition on. With the ignition off. UPC84 2. Repair if necessary. the value varies according to the consumption of electricity.Interpretation of parameters 87G ALTERNATOR CHARGE PR010 NOTES Check the configuration readings to make sure that the correct alternator type has been configured.UPC Vdiag No. With the engine running. check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the alternator. check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the alternator. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. With the engine stopped. Disconnect the 2-track connector of the alternator. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. above 98%. the value should be fixed.0 87G-36 Edition 5 . Carry out fault finding on the charge circuit. The value should not be fixed. If correct. UPC84 2. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of controls 87G MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS AC001 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of fuses 8A and 8B of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary.0 87G-37 Edition 5 .: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . if necessary. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 3 Track 4 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 4 Track 4 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If not correct. Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of the connector PPA and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. contact the Techline. replace the bulbs.UPC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. – the condition of the bulbs. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC001. Replace them. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on track 1 of the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 3 Track 5 or track 4 (according to vehicle type) of the left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 4 Track 5 or track 4 (according to vehicle type) of the right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors.UPC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 87G-38 Edition 5 . If the fault is still present. UPC84 2. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlights. If not correct.Interpretation of controls 87G AC001 (continued) With xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connector PPA and the fuses in the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 (for Megane-type vehicles) or track 4 (for Scenic-type vehicles) of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC001. If correct. Discharge bulbs). contact the Techline. apply the fault finding procedure (see 80C. contact the Techline. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on track 1 of the headlight connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC002. If not correct. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors.UPC Vdiag No. Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connector PPA and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them. If correct. If the fault is still present.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of controls 87G DIPPED HEADLIGHTS AC002 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of fuses 8C and 8D of the Protection and Switching Unit.0 87G-39 Edition 5 . – the condition of the bulbs. Repair if necessary. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 6 Track 2 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 5 Track 2 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. if necessary. replace the bulb(s). UPC84 2. Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlight connectors. If not correct. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 6 Track 3 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 5 Track 3 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary.Interpretation of controls 87G AC002 (continued) With xenon lights Check the condition and connection of the connector PPA and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. contact the Techline. Discharge bulbs).: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 2. Repair if necessary. If correct. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. apply the fault finding procedure (see 80C. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 3 of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC002.0 87G-40 Edition 5 . Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlights and rear lights. contact the Techline.0 87G-41 Edition 5 . Check for the presence of earth on junction R9 then on track 1 of the headlights and on track 2 of the rear lights and number plate light. Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. Ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 6 Track 1 left-hand rear light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 7 Track 1 right-hand rear light and license plate light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 1 Track 5 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 2 Track 5 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. if necessary.Interpretation of controls 87G SIDE LIGHTS AC003 NOTES Check: – the condition and the connection of fuses 7A and 7B of the Protection and Switching Unit. UPC84 2. If not correct. If the fault is still present. – the condition of the bulbs. PPH2 and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 of the headlights and track 1 of the rear lights and the license plate lights while they are being controlled by command AC003. Repair if necessary. Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connectors PPA. Replace them. replace the bulb(s).: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If correct. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary.0 87G-42 Edition 5 . Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 9 of the headlights and track 1 of the rear lights and license plate light while they are being controlled by command AC003. Check the condition and connection of the headlights and rear lights. If correct. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of controls 87G AC003 (continued) With xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connectors PPA. PPH2 and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit.UPC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on junction R9 then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlights and on track 2 of the rear lights and licence plate light. If the fault is still present.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 2. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 6 Track 1 left-hand rear light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 7 Track 1 right-hand rear light and license plate light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 1 Track 9 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 2 Track 9 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. replace the bulb(s). If not correct. If correct. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 8 Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 7 Repair if necessary. if necessary. – the condition of the bulbs.0 87G-43 Edition 5 . Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Replace them. Track 1 of the front left-hand foglight connector Track 1 of the front right hand foglight connector AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. contact the Techline.Interpretation of controls 87G FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC004 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 10. replace the bulb(s).: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Vdiag No. Check the condition and the connection of connector PPA of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on the fog light connectors they are being controlled by command AC004. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on junction R9 then check the connections of the bulb connectors. If the fault is still present. UPC84 2. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. replace the motor. If correct. UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Replace it if necessary. contact the Techline. Check the status and connections of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor while it is being controlled by command AC005. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool.0 87G-44 Edition 5 . If the fault is still present.Interpretation of controls 87G WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED AC005 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 9.UPC Vdiag No. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 2 Repair if necessary. Track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor. : 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of controls 87G WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED AC006 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 9. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check the status and connections of the windscreen wiper motor connector. If correct. If the fault is still present. UPC84 2. Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 1 Repair if necessary. contact the Techline.UPC Vdiag No. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor while it is being controlled by command AC006. Track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. replace the motor. Replace it if necessary. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool.0 87G-45 Edition 5 . AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Repair if necessary. Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 4.0 87G-46 Edition 5 . If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No. Repair if necessary. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 5 Air conditioning compressor connector. If not correct. Check for the presence of +12 V on the compressor connector while it is being controlled by command AC008. contact the Techline. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Check the condition and connection of the air conditioning compressor connector.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Replace it if necessary. Make sure that the compressor is properly earthed.Interpretation of controls 87G COMPRESSOR CONTROL AC008 NOTES Command prohibited with the engine running. Check the condition and the connection of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. UPC84 2. 0 87G-47 Edition 5 . The engine cooling fan must be off. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Replace it if necessary. Make sure nothing is mechanically blocking the rotation of the blade. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Check the condition and connection of the fan unit connector. If not correct. replace the fan unit.69 Ω ± 20%.UPC Vdiag No. contact the Techline. If correct. replace it. If the fault is still present. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM1 1 track 4 Track 1 of the fan unit OR Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM1 track 4 Resistor fitted on the fan unit (if present) Resistor fitted on the fan unit (if present) Track 1 of the fan unit Repair if necessary. Check that the resistor fitted in the fan unit (if present). Check for the presence of +12 V on the fan unit connector while it is being controlled by command AC009.Interpretation of controls 87G LOW-SPEED FAN UNIT AC009 NOTES Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 11.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Repair if necessary. is not in open circuit and that its resistance is equal to 0. If not correct. Ensure track 2 of the fan unit is properly earthed. UPC84 2. Make sure that the fan unit is properly earthed.0 87G-48 Edition 5 . If not correct. Replace it if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the fan unit while running command AC010. If not correct. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit while it is being controlled by command AC010. Check: – the condition and the connection of fuse 11 (Protection and Switching Unit level N3 only). If not correct.Interpretation of controls 87G HIGH-SPEED FAN UNIT AC010 NOTES This control is only valid for variants fitted with air conditioning. Replace it if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit. Repair if necessary. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 3 Track 1 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit Repair if necessary. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Track 1 fan unit Track 5 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit Repair if necessary. Type N2 Protection and Switching Unit Check the condition and connection of the fan unit connector. UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ensure there is continuity and insulation against +12 V on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 2 Track 2 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit Repair if necessary. Test the resistance of the external relay controlling the high speed fan unit: 65 Ω ± 10 Ω .UPC Vdiag No. UPC Vdiag No. UPC84 2.0 87G-49 Edition 5 . If the fault is still present. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: External control relay high speed fan unit track 3 Track 1 of the power supply fuse board Repair if necessary. If not correct. Check fuse F1 of the power supply fuse board.Interpretation of controls 87G AC010 (continued 1) Check for the presence of +12 V battery on track 3 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Replace it if necessary. contact the Techline. Check for the presence of +12 V on the fan unit connector while it is being controlled by command AC010.Interpretation of controls 87G AC010 (continued 2) Type N3 Protection and Switching Unit Check the condition and connection of the fan unit connector.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Make sure that he fan unit is properly earthed . AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. If not correct. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector P1 Fan unit Repair if necessary. If correct.UPC Vdiag No.0 87G-50 Edition 5 . UPC84 2. replace the fan unit. Repair if necessary. Check that the rear screen de-icer is earthed. Rear screen Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH1 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check that the resistance of the rear screen window is between 0. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH1 track 2 Rear screen Repair if necessary.UPC Vdiag No.Interpretation of controls 87G HEATED REAR SCREEN AC011 NOTES Ignition on Check: – the condition and connections of fuses 6 and W located in the passenger compartment. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen connectors. Check for the presence of +12 V on the rear screen terminal while it is being controlled by command AC011.0 87G-51 Edition 5 . If the fault is still present. Replace the rear screen if necessary.5 Ω and 1 Ω. UPC84 2.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. If not correct. Replace if necessary. UPC Vdiag No. UPC84 2. contact the Techline. ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH1 track 2 Track 1 of the door mirror via the fuse box and the passenger compartment relay Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. If not correct. Check the condition and connection of the door mirror connectors. Repair if necessary.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 87G-52 Edition 5 . If the fault is still present.Interpretation of controls 87G AC011 (continued) Door mirrors (if equipped with de-icers) Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH1 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Check for the presence of earth on track 5 of the door mirror connector. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the door mirror connector while the command is running. contact the Techline. consult the interpretation of these commands. Check the condition and the connection of connector PEH of the Protection and Switching Unit. Track 2 of the wiper motor Using a warning light bulb placed between track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor and the + battery supply.Interpretation of controls 87G WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION TEST AC012 NOTES Commands AC005 Low speed windscreen wiper and AC006 High speed windscreen wiper must be running to activate this control. replace the wiper motor. Apply this procedure if the windscreen wipers do not stop in their initial position. If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. UPC84 2. Repair if necessary. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. Check the condition and connection of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Otherwise. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults.0 87G-53 Edition 5 . If not correct.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PEH track 6 Repair if necessary. check that the bulb lights up briefly at the end of the wipe cycle.UPC Vdiag No. : 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 87G-54 Edition 5 . Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.UPC Vdiag No.Customer complaints 87G NOTES Carry out a fault finding procedure on the multiplex network. RECORDED FAULTS NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER ALP 1 THE STARTER DOES NOT WORK NO LIGHTING OF VARIOUS FUNCTIONS IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ALP 2 ALP 3 UPC84 2. If necessary.UPC Vdiag No. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of connector PEH. If the fault is still present. Check for the presence of +12 V battery on the connector P2.0 87G-55 Edition 5 .: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the battery terminals and power fuses. repair the defective connection and/or connector. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. If necessary. repair the defective connection and/or connector.Fault Finding Chart 87G ALP 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES Test the multiplex network. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. UPC84 2. Check for the presence of earth on track 3 of connector PPH2. Repair if necessary. Check the voltage of the battery. Repair if necessary. If correct. contact the Techline. Replace it if necessary. refer to the information on how to deal with this status. with the starter turning. Repair if necessary. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool.Fault Finding Chart 87G ALP 2 The starter does not work NOTES Check for any faults in the multiplex network by running the network test. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. Check the insulation against earth and continuity of the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM1 track 3 The control terminal on the starter motor. If everything is correct. Check that status ET010: Starting conditions met is YES after the Start button is pressed.UPC Vdiag No. If the fault is still present.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 3. Replace it if necessary. check for the presence of +12 V on the starter command terminal. continuity).0 87G-56 Edition 5 . Check the wiring of the starter motor (tightness of the terminals. carry out a fault finding procedure on the starter. Check the condition and connections of the starter power fuse. Refer to the Starting function to check that the starting conditions are met. Check the condition and connection of connector PPM1 of the Protection and Switching Unit and the control terminal on the starter motor. if not. UPC84 2. Repair if necessary. door lock switch. If the fault is still present. radio. instrument panel dimmer control and on-site headlight adjustment. Check for the presence of earth on the defective function(s). check for the presence of +12 V on the defective function(s). automatic transmission display and cruise control/speed limiter controls.Fault Finding Chart 87G ALP 3 No lighting of various functions in the passenger compartment NOTES The side lights must not be faulty. refer to the interpretation of command AC003 Side lights . Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. air conditioning control panel. Repair if necessary. If correct. Track 6 connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit Track 7 connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit AFTER REPAIR Deal with any other possible faults. hard roof switch. contact the Techline. Heated seat switches.0 87G-57 Edition 5 . Check the condition and connection of the faulty function(s). UPC84 2. Repair if necessary. replace the defective component. LPG or petrol fuel selection switch. Ensure insulation and continuity against earth between the defective function and the Protection and Switching Unit: Cigarette lighter.: 44 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . front and rear window riser controls and lock. With the side lights on. simultaneous window control. door mirror controls. multifunction display. if they are. Repair if necessary. electronic stability program switch.UPC Vdiag No. proceed as follows: with the vehicle card in the card reader.Introduction 87G 1. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed).1 87G-1 Edition 2 . Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.: 48 2. paper version. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II. Universal bornier USM_V48_PRELI UPC84 V1. oscilloscope Elé.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool).: C54 Vdiag No. Dialogys.187G UPC Program No. To cut off + after ignition feed. proceed as follows: press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds). Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP + CAN sensor Type of special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter. press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not met. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM). Depending on the type of vehicle equipment. Scénic II Function concerned: Protection and Switching Name of computer: Protection and Switching Unit Program No. 1681 3.: C54 Vdiag no. connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. REMINDER To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied. note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). etc. the fault should be dealt with by customer complaint. Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. For a stored fault .: C54 Vdiag no. this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. bent pins. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present.1 87G-2 Edition 2 . Customer complaints . – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation. – the resistance of the component detected as faulty. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values.Introduction 87G Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since. UPC84 V1. Therefore. For a present fault. and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – the connectors on these lines (corrosion. wear).). consult the corresponding fault finding page.UPC Program No. the fault is present. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: C54 Vdiag no. 1 yes Read the faults Faults present no Conformity check yes Deal with present faults The cause is still present no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs) no The cause is still present Fault solved The cause is still present no Fault solved yes Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log UPC84 V1.Introduction 87G 4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no See ALP No.1 87G-3 Edition 2 . If a fault is detected. Continuity. Twist the wiring harness. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs. Electrical measurements of voltage. insulation and resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines. resistance and insulation are generally correct. If there is a change in status. to + 12 V or to another wire.UPC Program No. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section).Introduction 87G 4. Look for signs of oxidation. Look for a short circuit to earth. use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. repair or replace the wiring harness. Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Carefully check the fuses. then section by section. insulators and wiring harness routing. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. UPC84 V1. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. try to locate the source of the fault.: C54 Vdiag no.1 87G-4 Edition 2 .: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out.000 V.Introduction 87G 5. 6. and do not work on the COSLAD system when it is in operation. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. The FAULT FINDING LOG.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer. IMPORTANT! IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline.: C54 Vdiag no.1 87G-5 Edition 2 . – use the appropriate tools. and enables better analysis of the parts removed. which should be completed during the procedure. – do not touch the xenon bulbs. – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement.UPC Program No. as the voltage can be more than 20. UPC84 V1. – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. FAULT FINDING LOG IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit List of monitored parts: Computer ● Page 1/2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool Update version CLIP OPTIMA 5800 NXR 2 0 ● Customer complaint 875 1194 Door locking/unlocking fault Warning light on 1070 Lighting fault 1075 Wiper fault Other Your comments: ● Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005 009 While driving Sudden fault 010 Gradual deterioration 004 Intermittently Other Your comments: ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used Type of fault finding manual: Fault finding manual no: Workshop Repair Manual Assisted fault finding Technical Note Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number: FD 15 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . Part 2 part no. Supplier no. Present Stored Fault name Specification ● Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no. Program no.page to print or photocopy . Software version Calibration no.page to print or photocopy . VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. Part 4 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Parameter name Value Unit ● System-specific information Description: Additional information ● What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments: FD 15 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Part 3 part no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ● Page 2/2 Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system Part 1 part no. Part 5 part no. Part of this function is handled within the unit. – Wipers. a Recharge Battery message is displayed on the instrument panel if the battery needs charging.1 87G-8 Edition 2 . – Air conditioning. the Protection and Switching Unit determines what the voltage across the battery terminals should be. actuators or computers. Depending on the battery charge status. If PR008 is below 12. To obtain this voltage. The signal is distributed to the sensors. b) Alternator The Protection and Switching Unit is linked to the alternator by a serial connection. the Protection and Switching Unit actuates the alternator. 2 . it actuates the after ignition relay unconditionally. 1 . a) Battery – PR008 Battery voltage after rest represents the battery charge status. – Lighting. The Protection and Switching Unit and the alternator communicate via this connection.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Electric power distribution The main function of the Protection and Switching Unit is to switch and distribute the power supply to the vehicle's systems. actuators and computers. UPC84 V1. the operating phase and the battery temperature. – Oil pressure detection.1 V in the first miles.Safety. – Charging circuit. – Electric power distribution. The alternator sends the Protection and Switching Unit the following signals: – Type of alternator: the Protection and Switching Unit configures itself according to the alternator specifications. When the Protection and Switching Unit receives this request.Charge circuit One of the main functions of the Protection and Switching Unit is managing the charge circuit. + 12 V battery supply The Protection and Switching Unit receives energy from the battery via the Busbar and MM connectors (tracks 6 and 4) and redistributes the + 12 V supply.System operation 87G General operation The Protection and Switching Unit is involved in the following functions: – Access . – ET023 Alternator thermal fault. but it is not electronically controlled by the computer. + 12 V after ignition supply The UCH sends the Protection and Switching Unit the + 12 V after ignition supply request via the multiplex network.: C54 Vdiag no.UPC Program No. The computer: – receives the supply request from the passenger compartment starter via the multiplex network. A maximum of 30 seconds after the engine has started. the Protection and Switching Unit is involved in the starting sub-function. to the UPC computer via the multiplex network. USM_V48_SSFON UPC84 V1. The computer also controls the rear screen de-icing. – disables or cuts off control of this relay if there is a start inhibition signal sent by the injection or gearbox computer via the multiplex network. the UPC computer reduces PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage. as well as the clutch pedal position. PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage is fixed at 10. For vehicles with any injection type except M9R: The UPC sends the alternator charge to the injection to regulate the idling speed.System operation 87G The Protection and Switching Unit sends the alternator the following information: – PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage. 3 .Air conditioning For the operation of the air conditioning and the role of the Protection and Switching Unit in the control of this function. the Protection and Switching Unit sets PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage to the calculated optimum value.6 V. Before and during starting.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the power available from the engine is less than the power consumed by the alternator.UPC Program No.Keyless vehicle Under the keyless vehicle function. the Protection and Switching Unit can temporarily increase PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage by 1 V for a period of 30 minutes after starting. Air conditioning. The computer controls the compressor clutch engagement relay. 4 .: C54 Vdiag no. Cold loop: The computer receives the compressor switch-on request from the injection via the multiplex network. Heating: The computer manages the alternator charge and sends back the signal over the multiplex network. – controls the starter relay. The Protection and Switching Unit can detect electrical or communication faults on this connection and signal them using the fault DF007 UPC-Alternator connection.1 87G-9 Edition 2 . Only on vehicles with M9R injection: The injection computer also acts on the alternator regulation voltage. see 62A. When the battery charge drops and PR008 Battery voltage after rest declines. The injection computer sends the maximum authorised power delivered by the engine. ). UPC84 V1.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 7 .Oil pressure detection The Protection and Switching Unit receives the oil pressure sensor signal and distributes it over the multiplex network. 9. The computer then switches the power relays: – side lights. Injection The Protection and Switching Unit plays a part in the injection operation.UPC Program No. Supply malfunctions may lead to engine management customer complaints (rough idle. 8 .Reverse gear engaged signal The Protection and Switching Unit receives the reverse gear engaged position sensor signal and distributes it over the multiplex network. – main beam headlights.Wipers The Protection and Switching Unit receives wiping requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then switches the power relays: – low or high-speed windscreen wiper. – The Protection and Switching Unit also receives the windscreen wiper park position signal. – dipped headlights. Using this signal the computer can determine whether the blade is jammed. – headlight washers pump relay.1 87G-10 Edition 2 . 6 .Exterior lighting The Protection and Switching Unit receives lighting requests from the UCH via the multiplex network.: C54 Vdiag no.System operation 87G 5 . – front fog light. in relation to the computer supply voltage and its sensors (see the different components that are supplied in Allocation of computer tracks). and decide whether to stop the wiper motor to protect it. etc. System operation 87G 9 . the associated fault becomes STORED. UPC84 V1. – N2: vehicles with a 460 W fan assembly. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If a fuse is faulty.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Protection and Switching Unit Version There are 4 Protection and Switching Unit versions: – N1: vehicles with a 340 W fan assembly. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits again to clear the fault.1 87G-11 Edition 2 . Once the fuse has been replaced or the repair completed. 460 W or 550 W fan assemblies + automatic gearbox and/or LPG and/or headlight washers. – N3: vehicles with a 550 W fan assembly (external relay). – N4: vehicles with 340 W.UPC Program No.Fuse fault finding The Protection and Switching Unit can detect the condition of its fuses and indicate faults using: DF016 DF017 DF014 DF015 DF030 DF023 DF018 DF019 DF020 DF022 DF031 DF036 DF029 DF024 DF025 DF026 DF021 DF032 LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT FRONT FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT HEATED REAR SCREEN CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT ENGINE MANAGEMENT/COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY LPG COMPUTER SUPPLY ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT +12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT To carry out fault finding on the fuses. UPC Program No.actuator track 1 Protected + battery supply Connector CM 1 + Protected after ignition supply fuse Track A1 additional heater relay 1 black connector Track B2 additional heater relay 2 black connector Track B2 additional heater relay 3 black connector Track 1A passenger compartment fuse and relay box black connector Track 1 diagnostic socket black connector Track 1 parking proximity sensor computer white connector 2 3 4 5 6 Not used Earth Rear screen de-icer + control supply ABS computer + protected battery supply Earth front left-hand side member rear screen connector track 1 ABS/ABS + ESP computer connector track 3 UPC84 V1.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Allocation of computer tracks Protection and Switching Unit computer tracks 87G Computer track Function Busbar connector Sensor .: C54 Vdiag no.1 87G-12 Edition 2 . 1 87G-13 Edition 2 .actuator track 1 2 3 + fuel pump supply Reversing light + control supply Headlight beam adjustment + control supply Fuel pump and sender unit connector track 1 Rear right-hand light track 2.Allocation of computer tracks 87G Computer track Function Connector CN Sensor .: C54 Vdiag no. track 1 number plate lights Injection computer black connector track G1 Track 2 headlight washer pump black connector Track 8 electric power assisted steering black connector track 7 airbag computer black connector Windscreen wiper motor connector track 4 Track 2 UCH connector PP2 Track 1 headlight washer pump black connector Rear left-hand light 4 5 6 7 8 Windscreen wiper high-speed + control supply + right-hand side light supply + injection supply.UPC Program No. rear left-hand light track 5 Track 7 headlight beam adjustment rheostat switch Windscreen wiper motor connector track 5 Track 4 rear right-hand light.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . protection relay Right-hand headlight washer motor + control supply Electric power assisted steering/airbag + protected after ignition supply Windscreen wiper low speed + control supply Steering column lock + protected after ignition supply Left-hand headlight washer pump motor + control supply + left-hand side light supply 9 10 11 12 UPC84 V1. UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Allocation of computer tracks 87G Computer track Function Connector CT1 Sensor .1 87G-14 Edition 2 .actuator track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CAN L ABS CAN L ABS CAN H Injection/steering column lock + after ignition supply Oil level sensor signal 1 Oil level sensor signal 2 Injection CAN L CAN H Injection CAN H Windscreen wiper park position control supply Water in diesel detection sensor signal + accessories supply Connector AN Track 16 UCH connector PE2 Track 15 airbag computer black connector Track 14 ABS/ESP computer black connector Track 26 airbag computer black connector Track 35 ABS/ESP computer black connector Track D1 injection computer black connector Track 5 steering column lock Track 8 instrument panel black connector Track 7 instrument panel black connector Track A3 injection computer black connector Track 6 UCH connector PE2 Track A4 injection computer black connector Track 2 windscreen wiper motor orange connector Track B3 injection computer grey connector Track 1G passenger compartment fuse and relay box black connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + front right-hand side light supply + front left-hand fog light supply + front right-hand fog light supply + left-hand dipped headlight supply + front left-hand side light supply + front right-hand dipped beam headlight supply + left-hand main beam headlight supply + right-hand main beam headlight supply Track 5 front right-hand side light Front left-hand fog light track 1 Front right-hand fog light track 1 Left-hand headlight Track 5 front left-hand side light Right-hand headlight Track 4 left-hand headlight Track 4 right-hand headlight UPC84 V1.: C54 Vdiag no. actuator track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Alternator synchronous bit signal Not used Not used Not used Fuel pump relay coil control supply Water in diesel detection sensor signal Oil pressure warning light control supply + alternator excitation supply High-speed fan assembly relay .1 87G-15 Edition 2 .: C54 Vdiag no.control + accessories supply Oil level sensor signal 1 Oil level sensor signal 2 Connector MM Track 2 alternator black connector Track 2 water in diesel sensor black connector Pressure switch track 1 Track 1 alternator black connector Track 2 fan assembly relay white connector Track A1 diesel fuel heater relay cyan connector Track 2 oil level sensor black connector Track 1 oil level sensor black connector 1 High-speed fan assembly supply Track 1 fan assembly black connector if climate control Track 2 fan assembly black connector if manual or regulated heating Track 1 fan assembly resistor Starter solenoid Track 1 + Protected battery supply fuse F3 2 3 4 5 6 Fan assembly + control supply + starting supply Protected + battery supply Not used Fan assembly fuse + protected battery supply Track 1 power and supply fuse board orange connector UPC84 V1.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Allocation of computer tracks 87G Computer track Function Connector MT1 Sensor .UPC Program No. 1 87G-16 Edition 2 .: C54 Vdiag no.Allocation of computer tracks 87G Computer track Function Connector MN Sensor .actuator track 1 2 3 4 5 Injection + supply Injection + supply Injection + supply LPG computer + after ignition supply Power latch relay coil .control Track 4 air flowmeter black connector (with RH connections) Track C2 LPG computer blue connector – track D4 injection computer brown connector (K4J. F4R) – track E1 injection computer brown connector (F9Q) – track F1 injection computer grey connector (K9K) Track A1 diesel fuel heater relay cyan connector 6 7 8 Protected + battery supply Not used Automatic gearbox computer or LPG computer + battery supply Track 56 automatic gearbox computer connector A tracks A1 and A3 of the LPG solenoid valve relays 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Ignition coil control Air conditioning clutch + control Reversing lights + after ignition supply Automatic gearbox neutral + signal Automatic gearbox computer + after ignition supply Reversing lights + after ignition supply Injection power + battery supply Not used Automatic gearbox computer connector A track 27 Reversing lights switch track 1. K4M. neutral sensor/reversing lights track 1 UPC84 V1.UPC Program No. neutral sensor/reversing lights track 2 Track A3 fuel pump relay Track A air conditioning compressor clutch Reversing lights switch track 2.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Switch the ignition off and on again for the configurations to be recognised.Replacement of components 87G Once a component is replaced. IMPORTANT Removing or replacing the Protection and Switching Unit computer relays is forbidden.: C54 Vdiag no. run VP004 Vehicle parameters (see Configuration and programming). UPC84 V1.1 87G-17 Edition 2 .UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 V1. ● In the configuration reading menu. ● Select the line corresponding to the vehicle equipment from the drop-down menus.: C54 Vdiag no. ● Select line VP004 vehicle parameters.Configurations and programming 87G Equipment required CLIP diagnostic tool This operation is used to configure the Protection and Switching Unit to the equipment present in the vehicle.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . ● Confirm the configurations selected then click on confirm.1 87G-18 Edition 2 . check that each configuration has been performed. Configuration VP004 LC008 LC007 LC013 Gearbox type Front fog lights Headlight washers Manual/Automatic WITH/WITHOUT WITH/WITHOUT Configuration reading Name of configuration Choice of configuration Procedure to follow for modifying these configurations: ● Establish dialogue with the UPC. ● Select the write configuration menu. ● Select the repair mode menu. Make sure that all the vehicle's equipment is working. ● Switch the ignition off and then back on for the configurations to be recognised by the computer.UPC Program No. ALTERNATOR CONNECTION VOLTAGE REGULATION ALTERNATOR ACCESSORIES SUPPLY UPC84 V1.UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Tool fault DF006 DF034 DF016 DF017 DF014 DF015 DF030 DF023 DF018 DF019 DF020 DF035 DF022 DF031 DF036 DF029 DF024 DF025 DF026 DF021 DF032 DF033 DF007 DF013 DF012 DF027 Associated DTC 920E 9212 9215 9216 9217 9218 9219 921A 921B 921C 921D 9213 921E 921F 9220 9221 9222 9223 9224 9226 9227 9229 9211 920F 9210 9225 Diagnostic tool title COMPUTER ALTERNATOR TYPE LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT FRONT FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT COMPUTER SUPPLY REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT INJECTION/STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY GAS COMPUTER SUPPLY ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT +12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FAN ASSEMBLY SUPPLY CIRCUIT UPC .Fault summary table 87G Summary of faults on which fault finding can be performed by the Protection and Switching Unit. (with corresponding design office codes).1 87G-19 Edition 2 . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.Interpretation of faults COMPUTER 1.: C54 Vdiag no. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.UPC Program No.1 USM_V48_DF006 87G-20 Edition 2 . The fault is declared present after the ignition is switched off and back on.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is present.DEF: Internal electrical fault 87G DF006 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults. contact the Techline. UPC84 V1. : C54 Vdiag no.ALTERNATOR CONNECTION CO : Open circuit CC : Short circuit to earth or to + 12 V 1. UPC84 V1.UPC Program No. alternator AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. Check the condition of the UPC . NOTES Special notes: If the Protection and Switching Unit connection is correct. its voltage is above 3 V.DEF: Communication disrupted 87G DF007 PRESENT OR STORED Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after the engine has been running for 10 minutes. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check the continuity on the UPC-Alternator connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1 track 1 Replace the wiring harness if necessary.Alternator connection at the alternator end. CO NOTES None Disconnect the UPC-Alternator connection from the alternator and the Protection and Switching Unit.Interpretation of faults UPC .Alternator connection at the Protection and Switching Unit end.1 USM_V48_DF007 87G-21 Edition 2 . Check the condition of Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1. Check the condition of the UPC .: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. 1 st procedure Using an oscilloscope. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. the USM is communicating with the alternator. Measure the voltage between the alternator body earth and the vehicle earth. check for a square pulse signal on the UPC-alternator connection.UPC Program No. If the voltage is less than 3 V. Check that the alternator earth is connected (straps. and disconnect the alternator-side connection.). contact Techline. Adjust the oscilloscope as follows: – calibration: 5 V/div – Time base: 500 µs/div Check for a square pulse signal on the oscilloscope. With the engine running. etc.1 USM_V48_DF007 87G-22 Edition 2 . switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.DEF NOTES None Check the connections on the alternator. If the difference is greater than 1 V.Interpretation of faults 87G DF007 CONTINUED 1 Connect the UPC-Alternator connection to the Protection and Switching Unit.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . check the vehicle earths. contact the Techline. Connect the oscilloscope between the UPC-alternator connection connector (on the alternator side) and a body earth. switch on the heated rear screen.: C54 Vdiag no. contact Techline. UPC84 V1. Check the connections on Protection and Switching Unit 12-track connector MT1. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. 2 nd procedure Measure the connection voltage on the alternator side with the multimeter. If the signal obtained is different. The test must not be carried out until the engine has been running for at least 10 minutes. If the fault is still present. as shown in the diagram below: If the signal obtained is similar. contact Techline. 1. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: C54 Vdiag no.UPC Program No. contact the Techline. UPC84 V1. Check the connections on the 12-track Protection and Switching Unit MT1 connector. Disconnect the UPC-Alternator connection from the alternator and the Protection and Switching Unit. Make sure that the UPC-Alternator connection is insulated against the + 12 V supply and earth: Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1 track 1 Replace the connection if necessary. alternator AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory.Interpretation of faults 87G DF007 CONTINUED 2 CC NOTES None Check the connections on the alternator. Measure the voltage on track 1 of Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1.1 87G-23 Edition 2 . and run another check with the diagnostic tool. If the voltage is 12 V. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Multiplexing). AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. Apply the multiplex network fault finding procedure (see 88B. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: C54 Vdiag no.1 USM_V48_DF008 87G-24 Edition 2 .UPC Program No. UPC84 V1.Interpretation of faults MULTIPLEX NETWORK 87G DF008 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES None.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 V1.DEF NOTES None Check the fitting. Check that the alternator is not clogged. Carry out command AC014 Alternator Regulation. contact the Techline. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the alternator is not clogged. contact the Techline.Interpretation of faults ALTERNATOR 1.DEF: Alternator mechanical fault 87G DF012 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to present faults: The fault is declared present when: the engine is running. 1.: C54 Vdiag no.UPC Program No. If the fault is still present. Carry out command AC014 Alternator Regulation. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. condition and tension of the accessories drive belt. Check the conformity of the connections and tightness of the alternator earth. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. condition and tension of the accessories drive belt. Check the conformity of the connections and tightness of the alternator earths.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .1 USM_V48_DF012 87G-25 Edition 2 .DEF: Alternator electrical fault 2.DEF NOTES None – – – – – Check the fitting. If the fault is still present. 2. and check its interpretation. and check its interpretation. contact the Techline. UPC84 V1. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the alternator and the battery. In the event of a fault. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the alternator earth is sound.: C54 Vdiag no. Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to present faults: The fault is declared present after: when the engine is running. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC014.Interpretation of faults VOLTAGE REGULATION 1.DEF: Voltage too high 87G DF013 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES Deal with fault DF012 Alternator if it is present or stored first. Run command AC014 Alternator regulation. If the fault is still present.1 USM_V48_DF013 87G-26 Edition 2 . Check the charging circuit) if not correct. Check command PR004 Battery voltage and carry out fault finding on the battery and charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014A.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .DEF : Voltage too low 2.UPC Program No. Repair if necessary.1 USM_V48_DF014 87G-27 Edition 2 . UPC84 V1.: C54 Vdiag no. Repair if necessary. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 5 Repair if necessary. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. bent. bent oxidised). Check the insulation. Repair if necessary. Clear the computer fault memory. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check that earth on track 2 of the front left-hand side light connector is perfect. Check that the front left-hand side light bulb is sound. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken. Check the fitting and switch on the front left-hand side light.Interpretation of faults LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. Check the condition and connection of the 2-track connector on the front left-hand side light (tabs broken.UPC Program No.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF014 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. track 5 of the front left-hand side light connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. contact the Techline. oxidised).: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. Repair if necessary. Check that UPC fuse F1 (7. UPC84 V1. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present.5A) is correct. Clear the computer fault memory.UPC Program No. Check the insulation. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 5 Repair if necessary. contact the Techline.1 87G-28 Edition 2 .Interpretation of faults 87G DF014 CONTINUED CCO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . track 2 of the front left-hand side light connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present. Clear the computer fault memory. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check that the earth on track 2 of the front right-hand side light connector is perfect. Check that the front right-hand side light bulb is sound.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF015 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the 2-track connector on the front right-hand side light (tabs broken. bent oxidised).Interpretation of faults RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. Check the insulation. oxidised). bent. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check the fitting and switch on the front right-hand side light. UPC84 V1. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.1 USM_V48_DF015 87G-29 Edition 2 .: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. track 5 of the front right-hand side light connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 1 Repair if necessary. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken. Check that UPC fuse F2 (7.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the insulation. contact the Techline. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 1 Repair if necessary. UPC84 V1.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: C54 Vdiag no. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.5A) is correct.UPC Program No.1 87G-30 Edition 2 . track 5 of the front right-hand side light connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Clear the computer fault memory.Interpretation of faults 87G DF015 CONTINUED CC. If the fault is still present. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer fault memory. Check the fitting and switch on the left-hand headlight. UPC84 V1.Interpretation of faults LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . bent oxidised). Check that the left-hand dipped beam headlight bulb is sound. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. contact the Techline. track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no. If the fault is still present. Check that the earth on track 1 of the left-hand headlight connector is perfect. broken. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. Check the insulation. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken. Repair if necessary. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF016 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. oxidised).1 USM_V48_DF016 87G-31 Edition 2 . Repair if necessary. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4 Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight 4 track connector (tabs bent. 1 87G-32 Edition 2 . UPC84 V1. track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present. Check that UPC fuse F4 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.: C54 Vdiag no. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.UPC Program No.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Clear the computer fault memory. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4 Repair if necessary. contact the Techline.Interpretation of faults 87G DF016 CONTINUED CC. Check that the earth on track 1 of the right-hand headlight connector is perfect. track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.: C54 Vdiag no. If the fault is still present. Check that the right-hand dipped beam headlight bulb is sound. Check the insulation. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check the fitting and switch on the right-hand headlight. Repair if necessary. oxidised). Repair if necessary. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Repair if necessary. Clear the computer fault memory. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Program No. Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken. broken. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF017 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight 4-track connector (tabs bent. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 6 Repair if necessary.1 USM_V48_DF017 87G-33 Edition 2 . bent oxidised).Interpretation of faults RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. UPC84 V1. Interpretation of faults 87G DF017 CONTINUED CC.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Program No. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Clear the computer fault memory. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.1 87G-34 Edition 2 .: C54 Vdiag no. UPC84 V1. contact the Techline. Check the insulation. track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present. Check that UPC fuse F3 (10A) is correct. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 6 Repair if necessary. bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. Clear the computer fault memory. UPC84 V1.: C54 Vdiag no. oxidised). run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 7 Repair if necessary. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight 4 track connector (tabs bent. Check the fitting and switch on the left-hand headlight. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken.Interpretation of faults LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. Repair if necessary. Check that the left-hand main beam headlight bulb is sound.1 USM_V48_DF018 87G-35 Edition 2 . If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. broken. contact the Techline. Repair if necessary. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. track 4 of the left-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.UPC Program no. Check the insulation. Check that the earth on track 1 of the left-hand headlight connector is perfect.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF018 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . and run another check with the diagnostic tool. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 7 Repair if necessary. Clear the computer fault memory.UPC Program No. contact the Techline. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. track 4 of the left-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. UPC84 V1.1 87G-36 Edition 2 . switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. If the fault is still present.: C54 Vdiag no. Check the insulation. Check that UPC fuse F6 (10A) is correct.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored.Interpretation of faults 87G DF018 CONTINUED CC. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 V1. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Check the insulation.UPC Program No. track 4 of the right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check that the earth on track 1 of the right-hand headlight connector is perfect. If the fault is still present.1 USM_V48_DF019 87G-37 Edition 2 . Check the fitting and switch on the right-hand headlight. bent oxidised).Interpretation of faults RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. broken. contact the Techline.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF019 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight 4-track connector (tabs bent. oxidised). Repair if necessary. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 8 Repair if necessary. Clear the computer fault memory. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.: C54 Vdiag no. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken. Check that the right-hand main beam headlight bulb is sound. 0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. contact the Techline.Interpretation of faults 87G DF019 CONTINUED CC. Check that UPC fuse F7 (10A) is correct. Clear the computer fault memory.: C54 Vdiag no. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. track 4 of the right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check the insulation. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 8 Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. If the fault is still present.1 87G-38 Edition 2 . and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1. UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF020 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Clear the computer fault memory. Check the fitting and switch on the front fog lights. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.Interpretation of faults FRONT FOG LIGHTS CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the earth on track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector is perfect. Check that the front fog light bulbs are sound. Repair if necessary. oxidised). switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2 UPC track 3 Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present.: C54 Vdiag no. Check that the earth on track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary.1 USM_V48_DF020 87G-39 Edition 2 . contact the Techline. Check the insulation. Check the condition and connection of the front fog light 2-track connectors (tabs broken. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken. bent. UPC84 V1. Repair if necessary or replace the light(s) if faulty. track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. 0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .1 87G-40 Edition 2 . contact the Techline. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check the insulation. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no. Clear the computer fault memory. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2 UPC track 3 Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87G DF020 CONTINUED CC. UPC84 V1. If the fault is still present. Check that UPC fuse F5 (20A) is correct. track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2 track 5 of the rear left-hand light connector track 2 of the rear right-hand light connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present. contact the Techline.Interpretation of faults REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT CC.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. UPC84 V1. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.UPC Program No.1 USM_V48_DF021 87G-41 Edition 2 . Check that UPC fuse F19 (10A) is correct.: C54 Vdiag no. Check the insulation.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF021 PRESENT OR STORED CC.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If the fault is still present. Check that the earth on track 1 of the rear right-hand light connector is perfect. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track Protection and Switching Unit CM connector (tabs broken. oxidised). Repair if necessary.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF022 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Repair if necessary. contact the Techline.UPC Program No. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4 Repair if necessary. Check the insulation. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. track 1 of the heated rear screen connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1. bent. Check the condition and connection of the heated rear screen (tabs broken.1 USM_V48_DF022 87G-42 Edition 2 . switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. bent oxidised). Clear the computer fault memory.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: C54 Vdiag no.Interpretation of faults REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC. Repair if necessary. Check that UPC fuse F23 (30A) is correct. track 1 of the heated rear screen connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check the insulation. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .: C54 Vdiag no. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4 Repair if necessary.1 87G-43 Edition 2 . run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present.UPC Program No.Interpretation of faults 87G DF022 CONTINUED CC. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1. Clear the computer fault memory. 1 USM_V48_DF023 87G-44 Edition 2 .: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 V1. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF023 PRESENT OR STORED CC. Check that UPC fuse F9 (25A) is correct.Interpretation of faults WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT CC.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Clear the computer fault memory. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 4 UPC track 9 Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. Check the insulation. track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor orange connector track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor orange connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present.UPC Program No. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.: C54 Vdiag no. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4 Repair if necessary.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF024 PRESENT OR STORED CC. Check that UPC fuse F16 (10A) is correct.1 USM_V48_DF024 87G-45 Edition 2 . If the fault is still present. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. track C2 of the LPG computer connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the insulation. Clear the computer fault memory. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.Interpretation of faults GAS COMPUTER SUPPLY CC.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. UPC84 V1. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.: C54 Vdiag no. contact the Techline.UPC Program No. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the insulation. Check that UPC fuse F10 (5A) is correct. contact the Techline.UPC Program No. UPC84 V1. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 8 track 7 of the airbag computer black connector track 8 of the electric power assisted steering black connector Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults 87G DF025 PRESENT OR STORED ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY CC. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Clear the computer fault memory.: C54 Vdiag no.0 : Short circuit to earth CC.1 USM_V48_DF025 87G-46 Edition 2 . and run another check with the diagnostic tool. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. 0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF026 PRESENT OR STORED CC. UPC84 V1. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 13 Repair if necessary. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. If the fault is still present. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.UPC Program No. Check the insulation. Clear the computer fault memory.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . track 27 of the automatic gearbox computer connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored.Interpretation of faults AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY CC. Check that UPC fuse F15 (5A) is correct. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: C54 Vdiag no.1 USM_V48_DF026 87G-47 Edition 2 . contact the Techline. contact the Techline. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 4 track 5 of the steering column lock 6-track black connector track D1 of the injection computer black connector Repair if necessary.UPC Program No.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.0 : Short circuit to earth CC.1 USM_V48_DF029 87G-48 Edition 2 .: C54 Vdiag no. Check the insulation. If the fault is still present. Check that UPC fuse F18 (5A) is correct. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. UPC84 V1. Clear the computer fault memory. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.Interpretation of faults 87G DF029 PRESENT OR STORED ENGINE MANAGEMENT/STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CC. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . 1 USM_V48_DF030 87G-49 Edition 2 . and run another check with the diagnostic tool. Check the insulation.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. Check that UPC fuse F22 (10A) is correct. UPC84 V1. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 10 Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF030 PRESENT OR STORED CC.Interpretation of faults CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC. Clear the computer fault memory.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. track A of the climate control clutch 2-track grey connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.: C54 Vdiag no. If the fault is still present. track 1 of the headlight washer pump 2-track black connector track 2 of the headlight washer pump 2-track black connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF031 PRESENT OR STORED CC. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present.1 USM_V48_DF031 87G-50 Edition 2 . Clear the computer fault memory.Interpretation of faults HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Program No. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Check the insulation. Check that UPC fuse F21 (15A) is correct.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. contact the Techline. UPC84 V1.: C54 Vdiag no. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 11 UPC track 7 Repair if necessary. Check the insulation. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If the fault is still present.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. F12 (20A) and F20 (20A) are correct.Interpretation of faults +12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC. track A1 of the diesel heater relay connector track 3 ABS computer connector AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC connector MN track 8 track 56 of automatic gearbox computer connector A track A1 and A3 of the LPG solenoid valve relays UPC connector MN track 6 UPC connector CM track 5 Repair if necessary.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF032 PRESENT OR STORED CC. Check that UPC fuses F8 (25A). and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: C54 Vdiag no. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. contact the Techline.UPC Program No. Clear the computer fault memory.1 USM_V48_DF032 87G-51 Edition 2 . UPC84 V1.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. Check the insulation. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 1 track 2 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (heating) track 1 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (climate control) Repair if necessary. bent oxidised). UPC84 V1. If the fault is still present. oxidised). Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 1 track 2 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (heating) track 1 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (climate control) Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of faults FAN ASSEMBLY SUPPLY CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.UPC Program No. Clear the computer fault memory. bent. CC.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track Protection and Switching Unit MM connector (tabs broken. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. and run another check with the diagnostic tool.: C54 Vdiag no. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Check the insulation.0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF033 PRESENT OR STORED CO NOTES To display this fault as present or stored. AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.1 USM_V48_DF033 87G-52 Edition 2 . Check the condition and connection of the fan assembly 2 -track black connector (tabs broken. If the fault is still present.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . UPC84 V1. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. that the alternator type corresponds to that fitted to the vehicle. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. If the fault is still present.1 USM_V48_DF034 87G-53 Edition 2 .DEF: inconsistency 87G DF034 PRESENT OR STORED NOTES None.UPC Program No. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory.Interpretation of faults ALTERNATOR TYPE 1. by reading configuration LC001 ALTERNATOR TYPE. Check.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . contact the Techline. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer fault memory. UPC84 V1.DEF: voltage too low 87G DF035 PRESENT OR STORED The fault is declared present after: a drop in the UPC voltage to less than 8 V for longer than 10 seconds.1 USM_V48_DF035 87G-54 Edition 2 . switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Contact the Techline.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of faults COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1.UPC Program No. and run another check with the diagnostic tool. NOTES The fault is declared stored following: a drop in the UPC voltage to less than 8 V for longer than 10 seconds followed by a rise in the voltage to more than 8 V. 0 : Short circuit to earth 87G DF036 PRESENT OR STORED CC. UPC84 V1. switch the + after ignition supply off and back on. Check the insulation.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . and run another check with the diagnostic tool.UPC Program No. Check that UPC fuse F11 (15A) is correct. track 2 of UCH connector PP2 AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.Interpretation of faults STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 NOTES To display this fault as present or stored.: C54 Vdiag no. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present.1 USM_V48_DF036 87G-55 Edition 2 . run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory. continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 10 Repair if necessary. : C54 Vdiag no. Main screen Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes Fault finding If there is a fault.UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped.5 V 2 Reverse gear ET004: Reverse gear engaged Oil pressure contact + 12 V after ignition feed relay control YES NO OPEN CLOSED INACTIVE ACTIVE 3 Oil pressure + 12 V after ignition feed ET027: 4 ET003: None USM_V48_CCONF UPC84 V1. None 1 Battery voltage PR004: Battery voltage 11 V < X < 13. refer to the procedure for dealing with parameter PR004 Battery voltage. In the event of a fault.1 87G-56 Edition 2 . + after ignition feed active. refer to the interpretation of status ET004. Normal status. In the event of a fault. Normal statuses. Checking the charge circuit. consult the interpretation for status ET010. Keyless vehicle Sub-function: starting Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes Fault finding In the event of a fault. In the event of a fault. refer to the interpretation of status ET004. 16A. + after ignition feed active.1 87G-57 Edition 2 . In the event of a fault. consult the interpretation of fault DF032.UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no. Application conditions: engine stopped. In the event of a fault.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Starting-charging ). 1 + 12 V after ignition feed AC015: + 12 V after ignition feed This command is used to activate the + after ignition feed 2 Reverse gear ET004: Reverse gear engaged YES NO NOT IN NEUTRAL NEUTRAL UNAVAILABLE INVALID STATUS 1 STATUS 2 STATUS 3 YES 3 Manual gearbox gear lever position ET005: Manual gearbox gear lever position 4 Starting conditions met ET010: Starting conditions met 5 + 12 V after ignition feed relay control ET003: + 12 V after ignition feed relay control INACTIVE ACTIVE UPC84 V1. consult the interpretation for status ET005. run fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014A.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). : C54 Vdiag no. if fitted to the vehicle.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .1 87G-58 Edition 2 . apply the procedure for dealing with command AC011.UPC Program No. FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: HEATING Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes 0 < X < 99 % Switch on the heated rear screen and check that the value increases This command supplies the rear screen and door mirror heating resistors. + after ignition feed active. consult the interpretation of parameter PR010 . Application conditions: engine stopped. 1 Alternator PR010: Alternator 2 Rear screen de-icer AC011: Rear screen de-icer UPC84 V1. Fault finding In the event of a fault. They should be warm.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). In the event of a fault. 1 Compressor control AC008: Compressor control In the event of a fault. In the event of a fault. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC009. This command is used to activate the fan assembly at low speed. consult the interpretation for status ET014 . In the event of a fault.1 87G-59 Edition 2 .UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no. In the event of a fault.Conformity check 87G Fault finding Sub-function: Cold loop Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes You should be able to hear the compressor clutch (stops the motor running).: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . apply the procedure for dealing with command AC010. In the event of a fault. AC009: 2 Fan assembly AC010: Low-speed fan assembly High-speed fan assembly Low-speed engine fan assembly relay control High-speed engine fan assembly relay control 3 Low-speed engine fan assembly relay control High-speed engine fan assembly relay control ET014: INACTIVE ACTIVE 4 ET013: INACTIVE ACTIVE UPC84 V1. This command is used to activate the fan assembly at high speed. consult the interpretation for status ET013. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC008. refer to the interpretation for status ET002.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). refer to the interpretation of status ET018 .UPC Program No. 4 Headlight washer AC013: Headlight washers relay UPC84 V1. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC013.: C54 Vdiag no. In the event of a fault. In the event of a fault. apply the procedure for commands AC005 and AC006 2 Windscreen wiper protection ET002: Windscreen wiper protection INACTIVE In the event of a fault. 3 Windscreen wiper park position ET018: Windscreen wiper park position PRESENT (if the wiper is not active) ABSENT This command is used to activate the headlight washers relay on the right and left-hand side alternately. FUNCTION: WIPING Sub-function: WIPING POWER Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes This command is used to activate the windscreen wiper motor at low speed.1 87G-60 Edition 2 . Fault finding AC004: 1 Wiper AC006: Low-speed wiper High-speed wiper In the event of a fault. This command is used to activate the windscreen wiper motor at high speed. Application conditions: engine stopped. + after ignition feed active.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . : C54 Vdiag no. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC002.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . In the event of a fault. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC003. In the event of a fault. This command switches on the front fog lights. 1 Side lights AC003: Side lights 2 Dipped headlights AC002: Dipped headlights 3 Main beam headlights AC001: Main beam headlights 4 Front fog lights AC004: Front fog lights UPC84 V1. This command switches on the dipped beam headlights. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC004. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC001. Application conditions: engine stopped.1 87G-61 Edition 2 .UPC Program No. In the event of a fault. + after ignition feed active. This command switches on the main beam headlights.Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Fault finding In the event of a fault. FUNCTION: LIGHTING Sub-function: LIGHTING POWER Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes This command switches on the side lights. : C54 Vdiag no. apply the procedure for dealing with command AC014.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). FUNCTION: CHARGE CIRCUIT Sub-function: ALTERNA TOR Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Alternator thermal fault Display and Notes Fault finding In the event of a fault. Application conditions: engine running. consult the interpretation of status ET023. the Protection and Switching Unit sets a regulation voltage setpoint for the alternator: – Alternator voltage = 15 V for 30 seconds – Alternator voltage = 13 V for 30 seconds 3 Alternator PR010: Alternator 4 Alternator regulation AC014: Alternator regulation In the event of a fault. UPC84 V1. In the event of a fault. apply the procedure for dealing with command PR010 Alternator Charge.1 87G-62 Edition 2 .UPC Program No. When the command is run. 1 Alternator fault ET023: ABSENT 0 < X < 99 % Switch on the heated rear screen and check that the value increases Run this command with the engine running. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Conformity check 87G NOTES Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped. apply the procedure for dealing with command PR004 Battery voltage.5 V UPC84 V1.5 V Battery voltage after rest 12. PR004: 1 Voltages PR008: Battery voltage 11 < X < 13.UPC Program No. apply the procedure for dealing with command PR008 Battery voltage after rest .1 V < X < 13.1 87G-63 Edition 2 .: C54 Vdiag no. + after ignition feed active. FUNCTION: CHARGE CIRCUIT Sub-function: BATTERY Order Function Parameter or Status checked or Action Display and Notes Fault finding If there is a fault. If there is a fault. UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .1 87G-64 Edition 2 .Status summary table 87G Tool status ET002 ET003 ET004 ET010 ET021 ET022 ET023 ET013 ET014 ET005 ET018 ET027 Windscreen wiper protection Diagnostic tool title + 12 V after ignition feed relay control Reverse gear engaged Starting conditions met Alternator electrical fault Alternator mechanical fault Alternator thermal fault High-speed fan assembly relay control Low-speed fan assembly relay control Manual gearbox gear lever position Windscreen wiper park position Oil pressure contact UPC84 V1. condition and assembly of the wiper mechanism linkage and no object that could impair the movement of the mechanism). continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector CT1 track 10 UPC connector CN track 4 UPC connector CN track 9 Repair if necessary.1 87G-65 Edition 2 . Check that the windscreen wiper mechanism is not seized. The status returns to INACTIVE as soon as the UCH requests another wiping setpoint (wiper control adjusted or request by the rain sensor).: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If everything is in order but the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connectors CT1 and CN on the UPC and the windscreen wiper motor.Interpretation of statuses WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION 87G ET002 NOTES Special notes: Only apply the checks if the status is ACTIVE or LOCKED. If the status is LOCKED. contact the Techline. If the status is ACTIVE.UPC Program No. Repair if necessary. this means that after a wiping request. track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor connector track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor connector track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. USM_V48_ET002 UPC84 V1. the UPC detected abnormal operation for more than 6 seconds (restricted or jammed). Check the insulation. this means that the total duration of pauses is greater than 2 minutes. Make sure that nothing is mechanically blocking the movement of the wiper arms (blades stuck. USM_V48_ET004 UPC84 V1. If the fault is still present. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged.: C54 Vdiag no. Repair if necessary. check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. track 2 of the switch track 2 neutral sensor track 1 neutral sensor AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.UPC Program No.1 87G-66 Edition 2 . – There must be no faults present. 5-speed manual gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. check for insulation. contact the Techline.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . If this is not correct.Interpretation of statuses REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED 87G ET004 NOTES Special notes: Only apply the checks if: – + after ignition feed is active. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14 Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11 Reverse gear engaged: Switch track 1 Repair if necessary. UPC84 V1. check for insulation. contact the Techline.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . continuity and the absence of interference resistance on connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14 Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11 Repair if necessary. If this is not correct. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged. contact the Techline. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11 Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14 Reverse gear engaged: Switch track 1 Repair if necessary. track A2. If the fault is still present.: C54 Vdiag no. check for insulation. Automatic gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN.1 87G-67 Edition 2 . Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. If the fault is still present. multifunction switch track A1 multifunction switch track 2 of the switch track 2 neutral sensor track 1 neutral sensor AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN.Interpretation of statuses 87G ET004 CONTINUED 6-speed manual gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. If this is not correct. contact your Techline. Make sure that the selector lever is in position P or N.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . STATUS 2 OR STATUS 3. UCH). Diesel injection and 17B. STATUS 3 The automatic gearbox computer is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from running the starter. refer to ALP 2.Interpretation of statuses STARTING CONDITIONS MET 87G ET010 NOTES Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is STATUS 1. If the conditions are met and the starter does not work. with the ignition on. Run fault finding on this computer (see 13B. If the fault is still present.1 87G-68 Edition 2 . Petrol injection). Run fault finding on this computer (see 23A. automatic gearbox). Run fault finding on this computer (see 87B. STATUS 1 The UCH is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from activating the starter.UPC Program No. USM_V48_ET010 UPC84 V1.: C54 Vdiag no. STATUS 2 The injection is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from running the starter. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. check the charging circuit (see Technical Note 6014A. 16A. Replace the belt if necessary. If the fault is still present. USM_V48_ET021 UPC84 V1. contact the Techline. Starting-charging). If status ET022 Alternator mechanical fault is PRESENT.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the alternator connector and Protection and Switching Unit connector MT. Checking the charging circuit.: C54 Vdiag no. Replace the alternator if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.1 87G-69 Edition 2 .UPC Program No. If status ET022 Alternator mechanical fault is ABSENT. check the condition and tension of the accessories belt.Interpretation of statuses ALTERNATOR ELECTRICAL FAULT 87G ET021 NOTES Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT with the engine running. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Replace the belt if necessary. If the fault is still present.UPC Program No.Interpretation of statuses ALTERNATOR MECHANICAL FAULT 87G ET022 NOTES Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT with the engine running.1 87G-70 Edition 2 . contact the Techline.: C54 Vdiag no. Check the condition and tension of the accessories belt. USM_V48_ET022 UPC84 V1. let the alternator cool down with the bonnet open for at least 1 hour.UPC Program No. contact the Techline. Start the engine with the bonnet closed. Stop the engine Check the general condition of the alternator: Make sure that there are no foreign bodies that could impair the alternator cooling.: C54 Vdiag no. Switch on the main beam headlights and rear screen de-icer.1 87G-71 Edition 2 . with the engine running. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. With the engine stopped.Interpretation of statuses ALTERNATOR THERMAL FAULT 87G ET023 NOTES Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT. Clean the alternator if necessary. USM_V48_ET023 UPC84 V1. If the status returns to PRESENT.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Parameter summary table 87G Tool parameter PR004 PR008 PR006 PR010 Battery voltage Battery voltage after rest Alternator setpoint voltage Alternator charge Diagnostic tool title UPC84 V1.UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .1 87G-72 Edition 2 . AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0. 16A. check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit.1 87G-73 Edition 2 .3 V difference between the 2 values). carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014. Engine running: 10. USM_V48_PR004 UPC84 V1.5 V .: C54 Vdiag no.5 V < X < 16 V. Starting-charging). If the values are consistent.UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Interpretation of parameters BATTERY VOLTAGE 87G PR004 NOTES None Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR004 Battery voltage. Engine stopped: 11 V < X < 13. Checking the charging circuit. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Wait 20 seconds. Wait 20 seconds. for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0. deal with the fault.: C54 Vdiag no. Run AC014 Alternator regulation. ET023 Alternator thermal fault is present. Measure the voltage at the alternator terminals.2. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. ET022 Alternator mechanical fault. Special notes: Only apply the checks if: – the engine is running. Wait for 10 minutes with the engine running. contact the Techline. if fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present. deal with these statuses first. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Run AC014 Alternator regulation again. – the parameter value is inconsistent with the voltage value measured between the alternator B+ terminal and the alternator chassis earth. for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2.1 87G-74 Edition 2 . for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0. Wait 20 seconds. If the values obtained are not correct. USM_V48_PR006 UPC84 V1. deal with this fault first.UPC Program No. After 10 minutes.2. – if one of statuses ET021 Alternator electrical fault.Interpretation of parameters ALTERNATOR SETPOINT VOLTAGE 87G PR006 NOTES Priority in dealing with fault: – if fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present. Wait 20 seconds. between the B+ terminal and the alternator chassis earth. Interpretation of parameters BATTERY VOLTAGE AFTER REST 87G PR008 NOTES This value can only be interpreted after the engine and electrical consumers have been stopped for at least 8 hours.UPC Program No. check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit. Starting-charging).1 V < X < 13.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Checking the charging circuit. If the voltage values are consistent. Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR008 Battery voltage after rest.: C54 Vdiag no. This value must be between 12. 16A. USM_V48_PR008 UPC84 V1. carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014.3 V difference between the 2 values).5 V If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.1 87G-75 Edition 2 . Check that the fan assemblies are not running. NO Start the engine and let it idle for 30 minutes. If PR010 Alternator charge is locked at 100 %.1 87G-76 Edition 2 . Starting-charging). Wait 20 seconds and check that PR010 Alternator charge has increased but remains below 100 %. Check that the fan assemblies are not running. If PR010 Alternator charge is locked at 100 %. Is parameter PR008 Battery voltage after rest greater than 12. USM_V48_PR010 UPC84 V1. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. check that PR010 Alternator Charge is below 50 %.2 V? YES Start the engine and let it idle for 5 minutes. Checking the charging circuit. Wait 20 seconds and check that PR010 Alternator charge has increased but remains below 100 %. 16A. Deactivate the climate control request. contact the Techline. If the fault is still present.Interpretation of parameters ALTERNATOR CHARGE 87G PR010 NOTES If fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present.: C54 Vdiag no. Without electrical consumers running. contact the Techline.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . deal with this fault first. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Deactivate the climate control request. carry out fault finding on the battery and charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights.UPC Program No. 1 87G-77 Edition 2 .UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .Command summary table Diagnostic tool title Main beam headlights Dipped headlights Side lights Front fog lights Windscreen wiper low speed Windscreen wiper high-speed Compressor control Low-speed fan assembly High-speed fan assembly Rear screen de-icer Headlight washer relay Alternator regulation + 12 V after ignition feed Test electrical supply circuits 87G Tool command AC001 AC002 AC003 AC004 AC005 AC006 AC008 AC009 AC010 AC011 AC013 AC014 AC015 AC016 UPC84 V1. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Replace them. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 7 Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 8 Repair if necessary. Replace them.Interpretation of commands MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS 87G AC001 NOTES Check the condition and connections of fuses 6 (10A) and 7 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. If the fault is still present.UPC Program No. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. track 4 left-hand headlight connector track 4 right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. UPC84 V1. Repair if necessary.1 87G-78 Edition 2 . Check the insulation. contact the Techline.: C54 Vdiag no. if necessary. If the value is correct. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 4 of the headlight while the command is running.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 4 Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 6 Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. if necessary. Replace them. Check for +12 V feed on track 2 of the headlight while the command is running. Repair if necessary.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . if necessary.: C54 Vdiag no. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary.1 87G-79 Edition 2 . If the fault is still present. contact the Techline. UPC84 V1. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors.Interpretation of commands DIPPED HEADLIGHTS 87G AC002 NOTES Check the condition and connections of fuses 3 (10A) and 4 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the insulation. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. If the value is correct. Replace them. if necessary.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. Check for +12 V on track 5 of the headlight while the command is running. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Check the insulation. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit.5A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. UPC84 V1. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Replace them. Repair if necessary. Replace them. if necessary.UPC Program No. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 5 Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 1 Repair if necessary. If the value is correct. track 5 left-hand headlight connector track 5 right-hand headlight connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start.5A) and 2 (7. If the fault is still present.1 87G-80 Edition 2 . Repair if necessary.Interpretation of commands SIDE LIGHTS 87G AC003 NOTES Check the condition and connections of fuses 1 (7.: C54 Vdiag no. Check for insulation. Replace it if necessary.UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of the bulbs. Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary.Interpretation of commands FRONT FOG LIGHTS 87G AC004 NOTES Use this command only for vehicles fitted with front fog lights. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 2 Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 3 Repair if necessary. Check for earth on the bulb connectors. if necessary. If the value is correct. Check the condition and connection of connector AN on the Protection and Switching Unit.: C54 Vdiag no. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. track 1 left-hand fog light connector track 1 right-hand fog light connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. replace the bulb(s). UPC84 V1. If the fault is still present. Check for the + 12 V feed on the bulb connectors while the command is running. Check the condition and connection of fuse 5 (20A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. contact the Techline. Replace them.1 87G-81 Edition 2 . : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Make sure that status ET002 Windscreen wiper protection remains INACTIVE. If the value is correct. track 4 windscreen wiper motor AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connector CN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the wiper motor.Interpretation of commands WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED 87G AC005 NOTES Check the condition and connection of fuse 9 (25A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present.1 87G-82 Edition 2 . Repair if necessary. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 9 Repair if necessary. replace the motor.UPC Program No. Check the earth of track 1 of the wiper motor.: C54 Vdiag no. UPC84 V1. Check for the + 12 V feed on track 4 of the wiper motor while the command is running. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation. contact the Techline. If the value is correct. track 5 windscreen wiper motor AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connector CN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Make sure that status ET002 Windscreen wiper protection remains INACTIVE. contact the Techline.Interpretation of commands WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED 87G AC006 NOTES Check the condition and connection of fuse 9 (25A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. C54 Vdiag no. Replace it if necessary. Repair if necessary.1 87G-83 Edition 2 . Check the insulation. If the fault is still present. replace the motor.UPC Program No. UPC84 V1. Check the earth of track 1 of the wiper motor.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connections of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 4 Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 5 of the wiper motor while the command is running. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 10 Repair if necessary. contact the Techline. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector MN on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check for + 12 V on track A of the compressor while the command is running. UPC84 V1. track A compressor connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Check the condition and connection of the climate control compressor connector.UPC Program No.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the condition and connection of fuse 22 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the compressor is earthed. Repair if necessary.1 87G-84 Edition 2 . If the fault is still present. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation.Interpretation of commands COMPRESSOR CONTROL 87G AC008 NOTES Activating the command with the engine running is prohibited.: C54 Vdiag no. track 1 of the engine cooling fan AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. If this is not correct. contact the Techline. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MM track 2 Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no. check for insulation. replace the fan assembly. Check the condition and connection of the engine cooling fan connector.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Ensure that track 2 of the engine cooling fan is earthed. If the fault is still present.1 87G-85 Edition 2 . UPC84 V1. Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. If correct.Interpretation of commands LOW-SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY 87G AC009 NOTES Make sure nothing is hindering the rotation of the blades. Check for + 12 V feed on the fan assembly while the command is running. replace the fan assembly. track 1 of the fan assembly AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. If correct.UPC Program No. Repair if necessary. C54 Vdiag no. If the fault is still present. Ensure that track 2 of the engine cooling fan is earthed. Check the condition and connection of the engine cooling fan connector.Interpretation of commands HIGH-SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY 87G AC010 NOTES Make sure nothing is hindering the rotation of the blades. UPC84 V1. If not correct.1 87G-86 Edition 2 .: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . check the continuity and insulation on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MM track 1 Repair if necessary. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the fan assembly while the command is running. contact the Techline. UPC84 V1. Check for + 12 V feed on the rear screen terminal while the command is running. Replace it if necessary. Check for insulation.Interpretation of commands REAR SCREEN DE-ICER 87G AC011 NOTES Check the condition and connection of fuse 23 (30A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check that the resistance of the rear screen is neither zero nor infinity. Make sure that the rear screen is earthed. Repair if necessary.1 87G-87 Edition 2 . REAR SCREEN Check the condition and connection of the rear screen connectors. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector CM and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Program No. If the fault is still present. track 1 rear screen connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. C54 Vdiag no. contact the Techline. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CM track 4 Repair if necessary. 1 87G-88 Edition 2 . If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector CN.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Check the continuity. track 2 of the headlight washer pump black connector track 1 of the headlight washer pump black connector AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. If the fault is still present. Replace it if necessary. supply the pump's tracks directly in one direction and then the other. replace it. The headlight washer pump operates if the dipped headlights are lit and the windscreen washer switch is pressed and held. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the headlight washer pump. Check for + 12 V alternately on track 2 of the headlight washer pump connector. To check that the pump is working properly. UPC84 V1. insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 7 Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 11 Repair if necessary. C54 Vdiag no.Interpretation of commands HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 87G AC013 NOTES Check the condition and connection of fuse 21 (15A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary.UPC Program No. contact the Techline. If the pump does not rotate. If the values obtained are not correct.2 on the alternator. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Starting-charging). for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0. – then for another 30 seconds.).: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Effect of command: – for 30 seconds. the Protection and Switching Unit imposes a regulation voltage of 15 V ± 0.1 87G-89 Edition 2 . the Protection and Switching Unit imposes a regulation voltage of 13 V ± 0. for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights.2.2. Wait 20 seconds. Switch off all the electrical consumers (fans. – Climate control off. Run AC014 Alternator regulation. Measure the voltage across the alternator terminals between the B+ alternator terminal and the body of the alternator for the earth. Run AC014 Alternator regulation again.Interpretation of commands ALTERNATOR REGULATION 87G AC014 NOTES Conditions for the application of the command: – engine running at idling speed and warm engine. main beam headlights. – check that the fan assembly is not in operation. for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0. Wait 20 seconds. C54 Vdiag no. etc. 16A. Wait 20 seconds. UPC84 V1.UPC Program No.2. Wait 20 seconds. Checking the charging circuit. – check that PR010 Alternator charge is below 50 % without electrical consumers and below 90 % with the main beam headlights lit and rear screen de-icer activated.2. for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0. carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014.2 on the alternator. This command activates several electrical circuits run by the Protection and Switching Unit.UPC Program No.Interpretation of commands TEST ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CIRCUITS 87G AC016 NOTES Switch off the ignition. and so carry out fault finding on the fuses in open circuit or short circuit. Deal with present faults.1 87G-90 Edition 2 . AFTER REPAIR Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits again. UPC84 V1.: C54 Vdiag no. Read the faults.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding . Switch on the ignition again. Multiplex).: C54 Vdiag no. Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.Customer complaints 87G NOTES Run complete fault finding on the multiplex network (see 88B. RECORDED FAULTS NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER ALP 1 THE STARTER DOES NOT WORK NO BACKLIGHTING OF THE VARIOUS FUNCTIONS IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ALP 2 ALP 3 UPC84 V1.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding .UPC Program No.1 87G-91 Edition 2 . Repair if necessary.UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.1 87G-92 Edition 2 . Check the voltage of the battery.: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic . a + 12 V after ignition supply on track 1. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the battery fuse box fuses and terminals. If dialogue with the computer is still not possible. Repair if necessary. Check for a + 12 V battery feed on track 16. an earth on track 5 and on track 4 of the diagnostic socket. Check for + 12 V feed on the Protection and Switching Unit bolted power terminal. condition and operation of relay 9 (+ after ignition feed) on the UPC. Check the condition and connection of the connectors and fuses on the UPC. Replace any faulty fuses. Check for earth on tracks 3 and 6 of connector CM. Repair if necessary. USM_V48_ALP1 UPC84 V1. Check the connection.Fault finding charts 87G ALP 1 No dialogue with the computer NOTES Run a complete multiplex network check using the diagnostic tool. contact the Techline. Try the tool on another vehicle. : 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic .Fault finding charts 87G ALP 2 The starter does not work NOTES Run a complete multiplex network check using the diagnostic tool. carry out fault finding on the starter. With the starter activated. Check the insulation. and of the starter control terminal. If correct. Repair if necessary.1 87G-93 Edition 2 . check for 12 V feed on the starter control terminal. continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between UPC connector MM track 3 and the starter control terminal. Using status ET010 Starting conditions satisfied. USM_V48_ALP2 UPC84 V1. contact the Techline. Check the condition and connection of connector MM on the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present.: C54 Vdiag no. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. the status should be YES.UPC Program No. Repair if necessary. check that all the starting conditions have been fulfilled. climate control computer. door mirrors control.Fault finding charts 87G ALP 3 No backlighting of the various functions in the passenger compartment NOTES Make sure that the side lights are working. track 5 of Protection and Switching Unit connector CN.UPC Program No. USM_V48_ALP3 UPC84 V1. Check for insulation. If the fault is still present. refer to the procedure for command AC003 Side lights .: C54 Vdiag no. replace the defective component. righthand window winder controls. continuity and the absence of interference resistance between the faulty function and the Protection and Switching Unit: Rear right-hand light. check for 12 V feed on the faulty function(s). left-hand window winder controls. left-hand heated seat control. automatic gearbox display. Rear left-hand light. If correct. right-hand heated seat control. Repair if necessary. electric door mirrors control. cigarette lighter. cruise control/speed limiter control. contact the Techline. Repair if necessary. track 12 of Protection and Switching Unit connector CN. radio. number plate lighting. AFTER REPAIR Repeat the conformity check from the start. if not.1 87G-94 Edition 2 . Check the condition and connection of the faulty function(s).: 48 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic . central locking switch. With the side lights lit. traction control switch. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on the faulty function(s). CD changer. Two of the computers have an internal resistance of 120 Ω (terminating resistance): – the airbag computer – the injection computer The network carries data exchanged by the computers. The Scénic II is a new-generation multiplex vehicle. 88B-1 . Note: A second multiplex network for the navigation system may also be present. On the Scénic II. The maximum number of computers on this network is 15. which are sometimes housed in various computers (distributed functions). Description of the multiplex network: The multiplex network consists of a twisted pair of wires connected to several vehicle computers. this provides an overview of the vehicles electronic architecture.Introduction INTRODUCTION 88B WARNING Fault-finding on the Scénic II can only be done with the CLIP diagnostic tool fitted with the new vehicle connection probe cord (part no. PURPOSE: ● The purpose of the multiplex network test is to determine the various computers present on the vehicle's multiplex network as well as the cause of possible inter-computer communication failures. The two wires are known as Can H and Can L. the main change is the increase in communication speed to 500 kBauds. ● The multiplex network test can also run diagnostics on computers disconnected from the multiplex network. Elé 1674 or 00 00 167 400). only one multiplex network can be diagnosed with the RENAULT tool.MULTIPLEXING 188B Fault finding . ● It also serves to determine the functions installed in the vehicle. ● The test also checks the condition of multiplex network segments. 88B-2 . this function also reads the number of faults present in the computers. the dipped headlights must be turned on. the other functions become accessible. It ensures that the network is correctly connected at the terminals of each computer and that the signal is correctly sent to it and received by it. Press and hold (over 5 seconds ) the Start button in the absence of start conditions (for example: selecting a gear). Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations.MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . Important: To power the discharge bulb computers. The multiplex network test function is executed automatically after vehicle selection by the user. This step is the essential starting point before any computer diagnostics. MULTIPLEX NETWORK TEST PROCEDURE: ⇒ Communication established with the computers storing the vehicle configuration (identification read). On the Scénic II. After the network check. ⇒ Vehicle configuration read in the two computers that hold the multiplex network configuration (airbag and UCH on the SCENIC II) ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ List of diagnosable computers read in the two configuration computers Computer interrogation Physical (electronic) measurements on the CAN network.Introduction MONITORING MULTIPLEX NETWORK OPERATION 88B Vehicle computer power supply for diagnostics: Vehicle card in card reader. The Diagnostics button runs diagnostics on the function selected from the list.MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . displays the various computers involved in the functions whether distributed or not distributed over the different computers. 88B PISTON RINGS – Valid: green dash. FUNCTION TESTING The vehicle function tests screen resembles the multiplex network test screen in showing a diagram of the network architecture if this is known and displayed. – Valid if the computer responded correctly to the tool's query. recognised and has no faults. – Unknown if the computer was detected but could not be identified from its response. green lettering. – OK if the computer was detected. – Undiagnosed: black dash. black lettering. the computers are organised and listed as follows: – Undiagnosable if the computer cannot be diagnosed with the tool and therefore was not queried. the computers are subdivided into Stores multiplex network configuration and Does not store multiplex network configuration". – Unknown if the computer is detected but cannot be identified from its response. – Undetected if the computer can be diagnosed but failed to respond. red lettering. Selecting a function from the list greys out the computers on the diagram that are not involved in that function. The Function tab. – Within the undetected category. On the Information tab. The Info tab displays the other possible functions found on the vehicle concerned. Undetected: red outline.Introduction COMPUTERS – – – – Valid: green outline. INTERPRETING TEST RESULT CHARTS On the Problems tab. the computers are organised into the following groups: – Faulty if the computer is known and has a non-zero number of faults. Clicking on the continue icon in the lower right-hand corner displays a new screen with the following tab: On the Results tab. Unknown: red outline. the computers are organised into the following groups: – Undetected if the computer failed to respond to the tool's identification request. red lettering + exclamation mark. 88B-3 . Undiagnosable: black outline. – Faulty: red dash. MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . The Configuration screen consists of two tabs for displaying and modifying the: – multiplex network configuration on the first tab. the two computers holding the multiplex network configuration are the airbag and UCH computers. LIST OF VEHICLE COMPUTERS Diagnosable computer configuration Via the ISO K/L Via CAN lines YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO YES YES NO NO YES NO YES Computer Multiplex network configuration PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT ABSENT ABSENT Injection ABS Protection and Switching Unit Automatic gearbox LPG Steering lock Electric power-assisted steering Instrument panel UCH Air conditioning Central Communications Unit Driving school unit Airbag Automatic parking brake Parking assistance Discharge bulbs 88B-4 . – diagnosable computer configuration on the second.Configuration MULTIPLEX NETWORK CONFIGURATION 88B In this vehicle. WARNING First repair the computers containing the multiplex network configuration (airbag and UCH) to be able to display the screen with the multiplex network configuration diagram for the diagnosed vehicle. 88B-5 . but never both.Configuration MULTIPLEX NETWORK GENERIC ARCHITECTURE Number of multiplex network segments between computers: 88B 120 118 1094 1337 119 997 1088 1232 247 645 Injection ABS ** ABS+ESP ** Switching Protection Unit Automatic transmission * LPG / GNV * Steering lock Electric power-assisted steering Instrument panel UCH 419 1125 469 756 1217 989 1222 Air conditioning Control and Communications Unit Driving School Unit Airbag Automatic parking brake Discharge bulbs Parking assistance * A vehicle can have either LPG or automatic transmission. ** The vehicle either has just ABS or ABS + ESP (electronic stability program).MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . Configuration NETWORK CONFIGURATION 88B NOTES The configuration is detected with the ignition on. Choice of computers in the vehicle present on the network The following computers are always fitted to the vehicle: – Injection – Protection and Switching Unit – ABS – Steering lock (cannot be support fault finding with the tool) – Instrument panel – Passenger Compartment Control Unit (UCH) – Electric power-assisted steering – Airbag + the vehicle options: – Automatic gearbox – LPG – Climate control – Control and Communications Unit (cannot support fault finding with the tool) – Automatic parking brake – Driving School Unit (cannot support fault finding with the tool) – Discharge bulbs – Parking assistance WARNING A computer connected to the multiplex network but not registered in the computers containing the multiplex network configuration will not be checked in the multiplex network test. Adjust the configuration by declaring any missing computers as present in the UCH or airbag computer or both. Relaunch the multiplex network test after modifying the configuration. The version number increases with each change to the multiplex network wiring in this vehicle. It can be launched from the multiplex network test results screens. 88B-6 . Configuration involves the following steps: – Select the computer to be modified. The tool displays the UCH and/or airbag computer configuration.MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . This information is available in the global vehicle base. – Select the multiplex network diagram version. In this event. Check the condition of the connections. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Reconnect the segment. + accessories or + after ignition). Isolate the faulty segment by disconnecting both ends of the segment. 88B-7 .MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics . Deal with any other possible faults. replacing the wiring). Is the segment still declared faulty? No End of fault finding. Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Check the continuity of the Can H and Can L lines between the two connectors of the isolated segment. Always check that the computer is operating correctly. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Important: the tool may not be able to pinpoint the faulty segment(s). Make sure the computer present in the vehicle is compatible with the Scénic II and that the data it is producing is correct. repair the segment nearest to the diagnostic socket.Dealing with faults FAULTY SEGMENT 88B NOTES First check that the computer at the end of the faulty segment is properly supplied (earth. Yes Apply the same procedure to each segment. Refer to the Help with finding short circuits section for computer and connection track allocations. It then suggests several segments that could be faulty. Yes Are there other faulty segments? No Repeat the multiplex network tests to check the continuity and insulation of the Can H and Can L lines between the end of the faulty segment and the diagnostic socket. + battery. Perform the necessary operations to ensure the continuity of the two lines (for example. + accessories or + after ignition). WARNING Dialogue with the Xenon bulbs is only possible with + after ignition and the dipped headlights on. – + After ignition + dipped headlights: Xenon bulbs. Parking assistance. Repair if necessary. Test of communication with computers. Steering lock. LPG. – + After ignition: Injection. ⇒No communication from computers to diagnostic tool: see Fault Finding Chart 1 No communication with the computer or computers not communicating with the diagnostic tool. 88B-8 . Deal with any other possible faults. air conditioning control panel. Make sure that the computer wake-up mode is in full working order on the vehicle and properly assimilated by the computers. Roof control unit. If after these tests no irregularity or open or short circuit has been detected.MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics . The wake-up mode is: – timed power supply: UCH. ABS. Automatic parking brake. – Check the power supply to the computers (earth. ⇒Computers that only produce partial information when identified: Check in the Workshop Repair Manual or Global Vehicle Base to see that the computer really is compatible with Scénic II. Control and Communications Unit. + battery. – + accessories: Protection and Switching Unit. radio. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. – Switch to computer diagnostics mode. Check the connections to the computers and for no open circuit. airbag. contact your Techline. Make sure the CLIP diagnostic tool update is recent enough to handle Scénic II faults. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. instrument panel. Electric Power Assisted Steering. Driving school unit.Dealing with faults FAULTY COMPUTER 88B NOTES – Make sure the computers installed in the vehicle are the correct type and are compatible with Mégane II. Automatic transmission. 88B-9 .: If after these tests no irregularity or open or short circuit has been detected. ⇒Make sure the computer identification information is correct and matches the vehicle in diagnostics. Test of communication with computers. Deal with any other possible faults. – Switch to computer diagnostics mode.: – Version no.: – Calibration no. Repair if necessary. Check the connections to the computers and for no open circuit. AFTER REPAIR Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. ⇒No communication from computers to diagnostic tool: see Fault Finding Chart 1 No communication with the computer or computers not communicating with the diagnostic tool. – Computer information: – Parts Department part no. contact your Techline.: – Vdiag: – Program no.Dealing with faults UNKNOWN COMPUTERS ON THE NETWORK 88B NOTES – Check the compatibility of the computers with Scénic II.MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics . Make sure the CLIP diagnostic tool update is recent enough to be able to handle Scénic II faults. CAN L). Deal with any other possible faults.Dealing with faults MULTIPLEX NETWORK OUT OF ORDER Help finding network short circuits 88B NOTES Get a copy of the multiplex network wiring diagram for the vehicle and the diagnostic socket diagram. continue disconnecting the connectors and computers one by one.ESP ABS Electric power-assisted steering Airbag Climate control Steering lock UCH Instrument panel Driving school unit Central communications unit Automatic parking brake R2 R 369 OBD (On Board Diagnostic) TRW Siemens S 3000 C S 3000 C LVCR DP0 PEH blue 2AN A black 2AN A black 2AN A black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black PE 2 black Grey Black Green Grey Grey White Black Can H 10 A4 A4 A4 A4 38 35 26 7 11 7 3 6 30 A3 6 A3 2 12 6 Can L 8 A3 A3 A3 A3 39 14 15 5 10 1 6 16 29 B3 7 A2 3 13 14 Grey Red Black 2AN B brown Connector PEH blue Output Can H 11/12 K4 Can L 7/9 K3 EDC 16 C Black 6 4 10/8 2 3 20/18 3 4 If the fault is not visible. 88B-10 . contact your Techline. Repair the damaged components. Input Connector Protection and Switching Unit K4J injection K4M . Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Check the condition of the connectors.MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics . The test procedure involves disconnecting the various network components in sequence to pinpoint the faulty one. Check the condition of the multiplex network wires (CAN H . AFTER REPAIR Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. In the event of a short-circuit to + battery. Systematically repeat the multiplex network test after each operation to see if the fault has been resolved. leave the battery connected.F4R injection K9K injection F9Q injection Automatic transmission ABS . If the fault is still shown as present. Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Make sure the tool version is more recent than CD-ROM No. Check: – The connection between the diagnostic tool and socket (connection and cable in good condition). Make sure that the CLIP sensor is communicating properly with the vehicle's computers. this is indicated by the two green diodes on the sensor lighting up. Make sure the CLIP sensor is properly fed by tracks 16 (+ 12 V ). and 4 and 5 (earth) of the diagnostic socket. make sure that the voltages at the diagnostic socket terminals are: – 2.5 V between CAN L (track 14) and earth (tracks 4 and 5) (average values) See the Help with finding short circuits on the network heading in this section for how to detect short circuits in the vehicle's multiplex network. WARNING: The dipped headlights must be switched on to power the Xenon headlights. 88B-11 . CAN network communications failure Check line continuity and insulation: CAN H (diagnostic socket track 6) CAN L (diagnostic socket track 14) With a multimeter. insulation and for absence of interference on the K line of the diagnostic socket ( track 7). No communication on the K line Check the continuity. indicated by the two red diodes on the sensor lighting up. – The engine compartment and passenger compartment fuses. Press and hold (over 5 seconds) the start button in the absence of start conditions (for example: selecting a gear). Make sure that the CLIP sensor is properly connected to the computer's USB port.Fault finding chart CHART 1 88B No communication with computers NOTES Vehicle computer power supply for diagnostics: Vehicle card in card reader.MULTIPLEXING Fault finding .5 V between CAN H (track 6) and the earth (tracks 4 and 5) – 2. – The computers' power supply. 32. Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. green diodes red diodes CAN ISO Vehicle power supply Sensor power supply Use the diagnostic socket to check the following tracks: track 1 + After ignition track 16 + Battery tracks 4 and 5 Earth Repair if necessary. – No Network version has been entered into the two computers that store the configuration. 88B-12 . – On the Multiplex network tab on the configuration screen.Fault finding chart 88B CHART 2 Topology diagram not displayed during multiplex network test NOTES The topology cannot be displayed under the following conditions: – The two computers storing the multiplex network configuration failed to respond. a wrong Network version number has been entered into one of the two computers that store the network configuration. therefore communication is impossible.MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . – The multiplex network is out of order. The configuration chart is always accessible through the Configuration icon. – Wrong network version number entered into at least one of the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration.Fault finding chart 88B CHART 3 Configuration chart display NOTES Fault finding chart to use if the tool loads the configuration screen at the end of the multiplex network test.MULTIPLEXING Fault finding . The RENAULT loads the configuration screen directly under the following conditions: ● MULTIPLEX NETWORK tab – Inconsistent Network version numbers entered into the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration. – Inconsistency in the list of diagnosable computers entered into the two computers that store the list of diagnosable computers. ● The COMPUTERS THAT CAN SUPPORT FAULT FINDING tab (see screen below) – Inconsistent diagram numbers entered into the two computers that store the configuration. – Inconsistency between the list of computers entered and the computers actually detected on the vehicle. – Inconsistent list of computers entered into the computers that store the multiplex network configuration. – One of the two computers that store the network version is blank (case of replaced airbag or UCH computer). 88B-13 . by disconnecting the connectors and computers in the order described under the "Help with detecting segments . At this point. this command can isolate multiplex network segments and thereby rule out those that respond properly to the tool. ABS. the operator can check the status of the multiplex network after each disconnection / reconnection procedure involving the selected connector or computer. the order for disconnecting connectors and computers recommended by the diagnostic tool will probably be as follows: Injection. heating and ventilation system. electric powerassisted steering. Control and Communications Unit. 88B-14 . Network physical measurements screen With the second screen. Then. NOTE: The tool sometimes requests that computers not present in the vehicle concerned be disconnected. LPG.computers" heading. instrument panel. This enables the operator to check the status of the multiplex network after disconnecting each component. steering lock. it is therefore essential that connectors and computers not attached to the bus are not taken into consideration. make sure that the computer in question is not installed. in this case. and a CAN H / earth short circuit. the computers can no longer communicate with each other nor with the diagnostic tool. the actual or possible segment causing the multiplex network fault can be identified. UCH. a CAN L / + 12 V short circuit. and confirm as though the component concerned had been disconnected and reconnected and continue the test. The CLIP tool can identify several types of faults by taking electrical measurements on the CAN H and CAN L multiplex network. ● A test for multiplex network faults by using physical measurements: When a multiplex network segment has a short circuit.MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics . R369 Union. Driving School Unit. Protection and Switching Unit. ● Disconnecting connectors and computers: ⇒ Help with locating network faults screen In keeping with the diagnostic tool algorithm and based on the results obtained as it unfolds. The algorithm for help with locating faults is intended for dealing with electrical faults present solely in CAN. automatic parking brake. R2 Union. airbag. This makes it easier to pinpoint the origin of the failure. automatic transmission.Repair assistance CHANGES IN SCENIC II DIAGNOSTICS ● 88B Assistance with computer or faulty segment detection: If the multiplex network is completely frozen. the network test is out of order. It can detect a CAN L / CAN H short circuit. a CAN H / + 12 V short circuit. – Set of adapters and terminal blocks for using the airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check function of CLIP and XRBAG tools for updates including the terminal blocks listed below.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS 188C AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 Fault finding . – Modifying the series of new airbag ignition module connectors entails modifying the dummy ignition module. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM).: 04 2. LOCAL MODIFICATION OF THE DUMMY IGNITION MODULE: – Remove the ignition module from its red mounting and remove one of the brown locking notches.AIRBAG . paper. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool). 1685 64-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1717 22-track seat terminal block: Elé.ACU 4 Program no.: Vdiag No. – – – – 22-track computer terminal block: Elé. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding method applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Véhicule : SCENIC II Function concerned: AIRBAG Name of computer: AUTOLIV . paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. 1687 10-track rotary switch terminal block: Elé.0 88C-1 .Introduction 88C 1. 1617 ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP Special tooling required: SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED – Multimeter. – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. – checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. For stored faults. you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. In this case.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . – Then connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. the fault is present. but the customer complaint persists. it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed) and the dipped headlights are on. The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. and which may correspond to a customer complaint. A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a logic flow chart. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting): – vehicle card in card reader. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied. Check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault.). – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds). This phase therefore: – diagnosis of faults that do not have a fault display. deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed. + After ignition feed cut-out is performed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool. Customer complaints – Fault finding charts If the diagnostic tool check is correct. wear). – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled.0 88C-2 . carry out basic checks.Introduction 88C 3. Faults: Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since. bent pins.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . or whether they remain but are not diagnosed within the current context). Deal with present faults according to the procedure specified in the Interpretation of faults section. – . – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. or use the fault finding procedure to check the circuit of the faulty component. If a state is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values. – See that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. REMINDERS Procedure: To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers. etc. note the faults displayed and follow the instructions in the "Notes" section. IMPORTANT The left-hand and right-hand Xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit.the resistance of the faulty component. Introduction 88C 4.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 88C-3 . FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses Print the system diagnostic sheet (available in CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP Dialogue with computer? no See CHART 1 yes Read faults no Faults present Conformity check yes no Deal with faults found The symptom persists Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use ALP charts (fault finding charts) Fault solved no yes The symptom persists Fault solved no The symptom persists Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. and wait at least 2 seconds for the reserve power capacity to discharge. All faults requiring replacement of a computer for thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. Never measure the airbag or pretensioner trigger lines with any device other than XRBAG or CLIP's "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check". ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. ensure that its resistance is between 1. 6.5 ohms. make sure the computer power supply does not drop below 10 V.0 88C-4 . While working. The diagnostic sheet must be filled out during the process and indicate the findings for the warranty refund. If it is impossible to connect the fault-finding tool.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . FAULT FINDING LOG 88C WARNING! WARNING: A properly documented diagnostic sheet is required for all monitored part (computer-type) reimbursements or Techline calls. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires obeying safety rules to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. The locked mode is signalled when the Instrument panel warning light comes on.Introduction 5. Before using a dummy ignition module.8 and 2. WARNING Airbag and pretensioner destruction and disposal is subject to national legislation. IT IS THEREFORE COMPULSORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EVERY TIME A FAULT FINDING OPERATION IS PERFORMED. remove the system power fuse.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . During operations on the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems it is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering (all the ignition lines will be inhibited). switch off the ignition. AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .Introduction SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (FRONT section) 88C AR To rear wiring ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-5 . AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . C2 and C4 C0 and C4 Correct value 1.2 Ω 1.8 to 4 Ω Correct insulation value: display ≥ 100.0 88C-6 . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.h or 9999 flashing.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .8 to 6. C1 and C3 Correct value 1.Introduction 88C SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (REAR section) AR A B C D E G H I To rear wiring Central unit Driver’s seat Front passenger seat Buckle pretensioner Driver's front airbag ignition module Passenger's front airbag ignition module Front side airbag ignition module Lap belt pretensioner or seat cushion airbag J/K L/M N/O Curtain airbag ignition modules Rear side airbag ignition modules Rear seat belt retractors Rotary switch + 12 V / earth Warning light / Fault finding lines Impact sensors/ Impact information Passenger airbag lock switch FRONT AIRBAGS Measuring point Driver Passenger C0.8 to 4 Ω CT P SIDE AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS Measuring point C0. 1717) ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. 1685) Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable A of 22-track terminal block Elé.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . 1685) Driver's side curtain airbag circuit (cable I of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit (cable G of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L14: Rear seat belt retractors (cables E and J of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable B of 22-track terminal block Elé.Introduction 88C DEFINITION OF THE TRIGGER LINES L1: L2: L3: L4: L5: L6: L7: L8: L9: Driver's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable B of 64-track terminal block Elé.0 88C-7 . 1717) L12: Passenger's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable L of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L13: Front buckles pretensioner circuit (cables A and C of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1685) Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable C of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Passenger's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable D of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L11: Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable N of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Driver's front chest side airbag circuit (cable H of 64-track terminal block Elé.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1717 L10: Passenger's front chest side airbag circuit (cable F of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1685) Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable D of 22-track terminal block Elé. – Front seat type BXX double pretensioner. INNOVATIONS: – Passenger airbag inhibition switch – Anti-skid airbag in the seat along with a buckle pretensioner on the front seat in type CMXX MEGANE II.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostics .System operation 88C PASSIVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT The MEGANE II has equipment also found on the LAGUNA II and VEL SATIS. Both features are never found on the same vehicle because they use the same ignition line.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . – Driver's seat position sensor for adaptive airbag. this airbag is referred to as the: SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG/DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT. namely: – Front seat chest side airbag. In the text. Via the same trigger line. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. The configuration for type C is: Driver's seat-cushion airbag.0 88C-8 . – Three-point rear centre seat belt. the ACU 4 Vdiag 04 computer controls either the seat-cushion (antiskid) airbag or the driver's seat lap belt pretensioner: The configuration for type B is: Driver's seat lap belt pretensioner. – Front and rear Isofix mountings. Driver's front chest side airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's rear seat belt retractor .Driver's side lateral impact sensor + Rear chest side airbag driver's side .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .Buckle pretensioner: passenger + Lap belt pretensioner: passenger .Driver's rear seat belt retractor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Driver's side lateral impact sensor .Computer track allocation 88C AIRBAG COMPUTER 22-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description + Passenger front airbag volume 2 + Passenger front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used + After ignition Not used Not used CAN L CAN H Track 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Description .Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat belt buckle contact .Buckle pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver Not used Not used Not used Not used .Passenger side curtain airbag Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger's rear chest side airbag .Lap belt pretensioner: passenger + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Passenger's front chest side airbag .Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used Electrical earth Not used Not used + Passenger airbag inhibition switch + Passenger airbag inhibition switch 64-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Description + Buckle pretensioner: driver .Rear chest side airbag driver's side Not used Not used Track 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Description Not used Not used Not used Not used + Buckle pretensioner: passenger .Driver's front airbag volume 1 .Passenger front airbag volume 2 .Passenger's rear chest side airbag Not used Not used + Passenger side lateral impact sensor .Passenger front airbag volume 1 .Passenger's front chest side airbag + Passenger side curtain airbag .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .Passenger side lateral impact sensor Not used Not used ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.Driver's seat belt buckle contact Not used Not used + Driver's front chest side airbag .0 88C-9 . Computer track allocation 88C SIDE IMPACT SENSORS CONNECTIONS 2-track connector Track 1 Signal + Description Track 2 Signal Description Note: The front belt pretensioners.0 88C-10 .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . front chest side airbags. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. lap pretensioners or seat airbags and seat position sensor functions run through a black 22-track R341 or R342 intermediate connector located under each seat and attached to the vehicle floor.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . The locked mode is signalled when the airbag fault warning indicator lights up on the instrument panel.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Modify the computer configuration if necessary. The airbag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid all risk of accidental triggering (all ignition lines are inhibited). Follow this procedure to replace an airbag computer: – – – – – – – – Ensure that the ignition is switched off.Replacing parts 88C REPLACING THE AIRBAG COMPUTER BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed. the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. Switch off the ignition.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostics . Enter the After Sales service date with diagnostic tool command VP008 "Write last After Sales service date".0 88C-11 . Unlock the computer only if no faults are indicated by the diagnostic tool. Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. YOU ARE REQUIRED TO CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE. Replace the computer. Enter the VIN into the computer with diagnostic tool command VP010 "Write VIN". the fault-finding tool has five automatic configuration commands for the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicles (BMXX. CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – To make it easier to configure airbag computer ACU4. CMXX. – The configuration commands (CFXXX) are used to adjust computer configuration to the equipment actually installed in the vehicle.AIRBAG . – STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS: – CF297: B/C NO SIDE AIRBAGS. – CF301: VAN WITH NO CURTAIN AIRBAGS. This command is used to clear faults from the computer's memory. C with FRONT FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). SMXX).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 Fault finding . Vehicle types B. C WITH NO FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (SABLAT / SSABCS). some sensors or trigger lines may have to be deconfigured after using standard configuration commands. – CF299: B/C WITH FRONT/REAR FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Vehicle types B. are used to configure each system component individually to adapt the computer configuration to the actual equipment in the vehicle. C with FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS). however. – CF300: VAN WITH CURTAIN AIRBAGS. After configuration. check the display configuration screen to make sure that the information entered is correct. Three S vehicles (vans) equipped with CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS). The commands in the table on the next page. Three S vehicles (vans) WITHOUT CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS).0 88C-12 . For this.Configuration and programming 88C CLEARING RZ001: Fault memory. use the individual configuration commands for system components. – The read-configuration commands (LCXXX) are used to display the current computer configuration in relation to the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicle. – CF298: B/C WITH FRONT FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B. Because of probably computer part number unification in the Parts Department. AIRBAG .Configuration and programming 88C CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – CONFIGURABLE FEATURES: Trigger lines "WITH" or "WITHOUT": The front buckle pretensioners are serially wired.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 Fault finding .0 88C-13 . The rear seat belt retractors are serially wired. CONFIGURATION READING LC080 LC079 LC052 LC047 LC048 LC049 LC040 LC041 LC042 LC043 LC044 LC045 LC081 LC078 TITLE SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG/DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT. PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG PASSENGER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG DRIVER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS REAR INERTIA REELS Sensors "WITH" or "WITHOUT": CONFIGURATION CF283 CF282 CF236 CF229 CF230 CF231 CF221 CF222 CF223 CF224 CF225 CF226 CF284 CF278 TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CONFIGURATION READING LC086 LC025 LC026 LC073 CONFIGURATION CF289 CF207 CF208 CF273 ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. 0 88C-14 . This command is used to enter the date the system was serviced. This command serves to enter the vehicle identification number (VIN) into the computer. – VP008: Write last After Sales service date. It obtains. – VP007: Unlock computer.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 Fault finding . a list of the trigger lines controlled and the system's state at the moment of impact. – VP010: Write VIN. This command is used in reconditioning the vehicle following an impact. It shuts down all trigger lines.Configuration and programming 88C CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION (continued): Passenger airbag lock mode "WITH KEY" or "WITHOUT": TITLE PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCK MODE Read type of vehicle: LC034 "MEGANE II" CONFIGURATION READING LC060 CONFIGURATION CF248 OTHER COMMANDS: – VP006: Lock computer. This command unlocks the computer after it was locked.AIRBAG . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. This command is used whenever servicing the system. – SC004: Read impact context. from the computer that is to be replaced. page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy .: FD 16 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .: Other documentation Title and/or part no./ Country Vehicle model VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool Version CLIP 2 0 ● Customer complaint 1192 Airbag warning light lit Other Please specify: ● When the fault appears 011 005 When switched on While driving Please specify: 004 Intermittently 999 When starting the engine Other ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure Type of fault finding manual: Fault Finding Manual No.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbags and pretensioners List of monitored parts: Airbag computer ● Page 1 / 2 Administrative identification Date Log completed by Business name or no.: Workshop Repair Manual: Technical Note Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No. Part 4 part no.page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . Program no. Part 2 part no. Present Stored Fault title Specification ● System-specific information Total vehicle mileage (kilometrage) when the customer's problem occurred: How often does it occur? How long after the engine starts? ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? CAN Wiring harness Seats Instrument panel Battery Other Rotary switch Fuse Please specify: FD 16 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Part 3 part no. Software version Calibration number VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. Supplier no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbag and pretensioners ● Page 2 / 2 Identification of the computer and parts replaced for the system Part 1 part no. AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .0 88C-17 . Driver's front airbag circuit 2 Driver's front airbag circuit 1 Passenger's front airbag circuit 2 Passenger's front airbag circuit 1 Driver's front side airbag circuit airbag locking switch circuit Trigger lines configuration Change of status of passenger airbag locking Computer to be replaced following impact Front buckles pretensioner circuit Airbag lock switch configuration Driver's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Rear seat belt retractors circuit Driver's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit Passenger's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.Summary table of faults 88C Tool fault DF001 DF002 DF010 DF028 DF034 DF039 DF040 DF051 DF052 DF053 DF060 DF065 DF066 DF067 DF068 DF069 DF070 DF071 DF072 DF074 DF075 DF077 DF091 DF187 DF193 DF194 DF210 DF214 DF232 DF239 DF240 DF241 Associated DTC 9080 9042 9040 9041 907E 9035 9036 9035 9036 9031 9050 9031 900E 900D 900C 900A 9009 9008 9007 9006 9005 900B 9034 9044 907C 907F 9014 9034 9051 9017 9001 9002 Diagnostic tool heading Computer Computer supply voltage Fault warning light circuit Passenger's airbag status warning light circuit Computer locked Driver's side sensor circuit Passenger's side sensor circuit Driver's side sensor configuration Passenger side sensor configuration Driver's seat position sensor Multiplex network Driver's front seat position sensor circuit Passenger's rear side air bag circuit Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit Passenger's front side airbag circuit Passenger's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's head side airbag circuit.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Fault Interpretation 88C DF001 PRESENT OR STORED COMPUTER NOTES Special notes: So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed. AFTER REPAIR Deal with any faults detected by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory.0 88C-18 .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Replace the airbag computer (see the replacing components section for this procedure).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. 1. Check the condition of the computer + locking connections. – – – – – Check the battery charge.5 volts ± 0.DEF: Micro-cut 2. Check the charging circuit. Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage supply to the computer: 10. if there are no faults. 1685 adapter for working on the computer connector (cable 1).DEF: Values beyond tolerance NOTES Special notes: Use the 22-track Elé. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.1 < correct voltage < 16 volts ± 0.Fault Interpretation 88C COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DF002 PRESENT 1. unlock the computer.0 88C-19 .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Check the tightness and the condition of the battery terminals. Check the computer earth.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. if there are no faults. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. unlock the computer.0 88C-20 . Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request) NOTES Special notes: None.Fault Interpretation 88C FAULT WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT DF010 PRESENT 1. Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER AIRBAG CONDITION INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF028 PRESENT 1. unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-21 .DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request) NOTES Special notes: None. if there are no faults.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . if there are no faults. unlock the computer.Fault Interpretation 88C COMPUTER LOCKED DF034 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None.0 88C-22 . Use diagnostic tool command VP007 to unlock the airbag computer. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28). 1717 adapter for working on the computer connector. Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system.DEF NOTES None. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . if there are no faults. connections.DEF: 3. Replace the driver's side sensor. CO .0 : 1.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Communication disrupted Sensor internal electrical fault External diagnostics NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . 1717) terminal 27 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé. unlock the computer.DEF NOTES None.DEF . etc. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring.Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF039 PRESENT CO : CC. 1717) terminal 28 Track 2 sensor connector 2.0 88C-23 .CC.3. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.1. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 .) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé.DEF: 2. Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF040 PRESENT CO : CC.DEF . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Replace the passenger side sensor.DEF: 3.0 : 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 61 and 62).) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé.DEF: 2. unlock the computer.CC.DEF NOTES None. 1717) terminal 61 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé.0 88C-24 . Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1717 adapter for working on the computer connector. connections.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Communication disrupted Sensor internal electrical fault External diagnostics NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé.3. 1717) terminal 62 Track 2 sensor connector 2. CO .DEF NOTES None.0 . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. etc.1. if there are no faults. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring. 0 88C-25 . The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Read configuration LC025 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF207 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. unlock the computer. if there are no faults.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer.Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF051 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. unlock the computer.Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF052 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration.0 88C-26 . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Use command CF208 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . if there are no faults. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Read configuration LC026 under the heading "read configuration". This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF053 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . if there are no faults. Read configuration LC086 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF289 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level. unlock the computer. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.0 88C-27 .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. Apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .Fault Interpretation 88C MULTIPLEX NETWORK DF060 PRESENT 1. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.DEF: Carry out the multiplex network fault finding procedure NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Check again using the diagnostic tool.0 88C-28 . YES Check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 3 and 4 ) and 64-track connector (tracks 9 and 10).DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Below minimum threshold Values out of range Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF065 is present with at least one of DF077. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Repair if necessary. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . replace the seat position sensor.Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT. unlock the computer. check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. DF065 PRESENT CO : CC. 1717 adapter for working on the computer connector. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. and the under-seat connector. Attach the 22-track (Elé. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. When the seat is forward. the resistance should be: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145 Ω ) If the resistances are correct. Replace the wiring if necessary.0 88C-29 . the seat position sensor. DF232. or DF240. Attach the 64-track (Elé.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .0 : CC. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. the resistance should be: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145) Are the values correct? NO Check the connection and the condition of the sensor connections. DF210.DEF: 2. 1717) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. If the fault is still present. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. When the seat is forward.1 : 1. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Track 3 Track 2 sensor connector Terminal block Track 4 Track 1 sensor connector If the checks are correct. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé. the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545) When the seat is back. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. if there are no faults. the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) When the seat is back. then switch on the ignition. unlock the computer. Attach the 64-track ( Elé.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.DEF. When replacing the airbag module. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable L. Replace the passenger's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). 1287).CC NOTES Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. CO .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . check and adjust the computer configuration.Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER CHEST REAR SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF066 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag is correctly connected. replace the wiring if necessary. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0).AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). If the value indicated is incorrect. the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Repair if necessary. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector.1 : CC. Use the 64-track (Elé.0 88C-30 . Lock the computer. if there are no faults.0 : 1. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.0 88C-31 . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). if there are no faults. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.CC. Lock the computer.1 . unlock the computer. If the value indicated is incorrect. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.Fault Interpretation 88C DF066 CONTINUED CC. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable L. Attach the 64-track ( Elé.0 NOTES None. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58 ). replace the wiring if necessary.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3 ) is faulty. 1287). When replacing the airbag module. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. When replacing the airbag module. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector.1 : CC. the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty.0 : 1. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag is correctly connected.0 88C-32 . Destroy the driver's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. unlock the computer. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER'S REAR SIDE CHEST AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF067 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. CO . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. check and adjust the computer configuration.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .CC NOTES Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30 ). Replace the driver's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Repair if necessary Attach the 64-track ( Elé. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.DEF. replace the wiring if necessary. If the value indicated is incorrect. 1287). Use the 64-track (Elé. Lock the computer. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. if there are no faults. unlock the computer. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag ( C0/C3) is faulty.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1287). Repair if necessary. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30 ). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable N. Destroy the driver's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.Fault Interpretation 88C DF067 CONTINUED CC. if there are no faults. If the value indicated is incorrect.1 . replace the wiring if necessary. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Attach the 64-track ( Elé. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Lock the computer.0 NOTES None. When replacing the airbag module. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.CC.0 88C-33 . 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure resistance in the adapter wire marked F. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. NOTES CO . 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). If the value obtained is correct. If the fault persists. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. Disconnect the side airbag ignition module. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Lock the computer. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector.DEF. Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. – If the value obtained is still not correct. if there are no faults. 1287). When replacing the airbag module.0 : 1.Fault Interpretation PASSENGER CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT 88C DF068 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Strip the passenger seat and check that the airbag ignition module is connected correctly. – If the value obtained is correct. 1717). replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat.1 : CC. Attach the 22-track (Elé. replace the passenger chest front side airbag module. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. YES Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with passenger front chest side airbags. Replace the wiring if necessary. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector.0 88C-34 . Use the 64-track (Elé.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF068 is present with at least one of DF210 or DF241.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . unlock the computer. check and adjust the computer configuration. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.1 . 1717). 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Repair if necessary. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. if there are no faults. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked F . Attach the 22-track (Elé. disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé.0 88C-35 . YES Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again.0 NOTES None. unlock the computer. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. If the fault persists. 1287). Replace the wiring if necessary. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. When replacing the airbag module. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1 ).CC. If the value obtained is correct.Fault Interpretation 88C DF068 CONTINUED CC. Is the value obtained correct? NO Passenger's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). Lock the computer. Replace the wiring if necessary. 0 88C-36 . 1287). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46 ). Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. replace the wiring if necessary. unlock the computer.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side curtain airbag. if there are no faults. Replace the passenger side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value indicated is incorrect. Repair if necessary.1 : CC. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. check and adjust the computer configuration. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Attach the 64-track ( Elé. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF069 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag is properly connected. the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty.DEF.0 : 1.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Lock the computer. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable G. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). CO . Use the 64-track (Elé. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . unlock the computer.0 88C-37 . 1287). 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable G.CC. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. if there are no faults. Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46 ). Repair if necessary. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.1 . If the value indicated is incorrect. the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3 ) is faulty.0 NOTES None. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. replace the wiring if necessary.Fault Interpretation 88C DF069 CONTINUED CC.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG.DEF. Switch off the ignition and make sure the ignition module of the driver side curtain airbag is properly connected. Lock the computer.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side curtain airbag. if there are no faults.1 : CC.0 : 1.Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF070 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. Replace the driver side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Use the 64-track (Elé. If the value indicated is incorrect. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.0 88C-38 .DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable I. check and adjust the computer configuration. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. replace the wiring if necessary. CO . Disconnect the ignition module from the driver side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. the wiring between the computer connector and driver side curtain airbag connector (C0/C3) is faulty. unlock the computer.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1287). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18 ). 0 88C-39 . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . If the value indicated is incorrect. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable I. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on.0 NOTES None. replace the wiring if necessary.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Attach the 64-track ( Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.Fault Interpretation 88C DF070 CONTINUED CC.CC. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring ( point C0). 1287). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18 ). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.1 . the wiring between the computer connector and driver side curtain airbag connector (C0/C1 ) is faulty. Repair if necessary. if there are no faults. Lock the computer. unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. disconnect the computer and check the connections of the 22-track (tracks 4 and 15) connector Fit the 22-track (Elé. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. unlock the computer. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag.1 : CC. With the ignition switched off. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10) . AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules. Check that it is correctly connected. Use the 22-track (Elé.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Attach the 10-track (Elé.0 88C-40 .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Replace the wiring if necessary. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). If the value obtained is incorrect. 1287). if there are no faults. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.DEF. check and adjust the computer configuration. 1685) test adapter. Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. CO . Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. then switch on the ignition.Fault Interpretation DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 88C DF071 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable D.CC NOTES None.0 : 1. If the value obtained is incorrect. 1 . do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . When replacing the airbag module. then switch on the ignition. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable D . Attach the 10-track test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10).0 88C-41 . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. If the value obtained is incorrect. unlock the computer. if there are no faults. disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections ( tracks 4 and 15). Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules. Fit the 22-track (Elé. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Replace the wiring if necessary.0 NOTES None. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. If the value obtained is incorrect.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel.Fault Interpretation 88C DF071 CONTINUED CC.CC. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A (driver's front airbag connected). With the ignition switched off. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections ( tracks 3 and 14).Fault Interpretation DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 88C DF072 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. check and adjust the computer configuration. if there are no faults.0 88C-42 . If the value obtained is incorrect.0 : 1.DEF.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Attach the 10-track (Elé. If the value obtained is incorrect. 1685) test adapter. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1287). Check that it is correctly connected. CO . Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). When replacing the airbag module. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B.1 : CC. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). Use the 22-track (Elé.CC NOTES None.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. then switch on the ignition. unlock the computer. Fit the 22-track (Elé. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B (driver's front airbag connected). unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. When replacing the airbag module.Fault Interpretation 88C DF072 CONTINUED CC. then switch on the ignition.0 NOTES None.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel. disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections ( tracks 3 and 14). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C . the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). Attach the 10-track (Elé. if there are no faults. 1685) test adapter. Fit the 22-track (Elé. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. Replace the wiring if necessary. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.1 .0 88C-43 . do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1287). If the value obtained is incorrect.CC. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7).AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules. If the value obtained is incorrect. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.CC NOTES None. check and adjust the computer configuration. CO .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1685) test adapter.0 88C-44 . if there are no faults. When replacing the airbag module. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ). then switch on the ignition again. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. unlock the computer.0 : 1. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. Disconnect the passenger’s front airbag ORANGE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.DEF. check the computer wiring again. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present).Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF074 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1 and 12). 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. Fit the 22-track (Elé. If the value obtained is correct. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Use the 22-track (Elé. If the value obtained is incorrect. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1287).1 : CC. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. if there are no faults. Replace the wiring if necessary. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer.0 88C-45 . Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1 and 12). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.Fault Interpretation 88C DF074 CONTINUED CC. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A . Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.0 NOTES None. If the value obtained is incorrect. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.CC.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . then switch on the ignition again. 1287). 1685). the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé.1 . Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF075 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. then switch on the ignition again.CC NOTES None. Replace the wiring if necessary.1 : CC. 1685). Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. if there are no faults. 1287).0 : 1. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13 ). Disconnect the passenger's front airbag BLUE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector.DEF. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ). CO . Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value obtained is correct. unlock the computer. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. When replacing the airbag module. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. If the value obtained is incorrect. check the computer wiring again. Use the 22-track (Elé. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. check and adjust the computer configuration.0 88C-46 .DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13 ).0 NOTES None. unlock the computer. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be use to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable B. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1685). If the value obtained is incorrect. When replacing the airbag module.CC.1 . if there are no faults. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. then switch on the ignition again.Fault Interpretation 88C DF075 CONTINUED CC. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1287).0 88C-47 .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Use the 64-track (Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.1 : CC. unlock the computer. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). or DF240. Disconnect the chest side airbag ignition module. Lock the computer. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.0 : 1.Fault Interpretation DRIVER'S CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT 88C DF077 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. – If the value obtained is correct. if there are no faults.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1).DEF. check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES CO . YES Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again. When replacing the airbag module. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. If the fault is still present. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked H. – If the value obtained is still not correct.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . If the value indicated is correct. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1717). connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's front chest side airbag. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. DF210.0 88C-48 . Remove the trim from the driver's seat and check that the chest side airbag ignition module is properly connected. replace the driver's chest front side airbag module. Attach the 22-track (Elé. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF077 is present with at least one of DF065. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Replace the wiring if necessary. Repair if necessary. DF232. 1287). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked H . If the fault is still present. YES Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1287). – Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring) if necessary. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. When replacing the airbag module.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Lock the computer. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.0 88C-49 . Replace the wiring if necessary.1 . AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition.Fault Interpretation 88C DF077 CONTINUED CC. 1717). if there are no faults. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Repair if necessary. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. If the value indicated is correct. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1 ). unlock the computer.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .CC. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A.0 NOTES None. Is the value obtained correct? NO – Driver's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Fault Interpretation 88C AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CIRCUIT DF091 PRESENT CO : CC. Track 6 lock switch connector Track 3 lock switch connector AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the locking switch. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1685 terminal 21 Terminal block Elé. wiring etc.0 : CC.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .). Check the condition and connections of the 22-track computer connector (lock system. Check that the lock switch is properly connected and check its connections. unlock the computer. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.DEF: 2. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.0 88C-50 . Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé.1 : 1.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Below minimum threshold Values out of range NOTES Special notes: Use the 22-track (Elé. then switch on the ignition. if there are no faults. 1685 terminal 22 Replace the locking switch if the fault persists. Check again using the diagnostic tool. adapting it to the equipment level of the vehicle.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Modify the computer configuration. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer.Fault Interpretation 88C TRIGGER LINES CONFIGURATION DF187 PRESENT NOTES None. Carry out a reading of the configuration under the heading "READING THE CONFIGURATION". ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration.0 88C-51 .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . After this time.0 88C-52 . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Switch the ignition back on and check that the fault is gone. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. if there are no faults. the computer will store this fault and light up the warning light on the instrument panel.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Switching the ignition off and on erases this fault from the computer memory.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . switch the ignition off and wait for a few seconds.Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATE DF193 PRESENT NOTES Special features: the vehicle user has 10 seconds after switching on + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag with the switch. Set the locking switch to the desired position. AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG .Fault Interpretation 88C COMPUTER TO BE REPLACED FOLLOWING IMPACT DF194 PRESENT NOTES None. Contact your Techline (see the "Replacing components" section for this procedure). AFTER REPAIR None ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-53 .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. 1287).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . unlock the computer.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Lock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. Replace the driver's seat buckle pretensioner if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.Fault Interpretation FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONNERS CIRCUIT 88C DF210 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). 37 and 38). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A.AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. If the value obtained is incorrect. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C.1 : CC. 1717).' Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector.0 : 1.0 88C-54 . Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. See next page. Use the 64-track (Elé. CO . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. See next page. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Replace the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ignition module if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). if there are no faults. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ( C0/C3). Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. 2. If the value obtained is incorrect. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.CC NOTES None. NOTES Special notes: the front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable C. If the fault persists. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). YES Again check the connections of the seat connector ( tracks 7 and 8) on the passenger compartment wiring side and of the 64-track (driver seat tracks 1 and 2 or passenger seat tracks 37 and 38) connector. the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat ( C1/C3). Is the value obtained correct? NO Check seat side seat connector connections again (tracks 8 and 7 ).0 88C-55 . the wiring is faulty between the computer and the seat displaying the fault ( C0/C1). unlock the computer. Repair if necessary. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG . ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1. Replace the wiring if necessary. If the fault persists. if there are no faults. Attach the 22-track (Elé. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again.Fault Interpretation 88C DF210 CONTINUED 1 Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C DF210 CONTINUED 2 CC.0 - CC.1 NOTES None. Lock the computer. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A . If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See interpretation A. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C . If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ( C0/C3). See interpretation A. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable C. Is the value obtained correct? NO If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). Replace the wiring if necessary. YES Faulty wiring between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-56 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C AIRBAG LOCK SWITCH CONFIGURATION DF214 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC060 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF248 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-57 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CIRCUIT 88C DF232 PRESENT CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Below minimum threshold Values out of range If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. CO - CC.0 - CC.1 2.DEF - 3.DEF NOTES Special notes: None. Check the condition and connections of the 64-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Make sure the driver's seat belt buckle sensor is properly connected and test its connections. Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 2 buckle sensor connector. Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 1 buckle sensor connector If the connection is OK, replace the driver's seat belt buckle sensor. If the connection is faulty: Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, seat side (tracks 5 and 6 ). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1687 terminal 5 Track 2 buckle sensor connector. Terminal block Elé. 1687 terminal 6 Track 1 buckle sensor connector Repair if necessary. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, computer side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the computer (point C0). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 5 22-track connector Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 6 22-track connector If the connection is faulty, repair or replace the harness. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-58 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS CIRCUIT 88C DF239 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: the rear seat belt retractors are serially wired. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. CO - CC NOTES Special notes: Correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear seat-belt retractors. Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side, if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, passenger's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module ( C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3 ) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-59 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C DF239 CONTINUED CC.0 - CC.1 NOTES None. Lock the computer. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module ( C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module ( C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-60 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF240 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF240 is present with at least one of DF077, DF065, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion air bag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. CO - CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's seat-cushion airbag / lap belt. Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked B. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track connector (tracks 3 and 4 ). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). NO YES Again check the connections of the seat connector ( tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 3 and 4) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced(tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-61 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C DF240 CONTINUED CC.1 - CC.0 NOTES None. Lock the computer. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3. YES Wiring fault between the computer and driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-62 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF241 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF241 is present with at least one of DF068, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion airbag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. CO - CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger seat-cushion airbag / lap belt. Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked D. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B . – If the value indicated is correct, replace the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). YES Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-63 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation 88C DF241 CONTINUED CC.1 - CC.0 NOTES None. Lock the computer. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3. YES Wiring fault between the computer and passenger's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-64 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 Fault finding - States and parameter summary table 88C ACU4 AIRBAG STATES SUMMAR Y TABLE: STATES TOOL ET010 ET072 ET073 ET074 ET076 ET103 ET105 ET108 ET143 ET144 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Impact detected Passenger airbag status indicator light commanded Computer locked by tool Fault warning light commanded Computer to replace Type of passenger airbag lock Locked diagnostics power supply out of limits Passenger airbag lock mode Passenger airbag(s) locked Fault present or in memory ACU4 AIRBAG PARAMETERS SUMMARY TABLE: PARAMETERS TOOL PR001 PR002 PR104 PR105 PR106 PR107 PR108 PR109 PR110 PR111 PR112 PR113 PR114 PR115 PR116 PR117 PR118 PR140 PR147 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Computer supply voltage Vehicle type Driver's seat sensor impedance Line 1 impedance (Driver's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 2 impedance (Passenger's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 3 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 1). Line 4 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 2). Line 5 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 1). Line 6 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 2). Line 7 impedance (Driver's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 8 impedance (Passenger's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 9 impedance (Driver's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 10 impedance (Passenger's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 11 impedance (Driver's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 12 impedance (Passenger's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 13 impedance (Front belt pretensioners circuit). Line 14 impedance (Rear retractors). Number of memory zone deletions Airbag lock circuit impedance The trigger line or sensor impedance is 99.9 Ω when the component is disconnected or not controlled by the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-65 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostics - Conformity check 88C NOTES Only carry out conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool. Order Function Parameter or State Check or Action Display and notes Fault finding 1 Diagnostic tool dialogue - Airbag ACU 4 CHART 1 2 Computer conformity Parameter PR002 "Vehicle type" MEGANE II: 48 DF001 3 Computer configuration Using "READ CONFIGURATION" commands Ensure that the computer configuration defined in the "Current" column corresponds to the vehicle equipment. None Warning light operation 4 Computer initialisation check. Ignition switched on Warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on None ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-66 AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault finding chart 88C CHART 1 No communication with the airbag computer NOTES Special note: To perform fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed), i.e. proceed as follows: – Vehicle card in card reader, press on the Start button for more than five seconds outside of starting conditions. Ensure that the diagnostic tool is not causing the fault by trying to establish dialogue with a computer on another vehicle. If the tool is not the problem and communication cannot be established with any other computer in the same vehicle, check the battery voltage and do the work required to obtain the proper reading ( 10.5 V < battery voltage < 16 V ). Check the presence and condition of the airbag computer supply voltage fuse. Check that the computer connector is properly connected and check the condition of its wiring. Check that the computer is correctly supplied: – Disconnect the airbag computer and attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). – Check and ensure the presence of + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth and + after ignition feed. Ensure that the diagnostic socket is correctly supplied: – + Before ignition on track 16. – + after ignition feed on track 1 – Earth on tracks 4 and 5. With 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685), check the continuity and insulation of the airbag computer / diagnostic socket connection between: Terminal block track CAN H Track 6 of the diagnostic socket Terminal block track CAN L Track 14 of the diagnostic socket If communication is still not established after these various tests, contact your Techline (see the "Help" section for details). AFTER REPAIR When communication is established, deal with any faults indicated. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0 88C-67 188C AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS ACU4 AIRBAG VDIAG No.: 08 Fault finding - Introduction 88C 1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding method applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle: SCENIC II Function concerned: AIRBAG Name of computer: AUTOLIV - ACU 4 Program no.: Vdiag No.: 08 2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM), paper. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED – Multimeter – Set of adapters and terminal blocks for using the airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check function of CLIP and XRBAG tools for updates including the terminal blocks listed below. – Modifying the series of new airbag ignition module connectors entails modifying the dummy ignition module. LOCAL MODIFICATION OF THE DUMMY IGNITION MODULE: – Remove the ignition module from its red mounting and remove one of the brown locking notches. – – – – 22-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1685 64-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1717 22-track seat terminal block: Elé. 1687 10-track rotary switch terminal block: Elé. 1617 ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-69 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08 3. REMINDERS Procedure 88C To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting): – vehicle card in card reader. – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – Then connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. IMPORTANT The left-hand and right-hand Xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed) and the dipped headlights are on. + After ignition feed cut-out is performed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – See that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since, or whether they remain but are not diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). Deal with present faults according to the procedure specified in the Interpretation of faults section. For stored faults, note the faults displayed and follow the instructions in the "Notes" section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. In this case, deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, carry out basic checks. Check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the faulty component, – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation, wear), or use the fault finding procedure to check the circuit of the faulty component. Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. This phase therefore: – diagnosis of faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a state is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint. A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a logic flow chart. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-70 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08 4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses 88C Print the system diagnostic sheet (available in CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) Connect CLIP no Dialogue with computer? See CHART 1 yes Read faults no Faults present Conformity check yes Deal with faults found The symptom persists no Fault solved Deal with stored faults Use ALP charts (fault finding charts) Fault solved no yes The symptom persists Fault solved no The symptom persists Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-71 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08 4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Wiring test: 88C Diagnostic problems: Disconnecting connectors and/or handling the wiring can briefly conceal the cause of a problem. Electrical measurements of the voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present (stored) when doing the testing. Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Meticulously inspect the protective devices, insulation and path of the wiring. Look for signs of rust. Tactile inspection: While handling the wiring, use the fault-finding tool to detect any change in the status of faults from stored to present during the inspection. Make sure the connectors are firmly locked; Apply light pressure to the connectors; Twist the harness; If the status changes, try to locate the origin of the problem. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and blades, as well as their crimping (no crimping on insulation part). Make sure the clips and tabs are properly locked in place. Make sure the clips and tabs do not get bent back when connecting them. Check the contact pressure of the clips with the proper type of blade. Checking the resistance: Check the continuity of the entire line, then each section. Look for a short circuit to earth at + 12 V or with another wire. If a fault is detected, proceed with the repairs or replacement. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-72 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08 5. FAULT FINDING LOG 88C WARNING! WARNING: All problems involving a complex system call for thorough diagnostics with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the fault finding procedure, ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. It is an essential item when discussing the fault with the constructor. IT IS THEREFORE COMPULSORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EVERY TIME A FAULT FINDING OPERATION IS PERFORMED. You will always be asked for this report: – When requesting technical assistance from the Techline. – For certification requests when replacing parts that must be certified. – Which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. It is therefore used to decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the removed parts. 6. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires obeying safety rules to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. During operations on the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems it is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering (all the ignition lines will be inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the Instrument panel warning light comes on. If it is impossible to connect the fault-finding tool, switch off the ignition, remove the system power fuse, and wait at least 2 seconds for the reserve power capacity to discharge. Never measure the airbag or pretensioner trigger lines with any device other than XRBAG or CLIP's "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check". Before using a dummy ignition module, ensure that its resistance is between 1.8 and 2.5 ohms. While working, make sure the computer power supply does not drop below 10 V. WARNING Airbag and pretensioner destruction and disposal is subject to national legislation. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-73 AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (FRONT section) 88C AR To rear wiring ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-74 AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction 88C SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (REAR section) Rear A B C D E G H I J/K L/M N/O To rear wiring R/S Central unit Driver’s seat CT Front passenger seat Buckle P pretensioner Driver's front airbag ignition module Passenger's front airbag ignition module Front side airbag ignition module Lap belt pretensioner or seat cushion airbag Curtain airbag ignition modules Rear side airbag ignition modules Rear seat belt retractors Rear frontal airbag triggers Rotary switch + 12 V / earth Warning light / Fault finding lines Impact sensors, seat position, seat belt buckles, rear retractor straps / Passenger airbag lock switch FRONT AIRBAGS Measuring point Driver Passenger C0, C2 and C4 C0 and C4 Correct value 1.8 to 6.2 Ω 1.8 to 4 Ω SIDE AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS Measuring point C0, C1 and C3 Correct value 1.8 to 4 Ω Correct insulation value: display ≥ 100.h or 9999 flashing. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-75 AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction 88C DEFINITION OF THE TRIGGER LINES L1: L2: L3: L4: L5: L6: L7: L8: L9: Driver's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable B of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Passenger's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable D of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable B of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685) Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable A of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685) Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable C of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685) Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable D of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685) Driver's side curtain airbag circuit (cable I of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit (cable G of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) Driver's front chest side airbag circuit (cable H of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L10: Passenger's front chest side airbag circuit (cable F of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L11: Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable N of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L12: Passenger's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable L of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L13: Front buckles pretensioner circuit (cables A and C of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L14: Rear seat belt retractors (cables E and J of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L15: Driver's side rear chest frontal airbag circuit (cable O of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L16: Passenger's side rear chest frontal airbag circuit (cable M of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-76 AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - System operation 88C PASSIVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT The MEGANE II has equipment also found on the LAGUNA II and VEL SATIS, namely: – Front seat chest side airbag. – Double pretensioner on front seat in type B, J, G, R, L, K, S. – Driver's seat position sensor for adaptive airbag. – Three-point rear centre seat belt. – Front and rear Isofix mountings. INNOVATIONS: – The ACU4 computers identified by Vdiag 08 use the signals from the side impact sensors to confirm detection of a frontal collision as well. This is why even vehicles without side airbags have side impact sensors. ACU4 Vdiag 08 computers are always configured "With side sensors". There is no fault-finding tool command to change that configuration. – LEFT-HAND and RIGHT-HAND steering configuration so that the system matches the vehicle. – Passenger airbag inhibition switch. – Driver's and passenger's side rear frontal airbags. These airbags are built into the seat belts only in the SCENIC II. – The absence of rear chest airbags is the SCENIC II is compensated by reinforced doors. – Anti-skid airbag in the seat along with a buckle pretensioner on the front seats in type C, E and G MEGANE II. In the text, this airbag is referred to as the: DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG and PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG. Via the same trigger line, the ACU 4 Vdiag 08 computer controls either the seat-cushion (anti-skid) airbag or the driver's seat lap belt pretensioner: In types B, J, R, L, K and S the configuration is: driver's seat lap belt pretensioner and passenger's seat lap belt pretensioner. In types C, E and G the configuration is: driver's seat-cushion airbag and passenger's seat-cushion airbag. Both features are never found on the same vehicle because they use the same ignition line. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-77 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG COMPUTER 22-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description + Passenger front airbag volume 2 + Passenger front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used + After ignition Not used Not used CAN L CAN H Track 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Description Fault finding - Computer track allocation 88C - Passenger front airbag volume 2 - Passenger front airbag volume 1 - Driver's front airbag volume 1 - Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used Electrical earth Not used Not used - Passenger airbag inhibition switch + Passenger airbag inhibition switch 64-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Description + Buckle pretensioner: driver - Buckle pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver Not used Not used Not used Not used - Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat belt buckle contact - Driver's seat belt buckle contact Not used Not used + Driver's front chest side airbag - Driver's front chest side airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's rear seat belt retractor - Driver's rear seat belt retractor Not used Not used + Driver's side rear strap sensor - Passenger's side rear strap sensor Not used Not used + Driver's side lateral impact sensor - Driver's side lateral impact sensor + Rear chest side airbag driver's side - Rear chest side airbag driver's side + Rear frontal airbag. driver's side + Rear frontal airbag. driver's side Track 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Description Reserved (+ passenger's seat belt buckle contact) Reserved (- passenger's seat belt buckle contact) Reserved (+ passenger's seat-cushion sensor) Reserved (- passenger's seat-cushion sensor) + Buckle pretensioner: passenger - Buckle pretensioner: passenger + Lap belt pretensioner: passenger - Lap belt pretensioner: passenger + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Passenger's front chest side airbag - Passenger's front chest side airbag + Passenger side curtain airbag - Passenger side curtain airbag Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger's rear chest side airbag - Passenger's rear chest side airbag + Rear frontal airbag. passenger's side - Rear frontal airbag. passenger's side + Passenger side lateral impact sensor - Passenger side lateral impact sensor + Passenger side rear strap sensor - Passenger side rear strap sensor ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-78 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 Fault finding - Computer track allocation 88C SIDE IMPACT SENSORS CONNECTIONS 2-track connector Track 1 Signal + Description Track 2 Signal Description Note: The front belt pretensioners, front chest side airbags, lap pretensioners or seat airbags and seat position sensor functions run through a black 22-track R341 or R342 intermediate connector located under each seat and attached to the vehicle floor. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-79 AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Parts replacement 88C REPLACING THE AIRBAG COMPUTER BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER, YOU ARE REQUIRED TO CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE. So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed, the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. The airbag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid all risk of accidental triggering (all ignition lines are inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the airbag fault warning indicator lights up on the instrument panel. Follow this procedure to replace an airbag computer: – – – – – – – – Ensure that the ignition is switched off. Replace the computer. Modify the computer configuration if necessary. Enter the VIN into the computer with diagnostic tool command VP010 "Write VIN". Switch off the ignition. Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Enter the After Sales service date with diagnostic tool command VP008 "Write last After Sales service date". Unlock the computer only if no fault is reported by the fault-finding tool and see if the indicator light is out. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-80 – CF299: B/C WITH FRONT/REAR FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. – STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS: – CF297: B/C NO SIDE AIRBAGS. C with FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS). Type S vehicles (vans) equipped with CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). Type J vehicles.Configuration and programming 88C CLEARING RZ001: Fault memory. C WITH NO FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (SABLAT / SSABCS). This command is used to clear faults from the computer's memory.AIRBAG . the fault-finding tool has automatic configuration commands for the trigger lines and sensors based on the equipment installed in the various models. C with FRONT FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). are used to configure each system component individually to adapt the computer configuration to the actual equipment in the vehicle. CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – To make it easier to configure the ACU4 AIRBAG computer. – The read-configuration commands (LCXXX) are used to display the current computer configuration in relation to the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicle. Type J vehicles.: 08 Fault finding . Vehicle types B. – CF298: B/C WITH FRONT FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in SCENIC models with front chest side airbags. Vehicle types B. – CF302: J NO SIDE AIRBAGS.0 88C-81 . Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in SCENIC models with no chest side airbags nor curtain airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF301: G/S NO CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type S vehicles (vans) WITHOUT CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. The commands in the table on the next page. – CF303: J WITH SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO REAR FRONTAL AIRBAGS. – CF300: G/S WITH CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B. curtain airbags and no rear seat-belt airbag (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – The configuration commands (CFXXX) are used to adjust computer configuration to the equipment actually installed in the vehicle.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. however. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in 4-door BREAK and TRICORPS models with front chest side airbags and curtain airbags (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF306: E WITH NO SIDE AIRBAGS Type E vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in CABRIOLET models with no front chest side airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in 4-door BREAK and TRICORPS models with front and rear chest side airbags and curtain airbags (ABLAT / SSABCS). For this.: 08 Fault finding . Because of probably computer part number unification in the Parts Department. curtain airbags and rear seat-belt airbag (ABLAVI / SSABCS). Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in SCENIC models with front chest side airbags. – CF309: K/L WITH FRONT/REAR CHEST AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS. After configuration. use the individual configuration commands for system components. – CF307: K/L WITH NO SIDE AIRBAGS. check the display configuration screen to make sure that the information entered is correct. – CF308: K/L WITH FRONT CHEST AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. – CF305: E WITH SIDE AIRBAGS.AIRBAG . some sensors or trigger lines may have to be deconfigured after using standard configuration commands. Type J vehicle. Type E vehicle.0 88C-82 . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in 4-door BREAK and TRICORPS models with neither front chest side airbags nor curtain airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS).Configuration and programming 88C – STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS (cont'd): – CF304: J WITH SIDE AIRBAGS + REAR FRONTAL AIRBAGS. Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in CABRIOLET models with front chest side airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. The rear seat belt retractors are serially wired.Configuration and programming 88C CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – CONFIGURABLE FEATURES: Trigger lines "WITH" or "WITHOUT": The front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. CONFIGURATION READING LC080 LC079 LC052 LC047 LC048 LC049 LC091 LC092 LC040 LC041 LC042 LC043 LC044 LC045 LC081 LC078 TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S SIDE REAR FRONT AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR FRONT AIRBAG DRIVER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG DRIVER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS Sensors "WITH" or "WITHOUT": CONFIGURATION CF283 CF282 CF236 CF229 CF230 CF231 CF294 CF295 CF221 CF222 CF223 CF224 CF225 CF226 CF284 CF278 TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR PASSENGER PRESENCE DETECTION SENSOR CONFIGURATION READING LC086 LC025 LC026 LC073 LC074 LC090 LC089 LC075 CONFIGURATION CF289 NONE NONE CF273 CF274 CF293 CF292 CF275 ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.: 08 Fault finding .AIRBAG .0 88C-83 . AIRBAG . This command is used to enter the date the system was serviced.0 88C-84 . – VP007: Unlock computer. This command is used in reconditioning the vehicle following an impact. This command is used whenever servicing the system. – SC004: Read impact context. a list of the trigger lines controlled and the system's state at the moment of impact. This command serves to enter the vehicle identification number (VIN) into the computer.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. It obtains. – VP010: Write VIN. This command is used to unlock a computer that is new or block by command VP006.: 08 Fault finding . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.Configuration and programming 88C CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION (continued): Lefthand/righthand steering configuration" Title STEERING SIDE Configuration reading LC088 Configuration CF291 Passenger airbag lock mode "WITH KEY" or "WITHOUT": Title PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCK MODE Read type of vehicle: LC034 "MEGANE II" Configuration reading LC060 Configuration CF248 OTHER COMMANDS: – VP006: Lock computer. from the computer that is to be replaced. – VP008: Write last After Sales service date. It shuts down all trigger lines. : Workshop Repair Manual: Technical Note: Assisted fault finding Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.page to print or photocopy .: Other documentation Title and/or part no.List of monitored parts: Airbag computer FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbags and pretensioners ● Page 1 / 2 Administrative identification 2 0 Date Log completed by Business name or no./Country Vehicle model VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool Version ● CLIP Customer complaint 1192 Airbag warning light lit Other Please specify: ● When the fault appears 011 005 When switched on While driving Please specify: 004 Intermittently 999 When starting the engine Other ● Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure Type of fault finding manual: Fault Finding Manual No.page to print or photocopy .: FD 16 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy . Program no. Present Stored Fault title Specification ● System-specific information Total vehicle mileage (kilometrage) when the customer's problem occurred: How often does it occur? How long after the engine starts? ● Additional information What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? CAN Wiring harness Seats Instrument panel Battery Other Rotary switch Fuse Please specify: FD 16 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy .page to print or photocopy . To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no.FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbag and pretensioners ● Page 2 / 2 Identification of the computer and parts replaced for the system Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Supplier no. Part 3 part no. Part 5 part no. Part 4 part no.page to print or photocopy . Software version Calibration number VDIAG ● Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no. 0 88C-87 .Fault summary table 88C Tool fault DF001 DF002 DF010 DF028 DF034 DF039 DF040 DF053 DF060 DF065 DF066 DF067 DF068 DF069 DF070 DF071 DF072 DF074 DF075 DF077 DF091 DF193 DF194 DF210 DF212 DF213 DF214 DF227 DF228 DF232 DF233 DF234 DF239 DF240 DF241 DF242 Associated DTC 9080 9042 9040 9041 907E 9035 9036 9031 9050 9031 900E 900D 900C 900A 9009 9008 9007 9006 9005 900B 9034 907C 907F 9014 901A 901B 9034 9026 9027 9051 9052 9053 9017 9001 9002 907B Diagnostic tool heading Computer Computer supply voltage Fault warning light circuit Passenger's airbag status warning light circuit Computer locked Driver's side sensor circuit Passenger's side sensor circuit Driver's seat position sensor Multiplex network Driver's front seat position sensor circuit Passenger's rear side airbag circuit Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit Passenger's front side airbag circuit Passenger's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's front airbag circuit 2 Driver's front airbag circuit 1 Passenger's front airbag circuit 2 Passenger's front airbag circuit 1 Driver's front side airbag circuit Airbag locking switch circuit Change of status of passenger airbag locking Computer to be replaced following impact Front buckles pretensioner circuit Rear front airbag circuit driver's side Rear front airbag circuit passenger's side Airbag lock switch configuration Driver's side rear strap sensor circuit Passenger's side rear strap sensor circuit Driver's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Passenger's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Passenger presence detection sensor circuit Rear seat belt retractors circuit Driver's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit Passenger's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit Lefthand/righthand steering configuration ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.: 08 AIRBAG .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. : 08 AIRBAG . AFTER REPAIR Deal with any faults detected by the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag computer (see the replacing components section for this procedure).Interpretation of faults 88C DF001 PRESENT OR STORED COMPUTER NOTES Special notes: So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed.0 88C-88 .AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. Clear the computer memory. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1. Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage supply to the computer: 10. unlock the computer. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.: 08 AIRBAG .1 < correct voltage < 16 volts ± 0. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Check the condition of the computer + locking connections. Check the tightness and the condition of the battery terminals. Check the charging circuit. if there are no faults. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1685) to work on the computer connector (cable 1). – – – – – Check the battery charge. Check the computer earth.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.5 volts ± 0.DEF: Values beyond tolerance NOTES Special notes: Use the 22-track adapter (Elé.0 88C-89 .Interpretation of faults 88C COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DF002 PRESENT 1.DEF: Micro-breaks 2. if there are no faults.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2. Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.0 88C-90 .DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request) NOTES Special notes: None. unlock the computer.Interpretation of faults 88C DEFAULT INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF010 PRESENT 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.: 08 AIRBAG . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 88C-91 .DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2. unlock the computer. Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section. if there are no faults.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.: 08 AIRBAG .Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER AIRBAG CONDITION INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF028 PRESENT 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request) NOTES Special notes: None. if there are no faults. unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Use diagnostic tool command VP007 to unlock the airbag computer.Interpretation of faults 88C COMPUTER LOCKED DF034 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 88C-92 . AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. : 08 AIRBAG . Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. if there are no faults.CC. connections.DEF NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track adapter (Elé.DEF NOTES None. Replace the driver's side sensor. Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system.) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Configuration Disrupted communication Sensor internal electrical fault Values out of range If 1.DEF: 2. 1717) terminal 28 Track 2 sensor connector 3.2. unlock the computer.0 88C-93 .DEF .DEF: 4. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. etc.Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF039 PRESENT CO : CC. 1717) terminal 27 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé.0 . 1717) to work on the computer connector.4.DEF: 3.DEF contact your Techline. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28).0 : 1.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . CO . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. DEF: 4. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.DEF contact your Techline. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring.0 88C-94 .4. CO .0 . connections.Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF040 PRESENT CO : CC.DEF NOTES None.DEF .) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. unlock the computer.CC.DEF: 3.DEF: 2. 1717) terminal 62 Track 2 sensor connector 3.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Configuration Disrupted communication Sensor internal electrical fault Values out of range If 1.DEF NOTES None.0 : 1. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé. Replace the passenger side sensor.: 08 AIRBAG .2. 1717 adapter to work on the computer connector. 1717) terminal 61 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé. etc. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . if there are no faults. Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 61 and 62). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. 0 88C-95 . This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. Read configuration LC086 under the heading "read configuration". The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration.Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF053 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. unlock the computer. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Use command CF289 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level. if there are no faults.: 08 AIRBAG . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. DEF: Carry out the multiplex network fault finding procedure NOTES None.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.Interpretation of faults 88C MULTIPLEX NETWORK DF060 PRESENT 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 88C-96 . Apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.: 08 AIRBAG . Check again using the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. or DF240. 1717) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. then switch on the ignition. the resistance is approximately: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145 Ω) If the resistances are correct.0 88C-97 . When the seat is forward. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.1 : 1. replace the seat position sensor. if there are no faults. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer.AIRBAG . 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track ( Elé. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Track 3 Track 2 sensor connector Terminal block Track 4 Track 1 sensor connector If the checks are correct. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Repair if necessary. DF210.Interpretation of faults DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT. If the fault is still present. 88C DF065 PRESENT CO : CC. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. and the under-seat connector.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. 1687) adapter for working under the driver's seat. Attach the 64-track (Elé. When the seat is forward. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.: 08 Fault finding . YES Check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 3 and 4 ) and 64-track connector (tracks 9 and 10).0 : CC. the resistance is approximately: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145) Are the values correct? NO Check the connection and the condition of the sensor connections. the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) In the fully reclined position.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values out of range If 1. the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) In the fully reclined position. Attach the 22-track (Elé. Replace the wiring if necessary.DEF: 2. Use the 64-track (Elé. the seat position sensor. DF232.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF065 is present with at least one of DF077. unlock the computer. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. check and adjust the computer configuration. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. When replacing the airbag module. Repair if necessary. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag is correctly connected. Replace the passenger's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value indicated is incorrect. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.: 08 AIRBAG . NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER CHEST REAR SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF066 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. CO .0 : 1.DEF. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Attach the 64-track (Elé. the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable L.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1.1 : CC. Replace the wiring if necessary. Use the 64-track (Elé. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58).CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear chest side airbags. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. if there are no faults. unlock the computer. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). 1287).0 88C-98 . the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3 ) is faulty. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.1 . If the value indicated is incorrect. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-99 . 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). When replacing the airbag module.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 NOTES None.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG . 1287). Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58 ). if there are no faults. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable L.Interpretation of faults 88C DF066 CONTINUED CC. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. unlock the computer.CC. Replace the wiring if necessary. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach the 64-track (Elé. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the wiring if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. If the value indicated is incorrect. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag is correctly connected.0 : 1. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. check and adjust the computer configuration. Replace the driver's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.DEF. When replacing the airbag module. 1287).CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear chest side airbags. if there are no faults.1 : CC. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Destroy the driver's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair if necessary Attach the 64-track (Elé.: 08 AIRBAG . unlock the computer. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30 ).AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. CO .Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S REAR SIDE CHEST AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF067 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. Use the 64-track (Elé. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-100 . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable N.1 . Repair if necessary. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. If the value indicated is incorrect. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. When replacing the airbag module.CC.0 88C-101 . Destroy the driver's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30 ).AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. if there are no faults. Replace the wiring if necessary.: 08 AIRBAG . 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.Interpretation of faults 88C DF067 CONTINUED CC. the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag ( C0/C3) is faulty.0 NOTES None. unlock the computer. Attach the 64-track (Elé. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. 1287). Strip the passenger seat and check that the airbag ignition module is connected correctly. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. Replace the wiring if necessary.DEF .1 : CC. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding .: 08 88C PASSENGER CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF068 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. Attach the 22-track (Elé. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF068 is present with at least one of DF210 or DF241. When replacing the airbag module. Disconnect the side airbag ignition module.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with passenger front chest side airbags. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure resistance in the adapter wire marked F . If the value obtained is correct. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat ( C0/C1 ). NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. unlock the computer. If the fault persists.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. Repair if necessary. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). – If the value obtained is still not correct. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 : 1. – If the value obtained is correct. Use the 64-track (Elé. if there are no faults. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 11 and 12). CO . as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. check and adjust the computer configuration.0 88C-102 . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. YES Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 11 and 12) again. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat.AIRBAG . AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. 1287). 1717). replace the passenger chest front side airbag module. connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A.Interpretation of faults VDIAG No. replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Replace the wiring if necessary. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. if there are no faults. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.Interpretation of faults 88C DF068 CONTINUED CC. YES Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.: 08 AIRBAG . If the fault persists. Repair if necessary. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked F. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1717).CC. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. unlock the computer.0 NOTES None. When replacing the airbag module. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. If the value obtained is correct. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1 ). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat.0 88C-103 . Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). 1287).AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Is the value obtained correct? NO Passenger's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .1 . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Repair if necessary. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. 1287). Replace the passenger side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF069 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé.0 : 1. the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's curtain side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. check and adjust the computer configuration. Attach the 64-track (Elé. if there are no faults. unlock the computer. If the value indicated is incorrect. Replace the wiring if necessary. Destroy the passenger side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46 ).DEF. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag is properly connected. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable G.0 88C-104 .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .1 : CC.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08 AIRBAG . CO . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side curtain airbag. 1 . Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46 ). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on.CC. If the value indicated is incorrect.Interpretation of faults 88C DF069 CONTINUED CC. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable G. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). Attach the 64-track (Elé.0 88C-105 . Repair if necessary. Destroy the passenger side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.: 08 AIRBAG .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's curtain side airbag (C0/C3 ) is faulty. 1287). if there are no faults. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. unlock the computer. Replace the wiring if necessary.0 NOTES None. unlock the computer.0 : 1. Destroy the driver's side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.DEF. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side curtain airbag.Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF070 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Attach the 64-track (Elé.1 : CC. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.0 88C-106 . Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18 ). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable I.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. 1287). If the value indicated is incorrect. if there are no faults. Replace the driver side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the ignition module from the driver side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Repair if necessary. Use the 64-track (Elé.: 08 AIRBAG . Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. CO .AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Replace the wiring if necessary. check and adjust the computer configuration. Switch off the ignition and make sure the ignition module of the driver side curtain airbag is properly connected. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). the wiring between the computer connector and driver's curtain side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Destroy the driver's side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable I. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Replace the wiring if necessary.0 88C-107 . Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0).CC.: 08 AIRBAG . the wiring between the computer connector and driver's curtain side airbag ( C0/C1) is faulty.1 .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . unlock the computer. If the value indicated is incorrect. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. if there are no faults.0 NOTES None. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18 ).Interpretation of faults 88C DF070 CONTINUED CC.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Repair if necessary. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. 1287). Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. unlock the computer. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. With the ignition switched off. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10) . Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A.DEF.1 : CC.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present).AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Check that it is correctly connected.: 08 AIRBAG . 1685) test adapter. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present).0 : 1. 1287). then switch on the ignition. Attach the 10-track (Elé. If the value obtained is incorrect. disconnect the computer and check the connections of the 22-track (tracks 4 and 15) connector Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. Use the 22-track (Elé.0 88C-108 . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable D. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Replace the wiring if necessary. When replacing the airbag module. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. CO .DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. If the value obtained is incorrect. if there are no faults. disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. check and adjust the computer configuration. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules.Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF071 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.CC NOTES None. Attach the 10-track test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). then switch on the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A (driver's front airbag connected). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1287). Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. When replacing the airbag module. unlock the computer.: 08 AIRBAG . disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections ( tracks 4 and 15).0 88C-109 . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable D . 1685) test adapter.CC.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.Interpretation of faults 88C DF071 CONTINUED CC. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. Fit the 22-track (Elé. If the value obtained is incorrect. Replace the wiring if necessary.0 NOTES None.1 . If the value obtained is incorrect. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. if there are no faults. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. if there are no faults. check and adjust the computer configuration. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off. If the value obtained is incorrect. Attach the 10-track (Elé.CC NOTES None.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Use the 22-track (Elé. Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. unlock the computer.1 : CC. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Fit the 22-track (Elé. When replacing the airbag module. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. If the value obtained is incorrect. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2).0 : 1. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). CO .DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF072 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.DEF. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. then switch on the ignition. 1685) test adapter. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 88C-110 .: 08 AIRBAG . Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1287). NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections ( tracks 3 and 14). 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). Check that it is correctly connected. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections ( tracks 3 and 14). Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 NOTES None. 1287). Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). if there are no faults. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B (driver's front airbag connected). then switch on the ignition. Fit the 22-track (Elé. replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules. Attach the 10-track (Elé. unlock the computer. 1685) test adapter.CC.: 08 AIRBAG .1 .0 88C-111 . Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector ( C0/C2). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C .Interpretation of faults 88C DF072 CONTINUED CC. If the value obtained is incorrect. If the value obtained is incorrect. Replace the wiring if necessary. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. When replacing the airbag module. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Replace the wiring if necessary.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.1 : CC. check the computer wiring again. If the value obtained is incorrect. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. then switch on the ignition again.0 88C-112 . unlock the computer. 1685) test adapter. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG.Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF074 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.CC NOTES None. If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1 and 12).AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ). CO . Fit the 22-track (Elé.: 08 AIRBAG .DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). If the value obtained is correct.DEF. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Use the 22-track (Elé. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. check and adjust the computer configuration. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the passenger’s front airbag ORANGE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. When replacing the airbag module. if there are no faults.0 : 1. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1 and 12). Replace the wiring if necessary.0 88C-113 . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A . do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Attach 22-track adapter (Elé.: 08 AIRBAG . Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. When replacing the airbag module.1 . then switch on the ignition again. 1685).0 NOTES None. unlock the computer. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .Interpretation of faults 88C DF074 CONTINUED CC. if there are no faults. If the value obtained is incorrect.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.CC. 1287). Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B . If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13 ). When replacing the airbag module. 1685).1 : CC. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. If the value obtained is correct. Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present).0 : 1. 1287).DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. If the value obtained is incorrect. then switch on the ignition again. if there are no faults. check and adjust the computer configuration.0 88C-114 .: 08 AIRBAG .Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF075 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. check the computer wiring again.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Use the 22-track (Elé. Disconnect the passenger's front airbag BLUE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. CO . NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ). Replace the wiring if necessary.CC NOTES None. unlock the computer.DEF. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. if there are no faults. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1287). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.1 .Interpretation of faults 88C DF075 CONTINUED CC. Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. If the value obtained is incorrect.0 88C-115 . unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. 1685).: 08 AIRBAG .0 NOTES None. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be use to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable B. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4 ). then switch on the ignition again. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. When replacing the airbag module. Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13 ).CC. Remove the trim from the driver's seat and check that the chest side airbag ignition module is properly connected.0 88C-116 .Interpretation of faults VDIAG No. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.DEF . Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. DF210. – If the value obtained is correct. – If the value obtained is still not correct. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration 88C If 1. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. CO . connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. 1717). the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat ( C0/C1 ).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding . Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked H. YES Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 11 and 12) again. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1).: 08 DRIVER'S CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF077 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. if there are no faults.0 : 1. When replacing the airbag module. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. unlock the computer. check and adjust the computer configuration. If the fault is still present. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 11 and 12). Use the 64-track (Elé. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's front chest side airbag. 1287). Replace the wiring if necessary.1 : CC. replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). DF232 or DF240. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Attach the 22-track (Elé. replace the driver's chest front side airbag module. If the value indicated is correct. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the chest side airbag ignition module. Repair if necessary. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF077 is present with at least one of DF065.AIRBAG . CC. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. If the fault is still present. 1717). When replacing the airbag module. – Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring) if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A. 1287). unlock the computer.Interpretation of faults 88C DF077 CONTINUED CC. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Is the value obtained correct? NO – Driver's seat wiring fault (C1/C3).1 .AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Attach the 22-track (Elé. as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). YES Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked H.0 88C-117 .0 NOTES None. if there are no faults. If the value indicated is correct.: 08 AIRBAG . Repair if necessary. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Replace the wiring if necessary. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .0 88C-118 . Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.Interpretation of faults 88C AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CIRCUIT DF091 PRESENT CO : CC : CC.). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. then switch on the ignition.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.1 : 1.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values out of range If 1. NOTES Special notes: Use the 22-track (Elé. if there are no faults.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. wiring etc. Check that the lock switch is properly connected and check its connections. unlock the computer.: 08 AIRBAG . Check the condition and connections of the 22-track computer connector (lock system.DEF: 2. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.0 : CC. Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. Track 6 lock switch connector Track 3 lock switch connector AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the locking switch. 1685 terminal 22 Replace the locking switch if the fault persists. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1685 terminal 21 Terminal block Elé. AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Clear the computer memory.Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATE DF193 STORED NOTES Special features: the vehicle user has 10 seconds after switching on + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag with the switch. the computer will store this fault and light up the warning light on the instrument panel. Switch off the ignition. After this time. unlock the computer. Switch the ignition back on and check that the fault is gone. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.0 88C-119 . and wait a few seconds. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .: 08 AIRBAG . Put the lock switch in the desired setting. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. if there are no faults. AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Contact your Techline (see the " Replacing components" section for this procedure).0 88C-120 .Interpretation of faults 88C COMPUTER TO BE REPLACED FOLLOWING IMPACT DF194 PRESENT NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR None ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.: 08 AIRBAG . : 08 AIRBAG . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. if there are no faults. 2.0 : 1. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. 1287). NOTES Special notes: the front buckle pretensioners are serially wired.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Use the 64-track (Elé. 37 and 38).Interpretation of faults FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS CIRCUIT 88C DF210 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. See next page. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. 1717). If the value obtained is incorrect. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ignition module if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.CC NOTES None. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.1 : CC. unlock the computer. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach 64-track adapter (Elé.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. If the value obtained is incorrect.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. Replace the driver's seat buckle pretensioner if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). See next page.0 88C-121 . the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). CO . the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ( C0/C3). Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. 1287).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. Attach the 22-track (Elé. If the fault persists. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.Interpretation of faults 88C DF210 CONTINUED 1 Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). unlock the computer.: 08 AIRBAG . if there are no faults. Repair if necessary.0 88C-122 . YES Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 7 and 8) on the passenger compartment wiring side and of the 64-track (driver seat tracks 1 and 2 or passenger seat tracks 37 and 38) connector. the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check seat side seat connector connections again (tracks 8 and 7). 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable C. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. If the fault persists. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C . 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1).Interpretation of faults 88C DF210 CONTINUED 2 CC. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections ( tracks 1.CC. 37 and 38). Is the value obtained correct? NO If the fault persists. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable C.0 88C-123 . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A .1 NOTES None. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ( C0/C3). If the value obtained is incorrect. unlock the computer. If the value obtained is incorrect. See interpretation A. Replace the wiring if necessary.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. See interpretation A. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1287).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). Repair if necessary.0 . YES Faulty wiring between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1).: 08 AIRBAG . 1717). if there are no faults. Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. Attach the 22-track (Elé. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. 2. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . If the value indicated is incorrect.1 : 1. Replace the driver's rear front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Destroy the driver's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side rear front airbag. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Repair if necessary. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). Replace the wiring if necessary.: 08 AIRBAG . Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 31 and 32 ). unlock the computer. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side rear front airbag module. then switch on the ignition. the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side rear front airbag ( C0/C3) is faulty. CO . if there are no faults. Use the 64-track (Elé. Attach the 64-track (Elé.Interpretation of faults 88C REAR FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT DRIVER'S SIDE DF212 PRESENT CO : CC : CC.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration If 1. When replacing the airbag module. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear front airbag is properly connected.0 88C-124 . Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear front airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch off the ignition.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. 1287).0 : CC. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable O. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. 1287). Destroy the driver's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). if there are no faults. Replace the wiring if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .: 08 AIRBAG . the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side rear front airbag ( C0/C1) is faulty.Interpretation of faults 88C DF212 CONTINUED CC. Switch off the ignition. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 31 and 32 ).0 NOTES None. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable O.CC. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side rear front airbag module. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Clear the computer memory.0 88C-125 . Repair if necessary. then switch on the ignition.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module.1 . Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. If the value indicated is incorrect. Use the 64-track (Elé. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. When replacing the airbag module. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. If the value indicated is incorrect. if there are no faults. Replace the passenger's rear front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.1 : 1. 1287).0 88C-126 . 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0).0 : CC.Interpretation of faults 88C REAR FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT PASSENGER'S SIDE DF213 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear front airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Attach the 64-track (Elé. Destroy the passenger's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 59 and 60 ). CO .CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side rear front airbag. the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's side rear front airbag (C0/C3 ) is faulty. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Switch off the ignition. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. Replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable M. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's side rear front airbag module. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear front airbag is properly connected. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.: 08 AIRBAG . Repair if necessary. then switch on the ignition.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . unlock the computer. Clear the computer memory. Repair if necessary. if there are no faults. the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's side rear front airbag (C0/C1 ) is faulty.: 08 AIRBAG . unlock the computer. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Destroy the passenger's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). Switch off the ignition. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's side rear front airbag module. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 59 and 60 ). do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one.0 88C-127 .CC. If the value indicated is incorrect. then switch on the ignition.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.0 NOTES None. When replacing the airbag module.Interpretation of faults 88C DF213 CONTINUED CC. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Attach the 64-track (Elé. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable M. 1287).1 . 0 88C-128 .: 08 AIRBAG . Read configuration LC060 under the heading "read configuration".Interpretation of faults 88C AIRBAG LOCK SWITCH CONFIGURATION DF214 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Use command CF248 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR CIRCUIT DF227 PRESENT CO : CC : CC.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1717 test adapter. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Fit the 64-track Elé. check and adjust the computer configuration. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. the resistance is approximately: 100 ohms In the fully extended position.: 08 AIRBAG .DEF. Clear the computer memory. if there are no faults.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block track 23 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block track 24 Track 2 sensor connector Also ensure insulation across these two connections. Disconnect the black 2-track connector and measure the sensor's resistance on the retractor side: In the fully retracted position.0 : CC.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Value out of range If 1. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. replace the driver's side rear retractor. Switch off the ignition. check the condition of the sensor connections.DEF: 2. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 23 and 24 ). 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.0 88C-129 . If the resistance is okay.1 : 1. Make sure the black 2-track connector under the driver's side rear retractor is properly connected. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. unlock the computer. then switch on the ignition again. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the rear strap sensor. Repair if necessary. the resistance is approximately: 400 ohms If the resistance is incorrect. Switch off the ignition. Repair if necessary. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. the resistance is approximately: 100 ohms In the fully extended position. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Fit the 64-track Elé. 1717 test adapter. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Value out of range If 1. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the rear strap sensor. then switch on the ignition again. replace the passenger's side rear retractor.0 88C-130 .1 : 1. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 63 and 64 ). Disconnect the black 2-track connector and measure the sensor's resistance on the retractor side: In the fully retracted position. check and adjust the computer configuration.0 : CC. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Track 63 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block Track 64 Track 2 sensor connector Also ensure insulation across these two connections. Clear the computer memory. if there are no faults.DEF: 2.DEF.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. Make sure the black 2-track connector under the passenger's side rear retractor is properly connected. check the condition of the sensor connections.: 08 AIRBAG .Interpretation of faults 88C PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR CIRCUIT DF228 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. the resistance is approximately: 400 ohms If the resistance is incorrect. If the resistance is okay.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . unlock the computer. 1687 terminal 6 Track 1 buckle sensor connector Repair if necessary.0 88C-131 .DEF: Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values out of range If 1. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .). AFTER REPAIR Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the 64-track computer connector (lock system. computer side (tracks 5 and 6). replace the driver's seat belt buckle sensor.Interpretation of faults 88C DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF232 PRESENT CO : CC : CC. Repair if necessary. Make sure the driver's seat belt buckle sensor is properly connected and test its connections. repair or replace the harness. Check again using the diagnostic tool.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. Attach the 22-track (Elé.DEF: 2.C. If a connection is faulty: Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 2 buckle sensor connector Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 6 22-track connector If a connection is faulty. S84 1. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687 terminal 5 Track 2 buckle sensor connector Terminal block Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. 1717) test adapter to the computer (point C0). seat side (tracks 5 and 6 ). 1717 terminal 11 Track 5 22-track connector Terminal block Elé.1 : 1. Attach the 64-track (Elé. ACU4 Vdiag04 B. 1717 terminal 12 Track 1 buckle sensor connector If the connections are OK.0 : CC. wiring etc. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé.: 04 AIRBAG . Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1287). Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. unlock the computer. 20.0 : 1. Use the 64-track (Elé. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19. NOTES Special notes: the rear seat belt retractors are serially wired. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1717).1 : CC. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. if there are no faults. Replace the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. then switch on the ignition again. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor. driver's side. If the value indicated is incorrect. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable E.: 08 AIRBAG . Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. check and adjust the computer configuration.0 88C-132 . if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present).DEF.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. Replace the rear seat belt retractor. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. driver's side is correctly connected.CC NOTES Special notes: Correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear seat-belt retractors. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.Interpretation of faults 88C REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS CIRCUIT DF239 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. 41 and 42). CO . Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. passenger's side is correctly connected. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . the wiring between the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. CC. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 41 and 42). Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. then switch on the ignition again. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19.Interpretation of faults 88C DF239 CONTINUED CC. if there are no faults.0 88C-133 . If the value indicated is incorrect. the wiring between the computer and the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module ( C0/C3) is faulty. the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module ( C0/C3) is faulty. unlock the computer.1 NOTES None. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable J. Attach 64-track adapter (Elé.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . 1717).0 . 20. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé.: 08 AIRBAG . If the value indicated is incorrect. 1287).AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable E. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition.: 08 88C DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF240 PRESENT CC : CO : CC. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat ( C0/C1 ). 1687) adapter for working on the seat.0 88C-134 . 1287). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked B. If the fault is still present.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's seat-cushion airbag / lap belt. connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. If the value indicated is correct. replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring). CO . Attach the 22-track (Elé.0 : 1.DEF . – If the value indicated is correct.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. – If the value obtained is still not correct. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Make sure the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Replace the wiring if necessary. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion air bag (anti-skid airbag) fault. When replacing the airbag module. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. then again measure the resistance in cable B . check the connections of the 64-track connector (tracks 3 and 4). 1717). then switch the ignition back on. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body.AIRBAG .SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding . Repair if necessary. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF240 is present with at least one of DF077. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module. DF210 or DF232. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and.1 : CC. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. DF065. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé.Interpretation of faults VDIAG No. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. Disconnect the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. YES Again check the connections of the seat connector ( tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 3 and 4) connector. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 9 and 10 ). if there are no faults. check and adjust the computer configuration. unlock the computer. Use the 64-track (Elé. replace the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. then switch the ignition back on. Replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. 1287).Interpretation of faults 88C DF240 CONTINUED CC. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module. if there are no faults. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. unlock the computer. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3. When replacing the airbag module.0 NOTES None. Repair if necessary. Is the value obtained correct? NO Seat wiring fault.: 08 AIRBAG . do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat.0 88C-135 . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Attach the 22-track (Elé.CC.1 . YES Wiring fault between the computer and driver's seat ( C0/C1). NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body. 1287). disconnect the computer and attach the 64-track adapter (Elé.: 08 88C PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF241 PRESENT CC : CO : CC.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding .Interpretation of faults VDIAG No. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). unlock the computer. then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector.CC NOTES Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger seat-cushion airbag / lap belt. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat.DEF . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. replace the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module.AIRBAG . If the fault persists. – If the value obtained is still not correct. 1717). Replace the wiring if necessary. Repair if necessary. check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. 1687) adapter for working on the seat. Use the 64-track (Elé. replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).1 : CC. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked D. DF210 or DF232. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. Is the value obtained correct? NO Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 9 and 10 ). if there are no faults. then again measure the resistance in cable B. CO . Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF241 is present with at least one of DF068.0 88C-136 . Make sure the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. check and adjust the computer configuration. Disconnect the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module. If the value obtained is correct. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1. connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat ( C0/C1 ). Lock the computer with the fault-finding tool command. – If the value indicated is correct.0 : 1. Attach the 22-track (Elé. When replacing the airbag module. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé.DEF: Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration If 1. YES Again check the connections of the seat connector ( tracks 9 and 10 ) and of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion airbag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Is the value obtained correct? NO Seat wiring fault. Repair if necessary. Replace the wiring if necessary.0 88C-137 . Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.: 08 AIRBAG .0 NOTES None. AFTER REPAIR Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion/lap airbag ignition module. then switch the ignition back on. Attach the 22-track (Elé. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1).Interpretation of faults 88C DF241 CONTINUED CC.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .CC. YES Wiring fault between the computer and passenger's seat (C0/C1). if there are no faults. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. 1287). When replacing the airbag module. do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé.1 . The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. unlock the computer. Interpretation of faults 88C LEFTHAND/RIGHTHAND STEERING CONFIGURATION DF242 PRESENT NOTES Special notes: None. Read the left/righthand steering configuration LC088 with "Read configuration".SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . AFTER REPAIR ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-138 . Configure the computer with command CF291.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. This fault occurs because left/righthand steering has not been configured.: 08 AIRBAG . Line 12 impedance (Passenger's rear frontal side airbag circuit).SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.States and parameter summary table 88C ACU4 AIRBAG STATES SUMMAR Y TABLE: STATES TOOL ET010 ET072 ET073 ET074 ET076 ET103 ET105 ET108 ET143 ET144 ET169 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Impact detected Passenger airbag status indicator light commanded Computer locked by tool Fault warning light commanded Computer to replace Type of passenger airbag lock Locked diagnostics power supply out of limits Passenger airbag lock mode Passenger airbag(s) locked Fault present or in memory Driver's seat belt contact ACU4 AIRBAG PARAMETERS SUMMARY TABLE: PARAMETERS TOOL PR001 PR002 PR104 PR105 PR106 PR107 PR108 PR109 PR110 PR111 PR112 PR113 PR114 PR115 PR116 PR117 PR118 PR119 PR120 PR140 PR147 PR149 PR150 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Computer supply voltage Vehicle type Driver's seat sensor impedance Line 1 impedance (Driver's seat / lap airbag circuit).AIRBAG . Line 15 impedance (Driver's rear front airbag circuit).9 Ω when the component is disconnected or not controlled by the computer. Line 3 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 1). Line 6 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 2). Line 16 impedance (Passenger's rear front airbag circuit). Line 11 impedance (Driver's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 13 impedance (Front belt pretensioners circuit). Line 14 impedance (Rear retractors). Line 7 impedance (Driver's side curtain side airbag circuit).: 08 Fault finding . ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0 88C-139 . Number of memory zone deletions Airbag lock circuit impedance Passenger's rear retractor circuit impedance Driver's rear retractor circuit impedance The trigger line or sensor impedance is 99. Line 2 impedance (Passenger's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 5 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 1). Line 4 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 2). Line 10 impedance (Passenger's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 8 impedance (Passenger's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 9 impedance (Driver's front frontal side airbag circuit). Conformity check 88C NOTES Only carry out conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool.0 88C-140 .: 08 AIRBAG . None Warning light operation 4 Computer initialisation check Ignition switched on Warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on None ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding . Order Function Parameter or State Check or Action Display and notes Fault finding 1 Diagnostic tool dialogue - Airbag ACU 4 CHART 1 2 Computer conformity LC034 "Type of vehicle" MEGANE II DF001 3 Computer configuration Using "READ CONFIGURATION" commands Ensure that the computer configuration defined in the "Current" column corresponds to the vehicle equipment. Check the presence and condition of the airbag computer supply voltage fuse.5 V < battery voltage < 16 V ). AFTER REPAIR When communication is established. – + after ignition feed on track 1. Ensure that the diagnostic tool is not causing the fault by trying to establish dialogue with a computer on another vehicle. Ensure that the diagnostic socket is correctly supplied: – + Before ignition on track 16.SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding .: 08 AIRBAG . – Earth on tracks 4 and 5. 1685).0 88C-141 .Fault finding chart 88C CHART 1 No communication with the airbag computer NOTES Special note: To perform fault finding on the vehicle computers. check the continuity and insulation of the airbag computer / diagnostic socket connection between: Terminal block track CAN H Track 6 of the diagnostic socket Terminal block track CAN L Track 14 of the diagnostic socket Contact your Techline if dialogue has still not been established after these various checks. deal with any faults indicated. If the tool is not the problem and communication cannot be established with any other computer in the same vehicle. switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed). Check that the computer connector is properly connected and check the condition of its wiring. proceed as follows: – Vehicle card in card reader. – Check and ensure the presence of + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth and + after ignition feed. i. check the battery voltage and do the work required to obtain the proper reading ( 10. With 22-track adapter (Elé. Check that the computer is correctly supplied: – Disconnect the airbag computer and attach 22-track adapter (Elé. press on the Start button for more than five seconds outside of starting conditions. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.e.AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No. 1685).
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.